Home

Tag Reference Manual - Pro

1. i B Bh r74 w About G tags WE Data stored in the Host s designated word address PLC is displayed on the graph in real time WE Absolute and Relative data formats are available Both binary and BCD formats can be designated for Absolute data however only binary format is available for Relative data E When using Relative data data read by the host PLC is automatically converted in accordance with the designated Input Range Therefore a data calculation program in the host PLC can be omitted WE With Absolute data negative values are calculated using 2 s complement With Relative data select either 2 s complement or MSB code E By designating an upper and lower display data limit an Alarm function can be used to warn of data values exceeding these limits W For Relative data an alarm can be used when the data is outside the desig nated valid range WE Alarm values can be set as indirect or fixed When the alarm is set as indi rect the addresses for storing the upper and lower limits are automatically allocated to the word addresses immediately following the graph s display data storage address WE Graph patterns can be selected from the following two types Pattern which fills the data display portion Single byte type and Meter which displays the data using a needle E Display direction color attributes and fill patterns can be selected GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Ta
2. 11 30 40 98 06 14 12 15 10 A tank Low Water Level 13 15 15 15 00 25 98 06 14 12 00 05 No 1 Pump Closed 14 00 20 16 50 30 e Opening with Excel Date oo cca a Time 1998 6 15 10 05 35 B tank Pressure Trouble 11 30 40 1998 6 14 12 15 10 A tank Low Water Level 13 15 15 15 00 25 1998 6 14 12 00 05 No 1 Pump Closed 14 00 20 16 50 30 e Only messages are displayed SS e The latest information is displayed on the top line which is the same format when the scroll direction is designated to Down Displays data in the same manner for Active History and Log e Item names in the third row such as Trigger Date Trigger Time Message s Acknowledge Time and Recovery Time are output in a fixed format e The time format for Trigger Time Acknowledge Time and Recovery Time is fixed to 24 00 00 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 197 Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 21 R tag yaya R tag Rail Settings 2 21 1 Overview Defines the rail track along which a Mark bit mapped icon moves Use R tags together with J tags The J tag designates the Mark file and the R tag designates movement along the points Can be used for displaying production lines or gradation markers for PV graphs 2 i a a a a J tags set which Mark ima
3. ie ee a l Pl Pl C GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 9 g tag yay Using g tags The General Info page provides infor mation about the current settings for the g tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and composed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a descrip tion of the tag Absolute Displays the absolute value data Binary or BCD data format 1s available Word Address Defines the address containing the dis play data 16 bit data Display Mode Use this setup to display negative data Only available for Binary data 100 e Checked Displays nega j tive data 100 to 100 100 e Not Checked Does not 100 display negative data 0 to 100 Data Format 0 Bin BCD Defines the type of data stored in the Word Address Relative Data contained in the Word Address is converted according to the Input Range settings before being displayed Word Address Defines the word address containing the display data 16 bit data Display Mode Use this setup to display negative data 2 71 2 9 g tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions r Dit Length g Tag Setting e Data Format Graph Type Range Calor Display Angle Defines the bit length of the data stored BAs Siew in the Word Address Word Address g ap
4. 3 After checking that the loading is not in progress turn ON the trigger bit B for the L tag A message will appear on the GP s screen Check for data 1 Touch the Check Access key loading in progress 2 The bit address A on the PLC is nts turned ON J 3 The PLC checks the status Check the status Ll L The L tag bit 4 After this check the PLC turns the is triggered L tag s bit address B ON S17 Check Access 5 The Ready message appears on the GP s screen 6 After checking this message turn the GP unit OFF reset it or insert remove the CF Card Ready to shut down your GP GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 95 4 4 Using the CF Card Chapter 4 Advanced Features W Other Precautions When corrupted data on the CF Card cannot be restored In this case you will need to re format the CF Card Be sure to back up all CF Card data as often as possible in the event the data becomes unreadable To read CF Card data on your PC your PC must be equipped with a PC card slot Insert the CF Card into your PC card CF Card adapter and then insert the adapter into your PC s PC card slot If the CF Card is not inserted into the GP s Multi Unit do not call up any project screen that uses CF Card data iz External Storage of GP PRO PB Ill data The procedures for using the CF Card as an external storage device are as follows 1 Prepare the CF Card data output fo
5. 2 98 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 12 K tag Key Input Input Code Format No Code Displays positive values only 2 s complement Uses 2 s complement to express negative K Tag Setting Alarm Settings Arithmetic Operation Display Angle General Info Data Format Size Style i Absolute if Relative i Char String Word Address Trigger Bit Address fe onon I lz fem konon Bit Length 1 16 16 ls Tl Round Up values Jl Indirect Base Aiesa S Ahe 4 Donon eE MSB O Devia Typa amp Adihess n GD Uses MSB code system to express nega tive values Code Select the Code option when handling negative values Only available when set ting Decimal data Display Format Input Code Format Display Format Mo Code I Code i Decimal i 2 s Complement t Hex i MSB Octal Input Range Display Range i E Min Value 0 a Min alue 0 Max Value 65535 E Mex Value 65535 E coc J He Decimal Hex Octal Select a numeric format from Decimal Hex and Octal Input Range Min Value Max Value Set up the min max limits for data in the storage word address The possible setup limits change with different Code Inputs Display Range Min Value Max Value Set up the limits for data conversion The possible setup limits vary according to the data s numeric f
6. Line No L i No of Scroll Lines r I General Info Mode Size Style Display Angle i Bit fe Word Text Screen Ward Address ey Dono FIE Data Format fs Bin BCD Display Start Line auansscseseorssineny Ward Address Mo of Scroll Lines ie Designates the start line address in word units Text Screen Word Address Designates the address storing the Text screen number to display Data Format Bin BCD These two selections designate the data for mat of the above mentioned word address Display Start Line Direct Sets the start line directly Line No Designates the X screen start line number Even when the Text screen has switched the start line number remains the same Indirect Sets the start line indirectly using data in the designated word address Word Address Designates the address where the start line data is stored Data Format Bin BCD These settings designate the data format for data stored in the above mentioned Word Address field No of Scroll Lines Sets up the number of lines the display will scroll when the start line changes Enter a number from 1 to 256 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 29 X tag W Size Style Display Size Text characters used in the display can be 16 32 64 or 128 dots high and 8 16 32 or 64 dots wide
7. Storage start address Stored data count n 1 Datat m Sampling data count E Sampling Sampling Type The method to import data from the host PLC is specified from the following Pe riodic Trigger Control and Trigger Sam pling Periodic No Trigger The host PLC data is imported at the setup intervals starting from when the GP is powered up Periodic During Trigger The host PLC data is imported at the setup intervals The data import start pause and clear commands will be performed accord ing to changes to the corresponding bit in the specified Word Address Sample Only On Trigger The data is sampled at the desired timing setup Data import and data clear will be performed according to changes to the cor responding bit in the setup Word Address Sampling Time Specifies the sampling time in 1 second units for the import of host PLC data Channel Setting ooo General Data Format Sampling 12 Periodic During Trigger 1 Sample Only On Trigger Sampling Time eo z word Address I DOOO00 rE Tok cancel _ Hep 3 62 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 2 Data Sampling Settings Word Address When Periodic During Trig ger option is selected The 00 and 01 bits of the Word Address specified here will control the data import start pause and clear operations 15 01 00 1 Data clear 1 J 0 Pause With
8. 1 Contains items whose functions change according to the GP S screen size and installa tion orientation i e portrait or landscape Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 GP 270 GP 370 GP H70 GP 377 GP37W2 units do not support this feature Chapter 2 Features Common to GP PRO PBIII for Win dows All Versions 4 3 4 4 6 Filing Data Filing data such as the previously registered recipe data can be sent to Function the PLC as desired 3 GP 270 does not support this feature Chapter 2 Features Common to GP PRO PBIII for Win dows All Versions 4 Depending on the PLC used certain tag features may not be available e Modicon Modbus Master e Modicon Modbus Slave e Modicon Modbus Plus e Allen Bradley PLC 5 Data Highway e Allen Bradley SLC500 DH485 e Allen Bradley Remote I O e Siemens S7 200 PPI 5 Available only with GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units Chapter 2 Features Common to GP PRO PBIII for Win dows All Versions 6 Available only with the GP77R and GP2000 series units Chapter 2 Features Common to GP PRO PBIII for Win dows All Versions 1 6 GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types 1 4 Tag List Function Order i Tag List Function Order Screen Function i Comments Operation Name k tag Key board Provides a touch keyboard for inputting data setings to touch panel Setup switches Use in combination with the K tags T tags int
9. PLC Data Monitor Select whether data stored in the PLC and monitored with the Q tag is retained or cleared when the GP s power cord is disconnected If the Clear when powering up is selected it is not maintained e To back up a Q tag alarm summary select Not clear when pow _ ering up for both Alarm Message Displayed in Q Tag and PLC Important Data Monitored by Q Tag e Data stored in the backup SRAM will be erased when e The memory is initialized e The screen data is transferred e The GP is set to the offline mode e The GP is powered off if the Clear when powering up Is selected for the Alarm Message Displayed in Q Tag and PLC Data Monitored by Q Tag in the GP system setting s Q Tag Setting window e The GP system protocol is set up e The GP s SELF DIAGNOSIS System s INTERNAL FEPROM SCREEN AREA is running e The GP s OFFLINE settings are being set up Note that when using the GP system version 1 30 or higher included in the GP PRO PBIII for Windows95 Ver1 1 software or higher data stored in the backup SRAM will not be erased 7 These features are enabled when the unit has the internal backup SRAM If the name plate at the rear of the GP70 series unit is copper color it is equipped with SRAM Also all GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units have this internal backup SRAM Copper colored sticker Pro face GRAPHIC PANEL GP571 TC11 S N 8800150000 DIGITA
10. The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for the L tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag Direct Select this option to directly designate a library screen file number to fix it Trigger Type 0 1 The library appears when the trigger bit changes from OFF to ON Only a single library can be displayed 1 0 The library appears when the trigger bit changes from ON to OFF Only a single library can be displayed Trigger Bit Address Defines the address of the trigger bit Erase Mode No Yes When the Yes option is selected the im age designated by the screen file number displays according to the value of the trig ger bit When the No option is selected the displayed library 1s not erased Screen Type Base Screen Image Screen Select the screen type from Base and Im age Library screens Image Screen CF Card Select this when you want to designate the Image screen saved to the CF Card 2 121 2 14 L tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Screen No Specify the desired library screen file num ber Base screen Image Library screen to display EN Presuming the Image Library screen s Erase Mode has been set to Yes When Note the Image Library screen is displayed it appears on top of the current sc
11. This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 65 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features Total Settings Color Settings Size Style Alarm Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk blink When the Alarm option is selected the color attributes designated here are used for normal display 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Color Setting _ _ _ Display Color Fg Hn ln io Blk I E O N NN N lo Display Style S m aoh Jaf Zero Suppress P OO O O Display Style ail Shift Left Shift Right Select either shift type Data is displayed from the selected position The default setting is Shift Left Zero Suppress When 0 suppression check box is checked all unnecessary Os are not displayed When this check 1s removed Os are added to the front of numbers to match the display length designated in the No of Display Digits area e g When the No of Dis play Digits is 4 and O suppression 1s OFF value 25 appears as 0025 This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 66 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function E Display Settings Maximum File Size The display settings file size capacity is approximately 58K B However depending on the specific setting combinati
12. When the Data Display is selected data Bin or BCD is displayed the way it is stored in the word addresses No of Display Digits Defines the number of places available for the display Include the decimal numbers but not the decimal point Decimal Places Defines the number of places available af ter the decimal point The allowable val ues are zero through 10 Display When Display is selected statistic data is calculated as a percentage and displays with the percent mark Ifthe Data Display is set OFF then this setting is fixed ON GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 37 2 5 d tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W Size Style d Tag Setting Display Size General Info Display Format Size Style Display Angle Text characters used in the display can be a No of Dixjsions 16 32 64 or 128 dots high and 8 16 32 or 64 dots wide The basic unit of mea surement is a Single byte character 1 e Display Color Merry Display Color lt Single byte Character gt Fo eee Oe bo A U m D ero 8 dots Display Style feo Shift Left Zer Suppress i Shift Right 16 dots No of Divisions Designate the number of data divisions to use Addresses corresponding only to the levels set up here will be automatically al located from Word Address data Display Color No of Divisions To define colors and blink attributes for each data click a data division number in the Divide Colo
13. Word Address When the Trigger Sampling is selected The 00 and 01 bits of the word address setup here control the data read start and clear operations 15 01 00 1 Data 4 i Change Data read 0 1 Data clear When bit changes fakes place D 1 or 10 Data read fakes place N Please wait until the GP confirms whether the control bits are 0 or Careful NEY 1 With Direct Access communication the period will be either the communication cycle time or 50 ms whichever is longer GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 273 2 30 Trend Graph Display Chapter 2 Active Image Functions e Up toa 1 second delay may occur from the data read to actual data sampling N Nes e If the data sampling time is shorter than the communication cycle time sampling may not be performed normally e If the Sampling Time is designated as several seconds data sampling is per formed before the PLC reads the data when the communication cycle time exceeds the sampling time Therefore previously acquired data may be dis played on a graph Also even if the sampling time is set up within the com munication cycle time the communication cycle time can become longer due to screen switching and scrolling operations As a result the communication cycle time exceeds the sampling time which also results in the displaying of the previously acquired data on a graph WWW VE Normal graph display When data is no
14. is selected e 2 23 T tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions lt p gt For a project with the screen hierarchical structure shown above any screen can return to the main screen using T tag s Return to Previous Screen option by the Screen Level Change function To do this select the Screen Level Change Flow option for T tag on each main screen 1 e Base screens 1 10 20 and 30 Also select the Screen Level Change Flow option in the GP System Settings field of the Project Manager Thus the user can jump directly from screen 200 to main screen 10 instead of to screen 100 To use this feature 1 Change from Base screen 1 to 10 using the T tag Word selec tion 2 Change from Base screen 10 to 100 3 Change from Base screen 100 to 200 4 Change jump to Base screen 10 by touching a T tag with the Return to Previous Screen option selected Note Screens jumped to using commands other than the T tag or W tag s Screen NA Level Change option will be handled as being on the same level e To select the Screen Level Change Direction option for a project be sure to first select the Screen Level Change Direction option for the GP System Settings 2 228 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 4 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 24 t tag rwn t tag Selector Switch Input
15. Using this tag you can create a touch panel object that can setup multiple bit addresses Each time the object switch is pressed one switch address bit turns OFF and another address bit turns ON Set Address 1 M0005 2 M003 3 Y0002 e Press the touch key 1 M0005 ON 2 M0035 OFF ee 3 Y0002 OFF ME e Press the touch key again 1 M0005 OFF 2 M0035 ON 3 Y0002 OFF e Press the touch key again 1 M0005 OFF 2 M0035 OFF 3 Y0002 ON e Press the touch key again 1 M0005 ON 2 M0035 OFF 3 Y0002 OFF Each time the touch panel key is pressed a bit on an address turns ON as follows M0005 gt M0035 gt Y0002 M0005 gt M0035 and so on rw wa About t tags M Pressing a single touch panel key causes the bit addresses to turn ON in the order set up Determine the order of the bit addresses and set them up The initial press turns the first bit address ON the second press turns the next bit address ON and the first bit address OFF W 2 4 bits can be set in each t tag WE Even on different screens the same bit operation is possible GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 229 2 24 t tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E The minimum unit for the touch panel key is 20 x 20 dots E When GP Initialize s Touch Operation Mode is set to 2 points then two different touch panel keys can be used simultaneously E Pressing T tag s touch panel key can cause a buzzer ou
16. 02 o 7 of of Of oO Pott tot fojtofoto STX Node No Sub address End code MRC SRC Response code ee Read data ETX BCC GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 39 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features Reading the target value e Command Frame 24 bytes Jy i BCC calculation range 2 oj1 jofo o ofj fofi ce 1i STX Node No Sub address SID MRC SRC Type of variable d o0 ojoj3fojojojojoj 1 0x03 0x42 Starting read address Bit positon Number ofelements ETX BCC e Response Frame 26 bytes BCC calculation range tt poxoz o 1 of of of oO fottfotttofoto a STX Node No Sub address End code MRC SRC Response code o Readout data ETX BCC For more information on the above refer to the communication specifica tions for Omron s thermoregulator This section explains the D Script Function The D Script editor in the main routine is as follows i D Scrpt Editor MAIN ID an The D Script Function Description Edge Bit Address MAIN i UN OS L5203800 FF taft otf Show Toolbox w Formula t 0010 0 Functions if Ib LSO05100 1 i t 0011 0 Data Type Data Length Code Enter an expression Press HELP for examples 3 40 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script The D Script and the D Script function are desc
17. CF Card The library appears when the trigger bit changes from ON to OFF Only a single cancel e library can be displayed None The screen file number of the display 1m age changes according to the data in the designated Word Address Trigger Bit Address Defines the address of the trigger bit Erase Mode No Yes When the Yes option is selected the 1m age designated by the screen file number displays according to the value of the trig ger bit When the No option is selected the displayed library is not erased Word Address Defines the word address containing the display screen file number Offset Value Defines the offset value added to the word address data Enter 0 zero if offset will not be used Screen Type Base Screen Image Screen Select the screen type from Base and Im age Library screens Image Screen CF Card Select this when you want to designate the Image screen saved to the CF Card Data Format Bin BCD Defines the data format used for the data in the word address 2 14 7 Offset Settings L tag GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 123 2 14 L tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Designated Screen State State Responding to changes in multiple bits the ae library display changes Word Address Library screen to display depends on the state of bit in the designated bit length of this word address Bit Offset Defines the bits from wh
18. Direction of signal Direction of signal RD Input 2 J 5 DR Input 6 6 DR CS Input 8 8 RS RTS NC RIMVCC Input Output Communication settings The communication settings of the extended serial I F of the GP 1s specified as the initial data of the bar code reader The initial data of Imex s bar code readers LS40041 is as follows Data length Stop bit Parity bit g600bps 8 1 Nme GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 125 4 7 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 126 For Olympus Symbol s bar code reader Model VS4004 e Wiring diagram AC 100V adapter lt y z D sub 9 pin connector Bar code reader P Laser scanner The bar code reader is directly connected to the GP Direction of signal GP Communication settings The communication settings of the extended serial I F of the GP is specified as the initial data of the bar code reader The initial data of Imex s bar code readers VS4004 is as follows Data length Stop bit Parity bit g600bps_ 8 1 Nme The VS4004 Serial code reader can also read the one dimensional bar code GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 47 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility For Olympus Symbol s bar code reader Model VS4004 e Wiring diagram AC 100V adapter
19. Escape from loop 2 endloop break Escape from loop 1 endloop If loop operation is finished without using the escape command the temporary Word Address value becomes 0 The range available for the temporary Word Address value will differ depending on the data format Bin BCD bit length and code used If code has been designated and the temporary Word Address becomes a negative value the con dition is judged at the beginning of the loop and the loop pro cessing stops DO NOT use a PLC device in the loop formula Instead use an address from the GP s internal LS area s user area device or a temporary Word Address For example the following de scription preforms data write to the PLC many times ina short period 100 times in the following example This can cause a system error since communication processing the time re quired to write to the PLC cannot be performed at this speed GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features E g t 0000 100 loop t 0000 w D0200 w LS0100 w LS0100 w LS0100 1 endloop Change as follows t 0000 100 loop t 0000 w LS200 w LS0100 w LS0100 w LS0100 1 endloop w D0200 w LS0200 Statements i ifi ifi ace e break 3 1 D Script Global D Script Loop100 times Write data to D0200 Increment LS0100 Loop100 times Writes data to D0200 Increm
20. Meter Down i Right WE Graph Type Pie Graph General Info Data Format Graph Type larm Color Settings cea spaxaassateeavuedted oy Half Pie Graph G Tag Setting Display Direction Graph Pattern f Cleves From Top a Normal 4 Clews From Bottom Meter Bar Graph Select this option to display data via a bar graph Display Direction Defines whether the graph data points Up Down Left or Right an Down d hb o Graph Pattern Normal Meter When Meter is selected the needle uses the foreground color and the meter face uses the background color Foreground color Background color Treat this setting as a normal color attribute when using the Alarm Pie Graph Select this option to display a pie graph Display Direction Clkws From Top Clkws From Bottom Defines the direction of the data display Clkws From Top Clkws From Bottom GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 8 G tag Graph Pattern Normal Meter When Meter is selected the needle uses the foreground color and the meter face uses the background color WE Graph Type Half Pie Graph Half Pie Graph General Info Data Format Graph Type Alarm Colar Settings Select this option to display a half pie i BarGraph Pie Graph Hall Pie Grapt graph G Tag Setting Display Direction Graph Pattern fh Clockwise e Normal Mete
21. oe ee e This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 29 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features e Place Click on the Place button to display the Filing Data Display If desired change the Part s size via its sizing handles a Bean 1234067 890 3 PLG 2 SRAM J SRAM PLE PLE SRAM Note To change the Filing Data Display s layout or attributes first ungroup it WE Operation Filing Data Transmission Flow GP Internal memory Filing data gt SRAM PLC Filing Data to SRAM All the filing data is written into the SRAM when the Trigger Bit is turned ON Control Word Address a 1 to D00200 Ta ON Write Completed Bit Address Se M0001 n i Data processing e SRAM to PLC Filing data selected by the GP s touch key is written to the PLC Actual Process 1 Select an item Here select Block 3 36 C POC 21 35 0 36 C gt PLE SRAM This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 30 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function 2 Touch SRAM gt PLC key SRAM LG gt PLC 3 Filing data is transmitted from SRAM to the PLC PLC D00100 D00101 D00102 ya Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 Here select
22. 32 or 64 dots wide The basic unit of mea surement is a Single byte character 1 e lt Single byte Character gt 8 dots 16 dots Min Value Color Defines the foreground and background colors and blink attributes for the alarm s lower limit display When displaying nu meric values using the n tag on a filled ob ject set the background color Bg of the n tag display the same as the fill color Max Value Color Defines the foreground and background colors and blink attributes for the alarm s upper limit display 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag 2 158 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 18 n tag E Display Angle n Tag Setting Display Angle General info Size Style Display Angle Set up the rotation for the display Select 0 zero 90 180 or 270 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 7 270 degrees GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 159 2 160 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 19 P tag 2 19 P tag Numeric Display in Pre designated Format Displays numeric data in a pre designated format Designated oa 10 7 1 5 Address E You can set the format whereby unit symbols are inserted between the data rn About P tags M Displays the designated word address data as an absolute value in real time using a pre designated f
23. 32 Bit length Data m 15 number of data pieces 16 Bit length GP PLC Backup SRAM Block Name AN Data transmitted between the backup SRAM and LS Area will overwrite the Note existing Block Name and Block data Data transmitted from the PLC to the LS Area overwrites only file data and preserves the Block Name e When a device is used with a 32 Bit system start Address filing data cannot be transmitted to the PLC via the LS Area e Block Name text characters are stored in order of the character input GP 477R 577R Series User s Manual 5 3 4 Text Data Settings This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 15 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features W Three Filing Data Transmission Methods lt Method 1 Automatic Transmission gt Filing data 1s transmitted from the GP to the PLC via a PLC trigger Use the Control Word Address instead of using the Filing Data Display to transfer data between the GP and the PLC GP gt PLC PLC GP GP Internal memory 1 Backup SRAM PLC screen data To use a CF card Digital s optional Mult CF card Unit is required 1 PLC Trigger 4 2 3 Using the Filing Data Function Write Setting Send Filing Data to SRAM 2 PLC Trigger 4 2 3 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 3 Backup SRAM to LS Area 3 PLC Trigger 4 4 8 Transferri
24. Active Image Functions E Display Angle P Tag Setting Display Angle ies oem eee Set up the rotation for the display Select one from 0 zero 90 180 and 270 de grees 90 degrees i 180 degrees i 270 degrees E Display Format General Info Data Format Size Style Alarm Settings Display Angle Display Format Digits Truncated digits Data Display Length Set up the pre designated display format Set up the data display portions with the asterisk and the text as desired which together must not exceed 80 characters The numeric value displays in the aster isks from the lowest position P Tag Setting Digits Truncated digits Data Display Length 2 166 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 19 P tag yak P tag Example Settings lt Example 1 gt Display Length 4 Truncate 0 Display Style Shift Right Zero Suppress ON Display Format Hour s Minute s Data Display 4l2 3 4 gt 12 Hour s 34 Minute s 42 3 gt 1 Hour s 23 Minute s r ee Text setup in the display format field lt Example 2 gt Display Length 6 Truncate 2 Display Style Shift Right Zero Suppress OFF Display Format Kg 00g Data Display _ 4 2 3 4 5 6 gt 123kg4009 Text setup inthe display format field 1 213 4 516 7 8 gt 345Kg600g Data is entered from the lowest asterisk field posit
25. Data changes in multiple word addresses can be monitored as a single block by the graph Enter address numbers to control the ON OFF display of the graph Status Status 2 Status Status 3 displays deletes displays clears old the graph the graph the graph graph and displays new one Control Status address for controlling display 2 Number of address data to display E The Scale the number of data points range that can be set up for a single trend graph is 1 639 for GP 470 570 477 577 2400 2500 and 1 319 for GP 270 GP H70 GP 370 GP 377R GP 377 and 1 799 for GP 675 2600 However the Scale range for a Block display trend graph using the Direct Access communication is 1 253 WE Absolute and relative data formats are available Binary or BCD formats can be designated for absolute data however only binary is acceptable for relative data E When using relative data the data written to the host PLC is converted automatically according to the Input Range settings A data computing program in the host PLC can be eliminated as a result WE With absolute data negative values are computed using 2 s complement With relative data both 2 s complement and MSB code are available E By setting maximum and minimum values for valid data an Alarm display function can be created W Set the display to face Up Down Right or Left WE The graph s color attributes and line types are all adjustable EN Thi
26. Display No of Display Lines 8 General Setings Disple Sile Color Swich Setings SwichType Colar _ No of Display Characters 15 In Mo of Display Lines 5 Direct Selection Selected Mo of Display Characters 15 E J Direct Selection Cursor Position Control Selected Cea a Za lt Cursor Position Control gt Note Even when the screens are changed on the GP monitor the current File Name X2 Display s cursor position can be retained e Cursor Position Control can be designated when setting up the File Name Display e When turning the GP s main power switch ON or resetting the GP the cur sor will appear on the first line e The cursor position will be stored for each ID No The storage area of an ID No and a cursor position are in correspondence with each other To retain the cursor position be sure that the File Name Display ID Nos do not overlap each other on any of the screens For more detailed informa tion about the File Name Display Operation Manual 2 1 Parts 2 1 16 File Name Display Switch Settings Send To PLC From SRAM Not Selected General Setings Dray Swle Coler Switch Setings SwitchType Oar Automatic Swikch Placement Method Send To SRAM From PLC Not Selected Roll Up Selected Roll Down Selected Send To LS From SRAM Selected Send To SRAM From LS Selected EREA Send To LS From PLC Selected Send To PLE From SRAM
27. Fill e Circle 15 8 7 O bit 1 Line typo Fil pattem Mode Line type 0 Solid line 1 Dotted line 2 One dotted broken line 3 Two dotted broken line 8 3 dot thick solid line 9 m_ 5 dot thick solid line Fill pattern 0 i 5 BH Mode 00 Line drawing 01 Fill The GP 270 does not support this function GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 83 2 10 H tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Color attributes 2 The foreground and background color attributes can be specified via the data stored here 1 7 6 5 14 8 0 2 Blink Background color Foreground color Color code Commonly used for both foreground and background colors 00h Black Olh Blue 02h Green 03h Lightblue 04h Red 05h Purple 06h Yellow 07h White 80h Black blinking 81h Blue blinking 82h Green blinking 83h Light blue blinking 84h Red blinking 85h Purple blinking 86h Yellow blinking 87h White blinking bit When using the 64 color display GP 15 14 13 8 7 6 5 0 bit sa Bink Background color Foreground color lt GP 571 gt 7 15 bits 6 14 bits Blink Status 0 0 FF O1 0o N lt Any model compatible with 3 Blink features 1 e GP 675 etc gt 7 15 bits 6 14 bits Blink Status 0 1 ON blinks two times faster than standard a On serdari ON blinks at half speed of standard When using the 256 color di
28. I O port receiving the data w LS0100 The is the beginning address where the received data is stored Only the LS area can be specified e The size of the received data is stored in address LSO100 and the received data is stored in addresses starting with LS101 See below for an illustration of the storage area Transfer Bytes 10 bytes of data are stored in the LS addresses from the I O Note The maximum number of transfer bytes that can be received is 2011 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 33 3 1 D Script Global D Script 3 34 LS0100 LS0101 LS0102 LS0103 LS0104 LS0105 LS0106 LS0107 LS0108 LS0109 LS0110 Chapter 3 Special Features Number of Bytes of Received Data 10 byte Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Figure 1 Illustration of Storage addresses for received data 2 Send Function The following messages to write the sent data to extended SIO e Format IO _ WRITE p EXT SIO LS Storage Address Transfer Bytes e Sample Description of Sending Function IO WRITE p EXT_ RSIO w LS0100 10 Description Contents I O Variable p EXT SIO I O port sending the data LS storage address w LS0100 e This is the beginning address where the sent data is stored e Only the LS area can be specified e In this case the start address is LSO100 See below for an illustration of the storage
29. ID Number Set up the ID number specific for the video window Be sure this number is not re peated on the same screen Input Channel No Set up the video input channel number 0 1 2 General Info Display Settings ID Number io E J Video window Display Input Channel No pb 4 Touch Panel Operation Display Size Normal 3 Zoom Video Window Display Set up whether the video window display is used or not used Touch Panel Operation When Touch Operation 1s set to ON touch panel input on the video window is enabled Transparent Mode if None 2 Selected color shows over video iy Colors other than selected show over video Cr Even though Touch Operation is turned OFF when the video window s dis Note play is also turned OFF touch panel input turns ON again Transparent Mode None Does not run the video window s transpar ent display Selected color shows over video When the color set here is behind the video window it appears through the video window Colors other than selected show over video All the colors behind the video window except the ones set here appear through the video window This function is only avaliable with the GP 570VM 8 amp 70VM and GP 2500 2600 with the VM unit GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 247 2 27 V tag 2 248 Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Display Size General Info Display Settings Normal ID
30. M0001 OFF e SRAM to PLC When the 0 Bit of the data transmission s Control Word Address D00201 is turned ON the designated filing data is written to the PLC To designate filing data prior to transferring filing data a file number is stored in D00202 and a block number is stored in D00203 directly follow ing the Control Word Address PLC Trigger Bit Address to 1 to D00201 i OFF Write Completed Bit Address M0002 OFF data processing written into PLC s D00100 to D00102 D00201 D00202 D00203 D00100 D00101 D00102 This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 26 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function ya Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 1 The following explains how to transfer data by selecting the desired screen setting Manual Transmission 1 W Screen Example In this example data from File No 1 s Block No 3 1s sent by touching the screen 21 35 C SRAM PLCS PLo SRAM E Filing Setting Example Filing Setting Esmee Write Setting From Filing Data To SRAM A Use Muiple Folders Control Word Address D00200 e Write Completed Bit Address M00001 PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Write Completed Bit Address Moon F S tti etting PLC Controlled Transfer Not selected eee cen rE When this check box is not checked
31. Meter on Display Direction Defines whether the graph points Up Down Left or Right Ti mel J Lett Right b od Graph Pattern Normal Meter When Meter is selected the needle uses the foreground color and the meter face uses the background color Treat these settings as the normal color attributes when using the Alarm WE Graph Type Pie Graph g Tag Setting Pie Graph General Info Data Format Graph Type Range Color Display Angle Select this option to display a pie graph i Bar Graph i Half Pie Graph E aen Display Direction Graph Pattern ah Clkws From Top f Normal 20 Claws From Bottom 20 Meter Display Direction Clkws From Top Clkws From Bottom Defines the direction of the data display Clkws From Top Clkws From Bottom GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 73 2 9 g tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Graph Pattern Normal Meter When Meter is selected the needle uses the foreground color and the meter face uses the background color WE Graph Type Half Pie Graph REL Half Pie Graph enera nio ata amat Graph T E anger Color isplay Angle e Benesi Irfa Data Fomai Groh Tee Barge Coer Dinin Ande o ooo Select this option to display a half pie i Bar Graph i Pie Graph ig Half Pie Grapht graph Display Direction Graph Pattern a Clockwise Normal 20 Meter Display Direction Clockwise The direction 1s fixed t
32. Mode Options dress 9 Bit ft Word C Special Ward Address Word Access foo IE Set 16 Bit Writes the designated constant value 16 bit data to the word address when the touch panel key is inputted The data range for the constant is 32768 to 32767 Set 32 Bit Writes the designated constant value 32 bit data to the word address when the touch panel key is inputted The data range for the constant is 2147483648 to 2147483647 Add Binary 16 Bit When the touch panel key is pressed it adds the data stored in Word Address 1 with the designated constant binary 16 bit data and writes the result to the des ignated word address The data range for the constant is 32768 to 32767 If desired the constant s value can be viewed in BCD or Hex format Add BCD 16 Bit When the touch panel key is pressed it adds the data stored in Word Address 1 with the designated constant BCD 16 bit data and writes the result to the des ignated word address The data range for the constant 1s 0 to 9999 AND Binary 16 Bit When the touch panel key is pressed it performs an AND operation between the data stored in Word Address and the designated constant binary 16 bit data and writes the result to the desig nated word address The data range for the constant is 0 to 65535 OR Binary 16 Bit When the touch panel key is pressed it performs an OR operation between the data stored in Word Address 1 and the designated constant binary
33. Sub Screen Alarm Screen 3 Alarm Screen 2 Alarm Screen 1 Breakdown The machine need gt nee j i fan belt D i When setting selected to the L tag set the Screen Access to Indirect Base Screen A tag select keys Switch Screen keys T tags T tags Enter the same address in the A tag s Word Address L tag Word Address and L tag s Word Address This example uses the GP internal LS area Enter similar contents for Base screens 2 and 3 The T tag OK button above diagram can overlap the same area as the Up or Down buttons In this case be sure to set up the Up and Down buttons before the OK button Do not overlap the Up and Down buttons amp GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 15 2 1 A tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions A tag Settings A tag A tag Display Format Size Color Sub Display Display Ange men mere ad T Display Format Size Color Sub Display Display Angle Consecutively prere um multi ple alarm Onore Base Screen i Cacivewin
34. Trademark Rights rene ces testes armas ee tateene ce snenneneceeesecetacaesestaeecteeecae 2 How to Use This Manual ccccccccsesececssceceeseceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeceeueeeeeeeeseneeas 3 Table OF Contents spiccesdatsmnesnenesseceurrwcentnne cu senasanevsanrecissiaewiiessenessedtatouseseenats 5 Manual Symbols and Terminology ccscceeeceeeeseeeesneseeeeeneeeeeeeeees 15 ES CaO NS aes diets cece etn a cle A EEEE AAE E AA EREE 16 LE OCCT UN Ey CS oi vsi sre cco E E ce covensestecacnsss 1 1 L2 POUR VS mage TCS oso rocco Seats cas sees ase nes oe te EEES 1 2 L3 Tag List Alphabetical Order secasisisssccccccscadeascscstecsuscastsanscsvecsciousessseasveesensostrienst 1 4 LA Tae List CRumction Order sscsisssseisccvecssssssssceccccececcssasaeancccececasessasdvacdaceceevasaeanciennce 1 7 LS FA SCC CANN acacia cess EER 1 15 CHAPTER2 Active Image Functions 2 1 A tag Alarm Summary TEXT Display cccccccccsssssssssssscsscccscsceessssseees 2 1 DMM EV ace perp cas gers EE E E EE NEN NA E E EE E 2 1 2L ABOA TI rE ANE EA E E E EAEAN NEEE E E OAEI EEN 2 1 Llr UIE AA a AE as ae E ENE EE AE A AE E EE 2 6 AA Aa E a E E E E E E E E EE A E AE 2 15 ALS LOr ENOS a E E EAEE E EE EE E AE EE E 2 18 2 2 a tag Alarm Summary Display ccscsecccooooossssssssseececccsesoseeocooosssssssssssssesesesee 2 21 DM NNO N A N E N A A 2 21 DD A E E EEEE AAE AEA AEE 2 21 P e NS E EEEO NIA A ENSS 2 23 224 Alarm Summary Display NOU Sra ceuccaza
35. a group number cannot be set for each message GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 193 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Q Tag External Operation This feature enables you to check and if desired clear all Q Tag Alarm Messages in all network GPs at one time via the host computer To use this feature you will need to designate the Q Tag setting s Control Word Ad dress and Completion Bit The Control Word Address designates the alarm type and operation code used for controlling the system via the host com puter The Completion Bit is used for designating the bit address that turns ON when the action is completed This feature can be used only with GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units lt Control Word Address gt 0 Not Operating 15 0 1 All Ack 0 Alarm Active Block 1 Data 0 Operation Code 2 All Clear 1 Alarm History Block 2 Data 1 2 Alarm Log Block 3 Data lt Example gt 1 Host Computer 4 Enter Operation Code Set Operation Code to 0 5 GP unit 1 Completion Bit GP unit n Completion Bit OFF OFF 1 Designate the Control Word Address alarm type and operation code in the host computer 2 The host computer then commands GP unit to turn its Completion Bit ON when the GP unit s operation 1s completed 3 The host computer commands GP unit n to turn its Completion Bit ON when the GP unit s operation 1s completed 4 Th
36. and later Word Addresses from the Word Address The allocated address 1s dis played in either Range Settings or Color Settings field 2 50 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 6 E tag Address Allocation in Indirect Designation 0 Display Data H Range 2 over fn 2 Range Slower init 3 Input range x 4 Display range Max 5 Display range Max Display range Hin 6 Display range Hin Indirect Designation Area Indirect Designation After Base Address Area After Display Input Display Designation Address Indirect Input Display Designa Color Designation Indirect tion Indirect No of Ranges 3 No of ranges 3 O Index 0 Display Data 4 Input range Wa 4 Input range Max 2 Inpatrange n 2 Inputrange Min 3 Display range Max 3 Dipl range mia 4 Dipl range Mas 4 Display range Max 5 Color code 5 Color code Indirect Designation Area Indirect Designation Area After Display Address After Display Address Input Display Designation Input Display Designation Indirect Indirect Color Designation Indirect Color Designation Indirect Range Settings Current Value The selected range number s range is dis played Here the range number can also be selected E Tag Setting General Info E Data Format Size Style Range Colar Arithmetic Operation Display Angle
37. display General function D tag Statistical data display General function d tag NUE cala General function display Corresponding range indirect seting Back ground E x w kasom 2 2 0 9 0 a o ololofofofololo Color indirect seting Free Library Display General function F tag Expanded function Graph Display G tag General function Graph Display Expanded General function function Corresponding g tag range indirect seting wm 2 lele leoelolofolofjo ojofo o ofo display Color indirect mi Se ooo Sno mmr Object drawing General function General funcion function Graphic drawing H x elo T fololofo o ofofofoolofololo GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual l 11 1 4 Tag List Function Order Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types GP 270 470 570 571 675 570VM 870VM 377L 377S 37W2 377R 477R 577R 2400 GP 2600 Moving mark display J tag ww limon oleflofolofo olofofo lofofjofofo function Color indirect c eg ofe fofoleflo ofelejo lofofefo o o w E EEEE using Bits ao Satelsbtetetetete Bo ea display General L tag function L ibrary state Ganea change display unction I small L tag Mark display General M tag function Numeric display General N tag function Alarm boundary Cerera a Numeric display in pre defined format Alarm summary display baer eefepopepe pe ojo
38. eco The Logging Address is changed by the offset value entered here For example when the number of logging words is 4 the offset value becomes 0 to 3 This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 69 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features CETE Display Data Format General Info Data Format Size Style e a Select the desired data format from Dec Address Offset 0 H Data Logging Address DOOO00 Hex and BCD Code Display Data Format 168 Check this check box when printing nega pag Beas tive values Only available when select t Hex aco ing the Dec data format Column Settings Relative General Info Data Format Size Style Absolute fe Relative Data stored in the Address entered in the Logging Address area 1s converted accord ing to the Input Range area s values and the converted numeric data is printed out Address Offset The Logging Address is changed by the offset value entered here For example when the number of logging words is 4 the offset value becomes from 0 to 3 Bit Length Enter the Enabled Bit length of data to be stored in the Logging Address Input Code Format No Code Displays positive values only 2 s Complement Uses 2 s complement to express negative values Code Check this check box when displaying negative values Only available when se lecting th
39. it is displayed at the center of the screen If the video window is already displayed it is tempo rarily hidden while the VGA is displayed GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 143 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 144 E Adjusting the VGA SVGA Display Adjust the VGA SVGA display as follows 1 Display the menu bar For more information on the method of viewing the menu bar GP2000 Series Users Manual 6 4 3 Touch Panel Settings bya CF START UP oF OFF LINE RESET CANCEL Vv 2 Press njat the left end of the menu bar three times to display the next menu PC SCREEN POSITION SCREEN COLOR DEFAULT 4 4 SETTING ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT SETTING e Press POSITION ADJUSTMENT to adjust the horizontal and vertical position YORA A e STA Tete AT 1 1 ADJUSTMENT a HOR POS VER POS e Press SCREEN ADJUSTMENT to adjust the clock and phase 1 2 ADJUSTMENT XXX PHASE CURRENT VALUE EXIT ADJUSTMENT XX 00 63 e Press COLOR ADJUSTMENT to adjust the red green and blue colors e Press DEFAULT SETTING to restore the POSITION ADJUSTMENT SCREEN ADJUSTMENT and COLOR ADJUSTMENT settings to their default values Sis apsosmier A iever V A veros 1 3 ADJUSTMENT LEVEL VER POS Ya omsm xr A reven V A veros 2 2 3 ADJUSTMENT LEVEL VER POS ye apsusrwenr A reven V A veros 3 3 ADJUSTMENT LEVEL VER POS t e The results of the horizontal position
40. of Display Positions Define the total number of display posi tions set for the Mark 1 99 This setting is valid when Fixed is selected for the Placement Placement Method Free Select this option to designate the number of Marks placed on the R tag and their positions manually Enter the settings for the R tag then click OK Left click on each desired position to designate posi tions To end defining positions right click on the end point Fixed Select this option to designate a fixed num ber of Marks positions on the R tag in the No of Positions setting Enter the R tag settings then click OK To enter the no of positions left click on the up or down triangle the desired number of times Also when using Fixed and No of Posi tions is more than 1 you can choose to use the Line option where R tag positions are designated evenly between 2 points 2 200 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 21 R tag EN e Up to 30 rails worth of R tags are valid for each display screen gS e Multiple setups of the same rail number cannot be done on a screen e When displaying two or more screens simultaneously be sure not to set the same rail number for each tag e Place the Mark so that it does not lie outside the display area e Keep the total number of display positions on one screen at less than 512 256 for GP 270 GP 370 and GP H70 GP PRO PB III for
41. or not memcpy memset loop break IO READ IO WRITE 3 22 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script D Script Global D Script Limitations e Limitations on BCD format operations If a value which cannot be converted into BCD format 1s found during operation the program stops running These values include A to F in hexa decimal format Do not use such values If the program stops due to non BCD values bit 7 in common relay information LS2032 in the GP turns ON This bit does not turn OFF until the GP is turned OFF or goes offline E g w D200 w D300 lt lt 2 80 If D300 is 3 shifting two bits to the left results in 0x000C which cannot be converted into BCD format interrupts program execution w D200 w D300 lt lt 2 If D300 is 3 shifting two bits to the left results in 0x000C Unlike the above example 0x000C is the result of the operation to be stored in the memory and does not cause the program to stop e Limitations of zero operations Do not divide by zero in division and remainder operations If you do the program stops and bit 8 in common relay information LS2032 turns ON This bit does not turn OFF until the GP is turned OFF or goes offline e Notes on delay during assign operation Using a device address in an assign operation may cause write delay because the GP has to re
42. t 0002 1 Set the transmit receive processing completion flag endif endif Transmit Receive Function 2 COMM READ2 Execution Formula if t 0001 1 Has reception completed Call TRANS FUNC RI Transmission of data 1 read command if t 0000 1 Has data 2 read command been transmitted Is the transmit completion flag set t 0001 0 Clear the receive completion flag t 0003 10 Set the receive timer endif endif if t 0001 1 Has transmission completed Call RCV FUNC RI Receiving the response to the data 1 read command if t 0000 1 Has data 2 read command been received Is the receive completion flag set t 0000 0 Clear the transmit completion flag t 0002 1 Set the transmit receive processing completion flag endif endif 3 50 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features E Main routine Trigger Formula Detect bit start up Execution Formula if t 0010 0 if b LS005100 1 if t 0011 0 Call COMM READ if t 0002 1 t 0002 0 t 0011 1 endif endif if t 0011 1 Call COMM READ2 if t 0002 1 t 0002 0 t 0010 10 t 0011 0 endif endif endif endif GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Bit address 3 1 D Script Global D Script LS203800 Detect trig
43. vertical position and phase adjustment ae are saved in the backup SRAM of the GP main unit Therefore if the GP main unit were replaced those results should be adjusted again gt GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit 4 9 4 Project Conversion from the GP 530VM GP 570VM to GP2500T 2600T E Conversion from the GP 530VM When converting from the GP 530VM to another GP consider the following 1 The start address of the video control area is changed from LS16 to LS20 The video does not display correctly because the start address is changed Reset the address If the video window is controlled with the PLC or the GP tags reset the address 2 The screen size is changed from 640 x 400 to 640 x 480 GP2500 or 800 x 600 GP2600 If the video window is controlled with the PLC or the GP tags the video window display position moves upward by 40 dots GP2500 or leftward by 80 dots and upward by 100 dots GP2600 3 The system window alarm message error display is brought to the front of the video display The system window including the alarm message is brought to the front of the video display E Convertion from the GP 570VM When converting from the GP 570VM to another GP consider the following The system window alarm message error display is brought to the front of the video display The system window including the
44. zero will clear the window D0100 Window Control Noto Ardem F E The window corresponding to the registra d a clea nea tion number stored here displays when the DOW Window Display Coordinates X axis y window control is set ON DOA Window Display Coordinates Y axis 74 Stores the coordinates for the window display The X coordinate can only be set at any multiple of 8dots Temperature Tank A Tank B Tank ELS ee Ratio of Materials Tank A Tank B Tank Condition of each tank Tank RUM Tank B RUN Tank GC STOF DSS D0100 D000 O D0101 D0101 D0102 D0102 bods 60 D0103 Window no 1 Window no 2 No window display displays at point 48 60 displays at point 192 15 despite the data in addresses D0101 D0103 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 243 2 26 U tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions yA wae GP System Area Global Window Display Settings E Displaying Global Window Using GP System Settings In the GP s Setup area turn on the Global Window setup by selecting the Global Window item from the Expansion menu Global Window Settings Ok Window Access Mode Cancel te Direct i Registration Mo mz f 2 Indirect Data Forma 1 Bias 2 BED Window Location s Pos pa JH Y Pos po JE Global Window Set up the Global Window ON or OFF checked or not checked If you wish to use the Global Window check this box
45. 1 1996 6777 9 00 00 sa eas a item Name 2 1o86 120000 gt pe e item Name 3 1996 6717 150000 z4 a Be a Item Name 4 1998 6 17 18 00 00 123 4 12 345 1234 Ooo T o o o e e Item Name 1 1998 6 18 9 00 00 345 6 3 456 3456 e Values are displayed according to the Display Settings Therefore they are Ge a not displayed from the Address Offset Number but from the designated fore NSS most column e When a PLC data read error occurs is displayed instead of an actual data value e No data is displayed in the data calculation area e Date and time data is always displayed in the yy mm dd and hh mm ss format e Item Names designated via the Display Settings are displayed e When Item Names are not designated for rows or columns no Item Name is displayed However even in such a case date and time data is displayed Date Time o o cca 9 00 00 1998 6 17 __ 12 00 00 e When multiple Item Names are entered in multiple lines in one cell a space 20H is inserted between each name e g Ist line Interior 2nd line Temperature for Interior Tempera ture e One blank row is inserted between blocks e Only logging data is displayed This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 80 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function When writing logging data to the CF card in auto sav
46. 219 TABLE OF CONTENTS eee 5 Tag List Alphabetical Order 1 4 Tag List Function Order 0 1 7 Tag Setting Cautions sersesssisrsssss 1 15 Tag Size ASG aie tarouteoneeotarsieccentenn tetova 1 17 Tih Tiw tags carcace ctntusemeniatecsonvenvantesas 2 223 TRADEMARK RIGHTS c0cee 2 Trend Graph Data s CSV File Storage Example 2 272 Trend Graph Display 006 2 257 MS EEA E E 2 227 U tag Examples 2 233 Using Arithmetic Operations 2 107 Using Trend Graphs eeoeeeeeeeeeeeenn 2 260 NADA E N AIE T 2 235 V tag Examples scstencusaiciecunevicanercers 2 239 WE e A 2 241 W tag Examples 0 2 247 3 30 X tag gocanivuanuerancerubnesonyeianseesieemaves 2 249 X tag Examples cceeeeees 2 254 il GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual
47. 300 Data in the word address Offset value Screen No to display M tag 100 ele 0 100 Data in the word address Offset value Screen No to display C Lag Mag 2 128 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 14 L tag 2 14 8 Notes On XOR Display When Erase Mode is set Yes library images created on Base screens display using XOR overwrite For example when two ON status pixels are laid on top of each other they become an OFF status pixel E g When a drawing on a Base screen And a Library image T bi Overlap e The XOR display results The XOR display can result in the following problems When loading a library using fills and its drawings are laid on top of other drawings or text in the Base screen filling may leak from the section show ing OFF status pixels designated in the XOR display E g Library a lamp Base screen Loaded In The fill in the rectangle leaks from here A i When drawing a rectangular lamp use the Pattern attribute to make a filled rect ore angle NS s When using multiple shapes or polygons dots at intersection points are lost because of the XOR drawing mode E g Drawings on a library file When loaded into a Base screen DA Dots are missing GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 129 2 14 L tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Qe re To avoid losing dots at intersecti
48. Absolute Data displays as an absolute value When using absolute values select either Binary or BCD data Word Address Displays the data stored in the word ad dress setup here which uses 16 bit data Offset This option 1s valid when Block Display has been selected for the trend graph screen settings The graph data storage address can be specified via the offset setting The offset setting is valid when the Word Ad dress is set to other than the LS Area Display Mode When using negative data check this option This function is available only when the Bin option 1s selected The PLC Ss designated in the 1 3 Tag List s note section 4 can only set the LS Device 2 This feature cannot be used with some PLCs For a complete list of these PLC s refer to 1 3 Tag List s note section 4 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 275 2 30 Trend Graph Display Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 276 EN e When the Block Display setting is used with a Trend graph the PLC Word Note Address and LS Area can be designated as a specific Word Address When the LS Area is designated be sure to also designate the GP System Setting Mode Setting Read Area Size The GP 270 only supports the LS Area e Trend graph display examples for each mode 100 Displays negative data 100 100 40 g Does not display negative data 0 Data Format Bin BCD Define the format of the numeric valu
49. Address of L tags or the Word Address of Window control you can use only an LS area address a Important W Sub Display Base Screen Base Screen General Info Display Mode Display Format Mode Settings Sub Display Display Angle Noe Base Scrcerh Active Window Change Screen Mode Settings Changes the display screen to another 2 Change Screen Screen Type Base Screen ae screen Same as the normal screen change E Text Display operation wa fo Changes the display screen to the Sub Dis IF P ie play screen No set in the Alarm Creation E Cursor Dibplby and Editing area Library Display Displays a library screen Base screen as a Sub Screen at the location set by the L tag Text Display A Sub Screen of text data Text screen will display at the location set by the X tag Offset Defines an offset value to be added to a Mark s Word Address data When Offset is not used enter a value of zero For further information 2 14 7 Off set Settings L tag Direct Selection Select this option when you will touch and select a message on the display and use the Sub Display feature Cursor Display Select this option when displaying a cur sor in the selected message using Direct Selection After the display cursor appears in the selected message you can check the message s contents o N cancel Hem 2 178 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Ac
50. Alarm Color Ifthe data exceeds the Alarm Range the Alarm display appears in the designated colors lt Alarm Range List gt Data Format Alarm Range P Coder 16Bit 32768 32767 Hex oA O EEE Bo 7 9009 EN _ There are two types of settings in the Date Time settings i e date settings and time gS settings Time is expressed only by the 24 hour system e For date mm dd yy mm dd yy mm dd dd mm yy e For time hh mm hh mm ss Size Style Column Settings Color Settings Genes bstaFomal Seo Sbi Alam Setimes Select the desired colors for Fg fore to aia tts E E sround Bg background and Blk blink 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Decimal Places 0 i Color Settings Display Color s OOS OMe from Display Style Preview E Shift Right J Zero Suppress C Shift Lett 0000s Input S tyle lt i Auto Clear OFF E Auto Clear ON Oe Cancel Help General Info Column Type Char Col Char Col General Info Data Format Size Style Alarm Settings Displays text Column MHo 2 Column Type Value E Date Time 2 Char Col Data Type eee Display Format wee laput nee Alarm Settings Display Style Mo of Display Digits 9 Decimal Place This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 63 4 3 Logging Function
51. Alarm Editor The alarm recovers when the word address data does not equal the alarm value WE The total number of registered messages in ACTIVE HISTORY LOG blocks 1 to 3 in the GP System Settings is limited to 768 The number of alarms stored in the backup SRAM depends on the settings When the number of alarms exceeds the settings overflowing alarms are deleted beginning with the oldest E The maximum number of messages that can be registered with the alarm editor depends on the GP model GP series Maximum number of registrable messages GP270 GPH70 GP370 512 GP70 series other than above models GP77R series GP377 768 series GP37W2 GP2000 series 2048 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag E The group number can be set up with the alarm editor The maximum group number is the maximum number of registered messages For the GP2000 series 2012 is the maximum group number The maximum value is 2012 this is the maximum value of the continuous LS area available to the user Therefore when the maximum number of messages has been set a group number cannot be set for each message Be sure to secure an LS area that complies with the group number E The maximum number of characters and rows per screen depends on the GP type and Display Size character size MOARTA 2 1 2 About A tags Max No of Characters and Lines A tag WE Both Display Size and
52. CR LF code were in cluded in the data Token s code reader would determine that reading of the data has finished because unlike Denso QR Reader mode the number of digits and BCC are not checked GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 109 4 5 Serial code Reader Compatibility 4 110 Chapter 4 Advanced Features Communication Settings The Serial code reader loads the data via a serial transfer function There fore the communication baud rate of the reader and the GP should be coordinated These settings can be changed in the GP system settings in the drawing software or off line Code Reader Data Read Timing Se te D The read timing and operation of read complete bit of the serial code are as follows When the Read Complete bit is set to ON Host side processing is required If this bit is set to OFF Host side processing is not required l l l l l l l l reader l Wittenin DY i l l l l the LS area w tL l l l l l l l complete l l l l l l l l bit Bit ON at GP Bit OFF at Host e Some models of Serial code readers can directly read one dimensional bar codes The read one dimensional bar code is also stored in the LS area GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 5 Serial code Reader Compatibility amy System Settings The GP supports Serial code readers saving this special data in the LS storage area Only the GP 20
53. Chapter 2 Active Image Functions r amp n gt Trend Graph Data s CSV File Storage Example When opening the Trend Graph data s CSV file stored in a CF card on the Excel For CSV file storage Operation Manual 9 1 Overview This function is supported only by the GP77R and GP2000 series e CSV File Screen No T1 T1 T8999 Channel Name 012345 Oabcd 01a2b3 Display Data Amount 8 8 5 Current No of Samples 15 15 8 Data 50 0 80 0 90 5 gt 90 0 70 0 80 0 gt 40 0 20 0 40 0 a 50 0 10 07 50 8 2 50 0 90 0 90 5 ma 100 700 gt 80 0 60 07 gt 70 0 50 07 Screen No 01 CurrentNo ofSamples 8 8 5 Data O80 905 4 Old data O w 5o f 2905 Data 70 80 o woy 80 o wW y New data e Display Data Amount represents the designated number of data samples Nl samples e Only data is output as CSV files and the Current No of Samples represents the number of backed up data e When performing the absolute value settings values after the decimal point are also displayed Excel When the values after the decimal point is 0 0 is not displayed on the GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Spe
54. Chapter 4 Advanced Features 3 Row Settings Display W Attribute Settings Select either Item Name or Data row and click on the Settings button to edit each row s attributes Display Settings pen erae Selecting Item Name Row General Info Item Settings The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for Item Name Settings Color e Color Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore Fo i OOOO A ground Bg background and Blk blink B MEE oer MOAIE 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag oe tance nee ote The row color settings have priority over the column color settings J Selecting Data Row General Info Row Settings General Info The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for Data set tings Row Number 2 Row Type t Data Char Col in Row Type Select the desired type of display from the Ca oe Data and Char Col settings This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 64 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function 4 Totals Display W Attribute Settings To set up the calculation attributes select the Totals cell and click on the Set tings button Display Settings Settings X General Info The General Info page provides informa tion about the c
55. D100 3 28 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script Smee Application Example 1 In this example we create a program for a temperature management system which checks an error bit in the host PLC to detect the temperature 70 or above and 30 or below If an error is found the GP displays alarm mes sages accordingly This system also counts the detected errors Error bit M0001 Temperature information D200 Error counter 70C or above LS300 Error counter 30C or below LS301 Alarm message screen number storage address LS302 1 From the Special menu select the D Script option Special D 5 cript Global D Sccript Data Sampling 2 When the D Script List appears click on the Add button O Siccript Delete Edt Copy Faste Close LETEN I OL cL Help GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 29 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features 3 The D Script Editor opens D Scnpt Function Untitled Function Name Show Toolbor Tril Formula Functions Enter an expression Press HELP for examples ro caer ue 4 Enter an ID number in the Identifier field In this example enter 00000 in the Identifier field and enter Alarm Display in the Description field o mm Description Alarm Display 5 Select a trigger
56. Decimal 1 2 s Complement E Round Up H Hex MSB i Octal Select Indirect Address Area is Ares Alter Disp Adthiess Ares Atter Base Addiess Input Range Display Range Min value 0 Min value 0 Max Value 65535 H Max value 65535 Input Display Designation f Direct 2 Indirect ee cc E Tag Setting 2 6 E tag Relative When the Relative option is selected the E tag displays a numeric value converted from the data in the designated Word Ad dresses based on the Input Range If the Indirect option is selected the data in the indirectly designated address will be con verted Word Address The E tag displays the data in the address designated here Bit Length 1 16 Setup the valid bit length of the data stored in the Word Address Indirect Word addresses which contain the data to appear in the E tag are indirectly desig nated 2 6 4 Indirect Word Addressing Examples Addresses The indirectly designated address is within the same device as the Word Address des ignated above Device Type amp Address Both a device type and an address are indirectly designated using device and address codes Write the device code in the designated word address and the ad dress code in the next word address PLC Connection Manual Base Address Defines the base address The E tag displays data in the designated address
57. Display Format General Info Data Format Size Style Tag Mame F om Wand Address poggi Data Format Abs Decimall 6 Alarm Settings Off Display Angle 0 degree E Data Format P Tag Setting Alarm Settings Display Angle Display Format General Info Data Format Size Style Word Address I Code Data Display Format 32 Bit Decima i Decimal i Hex i Hex CHBCD og BCD i Octal ok cance Hep ie YY host PLC in use 2 19 P tag are Using P tags The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for the P tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag Word Address Defines the address whose data appears in the P tag display Code Code only available for Decimal data is used when handling negative values Data Display Format Defines the format of the data stored in the host PLC Data is displayed in abso lute values and 16 or 32 bit data can be used for this purpose Select the base num ber Decimal Hex hexadecimal BCD or Octal Only 16 bit data is available for the Octal format When using 32 bit data the high and low order of word data depends on the PLC Connection Manual GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver
58. E Active Window Display Screen TT L Active Window placement area Tag Settings e L tag Screen Designation Indirect Trigger Type Indirect Word Address LS0020 Data Format Bin e T tag Word Address LS0021 Constant 0 others are omitted GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 185 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W Alarm Creation and Editing area Settings Example A tank Low Water Level message Sub Display screen No 302 Sub Display Alarm No of M D02000 o fy oof 200 18 JAtank Pressure Trouble 2 D02001 o Of 3oy 200 16 B tank Pressure Trouble 3jDo2002 J of o aof 20f 16fAtank Low Water Level 4 D02003 J of o osf dof 16fB tank Low Water Level 5 D02004 J of saf af 16jlevel 1 Pointclosed Do2005 of o tT 16jlevel 2 Pointclosed E Library Screen B302 Closed AN e Cursor movement is not connected with the Sub Display feature Even If you Note move the cursor to another message the previous Sub Screen continues to xX display e The Sub Display screen is not cleared automatically Also when the current message displayed on the screen is cleared the Sub Display screen is not cleared However when the current screen is changed to another screen 0 will be written to the L tag X tag and U tag s designated Word Addresses used to display Sub Displays When the Sub Screen feature is set to Change Scr
59. E EO ek C P Normal spay No B RENE zE L M m N E White Normal display No Blinking lary Blink Reverse WARE reverse and flashing display Text Color Fg Reeve io Bl Black Normal display No Blinking Bo k A Blk m White Blinking GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 19 2 20 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 2 a tag yam a tag Alarm Summary Display Displays the Alarm Editor registered message on the Base screen or on the window in a summary display This function is most suited for the Alarm Summary display Valve 1 Trouble Valve 2 Trouble Valve 3 Trouble vale 1 Valve 2 alve 3 rww About a tags WE When registering an alarm message with the Alarm Editor set the alarm type to Summary to display the message as part of the Alarm Summary display Operation Manual 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing E The Alarm Summary display lists only Alarm messages whose alarm type 1s Summary and the corresponding monitor bits turn ON These messages disappear when the monitor bits turn OFF E A maximum of 1600 Alarm messages can be displayed in the list However on one screen a maximum of 40 rows of messages can be displayed If messages exceed the maximum amount create other Base screens with the a tag and change screen setting to display all possible Alarm messages Set up the a tag start
60. EEEE E AEN TEE E E 2 63 LoS Un G E a ee Pe EE A E EE EE 2 64 2 9 g tag Extended G tag Function sssecccoosssssseccecoccssssssececoosssssececeossssssssseeessso 2 69 DN OVER VIC Wi a EE E P EA E E A A EE 2 69 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS 202 24 0 9 0192 E E EET A eee ee 2 69 PS J Mam 5 104 288 2 12 PP ere E ae a eee eee 2 71 2 10 H tag Moving Mark Display 1 ccccscccccssssssssssscccccccscssssssssscccsssseeeees 2 79 DANN MOC acres E asta to E EE E E E E 2 79 202 0 6 010 TAT p rE E E E E E E E E AE ENA 2 79 AE T TTR T a E E EE A E E A 2 80 2104 Object Drawno Data Ieeiea Einonen EAEEREN EAE RENERE 2 82 211 Jtao Moyine Mark Display ave venereet cessor ce tes steves sce ce cee cees eres n tenons 2 87 DAMA VCH N sscee ones vaca sea raatianan A E E E densest 2 87 MM PO TS secret sree EE E A A E EEA AE OEN E EAE 2 87 AES U SA aE EN EEEE TEENE TEE EA AE EATE 2 89 26 KAng Key DPL se tase cca ass sae rran de N EEEE 2 93 DN OEI N eie ee E ENE ENN EE E E NT EE AENEAN E 2 93 2 ADO 21 2S r E E E E N TA A AEO 2 93 2A Rm OS 121228 a a E EE NE EA E EEEE ee 2 96 2124 Wetec a cess pece teeta consegeasetavececutenps ceveeeesae aap aaa 2 108 2123 Notts on Fre BCD Dala sees cc secctsnetd ce eoecatueceenet AEE e aE 2 109 2120 Aot icari rampie sonarra EEEa 2 111 2 127 Using Arithmetic OperalOms c ccssasassedsscsssessassaraqnaesactecassatadsarsdaasaaieasddsarsanteconenaiaas 2 112 213
61. Features 4 102 a Important If a value other than the Auto Save Quit command is entered in auto save mode logging data acquired up fo that point will be written to the CF Card like the Auto Save Quit command How ever the value command entered in this mode will not be pro cessed In auto save mode if the file number is changed during data logging auto save will end at that point and all accumulated logging data will be written to the CF Card During loop operation the current CF Card storage command 0002h is effective however logging data will be output for only 1 loop cycle When writing logging data to the CF Card automatically using the loop feature if the logging frequency is not high and the logging cycle is short data write to the CF Card will be per formed frequently This however can shorten the CF Card s data write life Also if the logging cycle is short it is possible that data logging can be performed while data is still being written to the CF Card In this case until logging data write is com pleted for that cycle data logging will be suspended When writing backup SRAM data to the CF Card if the access to backup SRAM is performed from Pro Server 2 Way Driver data write to the CF Card will be suspended during the access When writing data to the CF Card automatically using the loop feature data write to the CF Card will also be suspended In this case until data write to the CF Card
62. Format Alarm Settings General Info Designated Screen t Direct Word Address Rail No Mark Storage Address Offset Value Doo000 mE e E GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Indirect With this option selected the Mark Screen No becomes variable The Mark Screen No should be stored in the designated Mark Storage Address Word Address Designate the Word Address where the Mark movement position number is stored Mark Storage Address Designate the Word Address where the Mark Screen No is stored Rail No The Mark display positions are designated on the rail designated here Must match the rail number set for an R tag 2 89 2 11 J tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Offset Value Defines an offset value to be added to the Mark Word Address data When not using the Offset enter a value of zero 2 14 7 Offset Settings L tag EN When the Mark Access is set to Indirect the Mark of the screen file number Note corresponding to the data in the Mark Word Address is displayed Using this method different Marks can be displayed on a single rail how ever different Marks cannot appear in the same position at the same time E Size Color Mark Size Select one from the two options Normal 40 x 24 dots and Extended 48 x 48 dots according to the size of the Mark to be dis played Normal 40 x 24 Select this option when using a Mark cre ated within the thick lined
63. Format Monitor Address A Tag Setting Monitor Word Address Defines the starting word address for the monitor bits No of Monitor Words Defines the number of word addresses used for the monitor bits Set it according to the number of rows registered in the Text screen A Maximum of 32 words can be entered fi Blank Line Display Border Type cael Defines the tvpe of border from No pets Border __ border and FE table No of Display Char u Display Format Direct Defines the text screen number directly in the Text Screen No area Text Screen No Defines the screen file number for the Text screen to be displayed Display Start Line Defines which row of Text screen to be gin the display with when the monitor bit has been activated No of Display Lines Defines the maximum number of rows for the message display on a single screen Maximum 40 rows can be set No of Display Char Designates the maximum character display length available for each row of messages A Maximum of 80 characters can be set Blank Line Display When a monitor bit s corresponding mes sage row is left empty the A tag allows you to delete hide that row As a result you can then display only those rows which contain messages in the Alarm Summary Display Regardless whether the Blank Line Display feature is ON or OFF a total of 512 General Info Display Format Size Color Il Sub Display Ii Display Angle Monto Adde
64. G tag E Data Format Relative Relative G Tag Setting Bata Farnat Gragh Type Namn Gotor Setmge If you select this option data is converted Absolute GBERE using the designated Input Range Word Address Word Address E poon m Defines the word address containing the PDEA piLenath 6 f display data 16 bit data Input Range aaa Iii Codd Format l Display Mode Min Value 0 i No Code Ete EJ 2 s Complement Use this setup to display negative data mox vous p I eoms Bit Length Enter a value between one and 16 Defines the valid bit length of the data stored in oR ff concet tee the Word Address Input Range Min Value Max Value Set up the range of the data stored in the Word Address The setup range limits vary with the Code Input Input Code Format No Code Displays positive values only 2 s Complement Uses 2 s complement to express negative values MSB Uses MSB code system to express nega tive values lt Min Max Input Range Values gt Input Code Format Input Range 2 s Complement 32768 32767 MSB 32767 32767 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 65 2 8 G tag 2 66 Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W Graph Type Bar Graph General Info Data Format Graph Type Alarm Color Settings Ee Half Pie Graph G Tag Setting Display Direction Graph Pattern fi Up e Normal Lett
65. GP 675 can display up to 50 rows GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 1 2 1 A tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions For example if the previous screen displays lines 1 20 the next screen should start displaying from line 21 E The maximum character length for a row is 80 however this will vary depending on the character size designated or your GP series type lt Maximum Numbers of Characters and Rows gt Landscape Mode Portrait Mode GP Model Maximum Maximum Characters Characters GP 270 GP 370 GP 377R 15 40 20 30 GP 377 GP3 7W2 eao e T GP 470 GP 577R GP 570VM GP 2400 GP 2500 W Text size color and borders are some of the available display options E By using the sub screen function a library item such as a sub display box window corresponding to a particular message can also be displayed The sub screen can also be used in combination with a window display The sub screen display activates as a result of using other types of tags such as L tag created in a Base screen or a window screen There are three ways of showing the sub screen Change Display Switches the display to another screen Library Display Base screen Can show pictures and data in a window Text Display Text screen Works best for long text such as that used for information e For actual display use L tags U tags or X tags depending on the type data to be displayed EN 2 15 L tag Libr
66. GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual directly This setting 1s valid only for the GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series Window Registration No Word Address Enter a Word Address where the registra tion start number of windows to be dis played is stored Designate the registra tion start number as a binary number Window Settings Global Displays a window globally Window Settings Local Displays a window locally Word Address2 Utag Word Address Must agree with the address set for con trolling the window via the U tag settings 2 1 A tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions x Library Display General ino Display Formet Size Coter Sub Dcpley DiepieyAnalel __ Sereen Type or Direct Change Screen OP Indirect Directly designates the starting number of raid pareve RE the Base screens for sub screen display via ae 1 the Screen No area Screen No Bom F SE a Enter the start number of the Base screens sndow agieresoniNe for the sub screen display aa Le Word Address1 Ltag Word Address E aes Enter a Word Address where data for the So sub screen display is stored The address EE A set for storing the Base screen number during L tag settings must be used Window Registration No Enter the registration number of the window to be displayed z Screen Type General info Display Format Size Color Sub Displey DisplayAnge _ Ind
67. I F This function is invalid on the GP 270 370 H70 377 377R GP 2000 2 236 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 26 U tag yay U tag Window Display Overview 2 26 1 This tag places a screen registered as a window over the currently displayed Base screen The standard Base screen remains displayed and other screens windows created using the U tag such as a numeric keypad can be placed over the Base screen only when it is necessary Window Control 2 a a a l Designated Word Address 2 26 2 About U tags E Direct or indirect methods may be used to designate which window to display or the position to display a window Dirgot 4s The window and its display position are fixed Only one word address is necessary for the operation Jndir ect ee The windows displayed and their display positions can change dynamically Four consecutive word addresses are necessary for the operation Operation Manual 2 6 Registering Windows WE There are two types of window display methods Global Window Display and Local Window Display Global Window Display Displays a window common to all screens Local Window Display veveeeeeeese Displays a window setup exclusively for the particular Base screen Up to three windows one Global Window and 2 Local Windows can be displayed simultaneously on each screen GP PRO PB III for Wi
68. Indirect the mark screen file number 1s vari able provided in the given word address WE The Mark s display attributes such as color foreground background colors and blink ON OFF and display size can be set up WE An offset value for the screen file number can be set up GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 141 2 16 M tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Pte The plotting point of a mark image is based on the origin point 0 0 of Mark screens D Operation Manual 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen E g Mark image registered in a Mark screen Mark screen origin point 0 0 When loaded onto the Base screen Specified display point decide where this point is on the Base screen 2 142 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 16 M tag W General Info M Tag Setting The General Info page provides informa General Info Designated Sereen Size Color __ tion about the current settings for the M Tag Name ha on tag Bereta D S Tag Name Trigger Bit Address O0000 g Display Mode 01 Must be no more than five Single byte or Display Color 0 LJ Display Color 11 LJ Character Size 121 two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag Designated E Designated Sc
69. Jij Send To LS From SRAM J Send To SRAM From PLE jj Send To SRAM From LS 4 Roll Up 1 4 Send To LS From PLC Ir M4 Rol Down f1 4 Send To PLC From LS a Sending To PLC From LS Selected This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 33 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features e Place Click on the Place button to display the Filing Data Display If you wish to change the Part s position or attribute you need to first ungroup the grouped objects parts and then place them in the desired positions 123456780901 2345 EN If you wish to change a Part s position or attribute you need to first ungroup Note YY the grouped objects parts 1 Writing filing data to SRAM All filing data is written to SRAM when the Trigger Bit 1s turned ON Trigger Bit Address 1 D0020000 _ OFF Write Completed Bit Address M0001 a OFF Data processing 1 Write Filing data to SRAM This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 34 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function 2 Selecting a file name Select the desired setting by touching Block 2 s GP screen data 3 Backup SRAM to LS Area Touching the SRAM gt LS key will transmit data from SRAM to the LS Ar
70. L Reset GP On Data Write Error id Taiwanese Char String Data Mode 3 t Chinese 2 i K tag Priority Font Quality a Standard i Standard t Re Try a High wateh Dag Backup Settings Word Address boaa E System Area Aea Time O Sec Global Window I CF Card Data Storage Settings YW Tag Settings Zl Data Storage G Tag Settings Control Word Address Daoood EE HEU Settings Specify the control address used to save the CF Card s CSV file data valable CF Card Space 7 Set Storage Address Lsoo20_ Cancel Defaults Help E Transferring Data to the CF Card The control address is divided into the Mode section to which a command and a status code can be entered and the File Number section where the name of the data file is specified GP PLC Save File Number CF Card GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 99 4 4 Using the CF Card Chapter 4 Advanced Features Mode When a command is written to the Mode section s address the correspond ing operation will be performed and its result status will be stored Mode WordData Description _ 0001h FilingData o 0002h Loggingdata S 0003h Trend graph data o 0005h Alarm active block 1 data 0020h Logging loop auto save start 0021h Logging loop auto save finish _ Command No data to be loaded when no data is specified 0400h File No Erro
71. Ng prior to the current screen ZEN Previous screen means the screen which is displayed prior to the current Note 2 256 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 28 W tag yaw seme V tag Examples W Screen Change Trigger Bit Explanation 51 E screen change In the Base screen B2 a W tag Trigger Mode 0 1 is set up The following timing charts describe the connection between a screen change a trigger bit and a W tag lt Example 1 gt Display screen number A A Bit address Address where W tag operates Write data operation lt Example 2 gt Se te Display screen number x 2 sae 1 Trigger bit 9 j f Address where W tag operates Write data operation When the screen changes the trigger bit value is 1 so the W tag is activated and the data write operation is performed When the screen changes the trigger bit value is 0 thus the W tag 1s not activated and data write is not performed After the screen changes when the trigger bit value changes 0 1 the W tag is activated and the data write operation is performed e Example 1 applies only with Direct Access format When using the Memory Link format only Example 2 applies Nl With the Operation Mode 1 lt gt 0 the same operation is performed Trigger bit W tag operation Operation Mode 0 amp 1 Write data Write data irite data W
72. SRC w LS0109 0x31 w LS0110 0x43 Variable type CO w LS0111 0x31 w LS0112 0x30 w LS0113 0x30 w LS0114 0x30 w LS0115 0x33 w LS0116 0x30 Bit position w LS0117 0x30 w LS0118 0x30 Number of elements w LS0119 0x30 w LS0120 0x30 w LS0121 0x31 w LS0122 0x03 w LS0123 0x40 Output to extended SIO IO_WRITE p EXT_ SIO w LS0100 24 t0000 1 Set sent flag endif 3 52 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script E Example of Service Response Command Receive Function RCV FUNC RI Execution Formula if s EXT_SIO_STAT02 1 if s EXT_SIO_STAT03 1 c EXT SIO CNTRLO2 c EXT SIO CNTRLOI 1 j else if r EXT SIO RCV gt 25 IO READ p EXT_ SIO w LS0200 25 t 0001 1 Call ASC2BIN w LS2001 t 0024 if t 0003 0 c EXT SIO CTRLO1 1 t 0001 1 endif endif endif j else if t 0003 0 c EXT SIO CTRLO1 1 t 0001 1 endif endif Received data is present Rreceiving error occurred Clear error Clear receive buffer Has necessary number of bytes of data been received Obtain received data Set received flag Has the receive time run out Clear receive buffer Set received flag Is the time for receiving run out Clear receiving buffer Set receiv
73. Screen Change Screen Number is the current display on the GP System Data Area 0 on the host PLC contains the number 1 which represents the screen number currently displayed System Data Area H 1 Touch panel input causes the display to change to screen number 2 The screen displays screen number 2 At the same time 2 is written to System Data Area 0 on the host PLC EN When a screen change is caused by touch panel input the contents of PLC Note S YV ystem Data Area 8 do not change 2 224 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 23 T tag E When the Touch Panel Key Has Higher Priority 1 Screen Number 1s the current display on System Data Area HO 1 the GP System Data Area 0 on the host PLC contains the number 1 which represents the screen number currently displayed WE 2 To change the display to screen number 2 the host PLC writes the number 2 to System Data Area 8 3 The screen changes to display screen number 2 4 After this the touch panel input causes the screen to change to screen number 3 The display changes to screen number 3 5 System Data Area 0 on the host PLC now contains the number 3 When screen changes are made by touch panel the contents of PLC System Data Area 8 do not change PLC System Data Area 8 still contains the number 2 6 The host PLC generates another request to a
74. Sound output is canceled Ge te While sound data is being output the Trigger Bit ON OFF status is ignored When NS multiple types of sound data are played the Trigger Bit ON OFF status is also ignored W Play mode Play Bit OFF Sound Stop Disabled GP is turned OFF PLC is turned OFF ON Monitor Bit Address fo a S OFF Sound Thank you Thank yOu l I I Sound output is not canceled W Play mode Play Bit OFF Sound Stop Enabled GP is turned OFF PLC is turned OFF ON Monitor Bit Address _ BA e Sound Thank you Thank y Sound output is canceled AN All charts shown here are intended to provide only a basic image of the GP s Note sound data output timing They do not show the exact time intervals of sound D data output e When Sound Stop setup is Enabled it may take slightly longer than expected to stop sound output from the time the Bit is turned OFF e When sound data is output set the Trigger Bit s ON or OFF time period to either the communication cycle time or to 150 ms whichever is longer This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 10 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function wa Filing Data Recipe Function me Overview The recipe function is used to transmit preset data conditions settings etc to the PLC These recipes can be used as settings for machine operat
75. The PLC Trigger Bit Address is turned ON 3 The logging data is read out one time 4 The GP_ACK Bit Address is turned ON 5 PLC detects the GP_ACK Bit Address is turned ON and the PLC Trigger Bit Address is turned OFF 6 GP detects the PLC Trigger Bit Address is turned OFF and the GP_ ACK Bit Address is turned OFF 7 The PLC confirms that the GP_ ACK Bit Address is turned OFF Sr Prior to performing steps 1 and 2 with the PLC be sure to confirm that the Note GP_ACK Bit Address has been turned OFF Also assuming that the main V power may be turned OFF for some reason be sure to take appropriate coun termeasures such as turning the PLC Trigger Bit and GP_ACK Bit OFF when starting operation E When designating time Data Logging Auth Bit Address PLC to GP Designated time Q Inside of GP Data read Logging data read out PLC to GP Cr e All the charts shown above are the basic image of GP s logging data read Note timing They do not show the exact time intervals of logging data read N When designating a Bit logging data is read out if the PLC Trigger Bit has been turned ON when the main power is turned ON When designating time without using loop operation a Block s Finish Bit Address is turned ON when a block s data logging is completed in order to start data read at the data read start time Logging data in the PLC Word Address is cleared by the PLC If a communication error occurs during loggin
76. Time 89 Char Col 2 Border General Info Column Mo Data Type ee Display Format Input Size Style No of Char Col General Info Sizer Style Display Format Ho of Char Col Preview 3 thie Fight M4 Zora Suppress Designates the cell size Enter a value from 1 to 32 digits Display Style General Info Column Type Border Border Prints out the borders Column Settings Data Format SizeStyle 1 Column Type 3 Value A Date Time i Char Col t Border General Info Column Mo Data Type eee Display Format wee Input This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 73 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features 2 Row Settings Print E Attribute Settings To set up row attributes select Border String Char Col or Data Value and click on the Settings button Print Settings rN Ee e l tro dt es oaa p e peeh e Border General Info Row Settings The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for Row Settings General Info Row Humber 1 Row Type 3 Data Char Col Borden Row Type Select the desired print item from Data x Mi covet Char Col and Border Za e With the real time printing if the
77. Window Access Mode When using the Global Window set up how to activate the window here Direct Window Registration No and Window Lo cation settings are fixed values Enter the registration no on the Registration No field Indirect By using the area reserved for entering the Window Registration number in the System Area multiple windows can be used as the Global Window As well the Global Window Location can also be adjusted using the same method Also be sure to set the Data Format used for these address s values g D i To use the Device Monitor Indirect and Binary must be selected for the Y Window Access Window Location Valid only when the Global Window Access is set to Direct set up the window display coordinates here These coordinates assume the top left corner is the origin point when the normal type is selected for the GP Dis play Type When the portrait type is selected these coordinates assume the lower left corner 1s the origin point 2 244 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 27 V tag ywAm gt tag Video Window Display 2 27 1 Overview This tag is supported only by the GP 570VM 870VM 2500 2600 Multi unit models This tag using a video signal is used to display a video win dow Depending on the control attributes and video ID setup it is possible to display up to three video signals While viewing the di
78. Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 201 2 202 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 22 S tag yyy S tag String Display EBD Overview S Displays character string data stored in the host s PLC word address Address re a a rwy About S tags WE The character string data is stored in the host PLC as ASCII codes or character codes WE There are three types of Trigger Types 0 1 0 lt 1 and Indirect Define the trigger bit when using the 0 1 and O lt gt 1 options O01 When the trigger bit changes from OFF to ON the character string data stored in the word address is displayed 01 When the monitor bit changes OFF gt ON or ON OFF the character string data stored in the word address is displayed Indirect The character string display changes when data in the word address changes WE The character string can display a maximum of 100 Single byte characters M Display Size character size and color attributes can be designated GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 203 2 22 S tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions e Please set the trigger bit ON after all the data has been changed a Important in the word addresses otherwise the character string may not display properly e If the trigger bit changes immediately after character string data SP te D 2 204 changes in the host
79. With this setting when a number of Alarm messages are issued they can be viewed for each Q tag without scrolling the screens GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 175 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions No of Display Lines Designates the number of rows for the Alarm Summary display on one screen EN The numbers of characters and lines that can be displayed per screen will vary Note oat NSS depending on the GP panel size installation orientation and character size 2 1 2 About A tags Max No of Characters and Lines A tag Line Spacing Set up the spacing 0 7 between each alarm message in dot units A Up to 7 dots E Display Format Common Select this option to display a message in a display format common for the all tags in the single project In this case the Q tag display format is specified in GP Sys tem Settings 2 20 9 GP System Area QO tag settings Individually Select this option to designate a display format for each Q tag However GP 270 does not have this setting Q Tag Display Format Tag Setting Size Color Sub Display Disolay Angle General Info Display Mode Display Format t Commort 13 Individually a OT ag Display Format Date IS Ack ERE Trigger S Recovered E Messages ES Date Time fe mm dd yy i 12 00 E mmdd fey 24 00 J wy mmedd fy 12 00 00 i dd mmyy i 24 00 00 Date Ce Trigger
80. Zi BIN Sound data ZO BIN mrm GP backup data MRM files ZC00001 MRM fixed Trend graph data ZT CSV men Sampled data Zo CSV Alarm data Active or block 1 data ZA CSV History or block 2 data ZH CSV Log or block 3 data ZG CSV e When the Filing data Multiple Folders setting is not used the number of folders is fixed to 0 4 2 Filing Data e The file numbers can be set from 1 to 8999 when using Filing data from 0 to 65535 when using data other than Filing data Select or deselect Use Multiple Folders in the Filing data setting area e CF Card data file names must be 8 single byte characters or less These file names however are not compatible with the FAT32 file naming system e When storing new data in a CF Card that will require the overwriting of old data the CF Card s available capacity amount of free space must be larger than the size of the data to be stored since the new data is written before the old data is deleted When Accessing the CF Card The data on the CF Card may be corrupted if any of the following actions occur during access between the GP unit and the CF Card Turning OFF the GP unit Resetting the GP unit Inserting or removing the CF Card alarm 4 94 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 4 Using the CF Card To prevent data problems it is recommended that you prepare in advance a special screen in your
81. a row or column to create the original data for copying 3 Select that row or column 4 Click on the Copy button 5 Select the destination row or column to paste the copied data to When copying multiple times select multiple rows or columns 6 Click on the Paste button to paste the same attribute to all the selected rows columns This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 57 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features 1 Item Name Settings Display E Enter Item Names Enter the Item Names for each cell aa tee Pees ou W Attribute Settings To change the Item Name attributes select the Item Name title area and click on the Settings button Display Settings General Info This tab page provides information about General Info caer 1 the current settings for the Item Name Column Ho Column Type Color Block Name Color Genera Caer Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk blink display Color Settings Block Name Fo MV iT No Bk IF Ba OOS OO soon ok di cance Hee This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 58 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function 2 Column Settings Display W Attribute Settings To
82. again The printing format consists of the three areas i e header main data and footer Up to 160 characters can be printed per line Header Data Footer This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 75 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features Ge e The following is an example of logging data printout The loop feature is not used Na Appr Check Create 00 3236 26 DL 324A 0 D0 327 30 D0 S210 6 0 8 3219 Za DL S22 00 S230 AVERAGE 3227 324A oye Oy This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 76 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function When using the loop feature regardless of the logging frequency the data display row will be designated as a single row Also Char Col Border and Total sections cannot be set Note V Print Settings 10 00 XXXX XXX XXX XX 11 00 XXXX XXX XXX XX 1200 XXXX XXX j XXX XX Prints the data 13 00 XXXX xxx xxx XX 14 00 XXXX XXX XXX XX SR PAYTONT ONY 15 00 XXXX XXX j XXX p XX __ When data logging 46 00 xxxx xxx xxx xx is performed The RR IRS l S TRS 1 A3 1 Taen footer ana 41 00 SXXX XXX XXX xX other items will not 42 0
83. an item using the File Name Display from a screen and fine tune minutely adjust the data via the LS area and then transfer the data manual transfer 2 E Screen Example L5 gt PLO It is possible to use the Eeypad and these settings to modify the LS AREA s current filing data and then Bend these new filing settings to the FLC CAUTION Sending data from the LS AREA to SRAM will overwrite the SRAM DATA This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 3 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features E Filing Setting Example Write Setting From Filing Data To SRAM TZ Fling ON OFF Control Word Address D00200 Tl Use Muliple Folders Write Sethings From Filing Data To SRAM Control Word Address Dom F Write Completed Bit Address Moogi F Write Completed Bit Address M00001 PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Setting PLC Controlled Transfer Not selected Control Word Address poo FIE When this check box is not checked Transmit Completed Bit Address zan TF manual data transmission is performed In that case the placement of a Filing Data ok coe S Hem Display on a Base screen is required PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings i PLC Controlled Transfer W File display Settings General Settings File Display FD_001 Use LS Area S
84. and or horizon e ae tal direction The minimum size for the Display Color 1 a aaa TR BKE Mark is 8 x 8 pixels the maximum size g _ If Blk for a Mark is 48 x 48 pixels a dots er dots 48 dots adats Dispiay Color w Defines the display attributes including foreground color Fg background color Bg and blink ON OFF setting Blk when the monitor bit value is 0 OFF or when using Indirect Data Display Color 1 Defines the display attributes including foreground color Fg background color Bg and blink ON OFF setting Blk when the monitor bit value is 1 ON 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag 2 144 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 16 M tag 2 16 4 Mark Display Using Indirect Mode 1 When Indirect Data s selected for the Display Mode The display of Marks in the same position changes according to changes in the host PLC word address screen file number Conditions WOO Miroi When the word address contains the value 700 Mark screen file number 700 displays i i i Similarly when the word address contains the value 701 Mark screen file number 701 displays ath Timing Chart Data in the word address__ 700 XO X m0 Mark screen 700 701 700 file number e e a U Display When displaying different size of Mark images with the Mark Access set to Indirect and if th
85. approximately 150 ms intervals There _ fore a slight time delay may occur until the GP detects the Trig Important ger or the Data Clear Bit Set these Bit change intervals to the length of communication cycle or to 150ms whichever is longer the PLC device uses 32 Bit length addresses only the lower 16 Bits of data Ka Each piece of data to be logged inside the record is only 16 Bits long When ote N are logged e The GP s internal clock controls time using the last two digits of the year display Therefore the logging data s year is controlled by these digits When the Start and End times are the same or when the time interval is 0 data logging is performed once for each block Data stored in the backup SRAM is cleared via the Data Clear Bit Address when the Clear Bit changes from OFF to ON When the GP s power is turned ON if the Data Clear Bit Address s Bit has been turned ON the GP deletes the backup SRAM logging data and turns OFF the Clear Bit e With loop operation and time setup designated when Data Logging Auth Bit Address is turned OFF or when the GP s power is turned OFF after the logging period elapses loop operation becomes the same status as non loop operation e g Start time 09 00 End time 18 00 Time period 3 hrs If the 15 00 logging was skipped due to the GP s power being turned OFF lt Without Loop Operation gt lt With Loop Operation gt Block 1 Logging Logging Loggin
86. area Transfer Bytes 10 e 10 bytes of data are sent starting from the the start address GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script e The maximum number of transfer bytes that can be sent is 2012 SS For a send buffer write a command in each word address in units of one byte to the LS device LS0100 LS0101 LS0102 LS0103 LS0104 LS0105 LS0106 LS0107 LS0108 LS0109 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 35 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features W Control Add the Control variable EXT SIO CNTRL to clear the send buffer receive buffer and error status This control variable 1s only write enabled e Format Bit Write c EXT SIO CTRL 00 to 15 Word Write c EXT SIO CTRL e Example Bit Write c EXT SIO CTRLOO 1 Word Write c EXT SIO CTRL 0 x 0007 Contents of EXT SIO CTRL 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R eserve 1 Clear receive buffer 1 Clear send buffer T S O S E When words are specified multiple bits are simultaneously set up the pro Note cessing order is as follows Clear error Clear receive buffer Clear send buffer 3 36 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script E Status Add EXT eSIO_ISTAT as a status variable The status information is as follows T
87. area in the dia grams below or when using a Mark cre ated previous to GP PRO PBIII panel edi tor program GP PRO II Expanded 48 x 48 Select this option when using a Mark that exceeds the thick lined area in the diagrams General Into Designated Screen Size Color Data Format Alarm Settings J Tag Setting Noma 40 x 24 ft Expanded 48 48 Display Color Fo I ek eof eR eo below Vertical mark Horizontal mark 2 dots dots 42 dots 46dots Mark screen When Mark Access 1s Indirect and mul tiple Marks are being used the Extended option must be used even if there is only one Mark that exceeds the thick lined area Display Color Set up the foreground Fg and background Bg colors and the blink BIk option 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag 2 90 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Data Format Absolute J Tag Setting Designated Screen Alarm Settings General Info Size Color Data Format i Relative E Data Format Relative J Tag Setting General Info Designated Screen Size Color Data Format Alarm Settings 9 Absolute iS Relative Firlenath fe E Te Input Code Format Input Range sa Noto Min Value jo o fa 2 s Complement 4 MSB Max Value 65535 2 11 J tag Absolute The stored data is the actual number that identifies the R tag display position Dat
88. at a time can be displayed E Even if the Portrait type is selected for the GP Display Type the video display and VGA display cannot be displayed in portrait orientation It is also necessary to set up the VCR so that the display will appear in portrait orientation W The Portrait display coordinates for the Video Window are as follows Portrait Display Normal Display 639 299 0 0 ___X Y Winda X Use ese 0 0 Y coordinates They differ according to the GP types The video area of the GP2500 2600 that mounts the VM unit Is _ different from that of the GP570VM When the V tag in the 70 Important series VM is replaced with that of the 2000 series VM the rightmost 40 pixels will not be displayed Therefore the loca tion of the camera and the display size of the V tag should be changed This function is only avaliable with the GP 570VM 870VM and GP 2500 2600 with the VM unit 2 246 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 27 V tag 2 27 3 Using V tags W General Info The General Info page provides informa tion about the V tag s current settings Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered Tag Name Description ID Number Input Channel Mo Video Window Display
89. available in the Decimal format Data Display Format 16 or 32 bit data is available when the Absolute option is selected Select the data format from Decimal Hex hexa decimal BCD and Octal The octal format uses only 16 bit data Data Display Format 16 Bit 32 Bit j Decimal fh Decimal i Hex i Hex i BCD ti BCD 1 Octal o Cancel P Hem Ge ft When using 32 bit data the higher and lower orders of the Word Address change i according to the host PLC in use PLC Connection Manual GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 149 2 17 N tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Data Format Relative mele Data Format Size Style Alarm Settings Arithmetic Operation Select this option to display the numeric i TS value converted from the data in the Word Address joo F pit Lenath 1 16 E_E Word Address in response to the desig nated Input Range Input Code Format Data Display Format fe No Code Jo Code f Decimal Word Address 2 s Complement i Hex e Cp d MSB C Ota Defines the address whose data is used in the display Input Range F Display A ange Min value jo a Min value jo fa Bit Length 1 1 6 Max Value J EI Max vate p E Set up the valid bit length for data stored in the Word Address ria me ne Format Displays positive values only 2 s Complement Uses 2 s complement to express nega tive values MSB Uses MSB code
90. be displayed through the video control e When setting the data in the video control area be sure to set the data within the specified range Otherwise the data may not dis play correctly the image may not appear clearly E ID Number The video ID number area address 0 in the video control area is where the ID number to specify the V tag 1s written For more information on the operation and applications of the V tag Tag Reference Manual Gr re e When V tags exist whose ID numbers are met on the current base screen call y the V tag information to the addresses 1 to 9 in the video control area to display the video window e When no V tags exist whose ID numbers appear on the current base screen the video window is not displayed E Internal Window Control Flag The internal window control flag address 10 is the area used for chang ing the display conditions of the video window After specifying the bit 6 to 8 of the appropriate mode increment or decrement the value of the address 4 to 9 of the video control area according to the information of the bit 2 to 5 As a result the position for displaying the window the window size or the origin of the video display is changed Write the bit for the internal window control flag with the T tag touch panel input to move the video window change its size or scroll it Ge re e Even if the coordinate value is written in the address 4 to 9 in the video 2 contro
91. bits remain unused in monitor addresses in this example words M0850 to M0863 keep them as reserves Allocate screen file numbers for these remaining bits as well Then create a Library screen for blanking the sub screen The screen file number for the sub screen blanking library is Sub screen Library Start file screen number Base screen Monitor Address Words x 16 bitiS 14 Rows of text Sub Screen Libraries hae S lst row B1000 hOB tas 2nd row B1001 WOes2uOes 3rd row B1002 hWiNs4 niOs63 49th row B1048 Do not use shaded 50th row B1049 nies them no text B1050 no text B1063 no corresponding bit no text B1064 Sub screen blanking screen Only screen file number is allocated Screen creation is not necessary 2 14 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 1 A tag WE A library screen that blanks the sub screen after using the sub screen func tion must be made For each library first draw a black filled rectangle Then draw what you want to display on the screen over the filled rectangle For the sub screen blanking library draw only a black filled rectangle B1000 B1001 B1064 Create drawings over the filled rectangles Only black filled rectangle 2 14 9 How to Avoid Overlapping Erase Images L tag E Since the maximum number of alarm message display rows is 20 three alarm screens become necessary to display all 50 rows
92. by adding the base address number to the data in the Word Address Bin BCD The E tag uses the data format designated here to display the data in the related word address When the Device Type amp Address option 1s selected the data format is fixed to Bin te For more about the Relative value input range settings XS 2 17 4 Relative Data Display Settings N tag GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 45 2 6 E tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Tag Setting Input Code Format Range Color Arithmetic Operation Display Angle General Info Data Format Size Style No Code i Absolute is Relative Displays positive values only 2 s Complement Uses 2 s complement to express negative values MSB Uses MSB code system to express negative values Code Select the Code option when display ing negative values Only available when setting Decimal data Round Up The decimal point numbers created dur ing relative data range conversion will be rounded up if the number is 5 or above and rounded down if the number is any thing under five When this option is not selected these decimal point numbers will be rounded off Display Format Select from Decimal Hex or Octal The relative data display can use only 16 bit data Input Display Designation Direct The Input and Display Ranges are desig nated directly Indirect The Input and Display Ranges can
93. can contain Decimal Places Defines the number of digits displayed after the decimal point the decimal point is not included Display Style Shift Left Shift Right Centered Select one from the Shift Left Shift Right and Centered options The E tag displays data starting from the position designated here Zero Suppress Normally when 0 suppression is ON clicked all unnecessary 0 s are not dis played When turned OFF 0 s are added to the front of numbers to match the Dis play Length e g When the Display Digit is 4 and 0 suppression is OFF value 25 will appear as 0025 Zero Display When the display value is O zero and when this option is not clicked that 0 value will not display i Shift Lett Mij Zero Display H Centered E Range Color Range Type jose e A If the Direct option is selected set the up E Le per and lower limits of the range while cre plier ET ating the tag tl Indirect Enabled when No of Ranges is 2 or more Indirect option will be valid when 2 or a larger value is set in the Number of Ranges at tribute The ranges are then designated by variables The addresses to store the lower limits for each range will be automatically allocated to the word addresses immediately following the Word Address designated on cwe Hee the Data Format page If Indirect is selected on the Data Format page use the Select In direct Address Area to se
94. color attributes for the Trigger Acknowledge Error Clear and Erase are available WE Date and Time display formats can be selected E When used with T tags Start Up Down Ack Ack All Delete Delete All End and Sub screen Display operations are possible 2 23 T tag Touch Panel Input GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 171 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Display Format Active Scroll Direction Down lt Display Example gt Alarm Order Level 1 Point closed gt A Tank Low Water Level B Tank Pressure Trouble Seve 10 05 B tank Pressure Trouble SOV 12 15 A tank Low Water Level SOTO 1200 Leyel 1 Point clased Trigger message Time Date W Display Format History Scroll Direction Down lt Display Example gt Alarm Order Level 1 Point closed A Tank Low Water Level B Tank Pressure Trouble See 10 05 B tank Pressure Trouble 11 30 Se 12 15 A tank Low Water Lewel 13 15 15 00 Se 1200 Level 1 Point closed 14 00 16 50 Recover time Acknowledge time Trigger message Time Date E Display Format Log Scroll Direction Down lt Display Example gt Alarm Order Level 1 Point closed A Tank Low Water Level B Tank Pressure Trouble B tank Pressure Trouble 17 00 Actank Low Water Level 17 00 Level 1 Point closed 17 00 Atank Low Water level 75 00 Recover time Level 1 Point closed 15 00 as L 10 05 B tank Pressure Trouble
95. condi tion 1s detected turn it OFF via the PLC When there is no designated Block No the Perform Data Write Bit Address is not turned ON This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function Block Logging data 15 0 See below 3 A 5 Data Enabled Disabled Bit Enabled Disabled status for data 1 to 16 Ei 6 Data Enabled Disabled Bit Enabled Disabled status for data 17 to 32 7 Word data 1 N 8 Word data 2 l Stored last two digits using the BCD format tne SLO Word Datan 15 87 0 0 L Read flag 0 Data read incomplete 1 Data read completed Read Error Code 0 Normal finish 1 Read error Word Data Enabled Disabled Bit 15 0 5 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 817 615 14 3 21 4_ 6 Each Bit in a Word represents a data number When a Bit is 0 the Bitis Disabled When a Bit Is 1 the Bit is Enabled EN e Block and data structures to be transmitted to the LS Area are as follows Note When using loop operation logging data is transferred starting with the old est piece of data Logging Data Process in Backup SRAM Here 1 to 6 represent logging data In this case logging data 1s written to the LS area in the order of 1 2 and 3 When using the Loop feature logging data is written in the order of 3 4 5 and 6 Thi
96. data as binary or BCD data Relative value display uses only Binary data WE The decimal point does not affect the number of display positions W Character size is adjustable W In Relative value display data read by the host PLC responds to the desig nated input range valid range and output range and displays after being converted automatically This eliminates the need for a program performing compensatory calcula tions of data in the host PLC when the E tag is used to display such things as temperature or number of rotations Host PLCI GP Input Output range range WE With Absolute data negative values are computed using 2 5 complement Relative data are computed using either a 2 s complement or MSB code WE The results of an arithmetic operation on stored data can be displayed however for Float data format operations cannot be performed WE The display styles Shift Right Shift Left Centered Zero Suppress can be set up E When the host PLC data is 0 zero the display can be set so that the zero will not appear Ge re For information about the higher and lower word addresses when using A 32 bit data PLC Connection Manual GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 6 E tag AED Using E tags O S E General Info E Tag Setting Range Color Anthmetic Operation Display Angle General Info Data Format Il Size 5tyle Tag Name T
97. display a numeric value from the host s PLC s word Display address B ia a Displays the upper and lower limits of the alarm range setin K tags E P tag Numeric Displays host PLC word address data as an absolute value using Display in Pre a pre defined format defined Format D tag Statistical Displays a statistical graph which represents data in the host s PLC s Graph Display consecutive related word addresses as percentages of a total Graph d tag Statistical Displays numeric values according to the data in the host s PLC s Display Data Display consecutive related word addresses G tag Uses bar pie or half pie graphs to display host PLC word address Graph Display data in real time GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 1 7 1 4 Tag List Function Order Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types Screen Function Name Comments Operation ie Displays bar pie or half pie graphs to display host PLC word address data in real time The color of the display can be set to show movement within preset data ranges Trend aropa Displays a trend graph that shows the change of a value overtime 1 in the host s PLC s word address data Brings up a library object in the position designated by the PL word address data The object may then be moved to any position on the GP display H tag Draws objects such as straight lines rectangles circles etc at the 19 Object Drawing desired coordinates using
98. ee Ee E E ee ee eee block creation Q tag batch i TT EE E a E TAA E le oe oe operation 1 See page 1 13 1 12 GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types 1 4 Tag List Function Order 270 470 570 571 675 570VM 870VM a ai P ea F 2400 GP 2600 tag loon H KAES R tag function DOCON0D S tag Touch panel input Inching function Inching output Tih and Tiw tags switch a and Window display oe U tag function Video window display General x x P M N P r E P P i Q 2 V tag function Write to device General W tag function Filing General x x x x x x x x function k ee Eekkekki function 7 A middle size Multi Unit E is necessary to enable to this function Chapter 2 Features Common to GP PRO PBIII for Win dows All Versions 2 A Video Mix Unit is necessary to enable this function e The differences of the GP37W2 from the GP377S L in functions are as follows e No SRAM function e No brightness setting e No detection of backlight burn out GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 1 13 1 5 Tag Setting Cautions Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types ime Tag Setting Cautions Please be aware of the following when setting tags on GP screens E Tag Descriptions A Description can be entered whenever you create a tag Entering a descrip tion allows you to see the descriptions when you input or edit the tag Left click on t
99. eos ascnnes apceexecsnosanesasesusessossaasaeanassagenedasseannaatesbessaessenensegediaiceenseanens 2 174 A OAS e AA E E EAA E NE EE A EEEE 2 175 PAP N es E E A E oh EO E O A E ON ASISI eee 2 182 DQ DUGD play Example erriyan iane EEEE EEEE EE EEEE NE AEREA 2 184 D207 ABOU Freeze MOU eian aa E E EAEN 2 187 220 8 Rol Upand Roll Dowin KEySeerscnii na A EERE 2 188 2209 GP System Arca Q a seling ie cuits cecertececavecasaaseeenancateteapenrdiaapentiiadeahuessapsaeietees 2 189 2 20 10 Q tag Alarm Summary s CSV File Storage Example ccccccccssssseseeeeeees 2 197 22r RAD CIS AM SCS soos sca canctes ct reo wesccecasecsevesscsucenctes stecowssecestoccacduastesiancsecevsves 2 199 Dt Mah ASI VAC W e EA A 2 199 De ADA KA asst sacesss E AAE 2 199 ES ES RAES e E A A AEA A 2 200 222 SAnS SNe DISPLAY ies icaicacscescvisscecsiesnaassuinseesannases cevestsousnesvoaaaeleseeesiansnsanveees 2 203 A T i E E E E T 2 203 a ABO eo 2 E E E E NEEN E E A EA AE ANNS 2 203 e T A A A ne ee ee EAEE N ene ANANS 2 205 223 E tag louch Panel Input sssscessscsssccetseccecssccsssexsscsctzesscansswnccscecsesetsueessassteaseis 2 209 DW ST a a EA E E AIE AA E NEE AE 2 209 10 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS De ROO TAAS ae cocci cas E E E ET 2 209 aD Bes Ue TT eaa ee mE ee ee en ne 2 211 2 23 4 One Shot Buzzer for T tag momentary ccc0sesseesssesesesesesdeessnesesssesesncessseses 2 220 Ap ie Yas D
100. equation break lt Stated when escaping from the loop halfway can be omitted endloop lt Stated at the end of the loop e Only a temporary Word Address can be entered in the paren theses e g loop t 000 e loop cannot be used for a trigger equation GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 15 3 1 D Script Global D Script 3 16 a Important Chapter 3 Special Features The temporary Word Address value used to designate the number of loops will decrease every time loop operation is performed When the value changes to 0 the loop s opera tion is finished If the temporary Word Address value desig nated for the number of loops is modified the loop will be come endless Also the temporary Word Address used is designated as Global Therefore simultaneously using this temporary Word Address for another item means the loop s operation may be performed forever Until loop operation finishes screen displays of tags etc will not be updated refreshed Only a temporary Word Address can be designated as the stor age area for the number of loops value The range available for the temporary Word Address value will differ depending on the data format Bin BCD bit length and code used loop can also be nested When it is nested the inner most loop will be skipped via the break command loop t 0000 loop 1 loop t 0001 oop 2 break
101. falls outside the Alarm Color range set here the Mark changes to the Fo W o ek Bo MNE E alarm display Alarm Color The alarm display colors can be different from the normal display colors 2 92 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 12 K tag Key Input r74 r K tag Key Input K tags display numeric or character string data input into the designated word address using touch keypads created with k tags or a bar code reader Designated Word Address Setup Data a a a ae a ae Designated Bit Address aves About K tags E Designate the trigger bit and the data storage address The trigger bit is a bit which triggers the display s input operation and the data storage address stores the set data E When the trigger bit value is 1 the data storage address waits for input E Numeric data Bin BCD Float and both Single byte and Double byte character strings can be entered WE Absolute and Relative data formats are available for numeric data Binary BCD and Float data formats can be designated for Absolute data however only Binary data can be used with the Relative format GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 93 2 12 K tag Key Input Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E The same trigger bit address can be designated for multiple K tags When using a common trigger bit K tags are activated automatically in th
102. from the host PLC is outside the set up Alarm Range the alarm displays with the set colors and attributes Alarm Range Min Value Max Value Set a maximum and minimum value from 0 to 100 100 to 100 is also enabled Alarm Color Defines the foreground and background colors and blink attributes of the alarm 2 277 2 30 Trend Graph Display Chapter 2 Active Image Functions yale Block Display Mode for PLC Direct Access To perform Block Display keep the areas for the number of addresses specified below beginning from the specified Word Address E Block Display Word Address The LS Area from LS0020 or the PLC Word Address is specified There is speed difference between when the LS Area is used and when the PLC Word Address is used Refer to the following When using the LS Area When specifying the LS Area designate Read Area Size The Read Area constantly reads out data from the PLC to the GP regardless of screen display status For Block Display Control Data Count and Data are required to be specified for the Read Area Since this area always reads out data the time from Control bit turning On to graph display will be shorter than when using the PLC Word Address However when the Read Area size is large the entire screen display time will be slower than when using the PLC Word Address Also the Read Area size is limited up to 256 words When using the PLC Word Address Whe
103. ignated for storing Text screen number dur ing X tag settings must be used Window Registration No Enter the registration number for the window to be displayed Text Display Screen Type Indirect Designates the start number of the Text screens created for the sub screen display indirectly This setting is valid only for the GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series Screen No Word Address Enter a Word Address where the start num ber of the Text screens created for the sub screen display is stored Designate the start number as a binary number Word Address X tag Screen Address Enter a Word Address where the data for the sub screen display is stored The address set for storing the Text screen file number during the X tag setting must be used Window Registration No Enter a registration number for the win dow to be displayed A Tag Setting General Info Display Format Size Calor Sub Display Display Angle t None iM Base Screen fe Active Window Window Registration No Mode Settings i Change Screen 1 Library Display is Text Display 1 Window Settings a f Global i Local Screen Type 4 Direct screen Type Text Screen Screen No Word Address fe Dood e Word Address itag Screen Address fay Doo000 F Fe E Display Angle A Tag Setting Display Angle General Info Display Format Size Color Sub Display Display Angle Set up the rotation for the display Sel
104. in the 2nd row and then up to 8 single byte charac ters in each row e Four rows are available for totals Total Average Max Min No of value columns Char Col Date Time Value Value Value Border endo RRB Er Aer rere eee Aer ee perme eee eae es e eee a eee S a E E soan aa eee R a E S S No ofdata AE Po ABOEFGH PP PVN Datadisplay o Cd Cd Cd TC pene a a E eee Anse it accel A A SR EY Uisa Aaa Race A ee siia as Mn cee E S S ee Le ages cee cg A i SY Se POO i eee eae a Sateen eee Sener ee When using the pattern shown above the maximum number of value col umns and data display rows are as follows The maximum number of characters that can be entered per row is 160 Therefore when 8 characters are entered for each column the number of value columns available will be 17 5 Ie the No of value columns number of logging words is oa ie maximum 16 columns When the No of value columns number of logging words is the maximum 8 columns When the No of value columns number of logging words is the maximum 4 columns When designating the columns as the block name display and i entering characters in each column the file size will become TET extremely large Depending on the number of characters en tered and other items designated several hundreds rows can be used for the pattern shown above This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series uni
105. indirectly designate the operand using the Word Address If the Indirect option is not selected on the Data Format page that page s Word Address data and the following address will be the operand If the Indirect option is selected the Area After Display Address settings shown below will be valid Select Indirect Address Area Area After Display Address Arithmetic operations take place using the values stored in the display data address and the address that follows Word Address Display Address ee Area After Base Address The operand storing addresses will be the consecutive addresses following the Word Address set on the Data Format page If the Device Type amp Address option is se lected on the Data Format page these ad dresses will be allocated to the third and later addresses from the Word Address setting ok caer ue Word Address Display Address ee GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 53 2 6 E tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Data FF a When operand setting is Direct the data designated here will be the operand Anthmetic Operators Data Location A Left fe Add a And Right 9 Sub J 9 Or fl Data Location 23 Mult a sor 7 Div UI Select the data location from Left and Right Arithmetic Operators Select an operator for the arithmetic op eration When Arithmetic Operation Arithmetic Operation Data Indirect L is selected w
106. is CF card required 1 PLC Trigger 4 2 3 Using the Filing Data Function Write Setting Send Filing Data to SRAM 2 Screen Touch Keys 4 2 7 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 1 Data transmission by selecting the desired screen setting Manual Transmission 1 3 PLC Trigger 4 4 8 Transferring Data from Backup SRAM to CF Card r When filing data is sent back to the PLC from backup SRAM the newly sent data Note Will overwrite the old In order to prevent this beforehand create another data NLV block for the return value data See the figure below to send the filing data to and designate that block via the Control Word Address File 0 A B A Return Value B Return Value a 60 30 0 0 lt Method 3 Manual Transmission type 2 gt Select the desired filing data via the screen s touch keys perform any data changes and then transmit the edited data to the PLC Use the Filing Data Display to transfer data to from the PLC using the LS gt PLC touch key and the PLC LS touch key GP 2 LS Area Internal memory 1 Backup SRAM lt PLC Filing data To use a CF card the optional Multi Unit is CF card required This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 17 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features 1 PLC Trigger 4 2 3 Using the Filing
107. item 2 16 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 1 A tag EN e When Text Display is selected for the Mode Set in the sub screen setting then the Note sub screen blanking library is not required The display area will be cleared by the Clear Color function in X tag e Treat all left over not used in the sub screen clearing library items as well as the 16 monitor address files as reserved and do not use them for another pur pose e When using a Global Window L tags or U tags for sub screen display select the Indirect option and set the Data Format to Bin e If a screen is switched with the sub screen left ON the GP will set the designated Word Address of the L tag X tag or U tag to zero clears the sub screen be fore switching to the next screen As in the above example if there is an A tag setting with the same monitor bit address on the switched screen then because of delays from communication timing you may See the sub screen for a mo ment The communication time could be shortened if the GP internal LS Area device is used as the word addresses for L tag X tag and U tag e When ndirect is selected for the Screen Type in the sub screen settings the start screen number and window registration number become valid by turning ON OFF the sub screen display Also during the sub screen display even if data for these items are changed the display is not changed e
108. its result will be as follows Word Address Operator Data gt Input data D00100 X 200 Value displayed via a K tag e Any overflowing digits resulting from an arithmetic operation are ignored e If division produces a remainder a small error may occur as a result of round ing up operation e Logical arithmetic operations AND OR XOR are performed in bits W Display Angle E Tag Setting Display Angle z B ae ee ee Setup the rotation for the display Select 0 Alarm Settings i Arithmetic Operation Display Angle zero 90 180 or 270 degrees 7 90 degrees ta 180 degrees ta 270 degrees GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 107 2 12 K tag Key Input Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 7 P gt Data Input Example The following provides an example of data input on the GP 1 Three K tags have been set to the same trigger bit address a Pe 2 When the trigger bit in the host is set high 0 to 1 Host 5 And press the ENT key N T 6 The data is stored in the K1 tag s word address Then the next tag K2 highlights and awaits input e E a __552 k1 Dxxxx PBSA Za e The trigger bit can be set high 0 1 by using a T tag If the T tag Operation Note Mode is set to Invert then the same T tag can also reset 1 0 the trigger bit D 2 24 T tag Touch Panel Input e For details on using a touch keyboard 2 13 k tag Keyboard Setup 2 108 GP P
109. kiap Keyboard Set p cicscisics cies ccciesscsscacsccesciesvevasscdeesveicasrsensiacwesssocssenveiaswese 2 113 Deed O a E E E E A EAA E E ETS 2 113 L ADOUR I E EE E TAREE E O OE eee ee 2 113 A OO cS AT a E E E E NEA TA A 2 115 214 Latag Library Display cssccscecestsscccssacsssccctsssccnsacecacestssscsssacecscuetscseessacecevestecsees 2 119 PAU Me O c E ne eee A E eee I A E ES E A EE 2 119 2142 Abu A arse gece tee i se NET EEE OEE EET EEE ET 2 119 2A U L a A TOA 2 121 8 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS 2144 Library Display Coordinates crcascrecaccanzectesassecnteaaseatanadsteetaienec occsasdonateecaceiencctesecees 2 124 2AA Display 010 nn en E E E EA 2 126 DAA Erie Mode GUS open ect cacece naan E EE E 2 127 pa a Oel Se NES erer iar e E A A ETE TEN E E A O EE T A ONET NA 2 128 24148 Notes On XOR i ly cheese siesta pier nas pence NEEN andes ieee 2 129 2 14 9 How to Avoid Overlapping Erase mages ccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 130 2 14 10 Overlapping Colors on a Color QGP piccenvese csensiestearetactsnavetes waste arclossieatecdeuseies 2 131 2 15 l tag lt small L gt Library Status Display secsccsssssseecccocosssesceccocsssssseeesoso 2 135 ZA NN N e E E E dad deuveonemgenees 2 135 L ADOT cece T A E E E A EA I E TENOS 2 136 LA U E en E E E EE TE AE T ner meee 2 137 2154 BitO Offsetand Bit Length SOU OS xccescccscosnczesepsvectanatsecetaienectesacs
110. left and right sides are signed or unsigned When a remainder is produced by a division operation an error may be created due to round up operation E g e 9 5 4 e 9 5 4 E Rounded Decimal Places Decimal places resulting from a division are rounded E g 1073 73 9 e 10 3 3 10 W Notes on Operating BCD data A BCD data operation which produces overflowing digits does not give the correct result GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 25 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features Smee Logical Operation Examples Bit Operation Examples 100 gt 99 and 200 lt gt 100 Result ON 100 gt 99 and 200 lt gt 200 Result OFF 100 gt 99 or 200 lt gt 200 Result ON 100 lt 99 and 200 lt gt 200 Result OFF not 100 gt 99 Result OFF not 100 lt 99 Result ON w D200 lt 10 Result True 1f D200 is smaller than 10 ON not w D200 Result True if D200 is 0 ON w D200 2 or w D200 5 Result True 1f D200 is 2 or 5 ON w D200 lt 5 and w D300 lt 8 Result True if D200 is smaller than 5 and D300 is smaller than 8 ON False OFF 3 26 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script cH WO Bit Operation Examples W This section gives examples of bit operations w D200 lt lt 4 Result The data in D20
111. loop feature is not used the header is also Note printed when the first item of logging data is printed When the last item of 3 logging data is printed the footer and total value s are printed e With both real time and block printing when the loop feature is not used after the last item of logging data is printed page feed is performed e The maximum number of columns is 60 and the maximum number of rows is 4200 However since the setting data file capacity is approximately 58KB maximum the number of rows will depend on the No of Char Col to be designated for the number of borders and cells 60 columns 4200 rows This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 74 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function If the Windows system s font setting is either Korean Hangul Taiwanese or Chinese image data is printed out Se te D Regardless of the printer s color settings all data is printed in black and white Alarm printing and screen hard copy commands are accepted even during real time printing Therefore during real time printing DO NOT enter other printing commands While multiple lines of data are being printed if logging data is cleared data printing is interrupted Also if the GP s power is turned OFF during print ing the remaining data will not be printed out even if the GP s power is turned ON
112. lt q a D sub 9 pin connector Bar code reader P Laser scanner The bar code reader is directly connected to the GP Direction of signal Direction of signal oe o put od eo o A NO 6 5 5 J SG R iE e e R RS Output 7 p 7 CS CTS CS Input 8 ke e RSRS O RIVCC Input Output Communication settings The communication settings of the extended serial I F of the GP is specified as the initial data of the bar code reader The initial data of Imex s bar code readers LS6004 is as follows Data length Stop bit Parity bit 9600bps 8 1 Ewn GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 127 4 7 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 128 Denso s bar code reader Model VS4004 e Wiring diagram AC 100V lt ee Sanwa Supply s cable D sub 9 pin connector Power box Bar code reader Touch scanner GP Sanwa Supply s cable KRS 423 XF1K is necessary to connect the bar code reader with the GP Direction of signal Direction of Direction of Barcode reader signal signal Pi iri RD Input DR cs CS RIVCC Input O utput Za O6 O8 Communication settings The communication settings of the extended serial I F of the GP is specified as the initial data of the bar code reader The initial data of Imex s bar code readers VS4004 is as follows Data length Stop bit Parity bi
113. lt Display Data Count amp Scale Value Range gt Display Data Sampling Amount Ranges GP 470 570 477R 577R GP 270 H70 370 377R 377 GP 675 GP2400 2500 GP 2600 1 639 1 319 1 799 However when Fill Below Line is selected the maximum Scale value becomes 97 Scroll Defines how much data scrolls over Screen Settings General Info Graph Settings Axis Setting Sampling 100 of Height jo j O Redraw Display when the graph display area becomes Pitch po JE full Display Data Amount i 0 H l Redraw Display Soroll E Erase Color When tick marks have been drawn to cI em Tm equally divide the graph display area and Fil Below Line this setting is OFF the tick marks disap pear when the data scrolls over When this setting is ON every time it scrolls over or when the graph 1s erased the graph display area is drawn again and the tick marks do not disappear Erase Color Defines the color of the graph display area where the graph does not appear For a monochrome GP select Black Fill Below Line When this option is selected a trend graph s lower area from the channel will be filled In the graph display area with the Paint Lower Section option se lected only one channel s trend graph can be displayed Also an alarm cannot be displayed GP 270 does not have this function Sx The redraw display will fill the graph display area with the clear color and Note
114. performed Possible data logging recording frequencies are as follows e Conditions Backup SRAM capacity 50Kbytes Number of logging data items 32 words Number of blocks 1 e Frequency of data logging 673 times or less lt Without Loop Operation gt e Used backup SRAM capacity byte 128 20 12 2 X Number of logging data pieces X Frequency of data logging X Number of blocks 51296 51296 1024 approximately 50Kbytes lt With Loop Operation gt e Used backup SRAM capacity byte 128 20 12 2 X Number of logging data pieces X Frequency of data logging X Number of blocks 12 2 X Number of logging data pieces 531372 51372 1024 approximately 50Kbytes e For the GP2000 Series lt No Loop Action gt 1024 20 12 2 x number of words of logging data x number of time x number of block lt Yes Loop Action gt 1024 20 12 2 x number of words of logging data x number of time x number of block 12 2 x number of words of logging data Za e Regardless whether loop operation is designated or not when the number of Note logging data items is an odd number add 1 to the above calculation For NY example when the number of logging data items is 7 it is considered as 8 Words e When using loop operation the backup SRAM s usage space requires 1 extra record This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 40 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver
115. play within the range of characters desig nated in the Display Setting area usually 1 to 14 digits The length designated here includes digits after the decimal point but not the decimal point itself No of display digits I No of data char Code Decimal places Decimal Places Designates the number of digits displayed after the decimal point usually as 0 to 16 This setting is valid only for Dec and BCD formats You can designate the value from 0 to 16 Enter 0 when not displaying decimal place numbers Decimal Places 0 No of display digits 1 No of Char Col Designates the cell size Enter a value ina range from 1 to 32 digits Display Style Shift Left Shift Right Select either shift type Data is displayed from the selected position The default setting is Shift Left Zero Suppress When 0 suppression check box is checked all unnecessary Os are not displayed When this check is removed Os are added to the front of numbers to match the Display Length e g When the No of Display Digits is 4 and 0 suppression is OFF value 25 appears as 0025 This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 7 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 72 Date Time and Value data except for text data is printed in the middle of a Note cell When the center point cannot be designated due to the number
116. product be sure to observe the following guidelines Warning Do not create touch panel switches that are used to either control or to ensure the safety of equipment and personnel such as an emergency stop switch etc Please separate your safety protection system from the GP operation system to prevent the danger of personal injury or property damage in case the ma chine malfunctions or operates incorrectly or an inadequate system program is used Be sure to quit this program before turning your PC s power switch OFF After transferring screen data created with this program to the GP unit do not then send the same screen data from the GP to a DOS version of this screen editor software e g GP PRO PB Ill GP PRO III Do not change the contents of this program s project files using the Text Editor software Do not transfer screen data to a GP that does not support all the data s functions i e Logging Filing etc GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual I7 18 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types 1 1 Screen File Types t gt GP Display Data Types The GP unit provides a real time interactive display of data stored in the host PLC This chapter describes the many types of functionality you can create on your GP s screen H Screen File Types Please look at the following list of GP file screen types This program utilizes six types of files s
117. project This screen will be used only for CF Card access and will prevent the GP unit from inadvertently accessing the CF Card This will also ensure that none of the previous actions are taken before you can check the GP CF Card s access status This type of access monitor screen is shown below This screen enables you to check whether data is being loaded to the CF Card After making sure on this screen that no data is now being loaded to the CF Card you can then turn OFF the GP unit reset it or insert remove the CF Card Example lt Creating the GP Screen gt 1 Call up a new Base screen and create a touch key Set this touch key so that it turns an arbitrary PLC bit 1 e A ON 2 Create a library for messages on another Base screen and register a message saying Ready to turn the GP unit OFF 3 Go back to the screen where you created the touch key and add an L tag As the trigger bit for the L tag use an arbitrary bit B on the PLC and set it so that it calls up the library screen created in step 2 lt PLC Program gt 1 Check that the touch key s bit A has been turned ON 2 Check the control word address specified by selecting GP Setup Extended Settings CF Card Data Storage Settings to ensure that no data is now being loaded When the lower eight bits in the control word address read 00 data loading is not being performed 4 4 8 Transferring Data from Backup SRAM to CF Card
118. screen is displayed in it 3 2 When a message is selected using the Up Down keys touch the Sub Display selection 3 The Active Window appears on the screen and the Library screen is displayed in it In this example the A tank Low Water Level message is selected and its Sub Display is called up The sub screen is displayed as an Active Window Displays the Sub Display screen No set in the Alarm Creation and Editing area When you select another message in the same way the screen dis played is set by the Sub Display screen No EN e Cursor movement is not connected with the Sub Display feature If you move Note acursor touching a message the previous Sub Screen continues to display D e If you touch an area outside of the messages even though the touch buzzer sounds the Sub Screen will not display 2 184 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag WE Base Screen Sub Display Delete Delete All End Sub Display Tag Settings Q tag Sub Display Active Window Mode Settings Library Display Screen No Storage Address LS0020 Word Address2 LS0021 Direct Selec tion Selection others are omitted e U tag Word Address1 LS0021 Designated Window Indirect Data Format Bin others are omitted e T tag Mode Q Tag Selection Key Action Sub Display others are omitted
119. settings are performed for each screen backup memory is allocated for each channel set up on a Trend Graph screen until all the backup memory capacity is used 1 The graph data back up function is valid only for the GP models with back up SRAM GP models with back up SRAM can be recognized by the label attached to the GP S rear face When the GP70 series units label color is copper brown the unit has back up SRAM GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units all have backup SRAM SRAM Seal Pro face GRAPHIC PANEL GP5 1 TC11 S7 N 8800150000 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS CORF MADE I Aap 2 The PLCs listed in section 1 3 Tag List s note section 5 cannot use the Backup feature 2 270 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 30 Trend Graph Display Synchronous Mode When the main power is turned OFF and then ON with this mode selected a graph will be drawn continuously from the graph drawn before the power is turned ON When the main power is turned OFF and then ON with this mode unselected a graph data will start from 0 All data in the back up SRAM will be deleted when J e The GP s memory is initialized TET e A screen is transferred to the GP e The GP s system protocol is set up e The GP self diagnosis Internal FEPROM screen is per formed e GP Offline is selected However the backup SRAM data of the GP s using GP system ver 1 30 or higher G
120. shaded areas was not cleared and will not be correctly displayed with the S tag When Clear Data with 0 is selected in the storage mode settings the data size between the read data size and maximum number of bytes for the LS area is written as 0 the shaded area described above GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 5 Serial code Reader Compatibility MRead Mode To operate the Serial code reader dedicated communication procedures are needed because each Serial code reader has a manufacturer specific commu nication format As previously described this new version supports three modes Standard Denso QR Code Reader and Token s code reader to support the following transfer format Standard Code data Terminator CR In Standard mode binary data cannot be handled In Standard mode Denso s Serial code reader can read data from other manufacturers code readers if the above settings are selected Denso QR Code Reader Number of digits bytes Code data STX fixed ON ON 5 CR fixed ON In Denso QR Code Reader mode binary data can also be handled How ever handling binary data requires that the Serial code reader be added to the above settings Token s Code Reader Code data STX fixed CR LF fixed In Token Code Reader mode handling binary data requires that the Serial code reader be added to the above settings If the
121. supplementary Note information XY Indicates an item s related information manual name page Refers to keys on the computer keyboard E Keyboard Compatibility List IBM Compatible Indicates a PC that can run the Windows operating system LC Abbreviation for Programmable Logic Controller Includes programmable logic controllers and sequencers Generic name for the GP Series of programmable operator interface made by the Digital Electronics Corporation For a list of compatible GP products please see Compatible Products and Environmental Specifications MAARA 1 2 1 GP PRO PBIII Features 16 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS E CD ROM and Floppy Disk Usage Precautions To prevent CD ROM and floppy disk damage or failure be sure to observe the following guidelines T Q T a re Turn your PC ON or OFF only after you remove CD ROM disk or floppy disk from it s drive Do not remove the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive while the CD ROM drive operation lamp is lit Do not touch the CD ROM recording surface or the floppy disk s internal magnetic disk Do not place CD ROMs or floppy disks where they may be exposed to extremely high or low temperatures high levels of humidity or dust Do not place the floppy disks near any type of magnetic device stereo speaker television etc E Product Usage Precautions For safe and correct use of this
122. the display usually 1 11 The length set here includes digits after the decimal point but excludes the decimal point Display Size GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 101 2 12 K tag Key Input Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Decimal Places Defines the number of digits displayed after the decimal point This setting is valid only for Decimal and BCD for mats The number set here must be less than the value set as the Display Length The setup range is 0 10 Set to zero if not using the fractional digit display Color Type K Tag Setting Direct Alarm Settings _ Arithmetic ames oeaan Display Angle _ Egi A heneral nio DataFomat __ Size Style Directly specifies the Color Settings Display Size et Format Indirect No of Display g P Fi This option is valid when the data format D FI sil is specified to Absolute and no alarm has Color Type Select Indirect Address Area s P n R been set The Color Settings can be indi 9 Indirect 2 Aeae Base dtess rectly specified The color attributes are G S ee specified in the address displayed in the isplay Color g m_i Bik oo OC ee Color Setting field However GP 270 does not have this setting Display Style Preview Shift Let JZ Zero Suppress 2 10 4 Object Drawin t9 Shift Right 4 Zero Display 3 5 J d Data Color Attributes H tag nput Style 4 Auto Clear OFF im BarCode
123. the display to screen number However since the data written to address 8 is still the same the GP does not register any changes in data so it does not perform the screen change Screen number 3 continues to display GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 225 2 23 T tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions In step 6 even if you press a touch panel key to change to screen number 2 the screen change will not take place To prevent this an extra level must be added to the ladder program that compares 0 and 8 and if equal erases the contents of 8 E g When using Mitsubishi PLC MS036 Usually ON fag Thus in Step2 both 0 and 8 have the value 2 With the above ladder during this time the value 8 would be changed to ZERO ay t This will not affect the current GP s screen since it is still displaying B2 ote from the address 0 DN 4 Forced Screen Change A forced screen change operation takes place when the host PLC System Data Area 8 s Change Screen Number storage address top bit is set to 1 Add 8000h to the desired screen number before writing this data to the System Data Area Only valid from the host PLC side The forced screen change has priority over other screen change operations E g To change to screen number 2 0002h 2000h 2002h oA When the touch panel input has the highest priority for screen change the N screen change does not take place
124. the host PLC Word Address data 4 J tag Moving Places an object and moves it along a preset rail created by an Mark Display R tag Used in conjunction with the R tags Displays Base or Image Library screen objects or text previously Library Display registered in libraries T hese items will be either displayed or not Animation blade displayed according to the host s PLC s data data previously registered as library items can be set to appear whenever there is Library State a change in the host s PLC s word device data This is a special Displa play L tag function Marks which are bit mapped icon images created in Mark screens are used on Base screens to reflect changes in host PLC data Graph Display Graph expanded G tag Display F tag Free Library Display L tag small L tag Mark Display R tag Defines the rail track along which a preset Mark set via a J tag Rail Settings moves Used together with the J tag Displays text messages registered on T ext screens in rows A tag according to the host s PLC s bit address data changes The Alarm Summary desired rows can be displayed in an Alarm Summary Using TEXT Display combinations of other tags sub screens corresponding to each message can also be displayed a ta j Lists the alarm messages registered in the Alarm Editor Alarm Summary Display according to the host s PLC s bit address data changes Character
125. then draws the graph in the Trend Graph Display Because it erases graph 2 display with the clear color the screen may flicker some time 2 272 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Sampling General Info Graph Settings Axis Setting Sampling Screen Settings 0 Continuous After Trigger Sampling Time Sampling Time m e Wwirdladittess D00000 Pe eee 2 30 Trend Graph Display Sampling Type Defines the data extraction method from the host PLC as one of three types Peri odic Trigger Start and Trigger Sampling Periodic After Trigger The host PLC data is read at the setup intervals starting from when the GP 1s pow ered up Continuous After Trigger The host PLC data is read at the setup intervals Data read start pause and clear commands can be executed according to changes to the corresponding bit in the word address setup Sampling Time The data is sampled at the optional timing setup Data read and data clear according to changes to the corresponding bit in the setup word address Sampling Time Defines the sampling time in 1 second units for reading data from the host PLC Word Address When the Trigger Start is selected The 00 and 01 bits of the word address setup here control the data read start pause and clear operations 15 01 1 Data cleat 0 Pause 0 1 Data clear 1 Start fakes place
126. though the information contained in and displayed by this prod uct may be related to intangible or intellectual properties of the Digital Electronics Corporation or third parties the Digital Electronics Corpo ration shall not warrant or grant the use of said properties to any users and or other third parties 6 The specifications set out in this manual are for overseas products only As a result some differences may exist between the specifica tions given here and for those of the identical Japanese product a MM aM MM aMMMMa ll a a ne ee nn a an nn a a nn a nn a O G O gt ia Copyright 2000 Digital Electronics Corporation All rights reserved Digital Electronics Corporation November 2000 For the rights to trademarks and trade names see TRADEMARK RIGHTS GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual l TRADEMARK RIGHTS TRADEMARK RIGHTS All company or product names used in this manual are the trade names trademarks including registered trademarks or service marks of their respective companies This product omits individual descriptions of each of these rights Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows Microsoft Corporation USA Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows Explorer Microsoft Excel 95 Intel Pentium Intel Corporation USA Pro face Digital Electronics Corporation in Japan and other countries Ethernet Western Digital Electric Corporation USA IBM VGA IB
127. to a 16 bit device or when 16 bit device data is copied to a 32 bit device if the D script bit length designated in D Script is 32 the copying will be as follows E g memcpy W30 0100 BD0100 2 31 0 BD0100 w30 0100 of gt 101 102 103 E g memcpy BD0100 W30 0100 4 0 15 31 0 BD0100 101 w30 0100 101 If the original and destination data ranges overlap all overlap ping data will be rewritten as follows 102 103 E g When copying D101 to D104 to D100 to D103 Data is copied to a smaller number Address Copy From Copy To E g When copying D100 to D103 to D101 to D104 Data is copied to a larger number Address Copy From Copy To e Although this example s function designates 2 Addresses these Addresses will not be counted as D Script Addresses 3 10 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script e When using device addresses for the Assign operation the write values will not be assigned immediately due to the GP to PLC transmission time E g memcpy w D200 w D100 10 Copies D100 to D109 to D200 to D209 w D300 D200 Assigns D200 data to D300 In this case D100 s value to be written to D200 as the operation result has not yet been assigned to D300 e Memory Set memset This feature is supported by only GP77R Series GP377 Series and GP2000 Series u
128. under five When this option is not selected these decimal point numbers will be rounded off cut Data Display Format The absolute data display can use 16 or 32 bit data Select the radix from Deci mal Hex BCD Octal Binary and Float floating point The Octal is available for 16 bit data only while the Float for 32 bit data IEEE 754 Format only An error may occur due to the Float feature s display digit limit i Also if an indirectly designated address is out of range or does Important not exist a communication error may occur effecting the screen update Check all indirectly designated data and store a correct value in the host s PLC related addresses to recover the screen update Ge bas When using 32 bit data the relationship of high order and low order word ove NSS data will differ according to the host PLC type Use address and device codes to indirectly designate both addresses and de vices PLC Connection Manual Supported Devices sections in Chapter 2 2 44 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Data Format Relative Range Color Arithmetic Operation Display Angle General Info Data Format Size Style 3 Absolute t Relative Word Address pou CS Bit Length 1 16 je iS Adbhesses fas LS0000 Mal Ee 1 Desirs Type amp Adkhess iN Bin B20 Input Code Format L code Display Format fi Mo Code t
129. using a W tag to change screens check this check box to select the Screen Level Change function 2 23 6 Screen Level Change Direction T tag Mode Set 16 Bit When the trigger bit is activated accord ing to the designated trigger mode a con stant 32768 to 32767 is written to the setup word address Set 32 Bit When the trigger bit is activated accord ing to the designated trigger mode a con stant 2147483648 to 2147483647 is written to the setup word address Add Binary 16 Bit When the trigger bit is activated accord ing to the designated trigger mode the b1 nary constant value 32768 to 32767 and the data in Word Address 1 are added and the results are written to the designated word address Add BCD 16 Bit When the trigger bit is activated the BCD constant value 0 to 9999 and the data in Word Address 1 are added and the results are written to the designated word address Word Address 1 Valid only for Add Binary 16 Bit or Add BCD 16 Bit operations the data in the word address set here is added to the constant value 16 bit data Constant Settings Constant Designates the fixed value used in the ad dition operation above 2 255 2 28 W tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions WwW Tag Setting Dec General Into Mode BCD 9 Bit 8 Word 0 Special Hex Trigger Type Trigger Bit Address Designates the data format for the constant 2021 310 20 1 are e S Ol pow H Refer to the ta
130. via PLC Trigger Automatic Data Transmission Data Transmission Specifications e Write Settings From Filing Data to SRAM Control Word Address D00200 Write Completed Bit Address M00001 When using multiple folders the Control Word Addresses will be D00200 to D00201 which overlap with the following transfer setting SRAM lt gt sPLC Control Word Address D00201 e PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings Control Word Address D00201 Transmit Completed Bit Address M00002 Block 1 s data is transmitted when the Control Word Address changes Filing Settings Example ji Filing ON OFF J Use Muliple Folders Write Settings From Filing Data To SAAM Control word Address bom T Write Completed Bit Address Mood mE PLC amp SAAM Direct Data Transmission Settings i PLC Controlled Transfer Control Word Address booz01 F Transmit Completed Bit Address Ang02 E This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 25 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features Filing Data Data Transfer GP Internal memory Filing data gt SRAM PLC Filing data to SRAM When the 0 Bit of a data transmission s Control Word Address D00200 is turned ON all the filing data is written to SRAM PLC Trigger Bit Address Co 1 to D00200 OFF Write Completed Bit Address i dT
131. window t Indirect screen Type Text Screen ScreenNo fI i gt Word Address tag Screen Address fay poon Ez 9 Active Window Screen Type 4 Direct screen Type Text Screen Mode Settings i Change Screen i Library Display ie Text Display Screen Mo Word Address EE Dooo00 F Word Address tag Screen Address fay poon Direct Designates the number of the Text screen for sub screen display directly in the Screen No area Screen No Enter the start number of the Text screens to be used as sub screens Word Address1 Xtag Screen Address Enter a Word Address where data for the sub screen display is stored The address set for storing the Text screen file number during the X tag setting must be used A Tag Setting Screen Type General Info Display Format Size Color Sub Display Display Angle t Base Screen Indirect Designates the Text screen number for sub screen display indirectly This setting is valid only for the GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series Screen No Word Address Enter a Word Address where the start num ber of the Text screens for sub screen dis play Designates the start number of the Text screens as a binary number Word Address1 Xtag Screen Address Enter a Word Address where data for the sub screen display is stored The address set for storing the Text screen file number during the X tag setting must be used Active Window General Info Displa
132. writing is activated you need to deselect this High Speed setting K tags U tags and V tags created in a window will not operate Trend graphs do not display on a window When a undefined registration number is designated on the Base screen cur rently displayed or if the Base screen on which the window is created is miss ing the window will not display For information on window screen registration Operation Manual 2 6 Registering Windows Activating ON OFF or switching a window with another resumes the tag operation from the first tag on the Base screen Activating ON OFF switching and moving a window is performed between tag operations GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 26 U tag rw nw Global Window Display You can set up the Global Window Display directly on the GP by selecting the USE option in the INITIALIZE SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT SETUP GLOBAL WINDOW SETUP Or open the GP Setup window view the Expansion area s data click on the Global Window button and set the Global Window ON The window set up here is then common to all the screens When using GP system settings SAMARI 2 26 7 GP System Area Global Window Display Settings U tag When using GP Gaga GP 70 Series User s Manual GLOBAL WINDOW SETUP Use a special area reserved in the System Data Area for the window display operation Direct Access Indirect Access L51
133. 0 gt 1 1 Start data is cleared Word Address When Sample Only On Trig ger option is selected The 00 and 01 bits of the Word Address settings control the Data Read Start and Clear operations 15 01 00 1 1 ae shy Change Data Import N With 0 gt 1 or 1 Ba Gi ATEA 0 data is imported KN _ Please wait until the GP confirms the status of the control bits i e EEA whether they are 0 or 1 For Direct Access communication either the communication cycle time or 50ms whichever is longer f No te A delay of up to 1 second may occur from the time of data import start to yY actual data sampling GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 63 3 2 Data Sampling Settings Chapter 3 Special Features wa gt Data Sampling s CSV File Storage Example This example opens a data sampling CSV file in Excel that was stored in a CF card For CSV file storage procedures 4 4 2 CF Card Features This feature is effective only on GP77R and GP2000 series units Channel Name 012345 01a2b3 No of Samples 15 8 Current No of Samples 8 5 Data 32768 23456 gt 90 0 70 0 80 0 65535 64553 gt 24682 32768 gt 32767 56666 Hn 099997 TEA O00 5 gt 327608 o 45564 e CSV File hannel Name Old data Ne
134. 0 xxxx xxx xxx xx be printed 13 00 XXXX XXX XXX XX aN With real time printing when using the loop feature the data display row will Oo e e e be designated as a single row NSS S g e When using the loop feature only real time printing can be used a e When using the loop feature and performing real time printing Important the Total section will not be printed e When using loop operation and performing real time printing if the logging frequency is not very high or a printer has not yet been connected printing cannot be performed at the speed the logging data is created thereby causing a diffrence between the two In this case only part of a single cycle s logging data will not be printed This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 77 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features E Print Settings Maximum File Size The print settings file size capacity 1s approximately 58KB However depending on the specific setting the user s file size may exceed this capac ity The setting file contains the print header print footer and print data areas settings The maximum number of characters that can be entered per row is 160 The following is the standard print setting size e Enter the Block Name in the 1st column and then up to 8 single byte characters in each column e Enter the Block Name
135. 0 0002h Mode 1 0001h File No CF Card Features 4 4 2 A large volume of image screens and sound data files can be stored on a CF Card and via the optional Multi Unit displayed on used by the GP unit An external storage device is required Filing Data can be saved on the CF Card and then transferred to the GP unit whenever necessary 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function All Alarm data trend graph data sampled data and logged data can be saved as CSV files CSV The saved data can be used for databases and other purposes by transferring it your PC Screen data can be saved as backup files MRM which can be then copied to other GP units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 93 4 4 Using the CF Card Chapter 4 Advanced Features Lem CF Card Usage Cautions W Optional Multi Unit is required e The CF Card can only be used with Digital s GP77R and GP2000 series units To use the CF Card please attach the Multi Unit sold separately to your GP For the GP2000 series the Multi Unit is not required e The GP unit used to save data must have its GP system and protocol files set up in advance W Precautions When Saving Data e When the CF Card is initialized by the GP unit folders will be created automatically The data transferred to the CF Card is saved in the follow ing file formats file Filing Data ZFe BIN log Logged data ZL CSV dat Image screens
136. 0 1s shifted 4 bits to the left w D200 gt gt 4 Result The data in D200 is shifted 4 bits to the right 0012h is stored in D301 using the BCD format w D200 w D300 gt gt w D301 Result The data in D300 is shifted 12 bits to the right and assigned to D200 Bit AND 0 amp 0 Result 0 0 amp 1 Result 0 1 amp 1 Result 1 0x1234 amp OxFOFO Result 0x1030 Bit OR 0 0 Result 0 0 1 Result 1 1 1 Result 1 0x 1234 0x9999 Result Ox9BBD Bit XOR 0 0 Result 0 0 1 Result 1 1A Result 0 Bit One s complement NOT When the data format is Bin16 0 Result OXFFFF Result OXFFFE GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 27 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 8 Conditional Branches W Control Branches Using if endif and if else endif if endif if condition Process 1 endif If the condition is true process 1 is executed If false process 1 is ignored E g if w D200 lt 5 w D100 1 endif If the data in D200 is smaller than 5 1 is assigned in D100 if else endif if condition Process 1 else Process 2 endif If the condition is true process is executed If false process 2 is executed E g if w D200 lt 5 w D100 1 j else w D100 0 j endif If the data in D200 is smaller than 5 1 is substituted in D100 Otherwise 0 is substituted in
137. 00 series support s this new feature 1 2 GP Setup Extended Settings Add button for Serial Code Reader GP Settings Factory Apr GF Settings LO Settings Mode Settings Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Communication Settings Font Setting Online Error Display Delete Error Display T Reset GP On Data Write Error Char Sting Data Mode fe Font Quality t3 Standard te High t3 Taiwanese 3 Chinese 4 Standard t3 Re Try Watch Dog Backup Settings System Area Global Windows V Tag Settings Word Address nano ieee CF Card Data Storage Settings T Data Storage Control word Address poo eee Available CF Card Space T Set Storage Address O Tag Settings HED Settings FEP Settings Estendi S10 Settings zeja Cade Feader Can be set only when the extended protocol code reader LS is selected Senal Code Reader LS Storage Start Address Here you can enter just the LS start address LS Storage Start Address Pressing the Extended Settings button opens the extended settings window GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual OF Cancel Extended Help 4 111 4 5 Serial code Reader Compatibility 4 5 7 Extended Settings The following items can be set in the Extended Settings dialog box 4 112 Chapter 4 Advanced Features Re
138. 05 05h 06 06h 07 Oh 08 O8h 09 O9 10 10h ptt 18h 12 19h p13 iih o 14 Ih 15 Ah 16 Bh O 17 13h 18 OAh 58 19 OBh 01 02 03 04 05 07 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 14 L tag When using 256 color display When the 256 color setting 1s selected blinking is replaced with the trans parent check display However the transparent check cannot be set on the Fg attribute Bee r OE There are 256 colors available via the color palette for the Fg attribute When transparent colors can be set on the Bg attribute Trans or Clr is displayed instead of the color number Table for Converting 64 color Settings to 256 color Settings 64 color settings without nens efe popra Ceo or a s 57 ss e0 e1 e2 6s s6157 se 50 60 61 o2 3 eMedium speed 64 color settings with blinking POT TT 2 st 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 114 12 13 14 15 80 81 82 83 132 133 134 135 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 High speed 64 color settings with blinking POT TT 2 sty 4 so 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 152 153 154 155 64 65 66 67 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 158 159 68 69 70 71 117 118 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2
139. 1 Ltag Word Address Enter a Word Address where data used for the sub display is stored Must agree with the L tag s Word Address used for the base screen No s storage address Screen Type Indirect General Info Display Format Size Color Sub Display Display Angle t None fe Base Screen H Active Window Screen Type 4 Direct TAR Screen Type Base Screen Mode Settings i Change Screen i Library Display 1 Text Display Screen No Word Address fae Oooo00 gt ez Word Address Ltag Word Address fe Doo000 FF GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Designates the Text screen number for sub screen display indirectly This setting is valid only for the GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series Screen No Word Address Enter a Word Address where the start num ber of the Text screens for sub screen dis play Designates the start number of the Text screens as a binary number Word Address1 Ltag Word Address Enter a Word Address where data for the sub screen display is stored Must agree with the word address set for storing the L tag s base screen number storage ad dress 2 9 2 1 A tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Text Display General Info Display Format sub Display Display Angle Screen Type t None Mode Settings i Change Screen i Library Display ie Text Display t None W Sub Display Active Window t Base Screen 9 Active
140. 133 2 14 L tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Low speed 64 color settings with blinking TOT i 2 3 4 5 e6 7 136 139 96 99 8 o 10 it i213 14 15 iE ie 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 20 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 84 85 86 87 128 12 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 88 89 90 91 137 138 184 185 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 186 187 216 217 218 219 97 98 E g When overlapping color codes 10 and 40 Check each color code s RGB code referring the RGB Code Table Color code 10 RGB code 10h Color code 40 RGB code 34h These codes will become as follows for the GP data Color code 10 RGB code 10h Color code 40 RGB code 34h For the XOR display an XOR operation will be performed Hh Color code 10 RGBcode 10h Bk Jo 1 0 0 0 0 Color code 40 RGBcode 34h Bk 1 1 0 1 0 0 Operation result RGB code 24h BIk 0 1 0 0 As aresult of an XOR operation when overlapping color codes 10 and 40 this overlapped color will be displayed as the following color code Color code 36 RGB code 24h 2 134 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 15 l tag lt small L gt 2 15 l tag lt small L gt Library Status Display In the RUN mod
141. 16 SE 2 14 4 Bit Offset and Bit Length Settings E g When the Bit Offset is 3 and the Bit Length is 4 12 1110 09 08 O7 06 05 04 03 02 OT 00 BitLength Bit Offset The shaded bits are used as the monitor data area Range Setting To designate the upper and lower limits for each range select a range number and set the Range n Lower Upper Limit fields Range n Lower Limit Range n Upper Limit Enter the lower and upper limits of the designated range number Input Data Format Decimal Hex BCD Specify the data format when setting the lower limit and upper limit values E g When the Bit Length is 4 the Number of Ranges is 3 and the Start Screen No is B1 Rangel O lt 5 Range5 5 lt 10 Range 10 10 lt 65535 lt Start Screen No and Ranges gt GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 15 l tag lt small L gt mire Bit Offset and Bit Length Settings The tag s Bit Offset sets up bits not used as data in the Word Address Bits not used are the consecutive bits that come before the Bit Length setup More than one Bit Offset block cannot be set up Set up an offset value of 0 15 When you can use the entire Word Address or the offset is unnecessary set up a value of O zero Disregarding the bits set up as the offset the Bit Length sets up the valid bit numbers used for the data Set up a Bit Length 1 16 Other than when the Bit Offset 1s 0
142. 16 bit data and writes the result to the designated word address The data range for the constant is 0 to 65535 9 Add Binary 16 Bit i Add BCD 16 Bit AND Binary 16 Bit i OF Binary 16 Bit Ci 0R Binar 16 Bit im Screen Level Change Direction C Digit A0D A Digit SUB Dec GIBCO Hex JI Interlock Interlock Address Jo00000 Touch available condition cH Bik OF fh Bik Orin 2 214 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 23 T tag XOR Binary 16 Bit When the touch panel key is pressed it performs an XOR operation between the data stored in Word Address and the designated constant binary 16 bit data and writes the result to the desig nated word address The data range for the constant is 0 to 65535 Digit ADD Digit SUB Every time the switch is pressed the data value increases or decreases by 1 at the designated digit position Rounding up or rounding down is not performed e g 0 9 gt 0 When a digit is increased or decreased there is no effect on any other surrounding digit For example when 19 s 9 digit is increased by one to 0 the left side 1 digit does not change Interlock The Interlock Address can be entered only when the Interlock is used to con trol the Touch screen s operation The Touch available condition designates which Interlock Bit Address setting i e ON or OFF effects the To
143. 25 tags Screen B1 Screen load P Screen load 30 tags GP Total 30 B1 10 B2 25 B3 65 lt 256 The total number of tags used can be monitored in the Editor s Screen Data window e When placing multiple tags on a screen if the tags and Parts L superimpose each other the display may not appear correctly Important Be careful when placing tags and Parts e When a screen has been loaded into another screen it cannot be edited in the screen it has been loaded onto For example in the previous diagram although B2 and B3 tags count as tags in the B1 screen these screens and tags cannot be displayed or edited on that screen the Screen Creation Area and Tag List Edit these tags by opening the Base screen with the original tags Activating the Device Monitor function occupies the capacity of about 90 reserved tags If the total tag count on the current screen exceeds the limit after Device Monitor is started the moni tor function may not operate correctly and the message TAG COUNT OVER may appear Do not use Device Monitor if the screen displays such a message SP te The number of tags set in windows displayed in the RUN mode must also be Ne considered in the maximum count E GP Orientation Even if the Display Type is set to portrait X and Y coordinates used for F tags Area U tags indirect designation H tags Object drawing and D script Object drawing functions will be still the same as the normal
144. 377R GP 2000 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 235 2 25 Tih Tiw tags Chapter 2 Active Image Functions rwn Using Tiw tags W General Info Tiw Tag Setting The General Info page provides information General Into Constant Options about the current settings for the Tiw tag Ta None Tiw Tag Name Must be no more than three Single byte or Caister 0 Decimal one Double byte characters long and com Ss of posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag E Constant Tiw Tag Setting Constant Settings Constant Turns the AUX signal ON according to designated constant s value and the data format Dec BCD Hex Also set up the data format of the constant 2 24 4 Setting Up T tags Decimal BCD and Hexadecimal values can be set up in the Constant field T tag E Options Tim Tag Setting Options Reverse Video Defines whether touch areas highlight while the touch panel key is pressed EN When copying screen data created by a screen creation software older than GP Note PRO PBIII if a touch panel key uses fills the filling may blink in Reverse mode To avoid this problem do not use Reverse Video with a fill pattern Buzzer Defines whether or not a beep sounds while a touch panel key is pressed AUX Output Defines whether or not a buzzer signal is sent from GP s AUX
145. 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function Data stored in backup SRAM is erased at the following times T When initializing GP memory Importante When transmitting screen data from your PC to the GP e When setting up the GP system and protocol e When performing GP s self diagnosis Internal FEPROM screen area EN Backup SRAM usage priority order Note 1 Q tag alarm x 2 Data sampling 3 Trend graph 4 LS Area backup 5 Logging data 6 Filing data Memory area is used starting from 1 To check the amount of memory available Operation Manual 4 5 1 Project Information E Data Logging Procedures Overview Logging settings Trigger settings When displayin When writing into a CF card pane settings Logging Print settings Logging Display settings Logging Display settings placement GP system settings Extended settings CF card data storage settings When selecting data edit Control Word Address settings Keypad creation placement This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 4 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features meme Logging Data Read Timing When designating a Bit Address PLC Trigger Bit Address PLC to GP Fa a GP_ACK Bit Address GP to PLC Data Read Logging data read PLC to GP lt Procedure gt 1 Data is set to the PLC Word Address 2
146. 5 0 Tag Reference Manual ee ce cc Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 12 K tag Key Input K Tag Setting Bin Alarm Settings Arithmetic Operation Display Angle General Info Data Format Size Style BCD i Absolute 13 Relative i Char String The K tag uses the data format designated here to display the data in the related Word Address When the Device Type amp Ad dress option is selected the data format 1s fixed to Bin Code Available only when using the Decimal nu Word Address Trigger Bit Address e D00000 e E ooo Indirect Boe delthes s i dchiessas ee Doo000 e Devies Typa 4 Addiesa Bin 2 BCD Lj Code Display amp yrite Data Format i Hex E Hex i BCD HM BCO e m a meric format Select the Code option i Bin 2 Float when you wish to display negative data Round Up This option is valid only when the display data format is set to Float Here at the number of display digits designated val ues will be rounded up if the number of the last digit is 5 or above and rounded down if the number of the last digit 1s any thing under 5 However when this option is not selected the decimal point numbers will be always rounded down from the des ignated digit E g Number of Decimal point digits 2 Value 1 9999 When this option is selected Rounded up to 2 00 When this option is not selected Rounded off to 1
147. 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 163 2 19 P tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions ASen Alarm Settings Display Angle Angle Display Format Format Display Foma Gerea DasFama 522e Display Size Display a e pe F 6 ps al Digits E Truncate bp E bp E Display Color Fo A ek Bo OOOO Ko Display Size Text characters used in the display can be 16 32 64 or 128 dots high and 8 16 32 or 64 dots wide The basic unit of mea surement is a Single byte character 1 e i I lt Single byte Character gt Papia ae EAT EAEE 8 dots fe Shift Right ai ero Suppress t Shift Lett 16 dots cea S e Display Format Digits Defines the number of digits for the dis play 1 11 including decimal fractions except the decimal point Truncate Sets the Truncate when only necessary parts of the data is to be displayed by trun cating unnecessary data fractions This field can only be set when the data format is Decimal or BCD Designate how many digits to truncate zero 10 When there are no digits to truncate set a value of zero Display Color Defines the foreground color Fg background color Bg and blink attributes Blk These color attribute settings are for normal display when the Alarm func tion is selected When displaying num bers and text on a filled image using the N tag set the Bg color the same as the fill 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Display Style Shift Left Shift
148. 6 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 7 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility 4 7 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Readers 4 7 1 Overview The GP supports serial one dimensional bar code readers that are connect able to the extended serial I F To connect a one dimensional bar code reader to the GP make the appropri ate settings in the Extended Settings of the GP System Settings in the draw ing software e The Serial code reader K tag handles the data transfer formats code data CR and code data CR LF e A Serial code reader can read the serial code if the code is displayed in the above data transfer format and the number of code characters is within the K tag s display characters 80 characters max 4 7 2 One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Features You can use a K tag to read data from the one dimensional bar code reader connected to the GP s extended serial I F interface since it is the same as the bar code read processing from the GP s tool connector The K tag s read processing of the bar code is as follows e After reading the data from the one dimensional bar code reader and the CR code the GP will automatically write the data in the data storage address There is no need to press the ENT key on the touch keyboard e If switching between screens is performed during inputting of the bar code the switching process tak
149. 6 Window Control L516 Window Control 17 Window Registaton no 18 Window Display Coordinates x axis 19 Window Display Coordinates y axis Window Control 15 02 01 00 bit aR Displays windows when this bit is high 1 Changes the display order When the bit is 0 zero the display order for multiple overlapping windows can be adjusted If the bit is 1 one the order cannot change as a result of pressing on the window Window Display Position When a window is accessed indirectly and the normal type is selected for the GP Display Type the coordinates of the window s upper left corner is set up using absolute value At this time the upper left corner of the Base screen becomes the origin 0 0 The X position can only be set at 8 dot intervals Portrait Normal 39 299 0 0 X x 63s 339 0 0 setup this coordinate GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 239 2 26 U tag 2 240 Se te XS Word Address Window Control Word Address 0 Window Control Chapter 2 Active Image Functions e If the window is accessed directly settings other than the Window Control are performed in GP PRO PBIII so areas LS17 19 become unnecessary Set the window registration number in a dialogue box and set the display posi tion directly on the screen To operate the Global Window Display from the host PLC setup and use GP s exclusive Global Window Display area in the GP
150. 7 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility Chapter 4 Advanced Features For Opt Electronics bar code reader Model NFT 7175 L RS232C e Wiring diagram AC 100V adapter D sub 9 pin connector E GP Bar code reader type The bar code reader is directly connected to the GP Direction of Connected to No 4 and No 6 pins Communication settings The communication settings of the extended serial I F of the GP 1s specified as the initial data of the bar code reader The initial data of Opt Electronics bar code readers NFT 7175 L RS 232C is as follows Data length Stop bit Parity bit g600bps_ 8 1 Nme 4 120 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 47 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility For Imex s bar code reader Model BR 730RS e Wiring diagram ee f re D sub 9 pin connector Bar code reader GP Pen type battery driven The bar code reader is directly connected to the GP Direction of signal Direction of signal Pin apne RD Input 2 e 2 SOTXD Connected 6 5 to No 4 and R Input 6 Ie o No 6 pins RS Output 7 p 7 CS CTS Input i a O O 8 RSRTS Input Output Communication settings The communication settings of the extended serial I F of the GP is specified as the initial data of the bar code reader The initial data of Imex s bar code readers BR 730RS is as fo
151. 77R Series The GP377RT GP377L S and GP2000 series do not offer the inching output function T Tag Setting General Info blode Options C Tre Stak 4 AUK Output GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 221 2 23 T tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions wee Setting Up T tags WE Touch Panel Grid Grids are made up of dots which are uniformly spaced on the area for creating screen Touch panel grids on the GP panel are grids that have been designated in 20 x 20 dots Turn ON the touch panel grid when drawing T tags or setting the coordinates of a touch area s start and end points If however a grid s point is located in the middle of a key touch input may be hindered The touch to the point on the touch panel grid may not be effective Therefore do not place the grid near the center of the touch panel keys If a grid point is in the center of the touch panel key it may be difficult to register touch input Also if a touch panel key is not designated as a square area it will not operate as a touch panel key Correct Incorrect 20 dots oo BG Ga For more information on the touch grid settings D Operation Manual 2 9 Efficient Drawing Techniques 2 9 1 Grid Snap F4 Option 2 222 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 23 T tag rwx Changing Screens There are two methods to change the screen e Send data from the
152. 7R or GP 377 supports this function since they do not have an AUX I F E When setting the touch panel switch the radio switch can be set using the same group number s touch panel switch if the group number was registered Sr The touch panel switch however cannot be operated according to the T tag Note using the group setting placed on the base screen or the T tag called up by the U Window tag using the group Setting GP 270 series units do not support this function To prevent severe bodily injury death or major machine damage do not use a touch panel key for extremely important switches such as an Emer gency Stop switch Instead provide a separate hardware switch e Bit Invert Compare Add AND OR XOR extract data from the host PLC after a screen change When a touch key is pressed its data is used as the base and the selected operation takes place When pressing one of these touch keys immediately after the screen change because the data may not have been extracted yet a failed value may be set When there is the possibility touch keys may be pressed immediately after the screen change set these touch keys addresses as Read Only areas Immediately after changing screens the touch panel keys may be temporarily ineffective because the processor is busy draw ing the screen Do not use the T tag name T699 It is reserved for internal use DO NOT set T tags on the same screen position as the Screen change ke
153. 99 Data Display and Write Format Set the data format to Decimal BCD Hex Octal Binary or Float In the case of Oc tal numbers use only 16 bit data and in the case of Float numbers use only 32 bit data IEEE 754 Format cc ua If the indirectly designated address is out of range or does not x exist a communication error may occur effecting the screen update Check the indirectly designated data and write the cor rect value to the host s PLC s addresses to restore the screen update If an error occurs in writing data turn the power OFF then ON to restore the system Important KX When using 32 bit data the relationship of high order and low order word data NY will differ according to the host PLC type PLC Connection Manual The display range should not exceed the input range If the display range ex ceeds the data range data entered for error handling may not be displayed GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 97 2 12 K tag Key Input Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Data Format Relative Relative es When this option is selected the bit length of the data being read can be designated in the range of to 16 Word Address Arithmetic Operation Data Format i Absolute i Char String Word Address Trigger Bit Address E D ooo00 FIE Efko IE Bit Length 1 16 16 a Dj Round Up J Indire Base reas os om FE Define
154. A 4 142 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit 4 9 3 VGA SVGA Display Function To activate VGA SVGA display connect the GP to the VGA SVGA port of a DOS V compatible computer Turn on the eighth bit of 14 control in the system data area to show hide VGA Bt1514131211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 Control VGA Display 0 Hide 1 Show PLC Connecting Manual 1 1 4 Contents and Area of the System Data Area EN e When SVGA is displayed on the GP 2500T it is reduced to 640 x 480 When Note VGA is displayed on the GP 2600T it is magnified to 800 x 600 or displayed N at full scale in the center of the screen Magnification or full scale display settings can be made only with the drawing software Depending on the color s displayed when the screen resolution is magnified or reduced lattice likelines may appear or flicker on the screen e When any area other than the 40 upper or lower dots on the GP screen is touched while the VGA SVGA display is active the VGA SVGA display is turned OFF and the control bit is also turned OFF e When VGA SVGA display is visible the touch switch on the GP screen is invalid 640 dots 640 dots Full scale POSCA ORRA 480 dots 480 dots VGA PC Magnifying GP 2500T Full scale mA 800 dots eS 800 dots Fulkscale display scale displa SVGA PC GP 2600T e When VGA is displayed at an equal scale on the GP 2600T
155. Address 1 8 Add Binary 16 Bit poo F Add Binary 16 Bit Doon Fi 1 Add BCD 16 Bit t AND Binar 16 Bit 3 DA Binary 16 Bit i MOR Binar 16 Bit i Add BCD 16 Bit t AND Binary 16 Bit t DA Binary 16 Bit t OR Binary 16 Bit l Sereen larel Chanas Direction Constant Settings 1D Sereen level Change Biest Constant Settings Constant 1 H BCD i Hes oc eN o ee Operation Example 1 Operating XXX Create Lamp green processing yellow prepare red abnormal Check the connection between xxx and yyy before supplying the power After the check turn the switch ON Pilot Lamp green RUN red STOP yellow PAUSE black Power Off Ifthe pilot lamp does not turn on turn the power switch off wait 3 minutes then turn it back on Operation Operation Operation 1 Operating XXX ON Pilot Lamp If the pilot lamp does not green RUN turn on turn the power i red STOP switch off wait 3 minutes yellow PAUSE then turn it back on black Power Off Check the connection between xxx and yyy before supplying the power After the check turn the switch ON poz00 po2od poz00 D020 DOZO D020 Displays the text in the Text By pressing the UP key the When the data in D0200 screen beginning from the data in D0201 increases by 1 changes to 3 the X3 Text first row and because the scroll line is screen will display and set to 5 it s
156. Base Addiass Display Range Min alue 0 L Max value E5535 E C cc lt Minimum and Maximum Values of the Input and Output Ranges gt Data Format Input Range Display Range e Code Input No Code 65535 32768 32767 0 655 2 s complement 32767 a 32767 32767 65535 a a BET ERY CMSB 32767 32767 O _FFFF h 2 s complement _ 32768 32767 O 177777 0 ms 32767 32767 0 1777770 t 0 65535 O 177777 0 WE Size Style E Tag Setting Display Size ange Color Arithmetic Operation DisplayAnge a oa d Text characters used in the display can be 16 32 64 or 128 dots high and 8 16 32 or 64 dots wide The basic unit of mea surement is a Single byte character 1 e Display Size Data Display 8x16 F ats BW No of Display Digits F A Decimal Places a Display Style Peat Preview f Shift Right M Zero Suppress i Shift Lett agggg 4 Centered i aE lt Single byte Character gt 8 dots 16 dots 2 48 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 6 E tag E Tag Setting Arithmetic Operation Display Angle General _DataFormat_ J Size Sye Display Size Data Dis olay 8x16 No of Display Digits F a Decimal Places a Display Style i Shift Right M Zero Suppress Data Display No of Display Digits Defines the number of digits the E tag
157. C When the user presses one of these touch areas the action designated by the associated T tag is performed When the Operation Mode is set to Word Designated Word Radas Data Entered f e a ee a l When the Operation Mode is set to Bit Designated Bit Address yaw About T tags WE The switches listed below can be set up using T tags e Bit Set e Bit Reset e Bit Momentary e Bit Invert toggle e Bit Compare lt lt lt gt gt gt e Group e Auto Off Group e Change Screen e Data Set 16 bit 32 bit e Word Add Binary 16 Bit Entering a negative value in the Constant field makes subtractions possible GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 209 2 23 T tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions e Word Add BCD 16 Bit Entering a negative value in the Constant field makes subtractions possible e AND Binary 16 Bit e OR Binary 16 Bit e XOR Binary 16 Bit e GP exclusive special function switches GP Reset cursor movement in Alarm Summary sub display Q tag etc E The minimum touch panel key size is 20 x 20 dots E When GP I nitialize s Touch Operation Mode is set to 2 points then two different touch panel keys can be used simultaneously WE In GP 470 570 pressing the touch panel key can cause a buzzer output through the AUX interface hereafter referred to as AUX I F provided at the rear of the unit Neither the GP 270 GP 370 GP H70 GP 37
158. Chapter 4 Advanced Features x gt Using the Logging Function Data Logging Settings After selecting the Project Manager s Project Logging Setting the following menu will appear Set up items in the Trigger Setting Dis play Print and Write to LS tabs E Data Logging Settings Trigger Settings Trigger Settings Display Print Write Settings LogginglIN UFFle gt gt 4 Special 2 Bit Method 9 Time Method Data Logging Start Address Doood File Full Bit Address 0000 Data Clear Bit Address 0000 ta Ec onomy EE icra aay aay Bit Method Logging ON OFF Check this check box when performing data logging Bit Method No of words Select this option when using a Trigger Bit eno clea to start data logging ee oe _ Data Logging Start Address Da 2 mia Designate the Start Address of the PLC device where data to be logged is stored No of Words Designate the desired number of words from the Start Address Up to 32 words can be designated Read Count Designate the frequency of data logging Data is logged at the frequency designated here and then handled as a block Block Count Designate the number of data blocks Data is logged for the number of blocks desig nated here and then handled as a file 1 lt Times x Blocks lt 2048 PLC Trigger Bit Address Designate a Bit Address to be used as PLC s trigger PLC toGP GP_ACK Bit Address Designa
159. Data Function Write Setting Send Filing Data to SRAM 2 Screen touch keys 4 2 8 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 3 Backup SRAM to LS Area 3 Screen touch keys 4 2 8 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 5 LS Area to PLC E Filing Data Setup Procedure 1 Filing data registration 2 Enter Write Settings for sending Filing Data to SRAM 3 Enter PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings 4 Setup Filing Data Display and their Screen Placement 5 Setup Library items and their Screen Placement Automatic Data Transmission Completed Manual Data Transmission 1 Completed 6 Setup Keypad Placement Manual Data Transmission 2 Completed 1 Filing Data Registration via Filing Data Filing List 2 Setup of Write Settings Send Filing Data to SRAM via Filing Data Filing Setting 3 When performing automatic data transmission setup the PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings via the same dialog box Automatic Data Transmission 1s completed here 4 When performing manual data transmission type 1 setup the Filing Data Display and designate its placement Manual Data Transmission type 1 is completed here 5 When performing manual data transmission type 2 setup the Library Items and designate their placement 6 Placement of the Keypad Manual Data Transmission type 2 1s completed here This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R an
160. Data Types ee 1 1 Automatic Filing Data Transmission 4 22 a A OE S aE 2 234 Bit Offset and Bit Length Settings 2 135 GP System Area Q tag settings 7 184 Bit Operation Examples 06 3 23 H Block Display Mode 2 268 2 272 How to Avoid Overlapping Figures 2 126 Qo A E A EE 2 25 CD ROM Usage Precautions 15 TA NA ea eee Changing Scree sessweesriiiireisi 2 212 Channel Settings ecicecrvacioviexecmiaceesse 2 265 VA E E te ceence esee 2 83 Color elo 11 Uh ee eee ene 2 18 Conditional Branches 3 24 3 26 K A vern 2 89 Q O oag eee 2 109 D Script Global D Script 3 1 D Seript Global D Script Limitations 3 21 TVS A A TET 2 115 D Script Limitations seeseesseeen 3 21 l tag lt small L gt ceectsdendtcsteesnndbnctnniens 2 131 DA EE 2 28 Library Display Coordinates 2 120 LAS EIE E E 2 32 Local Window Display c seess 2 230 Data Input Example ssec 2 104 Logging Data Read Timing 4 42 Data Logging Display Usage Example oe Logging Data s Excel Display Example 4 79 Data Logging FOW sacimenanceonaeres 4 43 Logging Function c sccsscesseeseee 4 37 4 89 Data Sampling s CSV File Storage Example 3 36 Logical Operation Examples 3 24 Display Settings cc eeesseteeeees 4 57 Display Timing oi cssacacesenreesesuswnersonesers 2 122 GP PRO PBIII for
161. Display Settings oe r Date _ _Time _Daia Dai Dota Deja _ eee oz ef w e o A E a De SUNJA 19987 13 00 00 n ma nj 1111 f sen 14 00 00 2222 2222 222 222 No data is displayed f neers 15 000 3333 3333 333 3 333 inthe calcuation area 1996 17 16 00 00 444a saa 44a 4 404 Also one blankrowis aff TTT inserted for spacing On GP years are displayed On GP time is displayed as 9 00 00 GP values such as 45 0 and 450 in two digits On Excel they On Excel the first 0 is omitted will appear on Excel with the 0 after are displayed using 4 digits the decimal point omitted This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 79 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features E CSV File When opening the logging data s CSV file in Excel e CSV File Data Format Date Time Item Name A Item Name B Item Name C Item Name D Item Name 1 98 06 17 09 00 00 123 4 123 12 345 1234 item Name 27 98 06 1 7 12 00 00 ee et IER ee eet eet Item Name 3 98 06 17 15 00 00 234 5 234 23 456 2345 Item Name 4 98 06 17 18 00 00 123 4 123 12 345 1234 eee ore Pee Poro erro eoo oore 2 2 9 9 2 9 Item Name 1 98 06 18 09 00 00 345 6 345 3 456 3456 e After opening by Excel Date Time item Name A Item Name B tem Name G Item Name D item Name
162. Display Type setting 00 0 Normal Portrait i a X X 0 0 E Valid Number of Tags u Valid tags are counted in the order tags were registered Any tags set beyond the maximum number of screens are not valid When other screens being called up also have tag settings the number of tags for these screens are counted after the tags in the original screen have been counted GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 1 15 1 5 Tag Setting Cautions Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types E Tag Sizes When setting up object movement Tags on a screen be aware of the remain ing screen capacity and tag size limitations as well as the maximum number of tag settings available per screen Tag Size i K Max Screen unit byte a Aam SommayDisy a D fSeisic Grah Diy e O o a Sisic Daa Dipy a O aoo Expanded N tag Function o Graph Display Expanded G ag tunotion 38 158 103 256 T libraryState Change Display 40 702 159 256 256 138 P Numeric Displayin Pre def Alarm Summary Elena 46 66 98 256 Expanded A tag Function R R lt Tag Size List gt ail Settings 20 String Display o 320 256 T Tih T includes n 20 S 32 Selector Switch Input 128 0 inon pey 256 Video Window Display 32 Write to Device 256 Display T ext Data 256 This data indicates the number of tags that can be created on a Base screen assuming other tags are not used The above data uses GP70 series units as its reference
163. Dom Area After Base Address The operand storing addresses will be allocated to the consecutive addresses immediately following the Word Address set on the Data Format page If the Device Type amp Address option is selected on the Data Format page these addresses will be allocated to the second and later addresses from the designated Word Address Word Address Display Address O J gt o 2 106 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 12 K tag Key Input Data Defines the data used for the arithmetic op eration Data Location Select the data location from Left and Right Arithmetic Operators Select an operator for the arithmetic op eration When Arithmetic Operation Designated Arithmetic Operation _ Data Indirect is selected with the following two conditions valid Important when 2 is displayed as a result of an arithmetic opera tion it actually means 1 Sr e When selecting Indirect Device Type amp Address and Display gS Data Type 32 bits in the Data Format area during tag settings e When the device code stored in the Base Address is 32 bit device Word Address Uperator Word Address o Pe k e The arithmetic operation is enabled only when the Alarm option is not selected on the Alarm Setting page Note that the arithmetic operation is disabled if the Data Display Format is set to Float e When an arithmetic operation is used
164. E tag adds the following extended functions to the N tag e The E tag can change the display color when data is changed through the designation of up to 16 data ranges and colors e Supports Binary and Float floating point decimal data formats 2 17 N tag Numeric Display Designated i i i Address 010715 awe About E tags E E tags display numeric data in real time as the data in the host s PLC s word address changes WE Word addresses which contain data to be displayed can be indirectly desig nated The pointer word device type can be the same or different from the one used for indirect designation E Setting up the numeric data s Number of Ranges and Range Color will allow different colors to be used for each data range E When Range Type is set to indirect variables can also be used To do so the word addresses storing the ranges minimum values are automatically set as consecutive word addresses E g e Number of Ranges 3 s 32 bit data 3 Range 2 lower value n 2 n 3 n 4 nts M Range 3 lower value e Designated Word Address for display data n GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 41 2 6 E tag 2 42 Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Decimal BCD hexadecimal binary octal and floating point formats are available WE Both Absolute data display and Relative data displays are available For Absolute display the host PLC can store
165. EE UP TAa ene nee ne 2 222 22 CHW INE OTOCI en vr een EN A A TA A EA re ee 2 223 223 Sereen Level Change Direto pissin inni rr ianen TEE AA a ARNEE T TAKEN need 2 227 2 24 ftag Selector Switch Input sicecsccsciccesteisesssscscssseisscetasecivicerieineeeriesoecusnssacoees 2 229 02 N E ee E E E E EE EE AAT EA ETE E 2 229 PAP SS ADONE E a E NET E E E E E E NE N O EARS 2 229 LA UD E en T E E TETA EA E A TONOS 2 231 2 25 Tih Tiw tags Inching Function ccssscccccssssssssssssccccccscsccsssssceccoees 2 233 2o O N E E E EE AEE EAE E EE AE 2 233 22532 About Ony TIWA S eeii ii e ee ee ee 2 233 se U TE a E E E EEN E E ANO EE TN 2 235 225m USE TIV a a E E E E EE EEE E 2 236 220 Dae VY IC OW Display hoea EE E 2 237 DDN RT N E E EE E E E E E EE E renee 2 237 22 ADON U ra N ANAR A AANE 2 237 220 3 Global Wy HAG OV Display scccccenassecneestesecesasceenseatdemeesanteanseateesaaantasanscaaecastentdeaeventecanes 2 239 2204 L cal Window Display sc 2 s2cceszeascanazqstesesatanaeatadadexssneaqsdasaqeaedasdsansaaiadeansiaieamaniaderns 2 240 2S U 0 E EE EEE AAE AE nee AENA ESS 2 241 2200 Nap Empl eS enge E ETEA E EE TARE ATERN AEAEE EAE 2 243 2 26 7 GP System Area Global Window Display Settings cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 244 2 27 V tag Video Window Display sisceccssscisssccscesessscccacsssecanececesesucaavenseossescvenseess 2 245 A ONO O a E E E E A E E E E A EE 2 245 22 ADON VAOS r S EE EE E EE E E E EEEE 2 245 PANE
166. EENEN ENA 2 139 216 M tagp Mark Display sass secstssereeescinscessanencstsctasewedarenssnsotassuccensntausouatesedesenesssceut 2 141 AGE VV Vy arc N NE EEE E E A EA 2 141 2102 ADONE MAA a asar N E EAE EE EEA AE A EAEE 2 141 Oa 6 es U N r A E E EN TEEI EA ENA O E 2 143 2 16 4 Mark Display Using Indirect Mode i icccscorsteserctvsatassasisesnccnatagmatiosaeteuclapeaaisaneenetss 2 145 ZA INCAS CONUMICIIC DIS DAY e E E 2 147 DMT ed ON a E E 2 147 DMZ ADON IN cg a E EAA A AE 2 147 LA ST INAS spe a E EE EEE E E AEEA EOE EEAS 2 149 174 Relative Data Display Settings ais cs cenesanvaaneaseecausessaaasavedesteeacaesiatentsnteeridsterentectass 2 155 2 18 n tag Alarm Range Display scccsssssscccccccssssscecccocsssssccecososssssececesesssssssssee 2 157 MBN MYC EI ETE E EA S E AE 2 157 a eS ADONNA A A E A EEEE E A N ENE 2 157 E E a E E EE A ee das E E E EE 2 158 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 9 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 19 P tag Numeric Display in Pre designated Format ssssscsssssccccseeees 2 161 RA OCW A E E E E EEE E A E EEA E A 2 161 PAS WP Mam 2 00 0100 E E a E A EENE EEEE INTAN A ANENE 2 161 2A O PAAS e E a A tee nse TEE NE ENEA EE E A N O EE 2 163 2494 Paan wy 2 1 0010 Cogeco ai r EE N N eee 2 167 2 20 Q tag Alarm Summary Display sssssssecccccssssssssececcoosssssecesososssssceecessssssoe 2 169 E OON ee O E sanaguasquedsacassdasansantaaee 2 169 2 AD A a r N TE eee eee 2 169 Laa Oae Re
167. G31 24V GP270 SC11 24V GP270 SC21 24VP GP270 SC31 24V GP370 LG11 24V GP370 LG21 24VP GP H70S GP 270L GP 270 series GP 270S GP 370L GP370 LG31 24V GP370 LG41 24VP GP 370 series GP370 SC11 24V GP370 SC21 24VP GP 370 GP 70 GP370 SC31 24V series GP370 SC41 24VP GP470 EG11 GP470 EG21 24VP GP470 EG31 24V GP5 0 SC11 GP5 0 SC21 24VP GP5 0 SC31 24V GP5 0 T C11 GP 470 series GP 470E GP 570S GP 570T GP570 T C21 24VP GP 570 series GP5 0 T C31 24V GP 570L GP5 0 LG21 24V GP 570VM GP5 0 T V1 1 GP 571T GP5 1 TC11 GP 57JS GP57J SC11 GP 675T GP6 75 T C11 GP 675 series GP675 T C41 24VP GP 675S GP675 SC11 GP 870VM GP870 PV11 1 For information about available models in your country please contact your local distributor 4 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ican GP377 LG11 24V C GP377LG4 2V Seer Sr iieetics GP377 SC11 24V Sones Gp 3778 a GP377 SC41 24V Kaca 37W2B GP37W2 BG41 24V P37 eannan Geta Jo C GP377R TCH 24V P GP 477R series GP 477RE a 47 TREC GP77R C GP4T7R EG41 24VP GPSTRS 577RS ee 1ml SC 11 GP577R SC41 24VP Kad 2400T GP2400 T C41 24V GP 2500T GP2500 T C11 GP 2000 series GP2500 T C41 24V GP 2600T GP2600 T C11 GP2600 TC41 24V TC41 24V series GP 577RT e TC11 GP577R TC41 24VP TC41 24 VP GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS FRO TAC C ee EEE EE 1
168. GP 2000 do not support the AUX I F therefore inching information cannot be sent yaw About Tih Tiw tags E Since outputs are sent directly to the host s PLC s DIN relay via GP s AUX I F the time required for data communication is shortened WE There are two types of inching outputs bit output and data output byte output Bit output Tih tag Data output Tiw tag Both operation modes are fixed and they send outputs only while the touch key is pressed Even normal address settings are unnecessary This function is invalid on the GP 270 370 H70 377 377R GP 2000 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 233 2 25 Tih Tiw tags Chapter 2 Active Image Functions lt Tih tag gt ALIX LF Taq signal name Tihod o2 1 2 03 04 3 o 4 5 Setthe Tag nare 07 O B fo Tino g lt Tiw tag gt While pressing the touch panel key the AUX signals corresponding to the Tiw settings turn ON ALIX LF Tiwi signal name Bit 01 Tsw 02 03 04 3 05 06 07 o8 7 OU45h 01000101 binary E Inthe same way as an inching output a buzzer signal can be sent to the AUX I F E The maximum number of Tih tag settings on each screen is 8 and 256 for the Tiw tag setting e While data is being sent to DOUT it is possible the host s PLC s DIN unit is Note simultaneously sampling data In such cases your l
169. GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 7 3 1 D Script Global D Script 3 8 SP te Chapter 3 Special Features or OR Disjunction ORs the right and left sides Value 0 zero is regarded as OFF and other values as ON N1 or N2 is true if either N1 or N2 is ON and false if otherwise not NOT Negation NOTs the right side Value 0 zero is regarded as 1 and other values as 0 not N1 is 0if N1 is 1 and 1 if N1 is 0 lt Smaller than Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant The result is true if N1 is smaller than N2 N1 lt N2 lt Equal to or smaller than Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant The result is true if N1 is equal to or smaller than N2 N1 lt N2 lt gt Not equal Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant The result is true if N1 is not equal to N2 NI lt gt N2 gt Greater than Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant The result is true if N1 is greater than N2 N1 gt N2 gt Equal to or greater than Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant The result is true if N1 is equal to or greater than N2 N1 gt N2 Equal Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a cons
170. GP2000 series units GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 51 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 52 Sni _ Print ON OFF neci a Click on this check box to print out the BBokumt Pesne Covide logging data omre E aoa p Block Unit No of Cac Rows M SS _ Logging data 1S printed in block units pease ee Printing is started via the Control Word Print Completed Bit Address XO0000 fF EH Address Realtime Logging data is printed out each time it is logged Copy from Display Click on this button when the display for mat has already been set up to use that format for printing Row Settings No of Data Rows Designates the number of rows in the data print area No of Calc Rows Designates the number of rows in the cal culation area Column Settings No of Data Col Designates the number of rows in the data print area Header Click on this button to display the header edit window Enter text on this window The maximum text entry size is 160 char acters for each row and the total of 40 rows Footer Click on this button to display the footer ed iting window Enter text in the footer sec tion The maximum entry size is 160 char acters for each row and the total of 40 rows Preview Click on this button to view the printing im age of the data header and footer areas Control Word Address When data is printed out for each block the printing starts with the Trigger Bit tu
171. ION VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL Video Control Area Start Address The range of LS20 to LS2010 in the LS area of the GP is used for control ling the video Specify the start address of the area used in the video control area When the start address is specified the sequential 22 words from the start address will be automatically assigned as the Video Control Address e When the screen of the GP 530VM is used as that of the GP 2000 Carefu I series with the VM unit the video control area start address differs between the GP 530VM and the GP 2000 series with the VM unit E Center Zooming Specify whether center zooming operation should be valid or invalid When the center zooming operation is valid the center of the video screen is displayed when standard mode is switched to large mode When center zooming operation is invalid the screen is displayed at the position that is specified according to the point of origin of the video display 4 10 2 Video Control Area GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit E Video Input Signal Select NTSC or PAL as the input signal of the video device e The center zooming function can be set on the GP System Settings in the GP Note screen creation software Y Tag Settings Video Control Start Address LS0000 L50020 Fea I Center Zoom Video Input 3 NTSC 3 PAL Display Mode SVGA fa VGA E Ad
172. In response to host PLC word address changes this function places a Usd e This tag is supported only by GP 570VM and GP 870VM units and Video Window GP2500 2600 with a VM unit This tag lays a special window screen Alarm Summary Display Q tag Display V tag jused for displaying video data over the currently displayed Base screen Up to three different video channels can be used Write to Device Writes data to a word address or either sets or resets a bit in response to Mg fos wevownncng X tag response to host PLC word address changes In response to changes in the host s PLC s bit address lists alarm Display messages registered in the Alarm Editor at the bottom of the screen Trend Graph Displays a trend graph that shows the change of a value overtime in the 1 host s PLC s word address data GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 1 5 1 3 Tag List Alphabetical Order Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types Design your own program and execute it on the GP to provide additional D Script display functions D script programs also help to reduce the PLC s data display load Data Sampling Designated Word Address data can be stored in the LS Area in time Settings series order Logging Logs and stores the PLC s data to the backup SRAM periodically or when Function the PLC triggers Also the logged data can be stored in a CF card Sound Output Sounds are output according to the host s bit changes
173. Input A ange F Input Code i Value re E a Mo Code 7 Value js iE oh 7 MSB D Cancer F Cancel Hep W Line Type Color Channel Settings en Type E ATT Fo WE oek I Bo OSS CE Noek F ok Cancel Hep Pte N not be drawn properly W Alarm Settings Channel Settings General Info Data Format Line Type Color Alarm Settings Min Value Max Value Alarm Color Fo OOO Noe Fl bo OOS OBE noek I GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual General Info Data Format Line Type Color Alarn Settings 2 30 Trend Graph Display Input Range Min Value Max Value Defines a range for data stored in the Word Address The possible setup ranges differ with the set Code Input Input Code No Code When set to None only positive values be come available 2 s Complement 2 s complement format is used for nega tive values MSB MSB format is used for negative values Line Type Select a line type from the 8 different line types to choose from Color Defines the Foreground Fg and Back ground Bg colors and Blink Blk at tributes When the alarm is ON the colors set here are referred to as the normal dis play colors MAEA 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag When using a dotted line please be sure to set the pitch to a value greater than 16 dots If the pitch is set to a smaller value the line may Alarm Display When data read
174. Input Color Settings ta Auto Clear ON r a Auto Clear amp Input Check Display Color Defines the display color Fg background color Bg and blink attributes Blk of the touch keys When the alarm color is set think of the color attributes set here as the normal display When displaying a numeric value using a K tag on a filled object set up the background colors the same for both the object and K tag Ge re For details about the color attributes setting NS 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Display Style Shift Left The data appears aligning to the left Shift Right The data appears aligning to the right Zero Suppress Selecting this option eliminates the lead ing zeros of the displayed data If not se lected zeros will appear preceding the value to fill the Display Digit e g when the Display Digit is set to 4 data 25 ap pears as 0025 2 102 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions K Tag Setting Arithmetic Operation l Display Angle l l Data Format Size Style Display Format Ho of Display bits E JE Decimal Places pS Select Indirect Address Area is dea difter Display diiess i Apea after Base dididiess Alarm Settings General Info Display Size ox16 m Color Type Direct 3 Indirect Color Settings Display Color Fg A ek Boe eed Display Style a review fe Shift Lett m Zer Suppress Shift Right T Zero Display p
175. J Loaging ON OFF gt gt fe Special ta Economy 9 Bit Method Data Logging Start Address Ho of Words Stark Time H M Finish Time ph fe MP fs Curation H Ma 5 Read Cont E Block Court Data Logging Auth Bit Address 0000 pa 0000 0000 eee Block s Finish Bit Address File Full Bit Address Data Clear Bit Address Chapter 4 Advanced Features Block Count Designate the number of data blocks Data logged for the number of blocks designated here is handled as a file When designat ing data logging time data for a block 1s logged per day 1 lt Times x Blocks lt 2048 Data Logging Auth Bit Address Designate the PLC s Bit Address When the Bit Address designated here is turned ON and it becomes the designated logging time data logging is performed PLC to GP Block s Finish Bit Address Designate the PLC s Bit Address When data logging is completed one time the Bit Address designated here is turned ON GP to PLC After the PLC detects that the Bit Address is turned ON turn it OFF File Full Bit Address Designate the PLC s Bit Address When data logging is completed for block the Bit Address designated here is turned ON GP to PLC After the PLC detects the Bit Address is turned ON turn it OFF Data Clear Bit Address Designate the PLC s Bit Address When the Bit Address designated here 1s turned ON data stored in the backup SRAM 1s deleted After the data is deleted GP tu
176. L ELECTRONICS CORP MADE IN JAPAN GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 195 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Q tag time format In the Q tag time format settings the following are selectable when the displayed time range is between 0 and 9 o clock The GP77 series GP377 series and GP2000 series support this function e 0 00 0 00 9 00 _ represents the space character e 00 00 00 00 09 00 Add 0 for double digit display Example Display using the 00 00 setting format Date Alarm Message Check Recovery 00 06 06 02 00 No 1 pump closed 04 00 06 50 The above settings apply to the following e displaying the alarm message on the screen e printing out the alarm message e saving the alarm message in a CSV file 2 196 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag 2 20 10 Q tag Alarm Summary s CSV File Storage Example When opening the Q tag s CSV file stored in a CF card on the Excel For CSV file storage refer to Operation Manual 9 1 Overview This function is effective only for the GP77R and GP2000 series e CSV File lt History gt 99 ee a 6699 6699 6699 Number of Message s eee 6699 6699 6699 6699 6699 bi 2 2 gt Trigger Date Trigger Time Message s Acknowledge Time Recovery Time 98 06 15 10 05 35 B tank Pressure Trouble
177. L Jel Repeat Flay ON meee ee a xooon2 Fl e foriginal File Na TE Information was 1 i Select a desired repeat play method from Repeat play Play and Play Bit Off Designate the Sound Stop status 1 e ON or OFF 4 1 4 Sound Output Setting Example After all the necessary items are desig nated save the sound settings See the picture on the following page This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 7 4 1 Sound Output Chapter 4 Advanced Features Es Sound Settings 7 Sound Edit Convert View Help Bee ie OE TE a r ie a peee El 2nternat ej pot comprgRerest Play ejon rimatn infomatoney e po pjece Eliot comert ION El infomation intrmationway loge ee ee oee a oen Hho s H H ioe Ta e 007 E zcanternaty F pot comerta teit OFF OFF JE intomaton infomatonway eE e e l a COREENE Repeat Play a ON eee Sound Data Output W Play mode Repeat play Sound Stop Disabled Trigger Bit Address oFF Thank you Thank you Thank you Sound Sound output is not canceled W Play mode Repeat play Sound Stop Enabled Trigger Bit Address OFF Thank you Thank you Thank y iy Sound 7 Sound output is canceled W Play mode Play Sound Stop Disabled Trigger Bit Address GFF Sound Thank you Thank vbr Soun
178. LS005000 Trigger bit ON with T tag Execution Formula Determine whether extended SIO protocol is present if s EXT SIO STAT15 1 Initialize the transmit receive process t 0000 0 t 0001 1 t 0002 0 t 0003 0 c EXT_ SIO CTRL00 1 c EXT_SIO CTRLO1 1 c EXT_SIO_CTRL02 1 t 0010 0 t 0011 0 b LS005100 1 endif GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Clear sent flag Clear sent flag Clear the transmit receive processing completion flag Initialize receive timer Clear send buffer Clear receive buffer Clear error Initialize timer Which transmit receive process should be run first Set up the communication permission flag 3 49 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features Transmit Receive Function 1 COMM READ1 Execution Formula if t 0001 1 Has reception completed Call TRANS FUNC RI Transmission of data 1 read command if t 0000 1 Has data 1 read command been transmitted Is the transmit completion flag set t 0001 0 Clear the receive completion flag t 0003 10 Set the receive timer endif endif if t 0001 1 Has transmission completed Call RCV_FUNC RI Receiving the response to the data 1 read command if t 0000 1 Has data 1 read command been received Is the receive completion flag set t 0000 0 Clear the transmit completion flag
179. Lists alarm messages registered in the Alarm Editor in historical Display Q tag order and in response to host PLC bit changes The messages Alarm Summary in this summary display can be listed as either active history or Display log When used in combination with other tags messages can be checked deleted or sub displayed S tag Displays character string data stored in the host s PLC s word String Display jaddress X tag Display T ext Data Action W Writes data to a word address or either sets or resets a bit in Write to Device response to host PLC word address changes GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Displays text data only characters registered on a T ext screen in response to host PLC word address changes Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types 1 4 Tag List Function Order Screen Function Name Comments Operation U tag Window In response to host PLC word address changes this function Display places a window screen over the currently displayed Base screen Window This tag is supported only by the GP 5 70VM GP 870VM models Display V tag Video and GP2500 2600 with a VM unit This tag lays a special window Window Display screen used for displaying video data over the currently displayed Base screen Up to three different video channels can be used Data Sampling Adesired Word Address data can be stored in the LS Area in time Filing Data _ Filing data such as the
180. M Compatible International Business Machines Corporation IBM USA The following terms differ from the above mentioned formal trade names and trademarks Windows 95 Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System Windows 98 Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System Windows NT Microsoft Windows NT Operating System MS DOS Microsoft MS DOS Operating System 2 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL E Structure of this Manual The Tag Reference manual is the second of four manuals for this product and explains how to use the GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 soft ware hereinafter referred to as this product Please refer to all of these manuals when using this product In addition to these manuals data files containing supplemental information on updated functions are also provided To read these files click on the Start button in your Windows OS main screen and select the Programs ProPB3 Win menu Then click on the Read Me selection For detailed information about GP series products please refer to each GP s User s Manual Optionally available Describes this product s operation procedures and Vol 1 Operation Manual all standard functions provided as PDF data z 9 Reference Describes the functions and detailed settings for all Manual this manual GP PRO PBIII T ags prov
181. MS N e E E E E E AAE 2 247 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Dee AAO Eal E epetic cc sess EEE merge teneteecereeemotenen earees 2 249 2 28 VV FAG Write to DEVICE occas scot ctsncedsosensebucdetonessnenaacesotenevecesnecsaconansueusiequsesionens 2 251 De ICE eae NE seins ete est EE fesse poses NENEN 2 251 PAIL SO ADOTE N A nee ee Re ene EEE eee ee 2 252 PARP See Mmmm OSU WN C2 ee en ee ee or een eee E enon Tee 2 253 De NA Ue TA See pecs se A AE E E EE EA 2 257 2 29 X tas Display Text Data crcscccsa yee c tcc ctctecscs ees ctncetssetecavesceuceseseccesvescuncetssocciaves 2 259 2D OVE EN a A A 2 259 Ld ADOM A E Sars snag vase E N E EAA ARTET 2 259 n NS E E AE ENIE A AEE E OOA 2 261 P T E E e E E E A A A T 2 264 2 30 Trend Graph Display sisissseseerssisrisrsrosssnsiscusintsuo rris uunin aeccecvecedecassueceseccsectees 2 267 2302 About Trend Grap iS eer ee me a ne ree EEE E eee eee eii 2 267 LE OI Nee cesses E E E ENEN E E E AE ANE A ENAA 2 267 20 Hane Te 1 G2 0 1 eer E E EEr 2 270 230A Channel eN er E secgaaceseauaneeanesasceeeaaunceaeecaectes 2 275 2 30 5 Block Display Mode for PLC Direct Access o oo cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 278 2 30 6 Trend Graph Data s CSV File Storage Example ccccccccccccccceeeeeesssesseseseeees 2 282 CHAPTER 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script sssecsssssseccccccccsssssccccoccsssssececoocssssssceccocsssssscceco
182. Manual 2 6 Registering Windows ZEN e Image Library screens can also be displayed as libraries using the same plot Note ting method as Base screens Na GP PRO PB III for Windows Operation Manual 3 5 Creating an Image the Image Screen e The center coordinates of each model of GP panel are as shown in the table below GP 570 GP 571 GP 470 GP 870VM GP 477R GP 577R_ GP 377R GP 2600 GP 2400 GP 2500 Screen Center Coordinates 320 200 320 240 160 120 400 300 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 125 2 14 L tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 14 5 Display Timing The timing chart below shows the relationship between the image on the screen the value of the trigger bit and the L tag Trigger Type after a screen change lt Example gt B1 B2 SCreer 1 ocreen 2 Screen Change w eL tag setting Trigger Type 0 gt 1 Library to Load Vy E Timing Chart Because the bit was set ON Screen Change I 2 before the screen change the L tag is displayed Bit ON OFF Display Screen Change i xX 2 Because the bit was set OFF before the screen change the Bit ON re a library does not display After OFF the screen change the library will display when the bit is set Display ON 2 126 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 14 L tag 2 14 6 Erase Mode Settings The library display chang
183. Messages Ack Recovered The distance from the Alarm Summary dis play area s left end is specified in the half character 8 dot unit When 0 is speci fied that item will not be displayed GP 270 does not have this setting 2 20 9 GP System Area QO tag settings Date Specifies the date display format Time Specifies the time display format 12 00 and 24 00 designate the display format of hour and minute 12 00 00 and 24 00 00 designate the dis play format of hour minute and second 2 176 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W Size Color Tag Setting General Into Display Mode Display Format Size Color Sub Display I Display Angle 2D ot Display Size Cursor Size Ee a ew oas Trigger Color Fo iE No ek Tl Ba OO OOM No Bk Acknowledge Color Fo POCO Me maT Bo BOR OOM ES a Recover Text s Color Fo OOM COMF nook F Bo BOR OOM Nobk IF Erase Color Ba OOS OOS ok P Cancel ff Her 2 20 Q tag Display Size Text characters used in the display can be 16 32 64 or 128 dots high and 8 16 32 or 64 dots wide The basic unit of mea surement is a Single byte character 1 e lt Single byte Character gt 8 dots 16 dots Cursor Size Designates the cursor line thickness Trigger Color Defines the foreground color Fg back ground c
184. NG lamp ON The host PLC uses M0003 as the trigger bit Program Example Trigger b M0002 Execution if b M0001 amp b M0002 bit set set b M0003 else Il bit clear Clear b M0003 clear b M0002 endif 3 32 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script 3 1 11 D Script Extended SIO Function E Outline of Function The extended SIO extended serial I F can be utilized with D Script en abling easy communication RS 232C with D Script Receive Function IO_READ p EXT_SIO LS Storage Address Transfer Bytes Send Function IO_WRITE p EXT_SIO LS Storage Address Transfer Bytes Control Bit Write c EXT_SIO_CTR Write Only 00 to 15 Word Write c EXT_SIO_CTRL Write Only Status Bit Position s EXT_SIO_STAT Read Only 00 to 15 Word Position s EXT_SIO_STAT Read Only Number of Bytes of r EXT_SIO_RCV Read Only Received Data The extended SIO extended serial I F is available with the D Script which enables an easy communication RS 232C with the D Script 1 Receive Function The following command 1s used to read the received data from the extended SIO e Format IO READ p EXT SIO LS Storage Address Transfer Bytes e Example IO_READ p EXT_ SIO w LS0100 10 Description Argument Example Contents I O Variable p EXT_SIO
185. Notes on XOR Display L tag WE Displayed Library screens can be designated in three different ways D1 rect Indirect and State E If Screen Access is set to Direct the tag is fixed to a single screen E If Screen Access is set to Indirect different library screens can be set to the same tag by simply changing the screen file number in the designated word address An offset value can be set up for the screen file number E If Screen Access is set to State library screens can change according to the state of data in the designated bit length Register library screens you would like to display with these consecutive screen numbers By designating the Offset Screen No the library changes automatically corresponding to changes in data 1 When display figures overlap the display pixel turns OFF XOR display function GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 14 L tag acme Using L tags W General Info L Tag Setting General Info Tag Name Description Word Address Bit Address Trigger Type W Designated Screen Direct nfo Designated Screen 2 Indirect 1 State e rigger Type Trigger Bit Address rase Mode SIES E koooon F FE 5 No 1 gt 0 on creen E Fo Typ 1 Image Screen CF Card ee cc GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual L Tag Setting
186. Number i w Video Window Display Zoom Input Channel Mo p Jg JF Touch Panel Operation Display Size 1 Normal A Zoom Changes the video screen size between Normal and Zoom Transparent Mode if None 2 Selected color shows over video iy Colors other than selected show over video E Place of V tag The video area of the GP70 series VM is 600 x 480 the GP2000 series NTSC is 640 x 480 and PAL is 768 x 576 pixels The following tag marks and ghosts are displayed with the V tag in the V5 0 i GP70 series VM area GP2000 series NTSC area GP2000 series PAL area Video display area When the video display area is placed the PAL area on the GP2000 series is clipped When the video display area for the GP2000 series and other GP series is set up to use NTSC which exceeds the video area the NTSC will not work correctly The display area is rounded within the video area This function is only avaliable with the GP 570VM 870VM and GP 2500 2600 with the VM unit GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 27 V tag wae tag Examples Video inputs from Channel 0 and Channel 1 are used to show examples of screen monitoring and Video Control Area ID number changes Base screen SCREEN MONITOR CHO CH1 TI T2 Base screen 1 Tag Settings Channel Tl Address LS8 oe Data 0002 T2 Address LS20 Data 0001 Base sc
187. O PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types 1 2 Active Image Functions Exception 2 U tags for Global Windows are created in the GP System Configuration window and the window s display is controlled in the System Area 2 27 Window Display U tag Exception 3 a tags are normally created on Base screens however some parameters such as display messages must be registered on Alarm Editor screens 2 2 Alarm Summary Display a tag E Create an Alarm Message Display To create an Alarm Message display use the Alarm Editor to edit the mes sages and set the related parameters You can also use the Alarm Editor to set the order in which messages are displayed or to display the messages in the order that they occur After all settings are entered save the screen and download it to the GP The GP will then display alarm messages based on your settings E Create a Trend Graph Display To create a Trend Graph display use the Trend Graph screen to enter the required parameters After creating the screen save it and load it onto a Base screen Next download all the related screens to the GP which will then display E D Script Reduces Your PLC Programming D Script programs are created via the D Script editor As a substitu tion to the PLC ladder program for display language type script pro gramming D Script can be used to create a display program Thus the GP can per
188. P PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 2 0 or later is not deleted W Axis Settings Screen Settings 100 of Height e e eee Senet _ Define the maximum data position of the D Y axis here and set it directly on the screen Pitch Defines the space in dots between each data displayed The pitch designated here is the first point of the trend line The next data also displays with the same space be tween it and the previous data Display Data Amount in one screen Defines how many data samplings are dis played on one trend graph line in one screen Til Redraw Display Ir Irr I rr mm mm fom Pitch ire __ Display Data Amount wo Bb Scroll Erase Color BOSOM J Fill Below Line ok Cancel P Hep lt Screen Setup Range gt GP 570 GP 577R GP 270 GP H70 GP 470 GP 2400 GP 370 GP 377R GP 675 GP 477R GP2500 GP 377 GP 2600 640X400 dot 640X480 dot 320X240 dot 800X600 dot Seting fers AN e The Origin Point Height and Pitch vary depending on the GP s screen size Note and orientation Landscape or Portrait e Set the Axis Setting so that trend graph lines do not exceed the graph display area GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 271 2 30 Trend Graph Display Chapter 2 Active Image Functions ZEN The table below describes possible values that can be set for the Scale if Note only one Trend graph channel is used
189. P PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features E D script SIO Function D script Settings 3 1 D Script Global D Script The extended SIO extended serial I F is available with the D Script which enables easy communication RS 232C with the D Script 3 1 11 D script Extended SIO Function SIO_READ Function S10 _ READ Function SIO Fort Mo Recieve Butter Top Address Recieve Size SIO_WRITE Function SIO WRITE Function SIO Fort Ho Send Buffer impr Top Address Laiti z Send Size GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual This function reads received data from the extended SIO port e SIO Port No Select the SIO port used for re ceiving data e Receive Buffer Top Address Select the first word address used for storing the received data Data indicating the size of the received data is stored in the first word address e Receive Size Select the number of bytes of data to be received This function writes send data to the extended SIO port e SIO Port No Select the SIO port used for sending data e Send Buffer Top Address Select the first word address used for storing the sent data e Send Size Select the number of bytes of data to be sent 3 19 Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script Label Settings 3 20 e Word settings Label Settings Label Settings e LABEL
190. P577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 19 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features Write Settings From Filing Data To SRAM e Control Word Address Designate a Word Address to use as a trigger or designate the mode to use when writing to backup SRAM This trigger controls the data write timing lt Filing Data SRAM gt When using multiple filing data items designate the folder numbers The Control Word Address will be as follows When Using Multiple Folders When Not Using Multiple Folders 0 Trigger Mode 0 Trigger Mode 1 Folder No 1 to lt Trigger Mode gt 0 1 10987 Trigger ON Write OFF Not write 5 1 Reservation Reservation All OFF All OFF I Witemode 9 8 Mode 0 Screen data to SRAM CF card to SRAM The allowed folder number ranges are as follows GP internal memory 1 to 64 CF card 1 to 8999 e Write Completed Bit Address Designate a specific Bit Address to be turned ON when the data write to GP backup SRAM is completed Sr If data cannot be transmitted to backup SRAM due to insufficient memory lt Note LS2032 s Bit 9 will be turned ON When data is transmitted to backup SRAM X again use either the designated communication cycle time or 150ms which ever is longer as the trigger s OFF time For communication cycle time details ieee PLC Connection Manual 1 1 5 Special Relays pL
191. PLC there may be instances when the character string does not display correctly In that case pro gram the host PLC to use the send wait to slightly delay the trigger bit change The send wait period depends on the amount of tags set scan time baud rate and the number of characters used Because S tag handles character string data it must process more data com pared to other tags which leads to longer communication times To display character data quicker use the following steps If there are only a few character strings to display register each string onto individual Base screens as libraries and then use L tags to display them If there are not many characters used in the character string set the Trigger Type to Indirect which does not use a trigger bit If the character string is longer use of the trigger bit will enable the displays to switch more quickly GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 22 S tag RIED UsingStags S W General Info S Tag Setting The General Info page provides informa Gereral Into Display Mode size Style Dienlyange tion about the current settings for the S Tag Name 5 on tag Description Lr eo __ Tag Name Word Address Dooo00 Tigger Bit Adekess x00000 Must be no more than five Single byte or a ace i two Double byte characters long and com Display Angle 0 degrees posed of letters and or symb
192. PREFACE Thank you for purchasing the GP Screen Editor Software GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 for use with Pro face s GP series operator interfaces Please read this manual carefully in order to use this software properly and be sure to keep this manual handy for future reference 1 The copyrights to all programs and manuals included in the GP PRO PB HI for Windows Ver 5 0 hereinafter referred to as this product are reserved by the Digital Electronics Corporation Digital grants the use of this product to its users as described in the Software Operating Conditions documentation included with this product s CD ROM Any actions violating the above mentioned conditions are prohibited by both Japanese and foreign regulations 2 The contents of this manual have been thoroughly inspected How ever 1f you should find any errors or omissions 1n this manual please inform your local GP representative of your findings 3 Regardless of article 2 the Digital Electronics Corporation shall not be held responsible for any damages or third party claims resulting from the use of this product 4 Differences may occur between the descriptions found in this manual and the actual functioning of this product Therefore the latest infor mation on this product is provided in data files i e Readme txt files etc and in separate documents Please consult these sources as well as this manual prior to using the product 5 Even
193. RO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 12 K tag Key Input rt PA Notes on Entering BCD Data 1 Usable Keys The following keys can be used to enter BCD data ODE Valid keys 0 9 and decimal point The decimal point will be used as a cursor movement key The code 0Dh to represent the decimal point is not written to the host with decimal places Alarm enabled no decimal places 0 9 and decimal point minus plus E and colon The decimal point will be used as a cursor movement key The code 0Dh to represent the decimal point is not written to the host with decimal places Alarm disabled 0 9 and decimal point When a decimal point is entered the code ODh is written to the host to represent a decimal point no decimal places When decimal places are in use the decimal point on the touch keyboard becomes a cursor movement key which switches the cursor between the integer and decimal area This operation also applies when the Data Format is set to Dec E g Cursor position Cursor position in integer area in decimal area Position Integer Decimal The cursor moves to the left The cursor moves to the right most digit in the decimal area most digit in the integer area 2 Using the Negative Code When entering BCD data the negative code is included in the Display Digi
194. Right Displays the data in the selected align ment Zero Suppress When this check box is not checked zeros are added to the front of numbers to match the Display Length E g When the Dis play Length is 4 and Zero Suppress is OFF value 25 will appear as 0025 2 164 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 19 P tag W Alarm Setting P Tag Setting Alarm Display Beneta Irig pereme Diese Turn this option ON to display the alarm arm 2 ettings __ Display Angle Display Angle Display Format Display Foma display Alarm Type Alarm Type Alarm Range ey Direct Min Value pi Direct Indirect Hox vae s E Defines the upper and lower limits for the alarm range Alarm Color Fo BETTNA e paces Bo Om eK When this option is selected the upper and lower limits are stored in the consecutive ae word addresses following the set Word Ad dress Alarm Range Min Value Max Value When the Indirect is not set for the Alarm Type set the alarm minimum and maxi mum values here The possible setup range changes according to the Data For mat Alarm Color If the data exceeds the alarm range the Alarm display appears in the designated colors lt Alarm Range list gt Data Format Rande ae E E E SS oct o TT Tin o o ee 098967295 c H C so o o ooo GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 165 2 19 P tag Chapter 2
195. Settings Extended SIO communication settings are set with the drawing editor on the GP system or off line Settings Setting Setting Range Initial Value Transmission speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 9600 bos baud rate 38400 bps i Data Length 7 8 bits Siop Bi 12 bis None Odd Even None GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script E Example Communication Using Extended SIO The command to read from of the variable area a communication command for Omron s thermoregulator is described below in a simple example In the variable area to be read the current value indicated by the thermostat and the target value are illustrated The current value and the target value are read out every 10 seconds through communication between the GP and the thermostat The following 1s an illustration of the communication E Data Format 10 seconds bo Ed Current value Target value Current value Target value is read is read is read is read The following data format is used to communicate with the thermoregulator Read out of the current value e Command Frame 24 bytes BCC calculation range ___ oo fof ifoftofotojtrf otr cfo STX NodeNo Sub address SID MRC SRC Type of variable ae Oo Of Of Of Of 0 jojojo 1 0x03 0x40 Starting read address Bit positon Number ofelementt ETX BCC e Response Frame 26 bytes BCC calculation range Il
196. Settings Constant Set up a fixed value of 32768 to 32767 Dec BCD Hex Also set up the data format for the con stant Relational Symbols T Tag Setting General Info Mode Options fi Bit EA ward CH Special Bit Address Relational Symbols f lt thes Pie gt b gt bes E3 Auto Off Group J Interlock Interlock Address Eo e Touch available condition E Bit Om ch Bit Oth lt lt gt gt gt Select a symbol used in the compari son The way of comparison is as fol lows S1 Symbol S2 S1 Word address data S2 Constant 2 212 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions T Tag Setting Eear Mode Emere fe Bit EA Word i Special Group No Touch available condition ci Bit Ora C Bip Oth OF Cancel Help SP tes 2 23 T tag Group Group No T tag with the same number as the Group No specified here will function as a ra dio switch state switch GP 270 Series units do not support this feature The T tag on a base screen is not regarded as the same group as the T tag which is called up by U tag from the different screen T Tag Setting General rio Mode Option ce Bit Fo Word C3 Special Bit Address Group Mo es Joooo00 F 7 Bit Access DI Momentary Eo Invert C Compare O Group JI Interlock Interlock Address o E
197. Setup or the GP s INITIALIZE OFF line menu To operate the Global Window Display use the Global Window Setup in GP s INITIALIZE OFF line menu or Program Manager s Setup area If the Device Monitor is loaded during the Global Window Display the Glo bal Window Display will end temporarily It will appear again after the De vice Monitor ends To use the Device Monitor Indirect and Bin should be selected for the Window Setting yaya Local Window Display Local Window Displays are set up on individual Base screens using U tags These windows are exclusive to the corresponding screen Multiple numbers of U tags can be set on each Base screen however the number of windows that can be displayed simultaneously is up to two If multiple U tags have been set up operate so that only necessary windows display on the screen Window display controls are performed at the designated word address Direct Access Indirect Access 1 Window Registration no 2 Window Display Coordinates X axis 3 Window Display Coordinates Y axis Each bit function for the Window Control is the same as in the Global Window Set the Window Display Position s X coordinate data in 8 dot intervals GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 26 U tag E General Info U Tag Setting The General Info page provides information General Into Designated Window about the curren
198. The basic unit of mea surement is a Single byte character 1 e Tag Setting General Info Mode Size Style Display Angle Display Size Display Format re Mo of Display Char 40 Display Color Fo OOS OOM noek IF B9 BOOM Hoek Ir Erase Color Cal BOs ONF lt Single byte Character gt 8 dots 16 dots Display Format No of Display Lines Designates the number of rows of text data displayed on one screen The maximum number of rows 1s 40 No of Display Char Designates the number of characters Single byte displayed for each row EN The number of display lines and character length depends on the GP screen Note size GP direction and Display Size 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Display Color Designates the color attributes Foreground Fg Background Bg and Blink Blk used in the Text display Erase Color Designates the color attributes for areas where messages are not displayed If the GP screen is monochrome this should be set to black E Display Angle Display Angle General Info Mode Size Style Display Angle Designates the degree of display rotation Se lect from 0 zero 90 180 or 270 degrees Display Angle i 0 degrees 7 90 degrees 7 180 degrees i 270 degrees Toe cared ner _ GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 263 2 29 X tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions rwa X
199. Touch available condition Bit On Ch Bib Oth Toe caee ner _ Bit Access Type Group a a fet Set CA Invert Jl Auto OFF Time sec Ch t C Reset o g Ct Momentary Auto Off Group The Auto Off Group setting is sup ported by only GP77R Series GP377 Series and GP2000 Series units Group No The group number can be from 0 to 63 Auto Off Time Sec The value can be from to 60 seconds Bit Access Type Group The following explains each touch panel screen square Set Touching this square turns this T tag s bit ON and all other T tag bits OFF Invert Touching this square inverts only the touched T tag s bit and turns all other T tag bits OFF Momentary Touching this square causes a momen tary change for only the touched T tag s bit and all other T tag bits will turn OFF GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual e The time period monitor will be enabled only when the GP s _ display changes to a screen where a T tag s Auto OFF Group Important setting is used Also the time period monitor operates indepen dently for each group so that if a group s T tag is touched only that group s time period monitor will restart e If the display is changed or if the window is closed this bit will automatically turn OFF 2 213 2 23 T tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Mode Word Word T Tag Setting Sets the designated data to the word ad General Into
200. WAV data Compress Displays sound data s compression status 1 e compressed or not compressed Play Mode e Repeat play e Play e Play Bit Off Sound Stop Selects the sound data s output cancel conditions 1 e if cancellation 1s Enabled or not Title Displays the selected sound data s title Original Wav File Names Displays the file names that were converted to a WAV data file Se te Up to 128 types of sounds can be set up 2 This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 3 4 1 Sound Output Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 gt Sound Output Setting Examples E Creating Sound Data _screen Setup Select the Project Manager s Project Editor menu Sound Settings command GF Setup Alarm Sound Settings Filing Data Data Logging Settings Device Monitor Symbol Editor Sound Settings Sound Edt Convert View Help Click on the icon or select Convert Ae reae lele E liei OTa menu Create Sound Data command ee Repeat F OE Repeat F Repeat F a a i q z E ae U 2 oe ES ace I eds Ed Create Sound Data Wave File Name __ Click on the Browse button Select a file CSod Dasniomaion Browse feo to be converted or enter the file name Output To a Then select the data write destination and E Int
201. When the Input Designation is Indi rect the Range Designation is speci Color Type No of Ranges is ari 2 Indirect is ago Designated Word Address Display Data 0 lt Range 01 lt 100 ia Eo i Range 1 A Pattern E N pee os my Range 3 Lower limit data Lower Limit Vate 0 YRS bisoa Colo Input range Max er Limit Yale 100 Fo eo E 7 Upper Limit w al fo le Bo Ol ek Input range Min fied to Indirect and No of Ranges Range Settings Color Settings Curent Value C tolas Blacks Range 2 Lower limit data Color Block s This setting 1s valid when No of Ranges is 2 or more When this number is 2 and the data value exceeds the one specified for Range 1 with the Color Block function selected Range 1 and Range 2 will be displayed in the previ ously specified colors When the Color Block function 1s not selected the color will be changed to the one specified for Range 2 The GP 270 however does not have this setting 4 When Color Block When Color Block is selected is not selected Pattern Select the fill pattern for the graph Display Color After selecting a range number in the sample graph set the display color for that range here 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 77 E Display Angle General Info Data Format Graph Type A ange Color Display Angle g Tag Setting Display Angle 90 degrees i om 180 degr
202. When the start screen number for the sub screen display is set to Indirect set up from the start to erase screens Also DO NOT change the start screen number during sub screen display e When Indirect is selected for the sub screen display settings a single Tag is counted as two tags GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 17 2 1 A tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions yay Color Settings The foreground Fg and background Bg color settings use the color bar illustrated below where you can select from 8 different colors Also the Blink option can be set ON OFF by clicking the Blk box When using 8 colors Text Color Fo DN A a I e ole oe When using 64 colors Text Color are e Bo MF Noek FF When using 256 colors Display Color fo BIO imm a o BOO Erase Color Dm A m Za e When using a monochrome GP Black Blue Green and Cyan display in black Note Red Magenta Yellow and White will appear white NA Do not select Black with the BIk option turned ON for tags and alarm messages 2 18 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 1 A tag Follow the steps below to set Blink Reverse and Blink Reverse settings Blink ABC flashing display Test Color Fo E White Flash Bg O A A Blk T Black Normal display No Blinking Reverse BU freverse display Text Color Fg NET
203. When using 8 color display lt Overlapping Colors List gt Bue Green Cyan Red Magenta Yellow White Blue Black Cyan Green Magenta Red White Yellow Green Cyan Black Blue Yellow White Red Magenta Cyan Green Blue Black White Yellow Magenta Red Red Magenta Yellow White Black Blue Green Cyan Magenta Red White Yellow Blue Black Cyan Green Yellow White Red Magenta Green Cyan Black Blue White Yellow Magenta Red Cyan Green Blue Black Overlapping the same colors causes it to turn black E g A library is loaded into a Base screen below e tag setting Trigger Type 0 gt Screen Access Direct Screen No 300 r Display color set to RED When the bit is ON B300 displays to make it look like a lamp has turned ON e B300 To display the word Problem in YELLOW J then the word Problem originally must be set in GREEN GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 131 2 14 L tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 132 When using 64 color display Since there are so many colors with 64 color display colors are indicated by color codes lt Color code gt oo o1 o2 03 04 05 06 07 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 lt RGB Code Table gt RGB Code 00 00h 60 Fh 01 Olh 02 Oh 03 03h 04 04h
204. Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script Bit Length Designates the D Script data bit length as either 16 bits or 32 bits Code Please refer to this table when entering negative numeric data Data Format Constant Entry ae 65535 4294967295 Binte Bin2 0 Bin16 32768 32767 Bin32 2147483648 2147483647 BCD16 0 9999 BCD32 1 0 99999999 When a D Script s command follows another D Script s com i mand enter a space between these commands TETT For example if the not command follows the and command spacing is needed between the commands andnot Incorrect The operation will not be performed and an error message will display on the software screen and not Correct Trigger Trigger ig 23 Timer Duration 7 ON ow fi fot titef e Trigger These selections designate the type of trigger used to activate your program The possible options are Timer Bit Rising Bit Falling Expression becomes Non Zero and Expression becomes Zero FE e Timer Settings When the designated time elapses the statements described in the Action area of your program are performed The timer duration can be set from 1 to 32767 seconds The timer restarts its counting when the designated time elapses Edge Bit Address GN or l FIE i taf i e Bit Rising When the GP detects the design
205. Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 1 INDEX IVA CAS a E E E 2 137 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 PEE A EATA 4 25 4 26 4 31 Mark Display Using Indirect Mode 2 141 INAS e A 2 143 AS E E O 2 153 Notes on Entering BCD Data 2 105 Notes on Operation Results 3 23 Notes On XOR Display 2 125 Object Drawing Data eeeee 2 78 Offset SEMIN GS rcsarsninescnsnedoanrendausieartice 2 124 Overlapping Colors on a Color GP 2 127 eu PLAS a e eaaa 2 157 P tag Example Setups 2 163 PRECAUTIONS esccccevsenaccinasnoceuramencenses 15 I ces ctaserea tc ces etn S l Pi en erene EEN ere 4 68 4 89 4 91 4 93 4 95 4 99 CHD DAA E E E EA 2 165 Q tag Alarm Summary s CSV File Storage EnD aer EO 2 190 Q tag Examples ccnccesceviccavetes 2 177 2 179 Q tag Restrictions 2 169 2 170 CD BAD aeoea E 2 191 Relative Data Display Settings 2 151 Roll Up and Roll Down Keys 2 183 Sa E E A EE E 2 195 Safety Symbols and Terms 14 Sereen File Types wisesuscavsseesseersdenseeseceses l 1 Screen Level Change Direction 2 216 Setting Up T tags cisvsrsiassncaseeasveraaiadees 2 211 Sound Data Output ee 4 4 4 8 Sound OUIDUL secacsersscesrsctnracaeecesncardaan 4 1 Sound Output Settings cseseeeeee 4 2 Special Features xc iaccicnssneectasenece 3 1 4 1 T E E 2 201 UV E P A E P E 2
206. Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 1 9 1 4 Tag List Function Order Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types New GP PRO PBIII for Windows 5 0 Functions and GP Availability GP GP GP GP GP GP GP GP GP GP VM VM R R R W2 L S 00 00 x x x x x x x Jo o o x x x ololo x xjxjojojo settings for data transfer dimension code reader Compatible with serial 1 dimension bar code reader Q tag Expansion of time X XIXI IXI X X I XIX format T tag momentary one X XIXI IX X X I XIX shot buzzer Number of logging X XIXIXIX X X X X X X X XJ X words 255 O Supported Depends on model X Not supported 2 A middle size Multi Unit E is necessary to enable this function 3 A large size Multi Unit E or GP Ethernet I F unit is necessary to enable this function bg GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types 1 4 Tag List Function Order E General GP PRO PBIII for Windows Features O supported specified products only X Not supported GP GP H70 cp GP GP GP GP i Function Name GP 370 GP 57JS 270 470 570 571 675 ae ee a ai a T a a oi GP rare Alarm summary General uncion General incon function Todda Text screen sub A tag display screen indirect seting Alarm summary display General function a tag Time display General function o o o o o Back ground 5 x C tag color Bg tling ANEU Statistical graph
207. Word Select either the EXT SIO _CTRL control EXT SIO fe word i Bit STAT status ExT SIO CTRL i EXT_SIO_RCV size of re ceived data setting Description Control for General Extended SIO Protocol e Bit Settings e LABEL Bit ae Select either the EXT SIO Lo Word i Bit CTRL control EXT SIO Bi aes STAT status EXT SIO RCV size of re LABEL EXT_SIO_CTRL F ceived data setting Description Control for General Extended SIO Protocal Bit Clear Send Buffer e Bit_pos only for Bit Designates the bit s position GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script E Functions A D Script program can be created using Functions A program created as a Function can be used on the same screen or on other screens The Functions can be used commonly for D Script and Global D Script The GP 270 does not support this feature Call Functions Select a Function name to be loaded and then click on this button After clicking on the Load button the called up Func tion name will be displayed in the for mula area Edit Select a Function name to be edited and then click on this button Use the D Script Function dialog box to perform editing Delete Click on this button to delete the created Function First select a Function name Call I New to be deleted and then click on the Delete Edit Delete button Copy Past
208. Write Completed Bit Address LS2032 Bit 9 Normal data transmission Data transmission eror EN This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 20 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function PLC amp SRAM Data Transmission Settings Here select the method used to transmit filing data either from backup SRAM to the PLC or from the PLC to backup SRAM Select this setting when per forming automatic data transmission using the Contorl Word Address feature lt SRAM gt PLC gt e PLC Controlled Transfer When this check box is selected automatic data transmission via the PLC s trigger is set up If this box is not checked data must be transmitted manu ally using the Editor area Toolbox s Filing Data Display Control Word Address 1 10987 Trigger ON Transmit OFF Not transmitted 5 10 0 Reservation Reservation All OFF All OFF i Transmission 9 8 Mode SRAM PLC 2 Block No PLC gt SRAM e Control Word Address Designates a Word Address where the filing data transmission trigger and mode data are stored e Transmit Completed Bit Address Designates the Bit Address that will be turned ON when filing data trans mission is completed AN e Use binary numbers to designate file and block numbers gS If data transmission cannot be performed LS2032 s Bit 10 is turned ON To transmit dat
209. a Format Bin BCD Defines the format of the data in the word address Relative The host PLC data is compared with the setup range and converted accordingly to identify the display position The data 1s treated in binary format Bit Length Defines the valid bit length of data stored in the Word Address Input Code Format No Code Displays positive values only 2 s Complement Uses 2 s complement to express negative values MSB Uses MSB code system to express nega tive values Input Range Min Value Max Value Set up the range of the data stored in the Word Address The setup range limits vary with the Code Input The GP will display percentage converted based on the range designated here The possible values de pend on the Code Input setting lt Minimum and Maximum Input Range Values gt Input Code Format Input Range No Code 0 65535 __NoCode 2 s Complement 32768 32767 MSB 32767 32767 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 91 2 11 J tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W Alarm Settings J Tag Setting Alarm Display Generalno DesonatedSoreen Select this option when desiring an alarm Size Color Data Format Alarm Settings display J Tag Setting Alarm Range General Info Designated Screen 7 l Size Color Data Format Alarm Settings Min Value Max Value When data movement position number read from the host PLC
210. a Storage Start Address boooo0 F Data Formia oes a a Bice Bice e F A0 T 7 Block Name 20 C Display Format KA El Dee F ELS p Entering File No Description No of Data Blocks No of Data Items and Data Storage Start Address File No 1 Description Heat Control No of Data Blocks 3 No of Data Items 10 Data Storage Start Address D00100 Filing List Display lt When using multiple folders gt lt When using a single folder gt Filing Data List eee Data List Filing Data List Folder Filing Setting Filing Setting f Internal Memory fa CF Card d a 1 Heat Control aa Heat Control L z F EA Cei is as Bate Dette elete cose He This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 24 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function WA Automatic Filing Data Transmission Previously entered filing data 1s transmitted to the PLC as shown below There are three methods to transmit data e g via the PLC s trigger or via selecting the desired settings from the two types of screens available Here each transmission method is explained File No i No of Data Blacks Description Heat Control No of Data Item Data Storage Start Addre Joon F See Name Doomoo Ooo 000101 000102 W Data Transmission
211. a to the PLC use either your standard communication cycle time or 150ms whichever is longer as the trigger OFF time For Communication cycle time details PLC Connection Manual 1 1 5 Special Relay Transmit Completed Bit Address LS2032 Bit 10 Normal data transmission Data transmission error ON For Write To SRAM setting details ALOZA 4 2 3 Filing Data Setting 1 This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 21 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features w gt Filing Data Setting 2 _Screen S etup Filing List Editor After selecting the Project Manager s GPSetup Screen Setup Filing Data Filing List Alarm the following menu will appear eo The internal memory setting area desig Filing Data Filing Settings Data Logging Settings Filing List nates the screen data The 1 Filing Data Deedat folder indicates the File Settings The CF Card selection is effective only when us ing a GP77R Series unit with the Multi Unit installed 4 4 4 External Storage of E Filing Settings GP PRO PBIII Data Add When not using multiple folders Filing Setting ft Internal Memon 4 CF Card Adds folder and file settings E Edit a Edits folder and file contents Bese Copy pee Copies folder and files a Paste Pastes copied
212. actesccn score n EEEN EREET 4 113 A53 0115 UH ANS or operadlo ersin a EEG 4 113 OA AON 5S OI anaE E E 4 115 e E o 10 e E E NEO E N P A A 4 119 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS EO IIS a T caus donee esas E N E EA sce ceareeaneesesacecenees 4 119 AD RS IGIC CL VC LINC Se a cccttucancticcb ones E A EET T A ES 4 121 4 5 8 Extended SIO Communication Settings vic cacscavesacsacaszanzesvexsctesancanzecveseesanastaczea exaeteces 4 121 AG ZIO COMGE MOU sesana EE 4 123 La ORN N aa ene ee eer en eee ee EE E ee ee ere 4 123 4 6 2 256 color Mode Cotes NOMIC ING Cia tears ccrscossatesraatinigrscaudasecmuatiescahsatnadeetagecandatnacnacn 4 123 4 7 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility cccccccseee 4 125 AN OVS Wi a E 4 125 4 7 2 One dimensional bar code reader function 0 0 eeeececeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeesstaaees 4 125 Bc PROVE Oar COGS RCAC eE NAE E E ERES 4 126 AS Backup SRAM Capacity scssecivcsscccccesesassesscdcentsesnevsexetacsesses css eeisisenevesnetesonsiasees 4 139 S ORTE ee er se ee ne ene eS ne ee ee NE 4 139 4 8 2 Applications of backup SRAM oc ceciccsscetecccaceecacastetssannselcaatsxitascthedesactetetdsacsielsaateaetes 4 139 4 8 3 Displaying Video Window cee csecncticsctacecestnevhinssiastesicuetee esses ieee eee 4 140 AD Extended Functions Of VM Umt sissseccssscsscscsssoecsasscavesssiasacsasoesscacnoeesconssaesessnseens 4 141 49l TC Control Fie sopra carte sv
213. ad Complete Bit Address Click the check box to specify the bit ad Storage Mode Click the check box to specify the maximum number of LS bytes to use Max Bytes for LS Area Select only one of the options Readout Mode Can choose which mode for reading the data Extended Settings Read Complete Bit Address Enable Bit Address Data Storage Setting LS Storage i Max fe Specify Initialization fe None i Clear with O i Clear with space GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 5 Serial code Reader Compatibility 4 5 8 Extend SIO Communication Settings Add the extend SIO communication settings to the extended function settings When the extend SIO protocol is not selected the button will be disabled GP Settings Factory A prw GF Settings E LO Settings Mode Settings Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Communication Settings Font Setting w Online Error Display Delete Error Display 2 Korean C Reset GP On Data rite Error ie Taiwanese Char Sting Data Mode K tag Priority Font Quality 5 Standard ta Standard i Ae Try as High ween Word Address D000 System Area Time JO fy See Global Window CF Card Data Storage Settings Tag Settings E Data Storage Q Tag Settings Control Word Address DODDO pe HEU Settings Available CF Card Space FEP Settings T set Extend SUD Settings Storage Addre
214. ad the address data from the host PLC Consider the following E g w D200 w D300 1 1 w D201 w D200 1 2 Statement 1 assigns D300 1 into D200 However in statement 2 the result of statement 1 has not been assigned in D200 because of time consuming communication with the host PLC In such case program so that the result of statement 1 is stored in the LS area before it is executed as shown below w LS100 w D300 1 w D200 w LS100 w D201 w LS100 1 e As a guide for D Script programming three addresses occupy the same amount of memory as one tag The maximum number of addresses available for a script is 255 However try to use the fewest possible addresses since the more devices that are used the slower the response e The Convert Address command in the Utility menu of the Project Manager cannot convert addresses used in D Script Open the D Script Editor to change these addresses e If you have changed the PLC Type setting in the Save As window from that used in the Project menu the addresses used by D Script will not be con verted Please use the D Script Editor to change these addresses e The size of a D Script affects the tag scanning time Note that using a large number of addresses may significantly degrade the performance of the program GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 23 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features Up to 9 l
215. adder program should be XVX created so that the data is read again For more on AUX I F Each GP Series User s Manual AUX Input Output e For more on the touch panel switch position 2 23 4 Setting Up T tags T tag This function is invalid on the GP 270 370 H70 377 377R GP 2000 2 234 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 25 Tih Tiw tags wim Using Tih tags W General Info Tih Tag Setting The General Info page provides informa General Info Options tion about the current settings for the Tih Tag Mame Tih tag Tag Nanie Reverse Video Off Must be one of the following names Tih 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 and 08 Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag E Options Tih Tag Setting Options Reverse Video Defines whether touch areas highlight while the touch panel key is pressed 4 AUS Output Se Note When copying screen data created by a screen creation software older than GP as PRO PBIII if a touch panel Key uses fills the filling may blink in Reverse mode To avoid this problem do not use Reverse Video with a fill pattern Buzzer Defines whether or not a beep sounds while a touch panel key is pressed AUX Output Defines whether or not a buzzer signal 1s sent from GP s AUX I F This function is invalid on the GP 270 370 H70 377
216. ag When the GP is Operating Selected line is highlighted as gt Text Listing Display Area we Only the text with p GP Display Screen monitor bits ON are displayed Up key highlights the line above Down key highlights the line below OK key confirms your selection and displays the appropriate Sub Screen Sub screen Data Red Alert AHS Red Alert AHS a ee ae Yellow Alert EBS Yellow Alert BS cay a rat 3 CA Yellow Alert BA4 Yellow Alert BA4 Yellow Alert BBZ atl Peakoown acy HE Yellow Alert B 4 The machine Red Alert d Bre Red Alert CHi needs new Breakdown Hren mn 1 fan belt Warning i seas i TG lo a Select b i the highlighted aa Information corresponding to the line line j will display GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 5 2 1 A tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions yam Using A tags E General Info The General Info page provides information A Tag Setting about the current settings for the A tag General Info Display Format Size Color Sub Display Display Angle Tag Name Tag Name a m Must be no more than five Single byte or A two Double byte characters long and com Display Start Line 1 posed of letters and or symbols Monitor Address DoOooo0 o ge No of Monitor Words 1 Description Text Screen No 1 Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte char of Dianin acters can be entered as a description ofthe tag E Display
217. ag Screen Address Text Display EAE E Erase Screen No i rf Offset JO E Word Address Utag Word Address im Direct Selection Eg L50020 pm Cursar BiiplBw Window Registration No nate an X tag s Text screen The Sub Dis play screen No used in the Alarm Creation and Editing area is treated as the Text screen No Erase Screen No When a message in the Alarm Creation and Editing area 1s selected whose Sub Screen No is not registered the Text screen called by this feature will delete the previous dis play screen Window Registration No Enter a Registration No here for the win dow you wish to display on the screen Screen Type Text Screen OK J cancel He Sr When the Sub Screen area is set to Active Window changing the current Note Base screen to display another screen will set the Window Registration No to 0 and prevent the Sub Screen from displaying E Display Angle Display Angle General Info Display Mode Display Forma Resende Te Anse Set up the rotation for the display Select 0 zero 90 180 or 270 degrees 12 90 degrees i 180 degrees 17 270 degrees GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 181 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions yay Q tag Examples Suppose a T tag special Q tag select key has been set up on the screen below Example operations are provided for each key Sa
218. ag awaiting input has had alarm set the n tag displays the alarm s upper and lower limits on the screen using the data formats set for the K tag Display style also follows K tag settings 2 12 K tag Key Input E When K tag awaiting input does not have alarm set or there is no K tag awaiting input the n tag will display a space 2 12 K tag Key Input E Different color attributes can be set for the alarm range s maximum and minimum value displays WE The character size for the upper and lower limit displays is adjustable although they must be the same size GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 157 2 18 n tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W General Info n Tag Setting General Info Tag Name Description Character Size Oe 6 Color Mire W Size Style n Tag Setting General Info size Style Display Angle Display Size ox16 ha Min Value Color Fo A I ek Eo COO Ko Max Value Color Fo ee ie ko oe OOOO eo The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for the n tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag Display Size Text characters used in the display can be 16 32 64 or 128 dots high and 8 16
219. alarm message is brought to the front of the PC screen display VGA SVGA or the video display 2 The screen size is changed from 640 x 480 to 800 x 600 GP2600 only For the GP2600 the screen size is changed to 800 x 600 Therefore If the video window is controlled with the PLC or the GP tags except the V tag the video window display position moves leftward by 80 dots and upward by 60 dots 3 The VGA adjusting method is changed to on line settings The method of adjusting the VGA display horizontal position vertical position is changed to on line setting Therefore the off line setting menu is lost On line settings should also be set on the GP main unit GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 145 4 146 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual PAD E A E EA 2 1 BS REEE E AE 2 37 A e EE 2 19 Erase Mode Settings ccicrvesssoctoviandoes 2 123 sing tant scrcnsetnin 2 15 About Freeze Mode ssssssssssesssseseesse ani R EA E N N 2 53 About D Script seeeceee 3 1 4 1 4 37 File Header ccccccccceoesseercccceeseeees l 1 Active Image Functions 1 2 2 1 Filing Data Recipe Function 4 11 Advanced CATES eect sphvassucincasssaunctiens 4 1 Alarm Summary Display Notes 2 23 L E 3 25 3 27 E A EA E E E TA 2 59 Application Pone O erreen 3 36 A E A T sean 2 65 Auto Clear Example secccrecesscisecdsecseeds 2 106 A a feces smesenetaes a GP Display
220. all ASC2BIN w LS2002 t 0024 if t 0003 0 c EXT SIO CTRLO1 1 t 0001 1 endif endif endif i else if t 0003 0 c EXT SIO _CTRLO1 1 t 0001 1 endif endif In this example the value of the read data 2 1s stored in the LS2002 address as a binary value 3 1 D Script Global D Script Received data is present Rreceiving error occurred Clear error Clear receive buffer Has necessary number of bytes of data been received Obtain received data Set received flag Has the receive time run out Clear receive buffer Set received flag Is the time for receiving run out Clear receiving buffer Set received flag GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 1 D Script Global D Script 3 56 E Value Conversion Function ASC2BIN Execution Formula t 0024 0 Converted binary value t 0025 0 Offset of read data t 0026 0 Work area for converting digit t 0027 4 loop t 0027 t 0026 w LS0220 t 0025 if t 0026 gt 0x30 and t 0026 lt 0x39 lt 0x39 t 0026 t 0026 0x30 endif if t 0026 gt 0x41 and t 0026 lt 0x46 lt 0x46 t 0026 t 0026 0x41 0xA endif t 0024 t 0024 lt lt 4 t 0024 t 0024 t 0026 t 0025 t 0025 1 kendloop This Processing Function converts the low order 4 bytes of the 8 byte data This function
221. anaus biade ok came Hep e This feature is effective only for the unit with the backup SRAM built in e The GP70 series unit in which the backup SRAM is built has a copper colored label on the rear of the unit Also the GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units all have the backup SRAM built in E Important Pro face GRAPHIC PANEL GP571 TC1 1 S N 8800150000 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS CORF MADE IN JAPAN Data stored in the backup SRAM is erased when The memory is initialized Screen data is transmitted The GP system and protocol are set up The GP self diagnosis Internal FEPROM screen area is performed e The GP offline is set up However if the GP system s version is 1 30 or higher the GP PRO PBIII for Windows95 Ver 2 0 or higher backup SRAM data is not erased The PLCs listed in section 1 3 Tag List s note section 5 cannot use the Backup feature GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 61 3 2 Data Sampling Settings Chapter 3 Special Features Data Storage Example The following is an example of data stored from the storage start address When the trigger bit is turned ON the data is stored into the LS Area e The stored data count is stored in the storage start address e The stored data count number n is in the Bin format e When the stored data count is less than the sampling data count the Word Addresses up to that number will be cleared to 0
222. and includes both called up and window screen tags For GP77R Series GP377 Series GP 37W2 and GP2000 units the maximum number of tags per screen is 384 and for the GP 270 GP 370 and GP H70 128 1 16 GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types 1 5 Tag Setting Cautions Only one can be used per screen A single screen can contain either an a tag s Alarm display or a C tag s clock display 2 Although it is possible to set up to 30 Rail R tags per screen the total number of display positions for all a screens R tags combined cannot exceed 406 However by loading in other screens a total of 512 positions can be used For the GP 270 GP 370 and GP H70 a total of 256 positions can be used 3 The maximum numbers of t tags set for each unit are as follows GP 377R GP 377L GP 2400 GP Type GP 477R GP 377S GP 2500 GP 577R GP 37W2 GP 2600 Number of 128 64 Valid Tags 4 The maximum number of windows that can display simultaneously on one screen is three one Global Window and two Local Windows 5 These tags cannot be used if the Display Type is set to portrait GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 1 17 1 18 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 1 A tag Active Image Functions This chapter outlines the A tag s functions describes the parameters avail able for this tag and th
223. ary Display 2 26 U tag Window Display Note 2 29 X tag Display Text Data Na e If text data is too long the portion that does not fit into the designated area will not display e Only one A tag can be created in a single Base screen If you wish to display multiple summary displays place the A tag in a window e Using the sub screen function may slow down the communication process 2 2 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 1 A tag E Screen file numbers for Base screens or Text screens used by the sub screen function must be registered consecutively and match the order of text data in the summary display E When using the sub screen function Touch Panel keys for selecting the text line which the sub screen corresponds to must be set in T tag s A tag Select Key function 2 23 T tag Touch Panel Input a Sub screen is carried out indirectly Designate one word for the sub screen Note display data storage address The GP automatically distributes stored data from other items and makes the settings W Also when a monitor bit s corresponding message row is left empty the A tag allows you to delete hide that row As a result you can then display only those rows which contain messages in the Alarm Summary Display Regardless whether the Blank Line Display feature is ON or OFF a total of 512 rows of text can be shown in either case This feature is availa
224. as a percentage Data in the 10 75 B range is displayed as normal data and data outside this range is displayed in alarm mode GP Host PLC b555 100 pper limit These ranges have an alarm set C anl Lower limit T e Input Range Set the minimum and maximum values for the range B Display Range Min Value Max Value Input Range Min Value Max Value e Display Range Set the minimum and maximum values for the range C The Calculation of B value The A range 0 65535 is converted into a percentage 0 100 B Upper limit X 100 75 65535 xX xX 49151 49151 B Lower limit X 100 10 65535 xX x Or 6553 Therefore the setting will be Input Range i 6553 Min Value 553 49151 Mas Value ag151 3 ange Min Value TO Man Value N Tag Setting General Info Data Format Size Style Alam Settings Arithmetic Operation Alarm Display GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 155 2 156 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 18 n tag yates n tag Alarm Range Display Displays the upper and lower limits of an alarm range set by K tags Upper Lt 80 4 5 6 E Lower Lt 90 1 EIRE N CJC LOICLRIT Set up the Touch Keyboard with k tags ym wae About n tags WE With trigger bit activated 1f the K t
225. as the operation result has not been assigned to D200 yet GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 11 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features e Offset Address This feature is supported by only GP77R Series GP377 Series and GP2000 Series units Offset Addresses can be designated Only temporary Word Addresses can be designated for offset value storage Addresses The offset Address format is as follows Word Address Offset Value Storage Address Constant Data Entry Ranges Data Format Constant Max Value Binnie 0l 65535 Bins2 4294967295 o re 32768 32767 2147483647 BCDI6 0 BCD32 0 99999999 E g Read w D0200 w D0100 t 0000 Offset Word Address Read 9999 Write w D0100 t 0000 100 Offset Word Address Write This Address becomes the Word Address Temporary Word Address value For the above example when the value 2 is used for t 000 the Address becomes w 0102 lt Offset Address gt e The device designated as storing the offset value is not always read from the PLC It is read only when D script processing is performed If a communication error occurs during device read the offset value will become 0 and the GP s internal special re lay LS2032 bit 12 is turned ON When the data read is com pleted normally this bit is turned OFF e Word Addresses used in the offset address format are not counted as D Script A
226. at Shift Right Zero Suppression enabled and Display Digits 3 When the Display option has been selected the division opera tion may create results that when totaled do not add up to ex important actly 100 Ge re When using a d tag in combination with a D tag set the Word Address Ne and No of Data Divisions data to match the D tag settings 2 4 3 Using D tags D tag 2 36 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 5 d tag yay Using d tags W General Info d Tag Setting The General Info page provides informa General Info Display Format Sizer Style Display Anale tion about current settings for the d tag Tag Name d am Description Tag Name oe Must be no more than five Single byte or Kaai play 0n5 0 two Double byte characters long and com Display Style Shift Lett a Bae posed of letters and or symbols No of Da Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag E Display Format e Word Address d Tag Setting Defines the first word address of the con secutive word addresses that contain dis play data for a statistic data display a oe Data Format 2 BCD o of Display Digits Be Bin Decimal Places e BCD Defines the format for the data in the word addresses Data Display Settings OK i e Hele Data Display
227. at one time select which folder will be used e Multiple folders can be registered in both the GP s internal memory and in the CF card e Up to 64 folders can be registered in the GP s internal memory and up to 8999 folders in a CF card e Select a folder to be used on the GP This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 12 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function e Only one folder of data can be transferred to the GP s backup SRAM e When multiple folders are registered the files are numbered The filing data structure is the same as the existing data structure Also if a previ ously created folder is present on the CF Card this folder will be auto matically named 1 E When saving filing data up to 2 048 filing data files can be registered with up to 1 650 data blocks in each file and up to 10 000 pieces of data in each block However when the data format is 32 Bits only 5 000 data items can be registered Up to 10 000 data items can be registered in a single block However when the data format is 32 Bits only 5 000 data items can be registered Usage priority of backup SRAM E 1 Note Q tag alarm X 2 Data sampling 3 Trend graph 4 LS Area backup 5 Logging data 6 Filing data SRAM Memory is used starting from item 1 To check the GP s available usage capacity MOARI O
228. ated bit change from 0 to 1 the statements described in the Action area are performed Bit Falling When the GP detects the falling edge of the designated bit the statements described in the Action area are performed xt e Bit Dual Operation Trigger When the GP detects the designated bit change from 0 to 1 or the falling edge of the designated bit the statements described in the Action area are performed Only GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units support this function GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 3 4 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features Trigger Om a ON Ox Simple Edge Expression fei fot fa tof e f t Expression becomes Non Zero When the GP detects true of a given condition in a triggering program the statement described in the Action area of your program is performed only one time at the detection e t f Expression becomes Zero When the GP detects false of a given condition in a triggering program the statement described in the Action area of your program is performed only one time at the detection e The bit designated for the Bit Rising Falling option must be 5 held ON or OFF for longer than the tag scanning time stored in Important S20 36 e Printing or drawing operation may cause a timer delay e The Timer feature when a screen change is performed will re set to 0 with D Script When using Global D Script the timer continues the c
229. ates and its display color 2 3 and 5 dot groups cannot be selected Dot type 3 1Dot i Miate i Sots i Blbats Fo OPO Kw GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 5 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features e Polyline Draws a line at the designated position Designate the line s type color attributes and start and end coordinates Fo eo eo ey el e Circle Draws a circle at the designated point When the Pattern check box is checked a filled circle will be drawn Select and enter the line type or fill pattern when selecting a pattern color attributes center coordinates and radius value YC Fil e Fo MN el T E Po H O a E Centre so SI Radius e Square Rectangle Draws a square at the designated position When the Pattern check box is checked a filled square will be drawn When selecting a beveled square a beveling dot can be entered Select and enter the line type or fill pattern when selecting a pattern color attributes and start and end coordinates Square Rectangle o of Ee aes es Fo M ee E _ 3 6 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script Math Operators 96 foe 7 f e Addition Adds the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant Any overflowing digits resulting fro
230. ation Area After Display Address Input Display Designa tion Indirect No of ranges 3 0 Display Data Input range H 2 Input range Hin 3 Display range Wax 4 Display range Has 4 Color code Indirect Designation Area After Display Address Input Display Designation Indirect Color Designation Indirect 2 47 2 6 E tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Tag Setting Input Range Range Color Arithmetic Operation Display Angle e Data Format Size Style Min Value O Absolute Pelaive Max Value Word Address Epo O BitLengtn 1 18 w TG Indirect 8 Adhesses E Donon re i Device Type amp Addhiess Bin O BED Input Code Format H Code Display Format fa No Code i Decimal 2 s Complement O Round Up Hex EJ MSB 1 Octal Input Display Designation Select Indirect Address Area a Direct E Indirect i Ares Alter Displey ddiess Input Range Min Value 0 Max Value 65595 a Defines the range of values used in data conversion in the Word Address The pos sible ranges depend on the Code Input set ting used When the Indirect option is se lected set the data storage range in the 1n directly designated address Display Range Min Value Max Value Defines the range of values displayed af ter data conversion The possible ranges depend on the Display Format and Code settings eair
231. aw 12 15 A tank Low Water Level ga 12 00 Level 1 Point closed Acknowledge time Trigger message Time Date 2 172 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag When Not Selecting a Block via Alarm Creation and Editing Registered Messages Level 1 Pump Closed A Tank Low Water Alarm B Tank Pressure Alarm The message Level 1 Pump Closed is triggered Active History 98 01 01 12 00 Level 1 Pump Closed 98 01 01 12 00 Level 1 Pump Closed 98 01 01 12 00 Level 1 Pump Closed When the alarm message Level 1 Point closed is triggered it is displayed according to Display Mode s settings active history log of each Q tag WE When Selecting a Block via Alarm Creation and Editing Block 1 Registered Messages Block 2 Registered Messages Block 3 Registered Messages Level 1 Pump Closed A tank Low Water Level B tank Pressure Trouble The alarm message Level 1 Pump Closed is triggered Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 98 01 01 12 00 Level 1 Pump Closed When the alarm message Level 1 Point closed is triggered according to Dis play Mode settings Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 of the Q tag the alarm message is displayed for the applicable tag When the alarm message is triggered it is stored in Block 1 E The Q Tag Display Format such as the message position trigger time posi tion and so on can also be set up in the GP PRO PBIII GP system settin
232. b Operation Manual 6 1 GP Initial and System Settings GP Settings Digital Plant prw GF Settings O Settings Mode Settings Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Communication Settings Pont Serma Fi Online Error Display Fi Delete Error Display 1 Korean L Reset GP On Data Write Error i Taiwanese Char String Data Mode I Chinese 2 jE K tag Priority Font Quality a Standard i Standard Designates the De a Storage Address a d t t r th d Backup Settings ae ny ore e Word Address Daoood E System Area ard s E Time lo Sec Global Window approximate free UU CF Card Data Storage 5 ettings i Tag Settings space value jm Data Storage G Tag Settings Control Word Address boog E Cree Setiap valable CF Card Space TJ Set Storage Address LSoo020 E cerca berate Hee GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 103 4 104 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 5 Serial code Reader Compatibility 4 5 4 5 Serial Code Reader Compatibility 1 Overview The Serial code reader connects to the GP s extended serial I F Only the GP2000 series supports this function 4 5 2 Compatible Serial code readers The following Serial code readers are compatible e Denso s Serial code reader QS20H QS20H 1 e Token s Serial code reader THIR 3000 THIR 3000H 4 5 3 Outline
233. bar graphs Use the Graph Type area s Display Direction settings for the bar graph GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 5 d tag yao d tag Statistical Data Display The d tag feature is used to display statistical data in numeric format yaw About d tags E Numeric values are displayed according to the data in the host s PLC s consecutive word addresses W tis mainly used in combination with D tags to display D tag s data as a numeric value However it may be used independently without D tag settings WE There are three ways of displaying statistical data Display Data Display and Data Display and Display W Statistical data can be divided into a maximum of 8 parts WE Data stored in the host PLC can be either binary or BCD but not both E Setting up first word address for data stored enables automatic setup of the next word addresses using the Denominator value WE Word address data all data is totaled and allocation division of display areas 1s performed automatically based on that total GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 35 2 5 d tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W Set up display attributes foreground and background colors and blink attribute for each data value E When using Data Display option display style can be selected For Display option display style is fixed
234. be allocated to the number of addresses desig nated by the Number of Ranges attribute When the After Base Address option is selected Previous page s example 1 Previous page s example 2 D00100 0025 D00100 5800 Device code D00101 D00101 0035 Address code D00102 The range setting or arithmetic operation address will be D00101 which follows the Word Address D00100 in example 1 In example 2 the address will be D00102 because two word addresses will be used for designating device and address codes For the Range setting the required addresses will be automatically allocated from D00101 or D00102 2 56 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 7 F tag Ya F tag Free Library Display 2 7 1 Overview F Tags can be used to bring up Base or Image Library screens library in the position indicated by the data of the host PLC word address F tags make the display of moving objects possible anywhere on the screen Designated Word Positional Data Address i a a a a a 1 When a drawing or screen is used often You can create the image on a Base Screen and register it as a library item The library s registered image is then displayed in the designated area with the image 5 center point being placed at the desired position This option is designated relative to a given start point a About F tags WE There are two Operation Mode settings i
235. be in directly specified When Indirect is speci fied select Select Indirect Address Area This setting is not enabled on the GP 270 Word Address ooo I tenna 8 Adbbesses E so000 re Devise Typa 2 Aghiess ein OECD Display Format i Decimal i Hex To Code Input Code Format fa No Code I Round Up H Octal 2 s Complement 12 MSB Input Display Designation Select Indirect Address Area i Direct i Ares Alter Displey Adthiess Indirect 1 Ares Atter Base Addbess Input Range Display Range Value 0 E Min alue I i Max Value 65535 a Max Value 65535 E ee cc Word Adress 0 Display Data eput range Has 2 put range min 3 Disptay range Wa 4 Output range Hin Select Indirect Address Area Area After Display Address The input and display ranges are automati cally allocated according to the indirectly specified display data address The allo cated address is displayed in the Input 2 46 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Tag Setting Range Color i Absolute Word Address General Info mpo O A tenna Arithmetic Operation Display Angle Data Format See5ye OO O J Indirect i Device Type 4Aadiess Bin BCD Input Code Format Cl Code Display Format fa No Code j Decimal 2 s Compl
236. ble below for the possible Word Address tu pom F setup ranges word Address 1 lt Constant Settings Range gt pooo F eee 9 Add BCD 16 Bit C Sereen Lavell Change Dikeetion Constant Settings Dec 3 BCD 9 Hex Weds onatant Set 16 Bit 32 68 32 67 Set 32 Bit 2147483648 2147483647 Add Binary 16 Bit 32768 32767 Add BCD 16 Bit 0 9999 E Mode Special W Tag Setting Special General nfo Designates a special function to be per Bi 9 Word ie Special formed when the trigger bit changes Trigger Type Trigger Bit Address Trigger Type 501 G0 Boel ko FE 0 1 The tag operates when the trigger bit changes 0 to 1 1 0 The tag operates when the trigger bit changes to 0 01 The tag operates when the trigger bit condition changes 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 Trigger Bit Address Designates the location of the bit used to trigger the operation Return to Previous Screen When the trigger bit is activated the GP returns to the previously displayed screen image It 1s possible to go as far back as 32 previous screens Return to Previous Screen Be sure to include sufficient time intervals the set communica _ tion cycle time or longer to write data to the PLC device If the Important GP internal special relay s tag scan counter is used as a data write trigger and data write is performed frequently a communi cation error can occur screen Previous screen does not mean the screen whose screen number is
237. ble only with Digital s GP77R Series GP377 GP37W2 and GP2000 Series units lt Relationship between text screens and monitor addresses gt Monitor Bits 15 2 1 0 T ext Screen Yellow Alert B02 Monitor Bits ON OFF Status 98765432 1 0 T ext Screen OO Red Aert A07 Pt a at ees GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 3 2 1 A tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions lt When Blank Line Display is ON gt lt When Blank Line Display is OFF gt Red Alert Red Alert Yellow Alert Yellow Alert Red Alert E Relationship Between Monitor Addresses and Text Data Monitor bit Text Data for Library screens oe Summary Display 1 for Sub Display 15 ot HWo l SeeERESER ERE EERE a B1OO1 Na Library for the 1st line SRREREEERES Ha BLOOZ Ha FEEFFE al Library for the 2nd line AiE LEE EE EEE E B1003 Library for the 3rd line B1004 Library for the 4th line sat SEEEEEESE ES EI B 1000 n a TU bits Library for the nth line No need to create A monitor a corre libraries for a remaining bits sponds to a message pind acu sereen The library item for clear B 1000 n a1 ing the sub screen has no corresponding monitor bit and text data Sub screen clearing screen To clear the sub screen make a library item that is only a black square 2 4 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 1 A t
238. button to select that folder CF Card Data Output Folder PEE EENS o If you specify the CF Card as the destina Do you wish to create folder tion before selecting CF Card Data Out put Folder one of these messages will appear Warning Cannot set CF Card output folder Please set folder Po er e em Transferring Data from Output Folder to CF Card The data saved in the CF Card data output folder is transferred to the GP s CF Card when the project file 1s transferred to the GP unit However to transfer your project s filing data to the CF Card you will need to select Filing Data CF Card in the Transfer Settings dialog box Operation Manual 7 2 Transferring Screens Transfer Settings x Tra nsfe rs Send Information Communications Port ling Data to Miad Information Coml A Come F Hi g Data to W GP System Screen Baudrate bps the CF Card famen Transter Method Send To 3 Send All Screens Automatically Send Changed Screens a Send User Selected Screens Setup Automatic Setup Use Extended Program a Force System Setup w Simulation 2 Do NOT Perform Setup Setup CFG file i English 3 Japanese 3 Selection OMPROPB WINS protocolgpsetupe cig e When data is transferred to the CF Card any file with the same J name will be overwritten and any file with a new name will be saved normally Therefore if project data is changed and then trans
239. c D ce ee e ee ooe o e oo mo Cem e oo BCD e 0 9999 De O ce ee Ce el o Ce 0 el oo o roa O ot ase GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 105 2 12 K tag Key Input KE Tag Setting General Into Data Format Size S tule Alarm Settings Arithmetic Operation Display Angle Operand s3 Direct 3 Indirect Select Indirect Address Area ie Spee After Displawddiiess iI deade Basedidiiess Word Address Operator Data poOoOOG F Data Location Arithmetic Operators f Right e5 Add a And i Lett 3 Sub 3 Dr l a Mult i raor 7 ta Div Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Arithmetic Operation Select this option to perform an arithmetic operation Operand Direct Select this option to directly designate the operand Indirect Select this option to indirectly designate the operand in a word address If the Indi rect option has not been selected on the Data Format page the data in the Word Address set on that page and the immedi ately following address will be calculated If selected the next attr bute Select Indi rect Address Area will be valid 2 6 4 Indirect Word Addressing Examples E tag Select Indirect Address Area Area After Display Address The address storing the operand will im mediately follow the indirectly designated address where display data is stored Word Address Display Address
240. cannot convert a negative value Therefore create a negative value conversion function if required GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script e Results of D script execution The following response commands will be set in the LS area when the D script is executed LS area Response Contents address command LS0200 LS0201 LS0202 LS0203 LS0204 LS0205 LS0206 LS0207 LS0208 LS0209 LS0210 LS0211 LS0212 LS0213 LS0214 LS0215 LS0216 LS0217 LS0218 LS0219 LS0220 LS0221 LS0222 LS0223 LS0224 LS0225 Number of bytes of received data STX Node No Sub address End code MRC SRC Response code When readout data is 5 ETX BCC GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 57 3 58 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 2 Data Sampling Settings wae Data Sampling Settings 3 2 1 Overview Desired Word Address data can be stored in the LS Area in series swage About Data Sampling Settings E The specified Word Address data is sampled each specified time or with a desired time cycle and stored it into the LS Area via the trigger bit E Data can be sampled per word and data for up to 640 words can be stored in series WE Sampled data can now be backed up As shown in the following page
241. ce Data Format No of data No of data Total capacity pieces blocks of all es J a S E E E e E e As the number of Addresses increases the more time is required for writing data to the PLC Depending on the number of Ad dresses it may take from 20 seconds to several minutes e When data is being written screen displays such as for tags may not be updated refreshed or may appear slowly Screen changes and Q tag alarm processing may also be performed slowly If Base or window screens are changed at this time screen data such as for tags will also be read out and data writing to the PLC will be performed at a slower than normal speed e DO NOT perform any of the following operations at the same time e Data transfer between the LS area and the PLC e Data transfer between SRAM and the PLC via the File Name Display e Data transfer between SRAM and the PLC via the Con trol Word Address using Transfer Settings Be sure to perform data transfer after the current data transfer is completed e During the current data write the succeeding data write opera tion cannot be accepted received E Important This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 14 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function W LS Area Filing Data Structure Designated address 0 Block Names 32 characters 15 number of data piecesx2
242. ce Manual 3 41 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features An initialization flow chart and an actual D Script are given below E Flow chart of initialization Initialization Does the generic SIO protocol exist Yes Clear sent flag Set received flag Clear the transmit receive processing completion flag Initialization of receiving timer Clear send buffer Clear receive buffer Clear error No Initialization of timer Set the number of the transmit receive processes to be operated first Set the communication permission flag 3 42 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual A Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script E Flow chart of main routine Are communications permitted Is it the read pro cessing of data 1 Run the read processing of data 1 Transmit receive processing completed Yes Clear the transmit receive processing completion flag Set up the number of transmit receive processes that are to be run next No Is it the read pro cessing of data 2 Yes Run the read processing of data 2 Transmit receive processing completed No gt es Clear the transmit receive processing completion flag Set the time until the next transmit receive process in the timer Set the number of transmit receive processing t
243. check the Backup s Data Backup check box in the Data Format tub The backed up data can be stored in the LS Area via the Trigger Bit WE Decide a channel name for each piece of sampling data E The number of channels that can be set is up to 20 for the entire system including trend graph channels When more than 20 channels are set channels after 20th will be disregarded according to the following rules e Data sampling will be given priority over trend graphs e Data sampling channel numbering will begin from those set previously GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 59 3 2 Data Sampling Settings 3 60 Data Sampling Settings E General Info Channel Setting General Data Format Sampling Tag Hame a Sampling 4ddress OOOO Trigger Bit Address OOOO00 Top Write Address o020 E Data Format Data Format Sampling wp HE klo EE ma A Ir Mo of Sampl Addr 1 ir Sampling 4ddress Trigger Bit Address Top Write Address TA Synethic vey itty o Cancer He Chapter 3 Special Features sway Using Channel Settings Add Use this button to set a new channel Delete Use this button to delete a channel which has been set Select the channel name then press the Delete key Edit Use this button to edit a channel which has been set Select the channel name then press the Edit key The General Info page
244. cial Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script mm Special Features The following chapter outlines the special D Script function and de scribes all D Script parameters and settings Smee D Script Global D Script Use the D Script function to design your own program and execute it on the GP to provide additional display functions D Script programs also help to reduce the host s PLC s data display load Trigger Bit Rising lt p Parts of a host s Bit ecules M0050 PLC s ladder Action W D00100 100 program can be replaced by D Script commands mera About D Script WE To use D Script for all of a project s screens regardless of the current screen select Global D Script To use the D Script only for the currently displayed screen select D Script while creating that screen The Global D Script feature is supported only by the GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series WE Thanks to the Global D Script feature Bin BCD display format changes text data changes or other functions all previously performed by the PLC can now be performed by the GP E Since D Script is a language program debugging can be performed easily E D Script can be programmed as a trigger to sense the leading or falling edge of a bit to activate a timer or to detect true or false of a given condition WE There are three elements in a D Script Operators Statements and Oper ands which can be used to program condi
245. ck Number Address E mT im Interlock Interlock Address E eooo FE Ce ee e Za This example does not use the loop feature When using this feature only one Note block will be used and the block number designation address setting will be disabled Operation Manual 2 1 16 Data Logging Display 2 Place the Data Logging Display on your screen 3 Select Op4 lib4 cpw from the Library Parts and select a keypad for data logging wi 0 p4 lib4 cpw Application Lib Parts Fie Edit View Window Help 5 Alarm Display iin This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 84 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function 4 Place the keypad Since this part has been grouped to change its layout ungroup it first 5 Change the layout and send the data to the GP After the layout change is completed send the data to the GP and start operation The logging data 1s displayed as shown below E Operation During Machine Run Data Edit 1 Touch the data on the screen to edit it O pe gt po m perce ares EN e Data entry procedures are the same as for a K tag Note Pressing the CAN cancel or ENT enter key takes you out of data entry mode e Even if another data area is touched while the current data is being edited entry location does n
246. creens each of which has a different purpose Screen Type SETETE Description Maximum JP Number P Screen Size Appears on the GP display while the GP is operating Objects used as either a static graphic or in a moving image can be called up from other Base Screen pam B file B1 B8999 Base screens and used like building blocks Base Approx 16 KB screen objects can be also registered as a window which can then be opened temporarily on another screen Displays user created dot based marks or symbols Mark Screen M1 M8999 up to a maximum of 48 x 48 pixels These marks Approx 576 M file can be either fixed or moving images on the Base bytes screens Trend Graph Displays graph axes and graduations and sets the screen T1 T8999 parameters used for trend graphs This screen can Approx 16 KB T file be called up and used on a Base screen Keyboard Displays a keypad which is used for entering screen K1 K8999 alphanumeric characters or symbols This screen Approx 16 KB K file can be called up and used on a Base screen Displays only text or character data AT ext screen can be created by entering characters directly or Text screen 0X file X1 X8999 by pasting text data previously edited with a text Approx 53 KB editor This screen is used with screens that contain moving images imade na Contains graphic images converted from bitmap eer l ie 11 18999 data Image screens can be either fixed or used Ap
247. crolls 5 lines The because the value in D0201 text display now starts from has not changed it will begin row 6 on row 6 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 265 2 266 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 30 Trend Graph Display yim Trend Graph Display 2 30 1 Overview This feature is used to display a trend graph showing the change of a value over time in the host PLC word address data Designated Word Trend Data Address rr a a ae l 2 30 2 About Trend Graphs WE Trend graphs display data samples at the designated time or sampling timing options from the designated word address E Set up trend graphs in Trend Graph screens Once a Trend Graph screen has been created save it load it into a Base screen and use that area for the Trend Graph Display WE Up to 8 Trend Graph Displays can be used on a single Base screen E A single Trend Graph Display can display the data of more than one trend line called channels The maximum number of channels that can be dis played in the entire GP application is 20 If more than 20 channels have been set up only the first 20 channels are used based on the following rules e Channels are counted from the lowest Trend Graph screen file number e Channels are counted from those set up first when in the same Trend Graph screen WE Each Channel name begi
248. curs Even when messages are controlled in block units individual messages are printed out every time they are issued When Grouping is Selected If you select Grouping you need to enter the Control Word and Completion Bit Control Word Addresses are for setting the Alarm types and Trigger bits used when controlling the system via a host computer Printing will start when the Trigger bit changes from OFF to ON The Completion Bit desig nates the bit address that will be turned ON when printing is completed The host computer will start printing the next data after it confirms that the Completion Bit has been turned ON Be sure to use the Host computer to turn the Completion Bit OFF after the bit s ON State is detected lt Control Word Address gt Trigger Bit 0 Print 1 Not Print 0 Alarm Active Block 1 Data 1 Alarm History Block 2 Data 2 Alarm Log Block 3 Data 0 1 15 0 Rea 7 The format of the printout is set in the Q Tag Format and Q Tag Print Settings 2 190 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag lt When Using the Grouping Selection Q Tag Print Settings Area gt k e If Grouping is selected the screen automatically displays the next important new page when the current page s printing is completed e If the GP is equipped with a color display you can designate the printout color using the GP s standard col
249. d GP2000 series units 4 18 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function yey Filing Data Setting 1 Filing Settings erm After selecting the Project Manager s er Screen Setup Filing Data Filing Set Aa ting the following menu will appear Sound Settings Data Logging Settings Device Monitor Symbol Editor WE Filing Settings ji Filing ON OFF ji Use Muliple Folders Write Settings From Filing Data To SAAM Control Word Address LSO000 F Write Completed Bit Address LS000000 F PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings i PLC Controlled Transfer Control word Address LS0000 F Transmit Completed Bit Address J sqqgogon F ok Eea Hee Note When using filing data be sure to enter the Write Settings data Filing ON OFF Check this check box in order to use the filing data Use Multiple Folders Check this check box in order to register 2 or more folders Write Settings From Filing Data To SRAM In response to a trigger filing data stored in the GP s internal memory screen data or on a CF card is written to backup SRAM This prepares for filing data transfer In order to tranfer data to the PLC you need to first write data to backup SRAM Only 1 item of filing data can be written to backup SRAM This function is supported only by GP477R G
250. d lower limits are stored in the consecutive word addresses directly following the designated data storage Word Ad dress 2 94 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 12 K tag Key Input E g 32 bit data e Designated storage address for the display data n n ne Display Data n 2 nt Data Max n 4 j na Data Min W Using the Bar Code reader connected to the GP data can be read then written to the data storage address setup Or you can create K tags exclusively for touch keypad input prohibiting data input from barcode reader When inputting data using the barcode reader input e Data read using the barcode reader is written automatically to the data storage address It is unnecessary to use the ENT key on the touch keyboard e If you enter a change screen command during barcode input because the screen change priority is higher the data being input will be ignored so please use with caution e Ending data write causes the System Area s Status 03 bit to reverse Using this you can figure out the data write timing W The results of data input operations carried out can be written except opera tions that use the Float data format E When displaying a character string the maximum number of characters that can appear in the display is eighty W Setups for the character size and display color attributes are available E Shift right shift left and zer
251. d output 1s not canceled This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 8 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 1 Sound Output E Play mode Play Sound Stop Disabled ON Trigger Bit Address Sai a Lt a FF Sound Thank you i If the Bit has already been turned OFF when sound data output is completed XS i the next sound data item is not output ay Trigger Bit Address es ee Sound If the Bit is turned ON to OFF to ON while a sound file is being output and is still turned ON when sound output is completed sound data is continuously output amp JN Trigger Bit Address A Dae AE S OFF oN Trigger Bit Address B Pii E E E Sound Ge te After Trigger Bit Address A s sound data is output Trigger Bit Address B s S sound data is output ON Trigger Bit Address A a O S OFF ON Trigger Bit Address B m a Sound Thank you H If the Trigger Bit Address B has already been turned OFF when the Trigger Bit Address A s sound output is completed the Trigger Bit Address B s sound data is not output amp This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 9 4 1 Sound Output Chapter 4 Advanced Features W Play mode Play Sound Stop Enabled ON Monitor Bit Addres o B Goo S OFF Sound Thank you Thank y l I I
252. dbus Plus e Allen Bradley PLC 5 Data Highway e Allen Bradley SLC500 DH485 e Allen Bradley Remote I O e Siemens S7 200 PPI GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 11 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features W Filing data is first written from the GP s internal memory or CF card to the GP s backup SRAM and then transferred to the PLC either directly or via the LS area lt Filing Data Data Transfer Flow gt GP p LS Area Internal memory Backup SRAM lt PLC Screen data To use a CF card Digital s optional CF Card Multi Unit is required W Filing data is organized into folders files blocks and data Also to use as much filing data as possible multiple folders can be used in the GP s inter nal memory or on a CF card to register multiple filing data items Folder 1 Folder 2 When not When using using mul multiple tiple folders folders only 1 folder multiple is created folders can be registered lt When multiple folders are not used gt Only 1 folder is registered In this case the folder number is usually not desig nated however whenever it is necessary the number is designated as 1 lt When multiple folders are used gt Multiple filing data folders can be registered In the GP the folder numbers need to be designated to transfer data to the GP s internal memory and backup SRAM Since only one filing data folder can be used on the GP
253. ddress D00100 0025 R0010 0040 R0035 Word Address D00100 will be the offset to be added to the base address value R0010 and the result is placed in R0035 GP Display 40 The sum of the Word Address data D00100 25 and base address value R0010 is placed in R0035 whose data will appear in the E tag Example 2 e The Indirect option and Device Type amp Address option are selected and e Word address R35 is indirectly designated The following example assumes that D00100 BCD is designated as the Word Address PLC Word Address D00100 5800 Device code R0035 0040 D00101 0035 Address code R0035 Thus the Data in Word Address D00100 stores the device code R 5800h while data in the following address D00101 stores the address code 0035 GP Display 40 As a result the E tag will display address RO035 s data GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 55 2 6 E tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Note For details about indirect designation YY PLC Connection Manual A2 1 PLC Devices and Address Codes by Maker Example 3 e The Indirect option is selected on the Range Setting or Arithmetic Opera tor page When the After Display Address option is selected Previous page s example 1 Previous page s example 2 R0035 0040 R0036 In both cases R0036 will be used for range setting and arithmetic opera tions Addresses used will
254. ddresses a Important 3 12 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script Bit Operations k lt gt gt amp 1 TA iso Oe jie Ce e lt lt Shift Left Shifts the left side data to the left according to the number of bits designated in the right side data Only logical shift is supported gt gt Shift Right Shifts the left side data to the right according to the number of bits desig nated in the right side data Only logical shift is supported E g When operating the shift left shift one bit to the left Before 1 0 1j0 1 0 1 0 10 10 1 0 1 0 After OTTO TIO ETO TTC TIO TO 110 9 T 1 is rounded off 0 e amp bit wise AND Evaluates 2 bits and returns value 1 if both bits have value 1 if not returns 0 e bit wise OR Evaluates 2 bits and returns value 1 if either bit has value 1 if not returns 0 e bit wise XOR Evaluates 2 bits and returns value 1 if one bit has value 1 and the other has value 0 if not returns 0 e bit wise NOT Evaluates 2 bits and returns value 1 if both bits have value 0 if not returns 0 Set Bit Address 0 1 Turns a bit ON Clear Bit Address 1 0 Turns a bit OFF GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 13 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features e Toggle Bit Address 1 0 0 1 Toggles a bit between ON a
255. deo window DY Video window AN e Maximum size of the video window Note GP 2500T Nel Standard 320 x 240 Expansion 640 x 480 NTSC Standard 384 x 288 Expansion 640 x 480 PAL GP 2600T Standard 320 x 240 Expansion 640 x 480 NTSC Standard 384 x 288 Expansion 768 x 576 PAL The minimum size is 25 x 25 dots in both modes e The start point of the video window display position GX GY should be specified so that the video window is displayed within the resolution of the GP When the video window is specified outside of the GP s resolution the video window will not be displayed If you want to display the entire video window the total values of DX GX and DY GY should be within the GP s resolution GP 2500T DX GX lt s 640 DY GYS 480 GP 2600T DX GX lt g 800 DY GYs 600 4 138 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit E Specifying Point of Origin of Video Display VX VY Determine what part of the video screen should be displayed The point of origin of the video display VX VY is specified with the resolution of the video NTSC PAL 640 dots 768 dots 480 dots Point of Point of origin of origin of Video window video Video window video display display Za e When specifying the point of origin of the video display take into consider Note ation the mode size standard mode or large mode and the v
256. designated time a frequency of at least once every 24 hours can be set up as the logging time for block To measure the timing of the data logging the GP s internal clock is used e g Start 9 00 End 8 59 W Each data file s Logging data can be written to a CF card Data written into the CF card is stored as CSV files not as raw data When using a CF card the optional Multi Unit 1s required With GP 377 units a CF card cannot be used 4 4 Using the CF Card W Logging data can be displayed via a Logging Display Display and print settings can be performed separately 7 This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 2 This function is not available with the following units e Modicon Modbus Master e Modicon Modbus Slave Modicon Modbus Plus Allen Bradley PLC 5 Data Highway Allen Bradley SLC500 DH485 Allen Bradley Remote I O Siemens S7 200 PPI GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 37 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features E Logging data can be printed out using a specified format such as borders E Logging data can be displayed with its Total Average Max and Min values which can be set via the Data Calculation Settings WE The Display Settings setting file capacity is approximately 58K B max 4 3 6 Display Settings W Display Settings Maximum File Size W The Print Settings file capacity is approximately 58K B max 4 3 7 Print S
257. directly designated using device and ad dress codes Write the device code in the word address designated in the Word Ad dress attribute and the address code in the next word address PLC Connection Manual Base Address Defines the base address The K tag displays the data in the address designated by adding the base address number to the data in the Word Address 2 100 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 12 K tag Key Input K Tag Setting e E Bin Alarm Settings Arithmetic Operation Display Angle General Info Data Format Size Style BCD i Absolute i Relative f Char String The K tag uses the data format designated here to display the data in the related Word Address When the Device Type amp Ad dress option is selected the data format is fixed to Bin No of Display Character Set up the number of display places for the character string The maximum length 1s 80 Word Address Trigger Bit Address Indirect Base Address fi Addresses E DOOD gt iA Device Type amp Address f Bin 3 BCD No ot Display Char 5 EN e For details about indirect designation Note 2 6 4 Indirect Word Addressing Examples E tag e The possible number of display lines and characters is determined by the GP screen size and orientation and the text size setting e If the no of characters entered
258. dow control flag address 20 is turned ON e Once the color value update bit is turned ON the ON condition is maintained Therefore the display conditions of the video window are changed in real time according to the written color value until the bit is turned OFF E Specifying the Video Window Display Position GX GY Specify in which part of the GP screen the video window should be dis played The video window is displayed in the quadrangle Specify the upper left corner of the quadrangle as the point of origin The video window 1s positioned relative to the point of origin The video window display position GX GY is specified by the resolution of the GP GP 2500T 640 dots 480 dots Video window display position L Video window GP 2600T 800 dots 600 dots Video window display position Le Video window GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 137 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit Chapter 4 Advanced Features E Specifying the Video Window Size Determine the point specified with the video window display position GX GY as the start point Determine the video window size from the start point Specify the width DX and height DY of the video window with the resolution of the GP GP 2500T 640 dots Width of video window DX 480 dots l l Height of video window DY Video window GP 2600T 800 dots Width of video window DX 600 dots Height of vi
259. e Copy Any selected function can be copied Paste Use this command to paste a copied function Click on this button and the following dialog box will appear Then enter the name for the function to be pasted Duplicate D Seript Function Mame Please enter a new function name function O E Cancel GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 21 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features New Select this button to create a new program Function A program can then be created via the D Script Functions that appear See below For how to create a new program refer to the D Script Editor D Script Function Untitled Function Mane Show Toolbox Fil Formula Functions DataType Bin F DataLength febi Fl Codes Enter an expression Press HELP for examples 0K caer f Hep Function Name Enter the name of your Function here Once a Function is created that Function name is displayed in the Function area Up to 20 characters can be used for a Function name Alphabet characters numbers and The following function names are reserved DO NOT use these names TF rise fall rise_expr timer set clear toggle if else endif b_call Bcall dsp_rectangle dsp _line dsp _ dot dsp circle dsp arc Call and
260. e Word 2 28 1 Wetag operation Writes constant data to a designated address When Trigger Mode Bit W tag operation Shy Designated bit address GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 251 2 28 W tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions iw About W tags E The timing mode that triggers the operation can be selected 0 1 When the trigger bit turns ON the W tag operation takes place 1 0 When the trigger bit turns OFF the W tag operation takes place 01 When the trigger bit changes turning ON or OFF the W tag opera tion takes place E The following operations are available 2 252 Bit Set Bit Reset Bit Invert Compare lt lt lt gt gt gt Change Screen Data Set 16 bit 32 bit Word Add Binary 16 Bit Use the negative sign for subtraction Word Add BCD 16 Bit Use the negative sign for subtraction GP exclusive special function switches Return to previous screen GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W General Info Tag Setting General Info Mode S Tag Name Description Trigger Bit Address Trigger Type Mode Addresses Mode Screen Level Change Dipech 00000 D gt 1 Bit 00000 Bit Set E Mode Bit Ww Tag Setting General Info Bil ti word 1 Special Mode Trigger Type t 0 1 31 0 Trigg
261. e body unit WEReadable data transfer format The following bar code specifications data transfer format are supported by the GP D Tmo a Femina RA When using 2 type of a bar code reader LF is ignored Sr When the read data exceeds the number of displayed characters specified in Note the K tag the data cannot be properly displayed with the K tag The maxi X mum number of display characters that can be set with the K tag is 80 4 118 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 47 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility Connection environment For Opt Electronics bar code reader Model OPT 5125 RS232C H OPT 1125 RS232C K e Wiring diagram AC 100V adapter D sub 9 pin connector GP Bar code reader Touch scanner The bar code reader is directly connected to the GP Direction of signal Direction o signa Ro Input 2 a l Connected se 5 Ps se j oR input 6 6 _ No 6 pins RS Output 7 _____ 7 CS CTS CS Input 8 RI VCC Input Output Communication settings The communication settings for the extended serial I F of the GP is speci fied as the initial data of the bar code reader The initial data of Opt Electronics bar code readers OPT 5125 232C H andOPT 1125 232C K are as follows Data length Stop bit Parity bit 9600bps 8 1 Nme GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 119 4
262. e upper and lower limits of alarm values cae poe Indirect Direct Select this option to indirectly designate 1 Indirect the upper and lower limits of alarm val Alarm Range ues The data in the address immediately Min Vaue 0 following the Word Address designated in Mar Value a the Data Format page will be the upper Patten N limit and the data in the next address will be the lower limit Graph Color Fo SIRO Bo i mie mero Alarm Range ok Min Value Max Value If the Alarm Type has been set to Direct designate the upper and lower limits of the alarm values Pattern Select the fill pattern for the selected por tion of the graph Graph Color After clicking on the upper or lower range of the left side s sample graph select the foreground and background colors and blink attribute for that range aN bes When Meter is specified for the graph pattern the graph color Settings fore Y ground color Fg will be the meter s needle color and background Bg will be the entire graph color Background color ON Foreground color 2 68 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 9 g tag y g tag Extended G tag Function Displays data in one of three graph types bar pie and half pie A g tag is a G tag s extension and depending on what color attributes and data ranges have been set up allows the color of the displayed data values to be c
263. e 8 RSIRTS RI VCC Input Output Communication settings The communication settings of the extended serial I F of the GP 1s specified as the initial data of the bar code reader The initial data of Imex s bar code readers BW 665RS is as follows Data length Stop bit Parity bit 4800bps 8 amp 8 2 Nme GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 123 4 7 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility Chapter 4 Advanced Features For Olympus Symbol s bar code reader Model LSH3502AHV e Wiring diagram AC 100V adapter lt seus D sub 9 pi n connector GP Bar code reader Laser scanner The bar code reader 1s directly connected to the GP Direction of signal Direction of 1 N L6 8 et a CTS NC SD TXD RD RXD 5 S RS RTS C Communication settings The communication settings of the extended serial I F of the GP 1s specified as the initial data of the bar code reader The initial data of Imex s bar code readers LSH3502AHV is as follows Data length Stop bit Parity bit 9600bps 4 124 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 7 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility For Olympus Symbol s bar code reader Model LS40041 e Wiring diagram AC 100V adapter lt y D sub 9 pin connector Bar code reader GP Laser scanner The bar code reader is directly connected to the GP
264. e Dec data format Round Up Round up displaying or printing values Input Range Min Value Max Value Designate the range of values stored in the Logging Address The possible ranges vary depending on the Input Code Format settings Address Offset 0 T Data Logging Address ponon Bit Length 1 16 16 H Input Code t No Code JA Code z i 2 s Complement L Round Up Display Range Min Value Max Value B5535 il ma This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 70 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features Column Settings General Info Data Format Size Style Absolute fe Relative Address Offset 0 Bit Length 1 16 16 Data Logging Address D00000 Input Code E No Code I Code i 2 s Complement JG Round Up Display Range Size Style General Info Size Style Display Format Mo of Display Digits Decimal Places Display Style 4 Shift Right i Shift Lett wil Zero Suppress 4 3 Logging Function Display Range Min Value Max Value Designate the range of values displayed in the N tag The possible ranges vary de pending on the Display Format and Code settings 2 17 4 Relative Data Dis play Settings N tag Display Format No of Display Digits Designate the number of digits for the dis
265. e Functions ym Using H tags W General Info H Tag Setting The General Info page provides informa General Into Address Settings tion about the current settings for the J Tag Marne H i tag escription Se Descrint Tag Name Togan Eiaa aa Must be no more than five Single byte or Read Out After Trigger Erase Trigger Bit Address two Double byte characters long and com Erase Screen Mo Data Storage Start Address pogot posed of letters and or symbols Read Out Data Size E Word Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag WE Address Settings Trigger Bit Address Address Settings Enter the trigger bit to draw objects When this trigger bit is turned ON the GP begins to draw an object After the GP completes Trigger Bit Address i 00000 MIE i Read Out After Trigger H MiaeMatnaaces mpa F drawing the object the GP turns OFF the Erase Screen No 1 trigger bit Preserve the object drawing data Data Storage Start Address Wooo O while the host s trigger bit 1S ON Read Out After Trigger 7 When this check box 1s checked object drawing data will be read out after the trig ger bit changes When the object drawing data is a large volume or when many H tags have been set in one screen check this check box for each H tag to increase other tag display speeds Erase Trigger Bit Address Enter the trigger bit to del
266. e Only one row can be set for Data Display only The total rows for the string and the border cannot be set e A column can be set for Date and Numerical Value only Up to two columns for date and time can be set for Date This function is supported only by GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 89 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features Sr e The maximum number of characters printable per row is 160 charac Note ters as usual Na E Write Settings No write settings the function enabling writing to LS are available in economy mode E Saving Data to a CF Card as a CSV File The settings are the same as those of Yes Loop Action in the conven tional compatible mode MIncrease in SRAM capacity e Fixed to Yes Loop Action 1024 20 12 extended data 2 x number of words of logging data x number of times x number of blocks 12 extended data 2 x number of words of logging data Extended data increases each 16 words by 2 bytes when the logging data exceeds 32 words 225 to 240 words 26 bytes 241 to 255 words 28 bytes This function is supported only by GP2000 series units 4 90 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function E Usage Restrictions More than 33 words can be set in stmple mode under the following limited conditions including the upper limit of the setting file l When chan
267. e displaying Mark image is smaller important than the previously displayed Mark image the part where it does not overlap may remain displayed on the screen GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 145 2 16 M tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 When Indirect is selected for the Mark Access The display of Marks in the same position or the display of Marks with different attributes changes according to changes in the host s PLC s word address screen file number and bit address Conditions M700 Mark screen file No 700 displays with the bit value of OFF a a ae a ae Mark screen file No 701 displays with the bit value of ON Timing Chart Bit value Data in the word address 700 700 gt 701 701 701 Bik off Blk on Blkon Blkoff Blk on file No 0 1 1 0 1 Mark screen 2 146 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 17 N tag r74 T N tag Numeric Display Displays the numeric data in a designated address Designated wa Ol0 7 5 Address f rt Ta About N tags WE Ata pre designated position on the screen N tags display in real time the numeric data of a designated host PLC word address E The Data Format can be set up as an Absolute or Relative display When Absolute is selected the stored host PLC data can use either Binary or BCD formats If Relative is se
268. e host computer confirms that all GP Completion Bits have been turned ON 5 The host computer sets its Control Word Address to 0 6 Each GP turns its Completion Bit OFF after confirming that the Control Word Address Operation Code has been changed to 0 7 The host computer confirms that all network GP Completion Bits have been turned OFF Prior to performing step 1 be sure that all network GP Comple I tion Bits are turned OFF Also since this procedure may be in japon terrupted such as by a power supply cutoff etc be sure to set the Control Word Address to 0 and turn all Completion Bits OFF before beginning 2 194 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag e Depending on each network GP s tag data reading order etc L the length of time each GP unit takes for each process and for Important turning the Completion Bit ON may differ e When operating 2 or more GPs at the same time depending on each GP s Read timing etc there will be a processing time lag e Ifan Alarm Trigger or an Alarm Recovery occurs just before or after the host computer s processing begins there may be slight differences between each GP s Alarm History Alarm Message Control Select whether the Alarm message 1s retained or cleared when the GP s power cord is disconnected If the Clear when powering up is selected all alarm message data is cleared
269. e in the set word address E Data Format Relative Relative Channel Settings Data Format Line Type Color Alam Settings Input data is converted to the set up dis 2 Absolute is Relative play range Word Address 1 Eloo E Li Ottset Word Address l Display Mode Bit Length 1 Input Range _ Init Code i Value A Mo Code 7 Value js OE rh ad MSB Cancel Heb Displays the data stored in the word ad dress setup here which uses 16 bit data Offset This option is valid when Block Display has been selected for the trend graph screen settings The graph data storage address can be specified via the offset setting The offset setting is valid when the Word Ad dress is set to other than the LS Area Display Mode Set this up when negative numbers are desired Bit Length Defines the valid bit length for the data stored in the set word address 1 The PLC designated in the 1 3 Tag List s note section 4 can only set the LS Device 2 This feature cannot be used with some PLCs For a complete list of these PLCS refer to 1 3 Tag List s note section 4 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Channel Settings General Info Data Format Line Type Color Alarm Settings 2 Absolute j Relative Saimi word Address Eil pon EI i ise l Display Mode Bit Lenghe m H
270. e mode using the loop feature e g When loop frequency is designated as 4 and the loop feature is S 3 S performed twice e CSV file Date Time Voltage Temperature1 Temperature 2 Pressure 98 06 17 09 00 00 3228 MOO 2a 6 1 ET 7 S oop 98 06 17 12 00 00 3236 26 4 26 4 6 4 operation 98 06 17 15 00 00 3244 20 0 21 6 6 2 cycle s 98 06 17 18 00 00 3202 SUr 28 7 6 5 carg 98 06 18 09 00 00 3210 26 9 29 9 9 3 2nd loop 98 06 18 12 00 00 3219 29 2 24 0 6 0 operation 98 06 18 15 00 00 3227 ST pa lee 6 3 98 06 18 18 00 00 3235 ia 26 3 6 1 aes When opened on Excel ate Time Voltage Temperaturet Temperature Pressure C E i e When writing logging data to a CF card in auto save mode using 1 the loop feature file data will be added to the previous data Important A file will be added and then opened If a file with the same name already exists data is added to that file e Ifa CSV file is too large it may not be able to be opened by Excel or other applications For more detailed information refer to the respective application s manual This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 81 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features x3 Data Logging Display Usage Examp
271. e order of their Tag Names E g Tag names K1 K2 K3 K10 oe will await input in the order K1 K10 K2 K3 and Tag names K01 K02 K03 K10 will await input in the order K01 K02 K03 K10 IIT L gt k The first display awaiting input is highlighted Pany 36 After entering a value and pressing the ENT key to store it KO in the data storage address data input moves to the next field The Start Bit turns ON E When using Relative data the data written to the host PLC is converted automatically based on the Input Range settings Host GP Input A data calculation program in the host PLC can be omitted E With Absolute data negative values are computed using 2 s complement With Relative data select a method either 2 s complement or MSB code WE The decimal point is not included in the Display Digit WE An alarm function is available by designating the upper and lower limits W For Relative values data that falls outside the valid range can be used as the alarm values Sr Only data within the valid range can be written to the host PLC Using data Note outside the valid range causes the GP to beep three times Ne data successfully written one beep data not written three beeps E When the ENT key is pressed Status s 03 bit in the system area will be reversed E Alarm may be set with variable values when the alarm uses the Indirect setup In this setup the upper an
272. e provides notes on setting up the Tag ya A tag Alarm Summary TEXT Display A tags display in rows messages text data registered in Text screens Only rows that are necessary are displayed When used in combination with other tags such as L and T tags you can display a sub display sub screen which corresponds to each message This is useful for troubleshooting of your system a a ae a Pena net running 3 Erro rough Pipe 1 ON i A Error 1 O Error 2 OW O Error 3 yaw About A tags W Each message text data is registered in a Text screen Operation Manual 3 4 Text Input the Text Screen W Allocate a monitor bit address to each row of text in the Text screen By designating the start address the monitor bits for the rest of the rows are allocated automatically Setup tags using word address units E Only rows whose corresponding monitor bits are activated display in the list These rows disappear when the monitor bits turn OFF W na Text screen a maximum 512 rows of text data can be registered A message summary of up to 512 rows can be displayed However with most GPs only 40 rows can display at one time on a screen If the messages cannot display on one screen create multiple Base screens set with A tags and display the other messages by switching Base screens In such cases set the Start Line number for each A tag to continue from the previous screen The
273. e screen this tag loads other library screens to create over lapping displays This tag is a special Library function The screen display changes according to the data in the designated word address 2 14 L tag Library Display Designated Word Address re a a a a Designated Word Address ____f ff Ff l Designated Word Address a GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 135 2 15 l tag lt small L gt Chapter 2 Active Image Functions awa About l tags WE The libraries registered on Base screens or Image Library screens display according to changes in the designated word address WE Changes in the designated Monitor Word Address data switches the library display WE Data changes can switch up to 32 libraries W Set up the data limits for when library switches take place in the Number of Ranges and Ranges fields The possible maximum value in the Number of Ranges field 1s 32 which 1s the same as that of the maximum number of libraries Set up the upper and lower limits for each range with a fixed value E As many libraries as the designated Number of Ranges are allocated to the consecutive screen file numbers starting from the designated Start Screen No W Register library screens you would like to display with these consecutive screen numbers WE Bit Offset and Bit Length setups are available for the Word Address Skip the bit O zero as set in the Bit Offset
274. e transmit receive processing completion flag Set the sent flag when sending is completed Set the received flag when receiving is completed GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script E Flow chart of Transmit Function Transmit Is the transmit buffer empty Is bit 0 of the status set to 1 Yes Set the transmit data in the LS area Transmit the data No Set the transmit completion flag End GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 47 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features E Flow chart of Receive Function Receive eceived data exists Is bit 2 of the status set to 1 Yes Has a receive error occurred Is bit 3 of the status set to 1 Clear receive buffer Has the required amount of data been received Yes Set the receive completion flag Has the receive time run out Has the receive time Convert the ASCII code of the read data into a binary value No Clear the receive buffer Set the receive completion flag 4 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Clear the receive buffer Set the receive completion flag Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script E Initialization of Extended SIO D script executed only once Trigger Formula Detect bit start up Bit address
275. ea SRAM L5 L5 SRAM Keypad Input Disply LS RES 4 Data Editing Edit the data using the keypad This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 35 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features 5 LS Area to PLC The edited data is transmitted to the PLC by touching the LS to PLC key Keypad Input Disply LS ARES This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 36 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function e Logging Function With this feature data of the designated PLC s device is sampled at the designated time or every time a Trigger Bit 1s turned ON and is then stored in the GP s backup SRAM T0064 Designated 0064 2 Sampling Word Addresses 0024 0025 0065 0025 0065 wae Logging Function WE Logging data is grouped into files and blocks WE Up to 32 words can be logged in one time These logged words are called data WE A group of data is called a block and a group of blocks are called a file Be aware that the number of pieces of data in each block is considered to be the same E Range of the number of blocks and the frequency of data logging 1 lt Number of blocks x Frequency lt 2048 E When data logging is performed at the
276. eaosessaeeereaeasanuseeeacstasceeaanantearseataeeeeaies 4 2 4 1 4 Sound Output Setting Examples lt 2 20sscssssqusesasaeanesatedadesdaaeaasaasaquaedaatecnnsasadiaerdnieaaaae 4 4 kho OUI Dalia T sree EREE EENE TAE AREA E EET NE 4 8 42 Filing Data Recipe Function ss ssssssssssusssisisosssinesises nesosusnasiscusisestesdesesiosvinssssss s 4 11 TN OTON E E AE A E E E A E ea iearen sea nate 4 11 WD Filing Data Recipe FUNCUON ee aes cacsice eas sce vnetiinetesaqiartews dence NN a iE E E ii 4 11 Ado Piling Dati CUT Face taecccict ee ctaaiecansecan enw n T A EN REE 4 19 424 Filing Data Seting 2 sseserssisetenisnee aian enn a iania a 4 22 42 Filing Data Sep Example serere aean aea 4 25 4 2 6 Automatic Filing Data Transmission cccreescciasovscesevortewserorreeuroniesioneueneesteseeneenes 4 25 4 2 7 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 1 ccccccccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeseeesssssnaaes 4 26 4 2 8 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 cccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeesseseseseeessssnaaees 4 31 e E E e a i T N O EO I EETA E S 4 37 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 13 TABLE OF CONTENTS 14 le WOVE VIG Wy x scien acwsec ncaa ee E E E E R 4 37 Ao MSO COINS Fane OM yeasts eoas ea acres E scence aseceses RN 4 37 A525 Logging Data Read TIMMINS ocpecccsacaancssceacsecteceenctenetetcececemoctesecnaceiecteressaeetecateerareieree 4 42 Aoa Data Loggina FOW secrepeceerini i inp E AREE AE E T TERES 4 43 4 3 5 Usi
277. eas where messages are not displayed If the GP screen 1s monochrome this should be set to black 2 24 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 2 a tag a Tag Setting Display Angle General Info Display Format Size Color Display Angle _ Set up the rotation for the display Select Display Angle O zero 90 180 or 270 degrees fe D degrees 90 degrees 7 180 degrees fh 270 degrees 2 2 4 Alarm Summary Display Notes WE Alarm messages display from the lowest monitor bit address W Be sure to allocate the monitor bits to consecutive addresses Cory unicaton Eror Code A A Tommunication Error Code ADT Gortrol Error Code BOS Path Error Code COS Display start Position W If there are many Alarm messages with the same monitor bit only the Alarm message with the smallest alarm number will display Avoid duplicating monitor bit addresses WE Monitor bit addresses cannot be used with different devices W Use the Alarm Summary display area exclusively for alarms Do not overlap the Alarm Summary display with other screen objects GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 25 2 26 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 3 C tag y C tag Time Display C tags display the current time based on the GP s internal clock Internal System 4147 1 Area Cl
278. ect O zero 90 180 or 270 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees fh 270 degrees EN e When setting a U tag L tag or X tag used with an A tag select Note Indirect in the Designated Window area for the U tag Indirect in the Desig N nated Screen area for the L tag and Indirect in the Mode Word Display Start Line area for the X tag Be sure to set each tag s Data Format to Bin e The Text screen and Base screen can use as many screens as 16 x monitor words one on a sub screen These screens cannot be used for other pur poses GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 13 2 1 A tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions yey A tag Example lt Specifications gt e Up to 50 lines of alarm messages e Maximum of 20 characters per line e Monitor bits starting from address M0800 ca2 e Sub screen Library used on the same Base Yellow Alert BA3 Breakdown screen Yellow Alert BUT The machine Start Screen No of sub screen libraries is Red Alert CAL B1000 Alarm Screen 1 Sub display W Since there are up to 50 alarm messages the text data that contains the messages must also use 50 rows Allocate a monitor bit address to each row starting from address M0800 The total monitor bits used will add up to 4 words 50 16 3 remainder 2 gt 4words WE Library screens used for the sub screen must be registered in the same order as the alarm messages as consecutive screen file numbers WE If
279. ed option is selected When the High Speed op tion 1s not selected select this option via the system area s Window Control 2 26 3 Global Window Display Ll High Speed Word Address I Touched Sereen Ta Fiant 9 Indirect Window Registration No E GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 241 2 26 U tag 2 242 ot O e XS Ll High Speed Word Address es Dooa FE Chapter 2 Active Image Functions For Global Window display addresses used for the window display operation are set in the System Data Area Be sure to set the addresses used for the window display via the GP Setup or INITIALIZE settings Up to 2 U tags can be set with the High Speed option selected on the same screen If the U tag with the High Speed option selected has a W tag or D script data write settings to a device data write is performed as if the required conditions are satisfied even when the window has been designated as being not displayed When High Speed is not selected however this data write is not performed The High Speed function is the same as the High Speed function of this software s version 2 0 or earlier Designated Window Direct The window display screen and display position are fixed The window display Designated Window L Tawehed Sereen Ta Fiant l Seer maar a oe _
280. ed Alarms i Clear All Recovered Alarms a Erases all the acknowledged alarms fa Finish Sub Display However the registered control devices are not deleted toot bee Finish This key ends key entry operations as the cursor disappears T Tag Setting General Into Options t Bit t Word fe Special Mode Special 17 Return to Previous Screen i Reset GP Sub display Pressing the Sub display Key with Q tag s sub display selected calls up the desig nated sub display screen GP 270 does not support this function Be sure to create the Q tag select keys for the Q tag s display L screen that the Q tag is designated They cannot be used if they Important are set on the screen that the Q tag is not set Also they cannot be used when two or more Q tags are created in a single screen 2 218 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 23 T tag E Options Options Reverse Video Defines whether touch areas highlight while the touch panel key is pressed EN When coping a screen data created by a screen creation software older than GP Note PRO PBIII if a touch panel key uses fills the filling may blink in Reverse mode X To avoid this reaction do not use Reverse Video with a fill pattern Buzzer Defines whether or not a beep sounds when a touch panel key is pressed One Shot 2 23 4 One Shot buzzer for T tag m
281. ed flag In this example the value of the read data 1 1s stored in the LS2001 address as a binary value GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 53 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features E Example of Service Request Command Send processing Function TRANS FUNC R2 Execution Formula if s EXT_ SIO STATOO 1 Is send buffer empty Set command output to extended SIO in LS area w LS0100 0x02 STX w LS0101 0x30 Node No w LS0102 0x31 w LS0103 0x30 Sub address w LS0104 0x30 w LS0105 0x30 SID w LS0106 0x30 MRC w LS0107 0x31 w LS0108 0x30 SRC w LS0109 0x31 w LS0110 0x43 Variable type Cl w LS0111 0x31 w LS0112 0x30 w LS0113 0x30 w LS0114 0x30 w LS0115 0x33 w LS0116 0x30 Bit position w LS0117 0x30 w LS0118 0x30 Number of elements w LS0119 0x30 w LS0120 0x30 w LS0121 0x31 w LS0122 0x03 w LS0123 0x42 Output to extended SIO IO_WRITE p EXT_ SIO w LS0100 24 t0000 1 Set sent flag endif 3 54 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features E Example of Service Response Command Receive Function RCV FUNC RI Execution Formula if s EXT_SIO_STAT02 1 if s EXT_SIO_STAT03 1 c EXT_SIO_CNTRLO2 c EXT SIO_CNTRLO1 j else if EXT_SIO_RCV gt 25 IO READ p EXT_ SIO w LS0200 25 t 0001 1 C
282. ed screen coordinates using host PLC Word Address data 4 TT Sai Places an object and moves italong a preset rail created by an R aa Display J tag tag Use in conjunction with the R tags Allows you to enter character or numeric data through either a touch Key Input keyboard set up via k tags a barcode reader or a standard PC K fag keyboard This data is stored in the hosts PLC s designated word address ae 1 Setup k tag switches Use in combination with the K tags Displays Base or Image Library screen objects or text previously registered in libraries These items will be either displayed or not displayed according to the host s PLC s data A variety of Base or Image Library screen data previously registered as library items can be set fo appear whenever there is a change in the hosts PLCs word device data activates a response This is a special L tag function Mark Display Marks which are bit mapped icon images created in Mark screens M tag are used on Base screens to reflect changes in host PLC data Free Library Display F tag Library Display L tag Library State Change Display small L tag et GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types 1 3 Tag List Alphabetical Order Numeric n la N tag ee Used to display a numeric value from the host s PLC s word address Alarm S Y Displays the upper and lower limits of the ala
283. eds the LS Area size that data cannot be transmitted This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 56 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function x8 Display Settings In this dialog box the settings used in the Display tab can be viewed and edited Data Logging Settings Display Print Write Settings JM Diplan ON OFF Capu fiam Fii Display Setting dialog box nE RRE 1 M Aow Settings F Column Settings Fi Display Block Mame Fj Display Block Name Ho of Block Name Rowe No of Char ltem No of Data Rowe No of Data Col No of Calc Rowe Data Char Size Ge te When using loop operation regardless of the logging frequency the data display X 7 row will be designated as only a single row Settings Rows and columns can be selected to change their attributes Add Select a Data row or Value column and click on the Add button to create a new row or column Copy Copies the currently selected Data row s or Value column s data 1s copied to the Clipboard Paste Pastes data row or Value column data copied to the Clipboard in the desired position Cut Deletes the currently selected Data row s or Value column s Ge t When copying row or column data with the same attribute multiple times 1 Designate the No of Block Data and No of Char Col 2 Enter all settings for
284. een any message whose Sub Screen No setting is 0 will not cause the screen to change When using the Sub Display feature you can place only one Q tag per Base screen When multiple Q tags are placed on a screen the Sub Screen will not display When Direct is selected due to the effect of the touch panel grid the Q tag s display position or the number of dots used for spacing between each message row may cause Touch Keys to lose their effectiveness If you touch an area on a message display where there is no message text even though the buzzer will sound the Sub Screen area will not display Placing Sub Display keys on top of the Start and Move keys is possible however be sure to place the Sub Display keys on top after placing the Start keys and Move keys 2 186 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag 2 20 7 About Freeze Mode In freeze mode Alarm Trigger Error Clear plus the Ack Ack All Delete and Delete All touch key inputs remain valid however the screen display simply does not refresh until freeze mode is released Use freeze mode when many alarms are activated at the same time e g test runs Stopping the display allows you to see the displayed messages asii 12 15 A tank Low Water Level 13 15 15 00 as DI 12 00 Level 1 Point clased 14 00 16 60 A line displays at the top and bottom of the frame in f
285. ees l 270 degrees r Magre General Info Data Format Graph Type RangeColor Display Angle g Tag Setting Display Angle 90 degrees 180 degrees Hi Ea f 270 degrees eee ea 2 9 g tag Display Angle Setup the data s display rotation angle for a Pie or Half pie graph Select O zero 90 180 or 270 degrees GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 78 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 10 H tag yt H tag Moving Mark Display Straight lines rectangles circles and dots can be drawn at desired coordi nates using the host Word Address data Specified Word Display data Address rm nY About H tag E Straight lines rectangles circles and dots can be drawn W For straight lines the display attributes such as line type and arrows can be specified E Drawn objects color attributes can be specified WE Desired coordinates can be specified in the X and Y directions E Objects drawn when the display trigger bit address is specified to OFF ON The drawn objects will overwrite the currently displayed objects M To delete objects call up the delete screen by specifying the delete trigger bit address to ON OFF The GP 270 does not support this function GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 79 2 10 H tag Chapter 2 Active Imag
286. eference Manual 2 205 2 22 S tag 2 206 Se he Se te XS Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Word Address Defines the starting word address for storing the character string Enter a NULL code of 00 h at the end of the string This NULL code deter mines the display length the number of bytes of the characters W Size Style 5 Tag Setting General Info Display Mode Display Size 8x16 ha Mumber Color Fg Background Color Pattern Bg Display Style te Shift Lett Clear Display i Centered 1 Shift Right Display Size Text characters used in the display can be 16 32 64 or 128 dots high and 8 16 32 or 64 dots wide The basic unit of mea surement is a single byte character 1 e lt Single byte Character gt 8 dots 16 dots No of Display Char Defines the character string length for the display The maximum number of display characters is 80 Number Color Defines the foreground color Fg back ground color Bg and blink attributes Blk Background Color Pattern and Background colors Bg and Blink status Blk are specified The Pattern s Background color Pc is desig nated by the Pattern color The Pattern s Background color will be a combination of Bg and Pc However Pattern 0 can only be specified for GP 270 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag The maximum number of characters available for the S tag display depends on the GP screen size p
287. eference Manual 4 107 4 5 Serial code Reader Compatibility Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 108 E LS Storage Size Settings Assign Size Maximum Setting Assign Size The maximum number of bytes for the LS area is the maximum volume of data that can be stored in the LS area The data can be written to the LS area if it does not exceed the specified maximum number of bytes of data If data exceeding the maximum number of bytes is read the overflow data will not be written to the LS area Setting Maximum Data can be written in the LS area if it does not exceed the maximum usable LS area However if the amount of read data exceeds the usable LS area the overflow data will not be written in the LS area E Storage Mode When processing the serial data specify a storage method You specify whether the data column should be cleared or not This function is activated only when the LS storage size is set to Assign Size The following three modes are available e OFF e Clear Data with 0 Clear with Null e Clear Data with Space When the currently read data size is shorter than the previously read data size the currently read data can be correctly displayed with the S tag by clearing the LS area data Where clearing of data column is required Example When the LS storage size is set to 14 bytes LS area address Previously read Currently read Volume ofread data 0 Status 1 Data 2 The previously read data in the
288. elected al Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchT ype Calor e Use LS Area Mil Use LS Area Top Write Word Address Mma Filing data is first transferred to the GP s LS area before being transferred to the PLC While filing data is being transferred from SRAM to LS and LS to SRAM the GP internal special relay LS2032 s bit 11 will be turned ON Use Transfer Completed Bit Address T Use Transfer Completed Bit Address ID Mo 10 Less PLC Transter Completed Bit Address Caneel A Heb Not Selected Enables disables the Transfer Completed Bit setting 4 2 7 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 1 W File Display settings ID No 0 In this example where only one Filing Data Display is placed the ID No does not need to be entered Keep the default setting When placing two or more Filing Data Displays on the currently displayed screen be sure not to use the same ID No for multiple Filing Data Displays Also when placing a window con taining two or more Filing Data Displays on a Base screen be sure not to use the same ID No more than once File No 1 Enter the previously entered filing data number Operation Manual 2 1 16 File Display This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 32 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function
289. ement J Round Up t Hex E MSE 1 Octal Input Display Designation f Direct E Indirect Input Range Min alue 0 E Max Value 65535 E E p 00000 FE i Ares Alter Displey ddiess H eadar Base Addiass Display Range E Min alue 0 E Max alue E5535 o 2 Indirect Address Area GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual ee cc Range 2 lower limit Range 3 lower limit Input range Max Input range Hin Display range Max Display range Hin Indirect Designation Area After Base Address Input Display Designation Indirect Color Designation Indirect No of Ranges 3 Input range Hax 2 Inptrange Min 3 ist range 4 Display range mas 5 Color code Indirect Designation Area After Display Address Input Display Designation Indirect Color Designation Indirect Word Address 2 6 E tag Range and Display Range fields Max Display Address Area After Base Address The input and output ranges are automati cally allocated according to the display data address specified in the Word Address field The allocated address is displayed in the Input Range and Output Range fields Max Min fields Address Allocation in Indirect Designation 0 Display Data H 1 r3 4 5 Display range Hax 6 Display range Min Indirect Design
290. en a Trigger Bit is turned ON sound data is output only once and then the Trigger Bit is turned OFF This mode is Enabled only with the LS Area E When a Trigger Bit is turned OFF sound data output can also be canceled 1 This feature is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 2 For sound output Digital s optional Multi Unit sound output feature compatible type and external speakers are required GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 4 1 Sound Output Chapter 4 Advanced Features EN When more than 1 Start Bit turns ON at the same time the sound items are Note normally output according to the sound setting s order However the order x may differ depending on the timing of the read out of the transmitted data Sound Setting 1 s Start Bit Address A OFF ON 3 Sound Setting vy i Start Bit Address B OFF i Sound 1 Sound 2 Sound Thank you H Welcome AN If Repeat Play is being used with one sound item and another Repeat Play sound Note item s Start Bit turns ON in the following Repeat Play operation these sound NV items will be output according to the sound setting s order Sound Setting ts pm Start Bit Address A OFF Sound Setting 2 s S Start Bit Address B OFF Sound 2 sound 1 Sound 2 Sound 1 Sound Thank you Thank you When 2 or more Start Bits turn ON at the same time the sound items are normally output according to the sound setting s order How
291. ent LS0100 Writes LS0200 data to D0200 Halts loop operation while the loop equation is being executed This feature is supported only by GP77R Series GP377 Series and GP2000 Series units ura The break command can be used only in the section of loop Important GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features WE Operands Address Operands foe ro fen e bit address Enter a bit address e word address Enter a word address e temp temporary work address Here a GP internal Address is specified that can be used with the program With GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units there are 90 words from 0000 to 0089 available for Temporary Work Address With all units other than GP77R and GP377 series units there are 4 words from 0000 to 0003 available for Temporary Work Addresses The Temporary Work Address s initial value is not fixed Constant Operands e Constant Select a constant 4 a bas To identify data via the input data s format a E g Decimal A numeric value without leading zeros 4100 Hexadecimal A numeric value preceding by 0x gt 0x100 Octal A numeric value preceding by a zero 0100 Calculation examples in hexadecimal and BCD formats Hexadecimal format only Ox270F amp OxFFOO The result 1s 0x2700 BCD and hexadecimal formats 9999 amp OxFFOO The result is 0x9900 3 18 G
292. enter column attribute data click on a Date Time or Value title top bar and then click on the Settings button Display Settings EE conv esate cur Date Time This tab page provides information about the current Column settings eneral Info Data Format Size Style Alara Settings 2 Column Type t Value fe Date Time 0 Char Col elaka Sa Column Ho Data Type Date Column Type Select the desired display item from Value Date Time or Char Col Display Format yy mind lapat ween Alam Settings Display Style No of Display Digits 9 Decimal Places Date Displays the date Data Format Size Style Alarm Settings e Displays the time Display Format pai mmdd Display Format Select the desired time date display format This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 59 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features General Info Column Type Value Value A Zae tere eeste en s us Selecting this option displays actual log Column Type i Value i Date Time 72 Char Col ging data in the Display Settings area Data Type Date Display Format yy mind laput eee Alam Settings OFF Display Style Shift Lett Mo of Display Digitz Decimal Places Absolute Data Formet Size Stie AlamSetings O Displays Logging Address area Addres
293. er 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 14 L tag yam L tag Library Display Graphics and text in other screens registered as Libraries can be called into the Base screen in RUN mode Responding to changes in word address data the screen can perform active image displays Use the L tag in situations such as displaying a lamp s ON OFF condition A screen image may be composed of a single shape or character string and then used much like a part called in as a library An L tag sets up the over lapping display position for the library s center point GP PRO PB III for Windows Operation Manual 2 5 Libraries a a a a 2 14 2 About L tags WE Graphics and text in a Base screen or Image Library screen registered as a library appears on the GP screen according to changes in the corresponding host PLC data A library can be made to display when the designated trigger bit changes GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 119 2 14 L tag 2 120 Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W The display and non display of libraries can be setup using trigger bits In such cases the Base screen library display becomes an XOR display When the Image Library screen library is displayed it appears on top of the current screen When cancelled the Library screen is written over by a black rectangle to the perimeter of the library screen image 2 14 8
294. er Bit Address fe koon om Bit Address Mode fe Set i Reset I Invert E Compare o cancer Hen GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 28 W tag The General Info screen provides infor mation about the current W tag settings Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Roman characters or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a descrip tion Bit Sets or resets the designated bit address when the trigger bit changes Trigger Type 0 1 The tag operates when the trigger bit changes 0 to 1 1 gt 0 The tag operates when the trigger bit changes to 0 01 The tag operates when the trigger bit condition changes 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 Trigger Bit Address Designates the location of the bit used to trigger the operation Bit Address Set up the bit address which is set or reset when the trigger bit changes Mode Set Sets the designated bit high ON when the trigger bit is activated according to the designated trigger mode The Set opera tion 1s performed only when the trigger bit changes The bit remains ON Reset Sets the designated bit low OFF when the trigger bit 1s activated according to the designated trigger mode The Reset op eration 1s performed only when the trigger bit changes The bit remains OFF Invert The designated bit conditio
295. ernal Memory J Compression C CF Card enter Title and Sound Number To com Tite press data after conversion via the Con a vert button check the Compression i a check box Za e The data write destination can be designated as the CF card if your GP is Note equipped with the Multi Unit sold separately This feature is supported Z only by GP77R Series units 4 4 3 CF Card Usage Cautions e The Wav file size that can be converted will differ depending on the data write destination For internal memory Approximately 50KB when compressed approximately 8 seconds For CF card Depends on CF card s amount of free space This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 4 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features EN e A Title can be entered using up N ote 4 1 Sound Output to 30 Single byte characters or 15 Double byte characters If the existing sound number is designated a prompt ap x pears asking if the new data should overwrite the old e To import sound data from the optional library CD select a file with a exten sion of daf Create Sound Data Wave File Name C Sound Data nformeation Browse BF Output To fF Internal Hemon l Compression 4 CF Card Title Information Sound Humber i E 1 Information conver E Changing Sound Data oe Edt Convert Vie
296. erpret touch area on the Graphic Panel for the host PLC When the user presses one of these defined touch areas the action 4 defined by the associated T tag is performed T tag Touch Panel Input Touch Switch Provides a touch panel object which looks and operates like a selector switch Each time the object switch is pressed one switch e address turns OFF and another address bit turns ON Sends inching output from the touch panel GP directly to a digital input DIN relay on the host PLC via the GP s AUX I O interface here after referred to as AUX I F This allows instantaneous fine adjustment to be performed using just the touch panel keys ttag Selector Switch Input Tih and Tiw tags Inching Function E tag Numeric Displays numeric data in real time as the data in the host s PLC s Data Display word address changes The color of the display can be set to show expanded movement within preset data ranges Data can be displayed in N tag function decimal hexadecimal BCD binary octal and floating point format l tag Settings Thatsettings being entered for the K tag are indicated in the input display window Allows you to enter character or numeric data through either a touch Numeric Display K tag keyboard setup via k tags a barcode reader or a standard PC 7 Key Input keyboard This data is stored in the hosts PLC s designated word address N tag Numeric Used to
297. es a comparison of the contents of the Word Address with a predetermined constant If the condition is correct the bit address is set high 1 Group A radio switch state switch can be created by setting the same group T tag This fea ture can not be used with GP 270 Series Auto OFF Group After the set time elapses the Bit will au tomatically be turned OFF The time can be designated from 1 to 60 seconds in 1 second intervals The Group No can be designated from 0 to 63 See next page GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 211 Touch available condition fi Bit Or C Bit fk 2 23 T tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Group Nos designated via Group and Auto OFF Group are controlled sepa rately As a result even if the same Group No is used in both modes they are processed as different numbers This feature is supported by only the GP77R Series GP377 Series and GP2000 Series units Interlock The Interlock Address can be entered only when the Interlock is used to con trol the Touch screen s operation The Touch available condition designates which Interlock Bit Address setting i e ON or OFF effects the Touch function The Touch available condition s Bit Off setting 1s supported by only GP77R Series GP377 Series and GP2000 Series units Compare Word Address Defines the word address containing the data compared with the set constant 16 bit data Constant
298. es preference and the data being input is ignored e When the data write is completed 03 bit of Status in the system data area is highlighted so that the timing of data writing 1s acknowledged e If the bar code input with the K tag is not permitted the bar code data cannot be written with the K tag EN e When the one dimensional bar code reader is connected to both the GP tool Note connector and the extended serial interface and the one dimensional bar Nel code data is read in them simultaneously the data may not be correctly writ ten in the K tag GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 117 4 7 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 7 3 Tested Bar Code Readers E Model Manufacturer Model Type Read width Remarks __ OPT 5125 RS232C H DC5300T Opt Electronics OPT 1125 RS232C K e a it l NFT 7175 L RS232C Statonary i A BR 730RS Pen f Battery powered Imex BR 530RS Pen BB 60 power supply required BW 665RS sold separately LSH3502AHV Laser scanner f P ly attached to th Olympus Symbol 001 Laser scanner f Power supply attached to the vs4004 Laser scanner ody unit L56004 Laser scanner P 200 power supply required HC36TR Touch scanner 61mm sold separately Sanwa Denso Supply KRS 423XF 1K HC61TR Touch scanner 61mm connection cable required sold separately Keyence BL 80R Touch seaane 105mm Power supply is attached to th
299. es with the Erase Mode setting 7 N nies When the Display Mode is set to Indirect Data and the Screen Access is set to Nyy ate the Erase Mode is fixed to No E g L tag setting Trigger Type cessvcrssnencs 0 gt Screen ACCESS Indirect e Libraries registered B00 B Ol B702 E Timing Chart e Erase Mode Enabled The image appears when the bit is ON When the bit is OFF the image is i removed Eit 7 mMm m File a iam x os nm 702 Screen lt a Display 700 700 70l TOL 702 Display Erase Dipleg Erase Display e Erase Mode Disabled The library image remains displayed if the bit turns OFF The next library image overlaps on the current image l O FL po File 70 lt FO 702 Hare r l Screen number Ol Display TO Display i 700 Display GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 127 2 14 L tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions aU WE Offset Settings This section explains an example of how to use an offset E g In the example below the data from a single address is used to trigger the simultaneous display of both an L tag and an M tag Setup these tags Tag Word Data Offset Name Address Format Value When the data value in address DM0050 is 100 both L tag s library B300 and M tag s Mark M100 display at the same time Word Address L tag 100 a 200
300. ete a drawn ob ject When the erase trigger bit is turned ON the GP overwrites the current screen with an erase screen After the erase screen display is completed the GP turns OFF the erase trigger bit Read Out Data Size 5 a i IF Co eee 1 The GP 270 does not support this function 2 This feature cannot be used with some PLCs For a complete list of these PLCS refer to 1 3 Tag List 2 80 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 10 H tag Erase Screen No A screen number Base screen to erase a drawn object is specified This screen needs to be prepared beforehand H Tag Setting Trigger Bit Address i 00000 MIE Address Settings i Read Out After Trigger S S A Erase Trigger Bit Address wko MA Data torage tart ddress The first Word Address to store the object Erase Screen No 1 a r drawing data is specified Data Storage Start Address few poong e Read Out Data Size The number of the words for the object drawing data is specified Read Out Data Size 5 a i IF Co eee Q te Bin data can only be stored for object drawing data BCD data cannot be used D GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 81 2 10 H tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions AOE Object Drawing Data This section explains the details about object drawing data starting from the Operation Mode s Data Start Address Dis
301. etermining the movement of the library item Screen No Enter the screen number Base screen or Image screen of the library item that you would like to display E Designated Screen Indirect F Tag Setting General Info Designated Screen Mode Il Data Format 1 Direct Tahana Word Address es Doon Screen Type fe Base Screen 1 Image Screen 17 Image Screen CF Card Screen No Storage Address Data Format a Bin ooog i BCD Offset Value r pe ee GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Indirect Select this option to indirectly designate the library item s screen number via the Word Address Screen Type Base Screen Image Screen Select the type of screen you want to dis play Base screen or Image screen 2 59 2 7 F tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Image Screen CF Card Select this when you want to designate the Image screen saved to the CF Card Word Address Defines the word address containing the data library item s movement Data Format F Tag Setting Mode Il Data Format 1 Direct fe Indirect EA Designated Screen Screen Type Ward Address fe Base Screen a nooo t Image Screen 17 Image Screen CF Card Data Format Screen No Storage Address i Bin ooog Bin i BCD Offset Value E BCD e j Defines the type of data stored in the coordinate or movement data Word Address Word Add
302. ettings Print Settings Maximum File Size WE Loop operation can be designated in logging mode With loop operation selected when data logging capacity becomes full logging data will repeatedly be overwritten from the 1st top data area loop operation Also the GP s backup SRAM storage area becomes one large storage area that has a linked buffer like structure lt Without Loop Operation gt Block 0 Logging Data 1 Each logging data item uses the same Logging Data 2 number of Words The range of the number of Words is from Ato 32 Logging Data n Block 1 Logging Data 1 Logging Data 2 Logging Data n Block m 1 Logging Data 1 Logging Data 2 Logging Data n e When data logging is performed for the designated number of blocks the GP Note will turn the File Full Bit Address ON and data logging will stop e To resume data logging turn the Data Clear Bit Address ON from the PLC The GP then clears all logging data and will start data logging from the beginning This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 38 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function lt With Loop operation gt Logging Data Using loop operation each logging data Block Logging Data item also uses from 1 to 32 words Single Logging Data Logging Data n e When data logging is performed to the end of a loop cycle data logg
303. evels of Functions can be called by a program Do NOT create more than that e Up to 9 levels of nested Functions can be recalled e Up to 254 Functions can be created D Script operations activated by a trigger after the screen changes are as follows moan o o e Timersetings x x x x x x xx Detecingwe x ol xlo Detecting o x lolx O Operation is performed right after the screen is changed or the power is turned ON X Operation is not performed right after the screen is changed or the power is turned ON When the timer is operating the timer starts counting right after the screen changes When using Global D Script the operations mentioned above are performed only when the GP s power is turned ON When the GP screen changes how ever the operation mentioned above will not be performed and the monitor operates using the trigger conditions that have been set When a Global D Script includes a timer the timer starts counting right after the GP s power cord is connected AN Do not use the touch panel key to set the trigger bit or to operate the start bit Note ina program because the timing of the touch input may not be correct re yx sulting in the bit being improperly entered 3 24 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script W Limitations Specific to Global D Script When the GP s power is turned ON t
304. even 1f the same data is written to host PLC System Area 8 as in step 6 of the previous page However when using the forced screen change the actions explained previ ously can bring about a screen change When forcing a screen change when screen number data is in BCD form set up the system so as it is controlled in the screen number range 1 to 1999 Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 23 T tag Releasing Forced Screen Change Forcing a screen change causes an inability to make any touch panel screen changes until the enforcing bit is released That is the top bit in the data in the 8 address must be set OFF Only valid from the host PLC side yw xa Screen Level Change Direction The screen change pattern path can be controlled by GP PRO s tags To create this path select the Project Manager s GP System Settings Area s Screen Level Change Direction option Then when you place T tags on a screen that has been registered as using this function the screens will change according to the Path shown below If you then turn this function OFF i e deselect it all T tag screen changes will simply return jump to the previous screen regardless of level Main Screen Screen Level Change Flow 300 is selected Main Screen 400 Main Screen Screen Level Screen Level Change Flow Change Flow is selected is selected 700 Main Screen 0 800 Screen Level Change Flow
305. ever the output orders shown in the examples below may differ since the order of sound output can change due to the timing of the read out of the transmitted data E g 1 When the Repeat Play mode sound setting 1 2 and 3 Start Bits turn ON at the same time the sound output order 1s L 2535 gt 15243 e E g 2 When the Repeat Play mode sound setting 1 2 and 3 Start Bits turn ON in 3 2 1 order following each sound setting s output 1 e while sound setting 3 is being output sound setting 2 s Bit is turned ON and while sound setting 2 is being output sound setting 1 s Bit is turned ON the sound output order 1s a gt l a le Oe This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 2 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 1 Sound Output 4 gt Sound Output Settings Screen Setup Sound Settings After selecting the Project Manager s GF Setup Alaina Sound Settings selection the following Sound Settings menu will appear Filing Data j Data Logging Settings Editor Device Monitor Symbol E ditor E Sound Settings HER le Byt Address Bit Address Sets up the Trigger Bit Addresses to output sound data Sound No Selects the desired sound data file number to be converted from
306. f Ranges 3 n Display Data e 16 bit data n Range 2 lower limit value e Display data storage address n n 2 Range 3 lower limit value W For Relative data when display data is outside the designated range the color changes to the maximum or minimum range s colors W Graph patterns can be selected from the following two types e Pattern which fills the data display portion Single byte type e Meter which displays the data using a needle GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W General Info g Tag Setting General Info Data Format Graph Type Range Color Display Angle g booo00 Abs Bin 16 bit Bar Up Normal Tag Name Descriptions Word Address Data Display Format Graph Type Color Type Direct E Data Format Absolute g Tag Setting Data Format Graph Type Range Color Display Angle Relative General Info fg pooo Fie l Display Mode i Bin Data Format F ETO E Data Format Relative g Tag Setting General Into i Absolute Data Format Graph Type Range Color Display Angle Word Address Dano Fie Cl Display Mode Bit Length w H Designated Input Direct 9 Indirect Input Range p Max Value 65535 Input Code Format i No Code i 2 s Complement iy MSB Min Value
307. ferred to the GP the previously transferred image screen and sound data files for that project are still remaining on the CF Card e When Memory Link Ethernet Type is designated as a PLC type screen data cannot be transferred to a CF Card GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 97 E Important 4 4 Using the CF Card Chapter 4 Advanced Features w Using the GP s OFFLINE Mode This section describes various actions related to using the CF Card via the GP s OFFLINE mode In OFFLINE mode the CF Card is initialized and the screen data downloaded to the GP is backed up For details refer to your Multi Unit Users Manual CAN e Unless the Multi Unit sold separately is installed in your GP unit the menu Note for the CF Card will not appear Nl Prior to using the GP s OFFLINE Mode be sure to send the system data to the GP unit using the screen editor software E Initializing the CF Card You can initialize the CF Card s memory via the GP s OFFLINE Mode feature E Screen Data Backup Screen data can be backed up as MRM files on the CF Card These backup files can be returned to the source GP unit or to another GP unit so that their screen data can be used there aN fa Only one project s data can be saved on a single CF Card as Creating a Backup File on the CF Card A backup file can be created on the CF Card by designating SCREEN DATA TRANSFER s COPY TO CF CARD se
308. fied Conventional compatible mode has a limit of 32 logging words To simplify the settings only Yes Loop Action is specified in simple mode Only GP2000 series unit supports this function E Trigger Settings The trigger settings in simple mode are as follows e When specifying bit Togging start address O C PEC rigger bitaddress O GP PACK bitaddress SC Fiebitaddess lt SOC Data clearbitaddress O Q Indicates a setting exists e When specifying time Toggingstataddress O E Od C Togging enable bit address O C Biockend bitaddress C Fie fallbitaddress iO Data clearbitaddress O Q Indicates a setting exists Indicates no setting This function is supported only by GP2000 series units 4 88 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function E Display Settings The display format is simplified in economy mode as follows Display Settings Economy ee es aaa ee loo See ee ee e A row can be set only for Item Name Data Display and Summary Each item has only one row The rows for Item Name and Summary can be made invalid e A column can be set only for Date and Numerical Value Up to two columns for date and time can be set for Date E Printout Settings The format for printout settings is simplified in economy mode as follows Printer Settings Economy tote pra rca eee
309. fill pattern for each division of the graph After clicking a division on the sample graph set color attributes No of Data Divisions Defines the number of parts you want the graph divided into You can designate from two to eight divisions The same number of word addresses from the designated Word Address will be automatically oc cupied for storing graph data Div 1 Pattern Div 1 Color Fg Bg and Blk Defines foreground Fg and background Bg colors blink Blk and fill pattern for each division of the graph After clicking a division on the sample graph set color attributes Se 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 33 2 34 2 4 D tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions When setting up the No of Divisions the sample graph will be sepa Note rated into the designated number of divisions with the currently desig NI nated section having a heavy black border Click on part of a division or enter a division number displayed in the graph to designate color setup for that division E Display Angle For Pie Graphs only D Tag Setting General Info Display Angle Data Format Graph Type _ z Designate the angle at which graph data Display Angle i i begins in pie graph setup only Select 0 Oe zero 90 180 or 270 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees i 270 degrees aN bes The display angle selection is not available when creating
310. fines the maximum character display length available for each alarm message 2 23 2 2 a tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Border Example Outer Border 2 deot line Red Alert Code AU Red Alert Code AUS Warming Er Code C03 Inner Border dot line Za a bas The message character display colors are designated in the Alarm Editor A The number of rows and characters on a screen will vary depending on the GP screen size panel orientation and character size 2 1 2 About A tags Max No of Characters and Lines A tag e When all the Alarm messages cannot fit on one screen set up the Start Line as shown below Screen 1 Start Line normally 1 Screen 2 Start Line previous screen Display Lines Start Line Screen n Start Line previous screen Display Lines x n 1 Start Line e The possible number of display lines and characters is designated by the GP screen size and installation orientation and the display size setting W Size Color Display Size Text characters used in the display can be 16 32 64 or 128 dots high and 8 16 32 a Tag Setting General Info Display Format Size Color Display Angle cinch or 64 dots wide The basic unit of mea surement is a Single byte or Double byte Erase Color character 1 e fe i lt Single byte lt Double byte Character gt Character gt 8 dots 16 dots a 16 dots 16 dots Erase Color Defines the color attributes for ar
311. fo Designated Screen Mode Data Format L Code t Range Min vae Py ja Max Value E5535 cal vin vae Oy Max Value 65535 F f o 2 7 F tag Data Storage Address Position Change The Word Address designated on the Screen Access page will be displayed here This address is used to store movement data Data Format Bin BCD Defines the type of data stored in the Word Address used for coordinate and move ment data Code Defines whether or not negative values can be used Available only when set to Bin format X Range Min Value Max Value Defines the minimum and maximum values for the X coordinate These fields appear when the Area option has been selected on the Operation Mode page Y Range Min Value Max Value Defines the Y coordinate s minimum and maximum values These fields appear when the Area option has been selected on the Operation Mode page lt Data Format Data Range gt Data Format Range 0 65535 Bin AN Do not store data in the designated Word Addresses that is outside the X Range Note ote Y Range or Move ranges D GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 61 2 62 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 8 G tag ya G tag Graph Display Displays data in any of three graph types bar pie and half pie Designated Word Address 010 715
312. folders and files When not using multiple folders Delete Deletes folders and files E Internal Memory Clicking on the Add button with Inter Folder Type Filing DatalIntemal Ton nal Memory selected will call up the fol Folder No 1 a Cancel lowing screen Folder No Filing data number Internal memory to 64 CF card to 8999 Folder Title Enter a title Commas are not allowed Folder Title Oooo This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 22 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function E 1 Filing Data Selecting 1 Filing Data and clicking on the reno EE baned EE Add button calls up the following screen Here Descipion Nactaaltens o E you can enter filing data addition settings Data Storage StatAd ess poo PE aroma File No be FI Filing data is controlled in individual file units Here designate the file numbers of fil Gaia ing data to be registered Up to 2 048 files Sex can be registered Data Storage Start Address L Enter the first Address where the transferred fil Ing data is stored Data storage areas will be saved in series starting from the Start Address for the number of filing data items No of Data Blocks Designate the number of blocks to be registered in one file A maximum of 1 650 blocks can be designated The maximu
313. form data processing internally thereby reducing the PLC s processing load E Register Filing Data via the Filing Data List Use the Filing Data List to register filing data The filing data function represents a function to register set values such as recipes as files to the GP and to send those values to the PLC devices due to an event etc This Filing Data is stored in either the GP s internal memory or in a CF card To send Filing Data to a PLC place a File Name Display and select the desired data to be sent E Log PLC Data Using the Logging Function Using the Logging Function PLC device data is logged and stored in the back up SRAM via the settings registered as the Logging Settings This logged data can also be stored on a CF card E Register Sounds via Sound Data Previously created Sound Data is registered in the GP as sound data This data can be stored in the GP s internal memory or on a CF card Sounds are then output from a speaker using the settings registered in the sound settings area GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 1 3 1 3 Tag List Alphabetical Order Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types Tag List Alphabetical Order Displays text messages registered on Text screens in rows Alarm Summary according to the hosts PLC s bit address data changes The TEXT Display desired rows can be displayed in an Alarm Summary Using 1 A tag combinations of othe
314. formed while the bit is Color Value Plus Operation ON Color Value Minus Operation When a bit is turned ON the A T TE bit is held until the power supply _4 Unused Reserve is turned OFF or the mode is Unused Reserwe switched from off line mode to 6 Brightness Adjustment Mode restart mode Bits 6 to 8 are for specifying Contrast Adjustment Mode the mode Turn one of the bits E Color Adjustment Mode to ON to specify each mode 9 to 15 Unused Reserve Brightness Contrast Channel 0 to 3 Brightness 15 Low lt gt High Hue 4 4to7 Contrast 15 Low lt gt High 8 to 11 Hue 15 Greenish hue lt gt Reddish hue 12 to 15 Unused Reserve Write 1 to 18999 1 to 91999 when input with BCD when selecting Dis play with V Tag as the control method Write FFFFHex to select Dis play with Video Control Area 2 The video image is double zoomed 3 Returns to the value specified with the V tag 4 To control the window via touch operation during GP operation determine the applicable mode 6 to 8 first turn ON the applicable bit Then select the applicable operation 2 to 5 turn ON the applicable bit GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 135 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit Chapter 4 Advanced Features N The data is processed in 1 word 16 bit length in the video control Careful area Therefore if the host device uses a 32 bit length the data cannot
315. g Alarm Type Direct Select this option to directly designate the fixed minimum and maximum values of the alarm range Indirect Select this option to use variables to designate the minimum and maximum values of the alarm range These limits are indirectly designated in word addresses Color Change When the bit specified in the bit address is turned ON Alarm will be displayed Alarm Range Min Value Max Value If the Direct option has been selected designate the minimum and maximum val ues of the alarm range If the Indirect op tion has been selected this field indicates 2 103 2 12 K tag Key Input Chapter 2 Active Image Functions K Tag Seteng the word addresses which will contain the ee eo minimum and maximum values These ad dresses will be automatically determined according to the setting of the Word Address designated on the Data Format page For the Relative value input the obit Address Output Range values designated on the aint Data Format page will be automatically O AnaAferEasaekhess designated as the minimum and maximum o eo eo values The possible values depend on the Bo ik settings on the Data Format page Bit Address The alarm display bit address to be used when the Alarm Type s Color Change is selected is specified When the bit speci fied here is turned ON the address will be displayed in the set alarm color In this case the maximum and
316. g Display Enter the Row Col umn and Spacing values The Display Settings designated above are used for the Logging Display Sr This example does not use the loop feature When using this feature the Data Note Logging Display s Data Calculation Scroll will be designated as None There XVL fore to display the Total data Total sections will always be displayed on the screen regardless of the scroll display Operation Manual 2 1 16 Data Logging Display 4 Placing the Logging Display The placed Logging Display on a screen has been grouped To change its layout ungroup it first 5 Connect the GP to the PLC and start operation After the Logging Display s layout change is completed send that data to the GP and start operation The following is an example of an image to be displayed after the Block No is stored in the Block No Designated Addr that is designated via the Logging Display This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 83 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features E Display and Edit of Logging Data 1 Set up Parts Data Logging Display Use the same steps up to step 3 above Here click on the Data Edit check box When the interlock function 1s required to edit data also check the General Settings Data Type Color _ Switch Setting Switch Shape Color _ Description Blo
317. g Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered Word Direct 1 Dood 12 E Mode Bit Tag Setting Bit esta Lyre Designates the start line address in bit Text Screen Nao 1 Display Stat Line Bit Address ess Konoa FI No of Bits JT units Text Screen No Designates the Text screen number di rectly No of Scroll Lines H Display Start Line Bit Address aK cance f Hep Designates which row of Text screen data SP te D to begin the display from Designates the starting bit address where the X screen start line in binary data is stored No of Bits Designates how many bits from the Bit Address are used for storing the Text screen start line data No of Scroll Lines Sets up the number of lines the display will scroll when the start line changes Use a number from to 256 e The device address set for the Bit Address field can use only word data PLC Connection Manual e The Bit No setting must not use two consecutive words GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 261 2 29 X tag 2 262 Tag Setting Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Mode Word Word i Bit fe word Scierie Text Screen Ward Address Data Format fs Bin i BCD Display Start Line te Direct t Indirect
318. g Reference Manual 2 63 2 8 G tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions BED Using G tags O S W General Info G Tag Setting The General Info page provides informa General info Data Format Graph Type Alam Colo Settings tion about the current settings for the G Tag Name G tag Description j Tag Name Word Address D00000 Must be no more than five Single byte or Data Display Format Abs Bin 16 bit two Double byte characters long and com Graph Type Bar Up Normal posed of letters and or symbols o Dece pion Colg Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag E Data Format Absolute G Tag Setting Absolute Data Format Graph Type Alam Color Sennas Select this option to display the absolute value data The data can be binary or BCD format Word Address Defines the address containing the display data 16 bit data Display Mode Use this setting to display negative data Only available for binary data 100 e Checked Displays nega 0 tive data 100 to 100 it Relative Word Address F Do0000 gt l Display Made fs Bin Data Format F ECD 100 e Not Checked Does not dis play negative data 0 to 100 0 Data Format Bin BCD Defines the format of the Word Address s data 2 64 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 8
319. g at 09 00 Logging at 12 00 Read Error Logging Read Eror tso Logging at 18 00 Block 2 Logging Logging Data logging at 15 00 is Data logging at 15 00 is stored as a stored as a read error read error Same as without loop operation This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 48 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function E Display Data Logging Settings Display ON OFF Display Pont Wite Setinas FA Dios ON OFF Postman Click on this check box to display data us Row Setting F Column Setting i i Fil Display Block Mame il Display Block Mame mg the Logging Display Mo of Block Name Rowe 1 Mo of Char tem 5 Copy From Print Hoof Data Rows 2 Ho of Data Col 2 No of Calc Rows 1 Click this button when the printing for mat has already been set up to use that Data Char Size No of Char Date E i Preven format for display Row Settings Display Block Name Check this check box to display data to gether with its Block Name No of Block Name Rows Enter a value here to display block names in multiple rows Up to 3 rows can be set up No of Data Rows Set up the number of rows in the data dis play area No of Calc Rows Set up the number of rows in the calcula tion area Up to 4 rows can be set up Column Settings Display Block Name Check this check box to display data t
320. g data read is displayed on the Logging Display and CSV file representing that there is no data Logging data is read only one time for each trigger or at the designated timing This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 42 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function 4 3 4 Data Logging Flow This flow chart shows the logging data flow and each trigger condition To use a CF card Digital s CF card optional Multi Unit is required PLC LS Area 1 Logging by the PLC Trigger Bit Address or at designated timing SEAT 4 3 5 Using Logging Function Trigger Setting 2 Printing for each block via the Control Word Address or the real time printing 4 3 5 Using Logging Function Print 3 Data display and edit via the Logging Display 4 3 6 Display Settings 4 Data storage in a CF card via the Control Word Address 4 4 8 Transferring Data from Backup SRAM to CF Card 5 Data transmission to LS Area via the Control Word Address 4 3 5 Using Logging Function Write to LS This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 43 4 3 Logging Function Screer S etup Editor GP Setup Alarm Sound Settings Filing Data Data Logging Settings Device Monitor Symbol Editor
321. ge to display 2 21 2 About R tags WE A single display screen can set up a maximum of 30 rails worth of R tags E The maximum number of Mark display positions for all the rails can total 406 However by loading other Base screens with R tag settings from libraries the total number of display positions can increase to 512 256 for GP 270 GP H70 and GP 370 If the display positions are set too close to each other and a Mark in overlays another Mark then the Marks may not display properly Important When setting display positions keep in mind the size of the dis played Mark and leave enough space between each position _ gt if L GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 199 2 21 R tag W General Info R Tag Setting General Info Tag Hame Descriptions Rail No No of Display Positions W Rail Settings R Tag Setting General Info Rail Settings Rail No E ilo of Display Posin E Placement Method ie Free 1 Fixed Chapter 2 Active Image Functions yaya Using R tags The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for the R tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag Rail No Assign an ID number to the R tag 0 29 No
322. ger with scan counter of tag Have 10 seconds passed Is communication permitted Has initialization completed In case of the data 1 read processing Run the data read out processing transmitting receiving processing When the transmit receive processing has been completed Clear the transmit receive processing completion flag Set the number of the transmit receive process that is to be run next In case of the data 1 read processing Run data 2 read process transmit receive processing When the transmit receive processing has been completed Clear the transmit receive processing completion flag Set the transmit receive timer Set the number of the transmit receive process that is to be run next 3 51 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features E D script for Creating 10 second Timer Trigger Formula Timer function 1 second Execute every second Execution Formula if t 0010 gt 0 t 0010 t 0010 1 Decrement every second endif E Example of Service Request Command Sending processing function TRANS FUNC RI Execution Formula if s EXT_ SIO STATOO 1 Is send buffer empty Set command output to extended SIO in LS area w LS0100 0x02 STX w LS0101 0x30 Node No w LS0102 0x31 w LS0103 0x30 Sub address w LS0104 0x30 w LS0105 0x30 SID w LS0106 0x30 MRC w LS0107 0x31 w LS0108 0x30
323. ging from compatible mode to economy mode in GP PRO PBIII for Windows the previous logging settings will be initialized In the logging settings loop action is performed Therefore the number of blocks is fixed at 1 3 The number of logging words that can be set is between and 255 4 5 6 1 SP te The display format is limited The format of the printout settings is limited On printing out the maxi mum number of words per row is 160 characters as usual Writing to the LS area is not enabled When the number of logging words is 255 the maximum number of loggings is 472 when SRAM capacity is 256KB The greater the number of logging words the longer the data readout time communication time from the PLC While the logging data are being read out the tag display may not be up dated or may be extremely delayed Transition or Q tag alarm processing may also be slow This function is supported only by GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 9 4 92 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 4 Using the CF Card ue Using the CF Card 4 4 1 Overview Digital s new GP77R series units all allow you to use a CF Card to store data after you attach Digital s optional Multi Unit sold separately to the rear of the GP The GP2000 series does not require the Multi Unit sold separately GP 4 Save CF Card
324. graphs and pie graphs yaw About D tags W Statistical graphs display the data in the host s PLC s consecutive related word addresses as percentages of a total W Statistic graphs can be divided into a maximum of eight parts This means up to eight words of data can be displayed as a statistical graph WE Data stored in the host PLC can be either Binary or BCD but not both E Setting up the first word address for the data stored enables the next word addresses corresponding to the number of graphs divisions to be occupied automatically WE The word address data all data is totaled and the allocation division of graphic display areas 1s performed automatically based on that total W Set up the display attributes foreground and background colors fill pattern and blinking for each data value Ge re Using a d tag allows a display of the D tag statistic graph s actual numeric w values or percent values 2 5 d tag Statistic Data Display GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 31 2 4 D tag 2 32 xb Important E Chapter 2 Active Image Functions r w gt Using D tags W General Info D Tag Setting The General Info page provides informa Division Colo Sl penine tion about the current settings for D tag Tag Name D Tan ame A Denen j Must be no more than five Single byte or WordAddess DODD oS two Double byte characters long and com Ue
325. gs 2 20 4 Using Q tags Display Format 2 20 9 GP System Area Q tag settings O tag WE Detailed information such as how to recover from an error can be displayed as sub screens by selecting an Alarm message WE The sub screen display can be used for screen changes library display L tag text display X tag or window display GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 173 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions rw R gt Q tag Restrictions Ifthe message does not fit into the setup display area the text that does not fit will not display In order to use the Q tag select key special T tag key only 1 Q tag should be used per screen OK NG Set the Q tag select keys to the same screen that the Q tag is set to They cannot be used if they are set to a screen that the Q tag is not set to Window display 2 174 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag rw nE Using Q tags W General Info The General Info page provides information about the current settings for the Q tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description Q Tag Setting Size Color Sub Display Il Display Angle General Info Display Mode Display Fo
326. hanged Up to 16 data ranges and colors can be set up 2 8 G tag Graph Display LEGEND Data range 0 50 Data range 50 100 Designated word 010 410 Address E Faa aa ee ae Designated Word Address 010 715 A ya w About g tags W v tags use bar pie or half pie graphs to display host PLC word address data in real time WE Absolute and Relative data formats are available Both binary and BCD formats can be designated for Absolute data however only binary format is available for Relative data GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 69 2 9 g tag 2 70 Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E When using Relative data data read by the host PLC is automatically converted according to the designated Input Range A program for re calculation of the host PLC data can be omitted WE With Absolute data negative values are computed using 2 s complement With Relative data select 2 s complement or MSB code E Setup the number of ranges for the display data then designate the range limits and select the display colors for each data range The data in each range will appear in the designated color WE The data ranges can be set as indirect or fixed When ranges are set as indirect values the addresses for storing the range s lower limits data are automatically allocated to the word addresses that follow the graph s data storage address Eg e No o
327. hat is to be run next GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 43 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features E Flow chart of a 10 second timer routine Run this routine every second 10 second timer Is the timer value or starting communications set to 0 No Is the timer value for time out of receiving set to 0 Decrement the timer value 3 44 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script E Flow chart of Transmit Receive Function 1 Receiving completed Yes Taaa TEA Set the sent flag when sending command is completed lt gt Yes No Clear received flag Set receiving timer Sending completed Yes Receiving the response to as P Set the received flag when the data 1 read command T receiving is completed gt Yes Clear sent flag Set the transmit receive processing completion flag GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 45 3 1 D Script Global D Script 3 46 Chapter 3 Special Features E Flow chart of Transmit Receive Function 2 Receiving completed Yes Transmit the data 2 read command lt 2 Yes No Clear received flag Set receiving timer Sending completed Yes Receiving the response to the data 2 read command ws Yes Clear sent flag Set th
328. he Description field A maximum of 20 single byte or 10 double byte characters can be entered H Tag Setting Data Format Sizes Style Alarm Settings Arithmetic Operation Tag Name W Description Ho of producta General Into Word Address Dooo0o00 Data Format Absolute Decimal 6 Alarm Settings Off Off Arithmetic Operator Tag descriptions can be read in the Tag List No of products Cd E Tag Limits The maximum number of tags that can be displayed on a screen including currently displayed window screens is as follows GP 470 GP 270 GP 377R GP 2400 GP 377L GP 570 GP 370 GP 477R GP 2500 GP 377S GP 675 GP H70 GP 577R GP 2600 GP 37W2 R tags have another limitation in addition to the number of tags R tags can use up to 512 positions in total up to 256 positions for GP 270 GP 370 and GP H70 Parts and D Scripts are also included in the tag count How ever there are some parts such as library parts which are not counted as one tag per part D Script count will vary according to the program size As a guide three addresses used in D Script programming are counted as a single tag Ps GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types 1 5 Tag Setting Cautions Please refer to the following diagram for the number of effective tags lt E g When using a GP 470 gt Screen B2 Screen B3 10 tags
329. he General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for the E tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description Description Word Address Base Address Data Display Format Abs Direct pidi Display Format Decimall 6 Input Display of the tag E Data Format Absolute E Tag Setting Absolute Bange Coor AitmeicOpertion DispayAngle When the Absolute option is selected the Data Format Size Style t Absolute H Relative E tag displays the data in the related word addresses as a numeric value using the format designated for the Data Display Word Address San00 FE lavas Rom HE Arbhesses E e Format attribute O Devine Type 4dddiess SEn OBED Word Address The E tag displays the data in the word ad dress setup here Ifthe Indirect option is selected the Word Address helps to des ignate where data is stored Indirect Designates the Word addresses which con tain the data as indirect icok Data Display Format O Raud Ua 16 Bit 3z Bit Decimal 4 Decimal i Hex E Hex BCD iy BCO i Octal t Bin 7 Bin i Float 2 6 4 Indirect Word Addressing Examples Addresses The indirectly designated address is within the same device bank
330. he actions shown in the table above are performed At the screen change the above table is not applied and the trigger conditions are continuously monitored Global D Script operation is suspended during screen changes or other GP operations After the GP s power is turned ON Global D Script actions are not per formed until all data reads are completed for the initial screen However after the initial screen changes Global D Script actions may be performed before the data reads are completed The maximum number of devices in Global D Script is 255 When this number exceeds 256 the D Script does not function Since these devices always read data regardless of the screens be sure to use only the minimum number of device settings in your D Script Otherwise operation perfor mance can be degraded The maximum number of Global D Scripts available is 32 The currently used function also counts as one Global D Script When the number of the Global D Scripts reaches 32 any new Global D Scripts are ignored sme Notes on Operation Results E Overflowing Digits Overflowing digits resulting from operations are rounded E g When performing an operation on unsigned 16 bit data e 65535 1 0 Produces overflowing digits e 65534 2 2 32766 Produces overflowing digits e 65534 2 2 65534 Does not produce overflowing digits E Difference of Residual Processing The result of a residual processing depends on whether the
331. he status variable is only read enabled e Format Bit Read sSsEXT SIO STAT 00 to 15 Word Read s EXT SIO STAT e Example Bit Write if s EXT SIO STATOO 1 Word Write if s EXT SIO STAT amp 0x0001 lt gt 0 Contents of EXT SIO STAT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 0 No extended SIO protocol Eve ened sO poe OOOO 3 0 Normal eee 2 0 No data received O Sinear OOOO O 1 0 Normal o Bae o 0 Data present in send buffer OO ismas o OOOO Note Only required bits need to be checked Reserve bits are for future use e When a Data Transmission error occurs Transmission timeout error or Trans mission buffer error the Data Transfer Error bit turns ON e When a Data Reception error occurs parity error overrun error framing error or overflow error the Data Reception Error bit turns ON GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 37 3 1 D Script Global D Script 3 38 Chapter 3 Special Features E Received Data Size The current number of bytes of data received is indicated allowing the amount of data received to be checked Received Data Size is only read enabled Format r EXT SIO RCV Example if r EXT_SIO RCV gt 10 The device address of the Send Receive Function should be the LS Although the Send Receive Function is specified to the device it is not in cluded among the number of devices Control status and received data are write on
332. henever the trigger bit reverses 1 lt gt 0 the W tag is activated and the write data operation takes place This feature displays previously registered text data characters only in response to host PLC word address changes GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 257 2 258 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 29 X tag yay X tag Display Text Data The Text screen can be displayed from any text row not just the first Wag operation SLY Designated Display stat Row Word Address 2 Operation Method First check that the red Preparation lamg is lit After 1 ff OOOI A ooj rww About X tags E Displays the contents of the Text screen beginning from the row designated in the Start Line Access Operation Manual 3 4 Text Input the Text Screen E The Text screen start line can be set indirectly using a word address which makes the scroll display of long text possible WE The Text display is cleared when the start line number is set to 0 zero E When the row designated as the start line does not exist then the operation is ignored The text already displayed remains WE There are two Operation Modes Bit and Word GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 259 2 29 X tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E When the Operation Mode is Bit the start line is set up ind
333. here S1 Word Address Data S2 Constant Word Writes data to the designated word address when the trigger bit changes Trigger Type 0 1 The tag operates when the trigger bit changes 0 to 1 10 The tag operates when the trigger bit changes to 0 01 The tag operates when the trigger bit condition changes either 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 Trigger Bit Address Designates the location of the bit used to trigger the operation GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions wW Tag Setting Mode General Into i Bit i Word 7 Special Trigger Bit Address Mode 9 Word Address 8 Set 16 Bit Epoo Uo Set 32 Bit 79 Add Binary 16 Bit i Add BCD 16 Bit Trigger Type i021 f 1e0 fides CI Screen Level Change Direction Constant Settings Constant lo fs Dec BCD Hex C ee e W Tag Setting Mode General Info 7h Bit i Word 1 Special Trigger Bit Address wp E hlode Word Address i Set 32 Bit ward Address 1 nen po FEI El Seren lere Thangs Dieetin Constant Settings Constant lo fi Dec BCD Hex ee Trager Type t 0 1 fion fo lt s1 ET i Add BCD 16 Bit GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 28 W tag Word Address Designates the word address for write operations when the trigger bit 1s activated Screen Level Change Direction When
334. hlight while the touch panel key is pressed t Tag Setting sindacaoscibancnsiiseeiaieiananantey Suecnre niuansaisansanensnaeretanncn Buzzer AUX Output AN When a touch panel key uses fills the filling will blink in Reverse mode Note To avoid this reaction do not use Reverse with a fill pattern D Buzzer Defines whether or not a beep sounds when a touch panel key is pressed AUX Output Defines whether or not a buzzer signal is sent from GP s AUX I F This function is invalid for the GP 270 GP H70 GP 370 GP 377R and GP 377 because they do not have an AUX I F 2 232 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 25 Tih Tiw tags YL Tih Tiw tags Inching Function This feature creates a touch panel object that sends inching output directly to the host s PLC s digital input DIN relay Tih Tiw Tags send momentary inching information via the AUX I O interface here after referred to as AUX I F on the GP from the touch panel to a digital input DIN relay on the host PLC This allows instantaneous fine adjustment using just the touch panel key Use this function to make fine adjustments in the interrupted position of objects on an assort ment of lines SEGA Direct to DIN unit 2 25 1 The conveyor moves Release and the while the switch is conveyor stops pressed GP 270 GP 370 GP H70 GP 377R GP 377 and
335. host PLC e Use a touch panel key on the GP unit If the above two methods are used jointly the screen change made from the touch panel key has higher priority Additionally the GP has a forced screen change function Listed below are the priority levels for screen image display changes 1 Forced screen change high 2 GP touch panel based screen change 3 PLC based screen change low E PLC Based Screen Changes This section s explanation 1s for when Direct Access format is used In this case it is assumed the System Data Area will be allocated all 20 words Section 2 3 and 4 use the same setups When using the Memory Link format and depending on the System Data Area settings the System Data Area addresses may be different than those provided below PLC Connection Manual Note Screen Number 1 is the current display on the GP System Data Area 0 on the host PLC contains number 1 which represents the screen number currently displayed To change the display to the screen whose number is 2 the host PLC writes 2 to System Data Area 8 which stores the change screen number to be displayed The screen displays the screen whose number is 2 As the display changes from image to image 2 the contents of area 0 in the host PLC also changes to 2 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 223 2 23 T tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E GP Touch Panel Based
336. ibraries retrieved using F tags WE The coordinates for area movement will be designated by the Display Type setting normal or portrait 0 0 Normal Portrait Y X Io X 0 0 SS 2 58 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W General Info F Tag Setting General Info F ki pogodi Area Tag Hame Description Word Address Mode Data Format Binary E Designated Screen Direct F Tag Setting General Info Designated Screen Mode Data Format H Indirect Word Address fey Doo000 Screen Type i Base Screen 2 Image Screen i Image Screen CF Card LSS Screen Mo Se 2 7 F tag The General Info page provides information about the current settings for the F tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag Direct Select this option to directly designate a library s screen number in the Screen No field Screen Type Base Screen Image Screen Select the type of screen you want to dis play Base screen or Image screen Image Screen CF Card Select this when you want to designate the Image screen saved to the CF Card Word Address Defines the word address containing the data used in d
337. ich position in L Tag Setting Ep ale BitLenath 2 E ERN the Word Address are used as the state trig ger bits Bit Length Defines how many bits in the Word Address are used as the state trigger bits Screen Type Base Screen Image Screen Select the screen type from Base and Image Library screens Image Screen CF Card Select this when you want to designate the Image screen saved to the CF Card Start Screen No Defines the start screen file number Base or Image Library screen of the library screen display The plotting point of a library is the center point of the loaded Base screen ave Library Display Coordinates Therefore using the GP 470 model in this example the library is displayed as its 320 200 point overlaps the point set up on the Base screen E g The screen to load B500 B F JL Display on B100 tag setup 320 200 ocreen B100 O Tag setup point 2 124 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 14 L tag lt Any parts of the library image that do not fit in the GP display impotant are discarded e Libraries loaded onto a Base screen using an L tag can only display graphics and text Any tag settings set on these library screens are not loaded If you wish to use a Base screen includ ing its tag settings on top of another Base screen use the Win dow display function 2 26 U tag Window Display and Operation
338. ided as PDF data Describes this product s pre made Parts and Vol 3 Parts List symbols provided as PDF data Describes the methods for connecting the GP to other supported manufacturer PLCs provided as PDF data PLC Connection Manual The PDF Manual CD ROM also contains Screen Data Layout Sheets in Excel 95 format To view this data use your Excel program to open any of the files shown below These sheets are useful for designing tag address settings etc and example sheets are installed as part of the GP PRO PBIII for Windows standard installation The following two layout sheets Device Allocation Table and Tag Lay out Sheet are in Microsoft Excel 95 format and are located in the PDF Manual CD ROM The following file location and file names are used Folder Name File Name Contents propbwin sheet Device1E xIs Device Allocation Table TAG1E xls Tag Layout Sheet TAG2E xls TAG3E xls TAG4E xis For information on the use of Microsoft Excel please refer to the Excel software s Users manual GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL E GP Series Product Names The GP PRO PBIII functions and settings available will vary depending on the model of GP used Use the following table to identify your GP s model number Product Name GP H70L GPH7 0 LG11 24V GPH 0 LG41 24 VP GP H70 series GPH7 0 SC11 24V GPH70 SC41 24 VP GP270 LG11 24V GP270 LG21 24VP GP270 L
339. ideo window 2 size lt Standard Mode gt An area whose width and height are two times greater than those of the video window is displayed on the video screen The total value of DXx2 VX and DYx2 VY respectively should be within the area of the video screen 600 x 480 dots DXx2 VX lt 640 640 dots DYx2 VY lt S 480 a 480 dots lt Large Mode gt An area whose width and height are the same as the width DX and height DY of the video window respectively is displayed on the video screen The total values of DX VX and DY VY respectively should be within the area of the video screen 600 x 480 dots 640 dots DX VXs 640 480 dots GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 139 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 140 E Specifying the System File To use the video window function specify the system file Use Off line Mode or GP System Settings in the drawing software to set the system file In Off line Mode perform the setup procedures in this order Defaults System Environment Settings Video Environment Settings and Adjusting Video Display Condition E Video Environment Settings Specify the video environment for controlling the video The Video Envi ronment Settings menu is displayed only when the GP body unit is equipped with a VM unit SET UP YIDEO OPERATION Video screen is displayed here STARTING ADDRESS OF VIDEO CONTROL AREA CENTER Z00M OPERAT
340. ile Display FD_001 Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchT ype Color General Settings Use LS Area J Use LS Area Top Write Word Address PLC Teanster Jj Use Transfer Completed Bit Address Description DC PLC Transfer Completed Bit Address ID Mo fo EJ File Mo i m Lee Display File Display FD_001 Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchType Color In No of Display Lines 3 ire Ir No of Display Characters 10 ir Mj Direct Selection Chapter 4 Advanced Features When using the Transfer Completed Bit Address after the Bit ON condition is de tected turn the corresponding Bit OFF on the PLC Also when the Transfer Completed Bit Address is used the special relay LS2032 s bit 10 will turn ON when data transfer is not completed normally between the PLC and LS area or between the PLC and SRAM PLC Connection Manual Chapter 1 PLC Transfer Completed Bit Address Not designated Since this example does not use the Trans fer Completed Bit Address this Address does not need to be designated When us ing the Transfer Completed Bit Address designate an Address that will be turned ON when data transfer is completed ID No 0 In this example where only one Filing Data Display is placed the ID No does not need to be entered Keep the default setting When placing two or more Fili
341. ile Full Bit Address turns ON The file is in CSV format e Starting Auto Save When saving logging data to the CF Card in auto save mode and using the loop feature designate the file number and write 0020h to the mode When the GP enters auto save mode normally the GP writes 2000h to the mode Only while the mode value is 2000h will auto save mode continue and when this value changes auto save mode will end Therefore to con tinue to use this mode DO NOT change this value To quit auto save use the following auto save exit command e Exiting Auto Save To exit auto save mode write 0021h to the mode When the GP performs auto save quit processing normally the GP writes 0000h to the mode When performing auto save quit processing logging data will be written to the CF Card up to the latest backup SRAM data Also when starting or resuming auto save Block name data and logging data are written to the CF Card from the beginning of the loop regardless of the previous data save status Logging Data Backup SRAM data 1 to 6 indicate logging data Quitting auto save in this case causes log ging data to be written in 1 2 and 3 order Quitting auto save in this case causes logging data to be written in 5 and 6 order When data 1 to 4 has already been writ ten data 5 and 6 will be added to them GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 101 4 4 Using the CF Card Chapter 4 Advanced
342. ing Settings as well as Filing Data Function Logging Function and Sound Output which all widen the application usage Parts seen in the GP PRO PBIII Editor screen s right side icon box are a collection of pre made often used object s icons Creating an Active Image display is easy Simply click on the type of Part you wish to use designate the necessary PLC addresses and position the item on your current screen This simplicity greatly reduces the amount of time required to create and edit a given screen Tags which are explained in detail in this manual are useful for when you wish to create unique original screens This manual has been created expressly to explain the types of Tags available and how they can add useful object movement functionality to your GP unit s applications E Creating Active Images Use your screen editing software GP PRO PB HI for Windows to create project files containing Active Image screens This project file will then be downloaded to the GP together any necessary system data The GP will then use this information to communicate with the host PLC E Exception Tags While most Parts and Tags are placed on Base screens there are the follow ing exceptions Exception 1 k tags are normally first placed on the Keyboard screens and then later called up on a Base screen Can also be placed directly on a Base screen 2 14 k tag Keyboard Setup GP PR
343. ing re Note peats from the beginning and overwrites the existing data e Only one block is used which has a linked buffer like structure and is simi lar to the link buffer e After data logging is completed and control jumps from the end of the block to the beginning the GP will turn the File Full Bit Address ON Turning this Address ON simply indicates that data logging has been performed from the beginning to the end one time and that data logging will continue e After the PLC detects the File Full Bit s turning ON turn the Bit OFF important When the Data Clear Bit Address turns ON from the PLC the GP clears logging data and repeats data logging from the begin ning When logging data is cleared the GP turns the Data Clear Bit Address OFF This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 39 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features E Backup SRAM s capacity is limited GP77R series and GP 377 series units Approximately 95KB and all blocks and records set up must be within these limits For example when the number of blocks is 1 and the number of records is 2048 the capacity available is approximately 32 KB assuming 2 pieces of data If the number of pieces of data 1s 32 the maximum the memory required becomes approximately 153KB which is too high In such a case since sufficient memory cannot be used data logging is not
344. ion However Truncate 1s set to 2 so data starting from the 3rd left side digit will be entered GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 167 2 168 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag yay Q tag Alarm Summary Display Displays Alarm messages registered in the Alarm Editor in historical order and in response to host PLC bit changes The message display uses three processes listed e Displays only currently triggered alarms Active e Displays messages in the order they were triggered and displays the time they were triggered acknowledged and recovered History e Displays the time and message whenever the alarm message is trig gered acknowledged and recovered Log When used together with a T tag cursor movement acknowledgment and clearing delete all are possible Current Alart Date Time Alana Contents Ack Recover qe 10 05 B tank Pressure Trouble 11 30 15 00 Gea 12 15 A tank Low WaterLevel 13 15 9840101 12 00 Mo Putip 14 00 i a a ae a ooj i _ mu mi a I gt OFF Tank B ON No 1 Purrip yw iw About Q tags W To create an Alarm Summary display using the Q tag use the following procedures 1 Registering an Alarm message using the Alarm Editor 2 Q tag setting using the GP system settings 3 Creating the Q tag on a Base screen W Register all the messages w
345. ion 1 2 etc The recipe function s data is called Filing Data 0100 Designated 0050 gt Word Address 0050 _ 0030 0005 0005 yay Filing Data Recipe Function E To set up filing data select the Project Manager s Filing Data Filing List selection 4 2 3 Filing Data Setting 1 4 2 4 Filing Data Setting 2 WE There are two methods of transmitting filing data to the PLC One is auto matic transmission where filing data is sent to the PLC via a PLC trigger The other is manual transmission where data selected on the GP screen is sent to the PLC E When using manual data transmission select the Filing Data Display from the Tool Box or Parts menus E Filing data can be controlled by file numbers for each project file E Filing data can be stored in either the GP s internal memory or on a CF card E Filing data is stored in the PLC in a series of addresses WE Filing data can be read out from the PLC to the GP s internal backup SRAM Once it is read this filing data can also be written to a CF card 4 4 8 Transferring Data from Backup SRAM to CF Card E Setting up filing data so that it is transmitted via an LS Area allows filing data to be edited on the GP panel and then written to the PLC This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 2 This function is not available with the following units e Modicon Modbus Master e Modicon Modbus Slave e Modicon Mo
346. ion General nfo te bate Arithmetic Operation _ If this item is selected an arithmetic operation will be performed to the data Operand e a retained from the word address and the es resulting data is displayed Word Address Operator Data Op erand pow Je Direct Data Location Arithmetic Operators i i g a Sc TET Select this option to directly designate 18 Right Sub ort a fixed operand 2 Mult ih Mor e Sine Indirect E Select this option to indirectly designate o cance Hep the operand The word address imme diately following the designated Word Address is automatically used as the data storage address GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 153 2 154 2 17 N tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Data If the Operand has been set to Direct designate the operand here Data Location Left Right Select the data location from Left and Right Arithmetic Operators Select the operator e The arithmetic Operator is enabled when the Data Format is set to Absolute and the Alarm option is not selected e Any overflowing digits resulting from arithmetic operations are ignored e In division there may be a slight difference in result data GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 17 N tag ymwe m Relative Data Display Settings e The range for data stored in the host PLC A 0 65535 e Displays the range A
347. irect eee sn Designates the start number of the Base pees a 6 Indirect screens for sub screen display indirectly Boos Screen Type Base Screen This setting is valid only for the GP77R ae Ee GP377 and GP2000 series oo Screen No Word Address ome FA Enter a Word Address where the start num Window Registration No ber of the Base screens for sub screen dis ae play is stored Designate the start number Local as a binary number Word Address Ltag Word Address a Ee ee Enter a Word Address where the screen file number for the sub screen 1s stored The address set for storing the Base screen file number during the L tag setting must be used Window Registration No Enter the registration number for the Genera mo Display Format Size Coler Sub Displey Dispeyarge window to be displayed i None Base Screen i Active Window Mode Settings Screen Type Text Display ae eee tented Screen Type PAREN TEE Direct Tex Display naw IB Deae thesia number of the Text screens for the sub screen display directly Word Address1 tag Screen Address e E in the Screen No area Window Registration No Screen No eas LE Enter the start number of the Text screens Local created for the sub screen display ee e 2 12 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 1 A tag Word Address1 Xtag Screen Address Enter a Word Address where data for sub screen display is stored The address des
348. irectly The data for the start line is obtained from consecutive bit addresses Simply desig nate the necessary bit length consecutively from the given bit address The Text screen is displayed E When the Operation Mode is set to Word the start line can be accessed directly or indirectly The Text screen to display is set indirectly in a word address whereby different Text screens can be displayed If a designated Text screen does not exist then the text display is cleared E A maximum 512 rows of text data can be registered in a Text screen E The maximum number of characters per row and the maximum number of rows that can be displayed on the GP will depend on your GP screen resolu tion and the current X tag character size setting 2 1 2 About A tags Max No of Characters and Lines A tag WE The character size and display color can be selected Si ote If your text data is wider than the setup display area the portions that exceed yY the area are truncated and do not display 2 260 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 29 X tag Tag Setting General Info Mode 5ize 5tyle Display Angle Tag Name Description Mode Text Screen Ho No of Display Lines No of Display Char yas Using X tags E General Info The General Info page provides informa tion about the current X tag settings Ta
349. is less than the number designated for No of Display Character spaces 20H which will balance the number will be stored lt When No of Display Character is 6 and 4 characters are entered gt If the No of Display Character cannot be divided by 2 When PLC s one device is 16 bit length Te eeo Ts tet If the No of Display Character cannot be divided by 4 when PLC s one device is 32 bit length NULL 00H will be stored at the end lt When No of Display Character is 5 and 4 characters are entered when PLC s one device is 16 bit length gt CA e oc gt NU W Size Style K Tag Setting Text characters used in the display can be arm Settings Arithmetic Operation Display Angle ae ee 16 32 64 or 128 dots high and 8 16 32 pepara ema or 64 dots wide The basic unit of mea No of Display Digit i Don surement is a Single byte or Double byte Decimal Places JE character i e Color Type Select Indirect Address Area lt Sin le b te lt 2 f Direct is deadlier Display diiess g J Double byte 3 Indirect D Speadifter Base Aidiliess Characte r gt Characte r gt Color Settings Display Color Fo oe I ek 8 dots 16 dots LHL ed Display Style a 1 6 dots l 6 dots e1 Shift Lett w Zero Suppress a Shift Right 4 Zero Display Input Style Display Format 4 Auto Clear OFF I BarCode Input ee enna No of Display Digits ES 3 Auto Clear amp Input Check Defines the number of digits for
350. isplay When a monitor bit s corresponding message row is left empty the A tag allows you to delete hide that row As a result you can then display only those rows which contain messages in the Alarm Summary Display Regardless whether the Blank Line Display feature 1s ON or OFF a total of 512 rows can be shown in either case This feature is available only with Digital s GP77R Series GP377 Series and GP2000 Series units e When the number of rows of text will not fit into a single screen display the Screen 2 Start Line previous screen Display Lines Start Line Screen n Start Line previous screen Display Lines x n 1 Start Line e For details about the Border 2 2 4 Alarm Summary Display Notes a tag e The possible number of display lines and characters is designated by the GP screen size and orientation and the Display Size setting e When the Text screen changes its sub display and cursor will be turned OFF Mi Size Color A Tag Setting General Info Display Format Size Color sub Display Display Angle Display Size 8x16 Display Color OOOO E Bo ek Erase Color Be 2 8 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Display Size Text characters used in the display can be 16 32 64 or 128 dots high and 8 16 32 or 64 dots wide The basic unit of mea surement is a Single byte or Double byte character 1 e lt Single byte lt Double byte Character gt Cha
351. isplay screen No used in the Alarm Cre ation and Editing area is treated as the Li brary screen No Erase Screen No When a message in the Alarm Creation and Editing area 1s selected whose Sub Screen No setting is 0 the base screen called by this feature will delete the previous dis play screen Create a Base screen for eras ing by making a black filled rectangle Base Screen Mode Settings Text Display Word Address 1 X tag Screen Address Defines the Word Address to be used as the X tag s Text screen No address The Sub Display screen No used in the Alarm Creation and Editing area is treated as the Text Screen No Erase Screen No When a message in the Alarm Creation and Editing area 1s selected whose Sub Screen No setting is 0 the base screen called by this feature will delete the previous dis play screen Create a Base screen for eras ing by making a black filled rectangle 2 179 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W Sub Display Active Window Active Window General Info Display Mode Display Format Mode Settings a e Change Screen i None E Base Screen teh Active Window Siibiersinistaacudewetanseatsinsaenss This settings turns the Window Display soe feature ON The Sub Display screen No N used in the Alarm Creation and Editing area 1s treated as the Window screen No ai L i Word Address Utag Word Address Library Display J Direct Selection
352. ith the Alarm Editor Operation Manual 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 169 2 20 Q tag 2 170 Chapter 2 Active Image Functions WE The distance from the left margin to the left side of each data field Date Message etc can be set in the GP system settings In that case that display format can be set as a common format for all screens where Q tags have been set up Also a format can be set up for each Q tag WE Control of the alarm is possible using bit bit log or word word log data E Alarm messages can be controlled for each block For example a group of alarm messages for serious problems and a group of alarm messages for minor problems can be displayed as blocks Up to 3 blocks can be set up To designate a block to be displayed use the Alarm Editor This setting is valid only for the GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series Operation Manual 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing E When entering the Alarm messages using the Alarm Editor set up the control device as either bits or words It 1s impossible to set up a control device with the Alarm Editor using a mix of both bit and word data WE Setup whether the message is activated when the monitor bit changes 1 0 or 01 The alarm that has been triggered is recovered when the bit changes back to its original state WE An alarm triggers when the data in the monitor word address equals the alarm value set up in the
353. ith the following two conditions valid 2 dis Important played as a result of the arithmetic operation actually means kkk A ad e When selecting Indirect Device Type amp Address and Display Data Type 32 bits in the Data Format area during tag settings e When the device code stored in the Base Address is 32 bit device Word Address Operator Word Address e ZEN e Only when the Number of Ranges setting in the Range Setting page is 1 and Note the Data Format area s Absolute setting is selected the Arithmetic NY Operator is enabled e Any overflowing digits resulting from an arithmetic operation are ignored If division produces a remainder an error may occur as a result of rounding the decimal These operations cannot be performed when the Float data format is selected 2 6 4 Indirect Word Addressing Examples E Display Angle Display Angle e ETATE Set up the rotation for the display Select O zero 90 180 or 270 degrees Display Angle 7 90 degrees 19180 degrees 13 270 degrees 2 54 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 6 E tag 2 6 4 Indirect Word Addressing Examples Example 1 e The Indirect and Address options are selected and e Word address R35 is indirectly designated The following example assumes that D00100 is designated as the Word Address and R0010 as the base address PLC Word A
354. justing the Video Display Condition Specify the display condition of the video screen on the GP The Adjusting Video Display Condition menu is displayed only when the GP body unit is equipped with the VM unit YIDEO DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT Video Input Channel Select the channel 0 to 3 that is connected to the video device Mode Select the color mode color or monochrome of the input from the video device Brightness The brightness level of the video window can be adjusted Press to make the video window brighter and to make the video window darker GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 141 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit Chapter 4 Advanced Features Contrast The contrast of the video window can be adjusted Press to increase the contrast and to decrease the contrast Hue The hue of the video window can be adjusted Press for a reddish hue Press for a greenish hue Sr e When monochrome is selected as the color mode on the video screen the hue Note cannot be adjusted Xe Standard Selections for brightness contrast and hue are assigned to the middle value 8 EN e The brightness contrast and hue of the video screen can be set on the GP Note System Settings in the GP screen creation software D Y Tag Settings Video Control Start Address L50000 LS0020 EE Center Zoom Video Input NTSC 9 PAL Display Mode 9 SVGA 2 VG
355. ka ve Dia L iF ts ye R Range 01 Lower Limit odes a Range 01 Upper Limit nS oe SE The selected range number s upper and Range tt LowerLimt p lower limit values are displayed Range 01 Uppertimt SC Color Settings Number Color The value foreground display Fg color and blink Blk status are specified Color Settings Number Color Fg EEE EEL ek o Bg Bee ME e 5 Background Color Pattern C ee ce GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 51 2 6 E tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Tag Setting General fo e E aes z Arithmetic Operation DispayAnge Danaea Background Color The value background pattern background color Bg and blink condition Blk are specified The pattern s background color Pc is specified by this value background pattern setting The background pattern col ors are the combination of Bg and Pc colors However for GP 270 even though colors can be selected on your PC s screen only the pattern 0 white will appear on the GP 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Select Indirect Address Area i eadar Display Addiess i Aeadier base ddiess g 0 lt Range 01 lt 65535 DeRangeli lt 656 sd Range 01 Lower Limit 0 Range 01 Upper Limit 65535 E ee cc ay i For more about the Relative value input range setup
356. l area the display conditions of the video window cannot be changed unless the update bit of the coordinate value of the internal window control flag address 10 is turned ON e Once the coordinate value update bit is turned ON the ON condition is main tained Therefore the display conditions of the video window are changed in real time according to the coordinate value written until the bit is turned OFF e Even if the touch panel input is inhibited in the video window it is validated when the video window is not displayed 4 136 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit E Internal Color Control Flag The internal color control flag address 20 is an area used for changing the color display condition of the video window only with the GP When the bit 2 to 3 1s turned on after the bit 6 to 8 of the appropriate mode is speci fied the brightness contrast and hue channels 0 to 2 of the GP are changed according to the bit 2 to 3 However the changed data 1s not saved When the bit for the internal color control flag 1s written with the T tag touch panel input the color display condition of the window can be changed Se Note Even if the color value is written in the address 11 to 19 in the video 2 controlarea the display conditions of the video window cannot be changed unless the update bit of the color value of the internal win
357. l be variable The address will be au Lower Limit Value Display Coke tomatically allocated to the word ad fo POCO eK Upper Limit Value 100 ppt Lim a MEDOM Ky dresses immediately following the Word Address designated in the Data E Format Word Address area No of Ranges Defines the number of ranges from 2 to 16 Then you need to set the upper and lower limits and the colors for each range Color Type Direct The Color Settings are specified directly Indirect This option is valid when No of Ranges is 1 The Color Settings can be speci fied indirectly The color attributes are specified for the Address displayed in the Color Settings field The GP 270 however does not have this setting 2 10 4 Object Drawing Data Color Settings H tag Range Settings Current Value The range currently selected in the sample graph will appear here Lower Limit Value Upper Limit Value After selecting a range number in the sample graph designate the upper and lower limits for that range here Color Settings lt Eg gt When Range Designation is In direct and No of Ranges is 3 Designated Word Address Display Data Range 2 Lower limit data 2 Range 3 Lower limit data GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 75 2 9 g tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions lt Eg gt g Tag Setting General info Date Format Graph Type Renge Cob Daplay Ange
358. lay Touch available condition Bit Orn i Bik Oth 2 20 5 Q tag Ex amples Q tag Up Moves the highlighted cursor up in the Q tag display area Down Moves the highlighted cursor down in the Q tag display area Roll Up With this key the specified number of lines display data will be rolled up Roll Down With this key the specified number of lines display data will be rolled down Ack Pressing the Ack key will display the Ack time in the row the cursor is cur rently displaying Ack All Pressing the Ack All key will attach and display the Ack time on all the messages displayed that do not yet have an Ack time Clear Delete Erases the message in the current row Clear Recovered Alarm When All Recovered Alarms is se lected recovered messages will be de leted from the currently selected alarms GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 217 2 23 T tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Clear Acknowledged Alarm When the All Ack Alarms is selected ac knowledged messages will be deleted from the currently selected alarms However the control devices will not be deleted Delete All a ere Erases all the Q tag messages displayed Tag Seiection Key Saipan However the control device is not de i Ack i Ack All leted Clear Delete Clear All Recovered Alarms I Clear Recovered Alarm R san Erases all the recovered alarms Delete Al Clear All Acknowledg
359. lay the video screen specify the part of the GP that the video win dow should display the video window display position the dimensions of the video window video window size and which part of the video window should be displayed the origin of the video display Two methods are available to control the video window Displaying with the V tag Control of the video image including the input channel the video window display position and the size of the video window 1s specified with the V tag 2 28 Video Window Display lt V Tag gt Displaying with the video control area The video window can be displayed according to the information written in the video control area regardless of whether a V tag is present E Resolution The resolution of the GP screen differs from that of the video images of various video devices When specifying the video window display position the video window size and the origin of the video display be sure to con sider this difference Resolution of the GP 640x480 dots on the GP screen GP2500T or 800x600 dots GP2600T Resolution of the video 600x480 dots on each video device Input signal for NTSC 640 x 480 dots Input signal for PAL 768 x 576 dots GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 133 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit 4 134 Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 9 2 Video Control Area The video control area is the area in which the video informati
360. lder 2 When drawing an object specify in the image screen sound data and Filing Data settings that the data is to be saved to a CF Card Data will then be temporarily saved in the CF Card data output folder 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function 3 Transfer the project file to the GP unit The data saved in the CF Card output folder will be transferred to the CF Card and all other data to the GP s internal memory 4 During normal GP operation the data will be loaded from the CF Card whenever necessary Create the CF Card data output folder Filing Data Sound data Specify a destination GP s internal memory CF Card Transfer the screen Data is saved in the GP s Data is saved to the CF internal memory Card Data is loaded whenever necessary 4 96 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 4 Using the CF Card ieee CF Card Data Output Folder Settings To save data to the CF Card you need to specify a location CF Card data output folder to temporarily save this project data If you specify the CF Card as the destination of image screen data sound data or Filing Data it will be output to the CF Card data output folder specified here CF Card Folder xl Select CF Card Data Output Folder from Project Manager s Project and check se a lect Use CF Card Specify any existing folder enter its name or click on the Browse
361. le Sx When using loop operation the Data Logging Display s Data Calculation Scroll Note Will be designated as None Therefore to display the Total data Total sections 2 will always be displayed on the screen regardless of the scroll display Operation Manual 2 1 16 Data Logging Display E Displaying Logging Data Perform detailed settings such as Trigger Settings according to each applica tion Here display related explanations only are given 1 Logging Settings Display Select the Project Manager s Project Logging Setting a wij DisplayfON OFFS Copy from Print Row Setting F Column Settings Fil Display Block Mame Fi Display Block Hame No of Block Hame A ows f Mo of Char tem Hoof Block Data Rows ji Mo of Data Col No of Calc Rows i Data Char Size x16 f No of Char Data 8 e H Preview 2 Display Settings Enter Item Name and other required data in the Display Setting dialog box The format designated in this dialog box is used commonly for all blocks Display Settings saia ia coy pose cu epee ot This example does not use the loop feature When using this feature only one S data display row will be used This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 82 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function 3 Setting the Logging Display Select the Screen Editor s Parts Loggin
362. lears and the number 4 is entered If you press an arrow key cursor movement The cursor position shifts without erasing the previous data e If the cursor is not in the first position then entering a character will not clear Note the previous data e The K tag display operates the same for barcode inputs Character keys exclude the cursor movement ENT DEL and BS keys GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 111 2 12 K tag Key Input Chapter 2 Active Image Functions rn PAD Using Arithmetic Operations W When Setting up Data e Displays the value as was set up e The value written to the Word Address is the result of a reverse calculation for a regular arithmetic operation ADD SUB MUL DIV or the result of a logical arithmetic operation AND OR XOR E g Arithmetic Operator and data 3 The set value minus 3 is written to the Word Address by the K tag 0 If the write value A and the set display value B then A B 3 W Data Display when trigger bit 0 e Displays the results of the arithmetic operation performed on the data in the Word Address same as N tag lt Arithmetic Operation Table gt a Time sm Time 2 112 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 13 k tag Keyboard Setup 74 E gt k tag Keyboard Setup BERD Overview k tags can be used to create lettered or numbered data input
363. lect how range limit addresses are designated O GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 49 2 6 E tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions No of Ranges Senge Calor ES If you want to change the E tag color as the value increases or decreases beyond a certain range designate the number of value ranges The range is 2 to 16 Color Type Danaea Select Indirect Address Area i eadar Display Addiess i Aeadier base ddiess SS a 1 Direct Range dt Lovertmt dS Specifies the color attributes for each Range 01 Upper Limit pss H Range No Indirect This option is valid when No of Ranges are 1 Specify the color attributes for the address displayed in the Color Settings field However this setting is not enabled on the GP 270 2 10 4 Object Drawing Data Color Settings H tag Select Indirect Address Area Area After Display Address Defines range values in consecutive ad dresses following the data display ad dresses The allocated address is displayed in either Range Settings or Color Set tings field Word Address Display Address ee ce cc After Base Address Defines range values in consecutive ad dresses following the Base Addresses If the Device Type amp Address option 1s se lected on the Data Format page these ad dresses will be allocated from the second
364. lected the data must be Binary E When using the Relative value display data read by the host PLC responds to the set up input range valid range and output range and automatically converts the display HostCPLe GP Input ice Output range It is possible to remove programs for the compensatory computing of data taken in by the host when displaying such things as temperature and revolu tion frequencies E With Absolute data negative values compute using 2 s complement Rela tive data computes using either 2 s complement or MSB Code WE The decimal point is not included in the Display Digit value GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 147 2 17 N tag Re O Chapter 2 Active Image Functions WE An alarm function is available by designating the upper and lower limits of display data WE For Relative data an alarm can be activated whenever the data is outside the valid range setup WE The alarm can use variable values in an Indirect setup In these cases the upper and lower limits are stored in the consecutive word addresses immedi ately following the display data storage word address Eg 32 bit data a r Display data Designated word address n 2 Data Max Value for display data n n 3 n Daa Min Val nis ata ivun Value te For more about the relationship of high order and lower order Word Address NY data when using 32 bit data PLC Connection Manual WE The results
365. lection in the GP s OFFLINE Mode Copying the Backup File from the CF Card to the GP Unit A backup file on the CF Card can be copied by designating SCREEN DATA TRANSFER s COPY FROM CF CARD selection in the GP s OFFLINE Mode 4 98 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 4 Using the CF Card ea Transferring Data from Backup SRAM to CF Card Any alarm data trend graph data logging data and sample data stored in backup SRAM during GP unit operation can be saved as CSV files CSV on the CF Card This data can be transferred from the GP s backup SRAM to the CF Card by writing an appropriate command to a control address All CSV files saved on the CF Card can then be loaded into your PC and used for a database by selecting Transfer Upload Stored Data of CF Card or by using the CF Card Tool EET GP PRO PBIII for Windows Operation Manual To transfer CSV file data stored in the GP s backup SRAM to the CF Card you will need to write a command to a designated control address E Specifying a Control Address To specify a control address select GP Setup Extended Settings Operation Manual 6 1 GP Initial and System Settings GP Settings Digital Plant prew GF Settings LO Settings Mode Settings Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Communication Settings Font Setti ja r 5 o Fi Online Error Display mee Fi Delete Error Display i Korean
366. llows Data length Stop bit Parity bit 4800bps 8 amp 8 2 Nme GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 121 4 7 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 122 For Imex s bar code reader Model BR 530RS e Wiring diagram AC 100V adapter _ 7 D sub 9 pin connector Powerit Bar code reader GP Pen type The bar code reader 1s directly connected to the GP Direction of signal Direction of signal SD TXD RD RXD Connected to No 4 and No 6 pins CS CTS Communication settings The communication settings of the extended serial I F of the GP 1s specified as the initial data of the bar code reader The initial data of Imex s bar code readers BR 530RS is as follows Data length Stop bit Parity bit 4800bps 8 2 Nme GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 7 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility For Imex s bar code reader Model BW 665RS e Wiring diagram AC 100V adapter E D sub 9 pin connector Power unit Gp Bar code reader Touch scanner The bar code reader is directly connected to the GP Direction of signal Direction of signal RD Input 2 e 2 SDOTXD 3 RD RXD ae Output La q m g ec sc 5 5 onnecte DR Input 6 e 6 _ 0No4and RS Output 7 SF 7 CS CTS No 6 pins CS Input 8
367. lor in the background of the drawing data which is speci fied by the background color black Medium speed Blinking in 64 color mode is allocated to the color code 80H color palette number 255 There fore the background colors for the drawing data are 255 colors the trans parent color For displaying drawing data and image data 256 colors are available If you create screen data where the blink settings are specified in 64 color mode for the image data and display the screen data in 256 color mode the colors will not display correctly Do not specify a transparent color as the clear color for the background color the A a X and Q tags the file item indicator and the logging indicator that are created in 256 color mode Otherwise the display cannot be updated cor rectly Filling the tiling pattern with black is not available in 256 color mode The GP displays black on the screen in 256 color mode when the circle of graph tag D tag G tag g tag and the graph pattern setting of the half circle sets normal or the display color of circle graph parts the half circle graph and the tank graph are set to the color code 0x80 the darkest green When using a Tank Graph the data display area turns the color code 0x80 the darkest green for a moment right after switching the screen mode When K tag and logging functions are edited the cursor does not blink GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 115 4 11
368. ly read only and read only respectively Reading the Control variable or writing in the Status variable may cause a malfunction When sending or receiving data create and execute a different D script or function for each purpose For more information refer to the data transfer flow chart on the next page If there is no extended SIO protocol processing of the D script will stop when a readout of the Input Function Output Function Control variable Status variable or the Received Data Size is performed However processing of the D script will not stop when EXT SIO ISTAT15 readout of the status to determine whether extended SIO protocol exists is executed The effective range of the LS device that is specified with the Send Receive Function is the user area LS20 to TLS2031 LS2096 to SLS4095 Therefore the maximum number of bytes of data that can be sent is 2012 and the maxi mum number of bytes of data that can be received is 2011 If no extended SIO protocol exists the 13th bit of LS2032 turns ON when a readout of the Input Function Output Function Control variable Status variable or the Received Data Size is executed When using the Data Transfer Data Receive feature specify the D Script bit length as 16 bits The data transfer buffer size is 2048 bytes and the data receive buffer size is 8192 bytes After more than 80 of the designated received buffer data is received the CTS line turns OFF Extended SIO Communication
369. m number will change depending on the number of data blocks No of Data Items Designates the number of data items registered in one block A maximum of 9 999 data items can be registered The maximum number will change depending on the number of data blocks Data Format Select either 16 or 32 bit data Display Format Select a filing data display format Code minus display becomes effective when this check box is checked Import Other file data CSV format can be imported and used as filing data Export Filing data can be exported and saved in the CSV format lt Output Example using CSV Format gt Filing Data lt q Filing CSV data s Header Description This is necessary for data import No of Data Blocks No of Data Items Address Data Format 16 Bit 0 32 Bit 1 Display Format Dec 0 Hex 1 BCD 2 Code 0 1 Block0 Block2 Data Data3 o 4000 2 2000 4 3000 6 4000 8 5000 If this data is incorrect CSV data cannot be imported This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 23 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features wap Filing Data Setup Example The following explains about setting up Filing Data W Setting up Filing Data Filing Data to File No D F No of Data Blocks Description Heat Control No of Data Items 10 Dat
370. m the operation are rounded e Subtraction Performs subtraction on the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant Any overflowing digits resulting from the operation are rounded e Remainder Detects a remainder of a division performed on the data in two word ad dresses or the data in a word address and a constant The operation result may depend on the sign of the left and right sides e Multiplication Multiplies the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant Any overflowing digits resulting from the operation are rounded Division Performs division on the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant Decimal places and overflowing digits resulting from the operation are rounded Assign Assigns the right side value in the left side The left side can state a device address only while the right side can describe both a device address and a constant Any overflowing digits resulting from the operation are rounded ON For details about overflowing digits and errors and rounded decimal places NSS resulting from a remainder operation 3 1 5 Notes on Operation Results Comparisons ina for fot fl E gt e Boolean and AND Conjunction ANDs the right and left sides Value 0 zero is regarded as OFF and other values as ON N1 and N2 is true if both N1 and N2 are ON and false if otherwise
371. manual data transmission is performed In Transmit Completed Bi anaras j F El ae that case the Filing Data Display must be Tok ee Hee placed on a Base screen PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings Ji PLC Controlled Transfer W Filing Data Display Settings General Info Description Heat Control Use LS Area ings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchType Color __ Dit Ste Ele teh atin Sate vee Use LS Area Not selected Tussi wes Since in this example data 1s transmitted palais from SRAM to the PLC it 1s not transmitted via the LS Area Keep the default setting Top Write Word Address Not selected Not designated Since this example does not use the LS area this Address does not Pace tones Hee need to be designated When using the LS area designate the Top Address of the LS area where data is stored PLC Transfer Use Transfer Completed Bit Address Not selected The example does not turn the PLC Transfer Completed Bit Address ON when the data transfer 1s completed be tween the LS area and PLC and SRAM and PLC No information is sent when data transfer is completed J Use Transfer Completed Bit Address ID No JO i PLC Transfer Completed Bit Address This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 27 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function 4 28 F
372. minimum values cannot be displayed in the alarm color Also the GP 270 does not support this function Alarm Type Alarm Range Bit Address ina ves _ idis _ Color Change BitAddress Select Indirect Address Area Area After Display Address The addresses storing upper and lower lim its will be allocated to the consecutive ad dresses immediately following the indi rectly designated address which contains display data Word Address Display Address Alarm range Min amp Max Area After Base Address The addresses storing upper and lower lim its will be allocated to the consecutive ad dresses immediately following the address designated in the Word Address attribute on the Data Format page If the Device Type amp Address option has been selected on the Data Format page these addresses 2 104 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 12 K tag Key Input will be allocated to the second and later word addresses from the designated Word Address Word Address Display Address gt __ e Alarm range Min amp Max Alarm Color Set alarm display colors different from the normal display colors 16 Bit Data 32 Bit Data Eg Designated l Designated Word Address Display Data Word Address 1 Upper Limit 1 2 Words sa LowerLimit 4 2 3 4 5 4 Words lt Alarm Ranges gt Range ee oe Je
373. mounts of SRAM space Except for the System Data area if the amount of space required by a feature is not explicitly specified 1 e left unused the area is not reserved for that feature Total 96KB max Total 256KB max Japanese FEP Leaming Function me Q tag Alarm 28KB max 38KB max r PAAA 64KB max 64KB max Line Graph LS Area Backup Logging Data 95KB max 255KB max Filing Data 95KB max 255KB max E Calculating Backup SRAM space Refer to the following explanations about how to calculate the amont of backup SRAM space For Logging Data SECT 4 3 2 Logging Function and 4 3 10 Economy Mode For Filing Data 4 2 2 Filing Data Recipe Function GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 131 4 132 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit This section describes the extended functions that the GP 2500T 2600T series supports when the GP series is equipped with the VM unit The extended functions are as follows e Video window function e VGA SVGA display function When the GP 2500T 2600T series is equipped with the VM unit the GP series supports the extended function known as the Video Window Function as well as the conventional functions of the GP2000 series This chapter describes the Video Window Function 4 9 1 Displaying Video Window To disp
374. mple when the offset setting is not used When using only the display Word address O 03 02 o od Bit The previous graph 16 remains and the current Control Status data graph overlays it zerer 4 2 1 Data When 1 is entered to the Control Status word bit 00 turns ON and the new graph overlays the previous display 2 280 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 30 Trend Graph Display When clearing the display Word address 2 control status Clear Data Count Data 1 Clears the previous os Se S1 A Bit graph display Even if Control Status 11 0O there is data the graph 32767 4 2 1 D does not display When 2 is entered to the Control Status word bit 01 turns ON and the new graph display is cleared When clearing then displaying the graph again Ward address 3 Control Status ie F Data Count 20 Data 1 30 Data 2 dQ Dataz Daam 20 Data 4 20 Data 6 a0 Jaa 16 02 OF 0l oO Bit Clears the previous Control Status PTS 7 Lo graph display then uses 27 BT 4 4 gt Dats the current data to display the graph again When 3 is entered to the Control Status word both bits 00 and 01 turn ON and after the graph display is cleared the current data is used to display the graph again GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 281 2 30 Trend Graph Display 2 282
375. mple screen History Save 10 05 B tank Pressure Trouble 141230 SOTO 12 15 Adank Low vWaterLevel 13 15 15 00 SOTO 1400 Leyel 1 Point closed 14 00 16 50 set op bom A fovea pave en e Pressing the Start key causes the cursor to appear The cursor displays as a solid line over and under the current message Other Q tag select keys will not be enabled until the Start key 1s touched Save 10 05 B tank Pressure Trouble SOV 12 75 A tank Low Wiater Level Ls S11 1400 Level 1 Point closed e Press the Up or Down keys to move the cursor up and down See 10 05 B tank Pressure Trouble SOT 12 15 A tank Low Wiater Level STO 100 Leyel 1 Point closed e Press the Ack key when the message is checked or acknowledged That message s line appears with the Acknowledge Color settings only for that message s line If Ack All is pressed then all the lines appear with the color settings for all the messages ACK ALL Message times previously displayed are not updated by the new acknowledge time display However if error cleared messages are acknowledged they remain with the Error Clear Color settings Ack All 2 182 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Sele 10 05 B tank Pressure Trouble Sev 1215 Atank Low Water Level STO 100 Level 17 Point closed aie Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag e When the alarm is recovered the error cleared time appears in designated Error Clear Col
376. mpletion bit from the GP does not turn ON GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 191 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions lt Printing Format Example gt Date Trigger Message Acknowledge Recovered lt Message Printing Example gt e Alarm Log Number of Message s 8 Date Trigger Message Acknowledge Recovery 00 06 14 12 00 1st Pump Closed 00 06 14 12 15 Tank ALow Water Level Tank ALow Water Level 1st Pump Closed Tank ALow Water Level 1st Pump Closed 00 06 14 10 05 Tank B Pressure Alarm Tank B Pressure Alarm e Alarm History Number of Message s 3 Date Trigger Message Acknowledge Recovery 00 06 14 12 00 1st Pump Closed 14 00 16 50 00 06 14 12 15 Tank ALow Water Level 13 15 15 00 00 06 14 10 05 Tank B Pressure Alarm 11 30 e The item titles Number of Message s Date Trigger Mes L sage Ack and Rec are only printed on the first page s top 2 Important lines even if the printout is more than 1 page e If your GP font setting is set to other than JAPANESE i e l ASCII KOREAN TAIWANESE or CHINESE all item titles are printed in English 2 192 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag Triggered Alarm Count The LS Area s start address is specified to write the number of triggered alarm summaries whose group numbers have been specified Starting f
377. n 2 188 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag yay AIR GP System Area Q tag settings In order to create a Q tag it must also be setup using the GP system settings From the GP PRO PBIII Project Manager s GP Setup area select the Expansion tab then click on the Q tag Settings button to bring up the following display Q Tag Settings O Tag Setting O Tag Format 7 z Active EJ Ack z z History ize Trigger mE Recovered Helo Log ize Messages m E O Tag Print Settings Triggered Alarm Court Word Address L50020 ae J Print Setting reall Tine 1 Grayling Copa poligticory Eik Tonka ud Aelidiess ae ue tag External Operation Date Format im External Operation Topia Satara dadie Time Format T joo P oss os O Time Format less oms si 9 15 09 15 Alarm Message Displayed by G Tag PLC Data Monitored by Q Tag 4 Clear when Powering Up i Clear When Powering Up 2 Do Not Clear When Powering Up 9 Do Not Clear When Powering Up Sample E a T F aa pa Q Tag Setting Set up maximum trigger frequency of alarms possible in each Alarm display mode Set up maximum trigger frequencies so that the sum of all the values is not greater than 768 When the number of alarms exceeds this fixed value the oldest alarms are dropped to make room for the new alarms Also when alarm
378. n Moves the highlighted cursor down a row in the A tag display area OK Runs the Sub Screen sub display dis play for the highlighted row GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual JI Interlock Interlock Address EE Jo00000 Touch available condition i Bit Cy i Bik Oh Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 23 T tag Interlock The Interlock Address can be entered only when the Interlock is used to control the Touch screen s operation The Touch available condition des ignates which Interlock Bit Address setting i e ON or OFF effects the Touch function The Touch available condition s Bit Off setting is supported by only GP77R Series GP377 Se ries and GP2000 Series units If the calling up of a window causes the current screen to contain more than ote a single 1 A tag the A tag s item selection Key will operate on the A tag that is front most on the screen Q Tag Selection Key This feature allows you to use the fea tures listed on the screen here Action Start This key begins operations in the Q tag display area Pressing this key causes a cursor to appear in the display area T Tag Setting EA ward 4 Special C Clear Delete Dearest Freeze Mode ear Acknowledged Alarm C Delete Al Check this check box to select the freeze E Clear All Recovere d Alam im Interlock E Clear All acknowledged Alarms mode Interlock Address i Finish Eo C Sub Disp
379. n 1s reversed ON lt gt OFF when the trigger bit 1s activated ac cording to the designated trigger mode 2 253 W Tag Setting General Into f Bit Mode 7 Word 17 Special Trigger Type t 0 1 3 1 0 Trigger Bit Address Ch de gt 1 Bit Address Word Address es poo l pono FI Kinde Constant Settings ti Set ene b iA tj Dec BCO i Hes Relational Symbola e e E o o ios i Reset co I Invert E Mode Word Ww Tag Setting Mode General Into t Bit Trigger Type f 021 3 1 0 Trigger Bit Address Mode 9 Word Address 8 Set 16 Bit Epoo Uy Set 32 Bit 19 Add Binary 16 Bit i Add BCD 16 Bit Ch de gt 1 CI Screen Level Change Direction Constant Settings Constant lo fs Dec BCD Hex C ee e a 7 Special Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Compare Designates a comparison of the data in Word Address with a predetermined con stant value when the trigger bit is activated If the condition is met the Bit Address is set to high 1 Word Address Designates the word address data that is compared with the constant 16 bit data Constant Setting Constant Designates the fixed value to be used in the comparison Dec BCD Hex Designates the data format for the constant Relational Symbols Designates the symbol used in the com parison The comparison method is as fol lows S1 Symbol S2 w
380. n settings of the GP system settings or with the GP off line Extended settings e Read complete bit address Setting ON OFF e Storage mode Setting Data clear with 0 Data clear with space OFF e Maximum number of bytes of data stored in the LS Setting ON OFF e Readout mode Setting Standard Denso s QR code reader Token s code reader Basic Settings E Starting address of data stored in the LS area Read data is stored in the LS area The data cannot be in the PLC device The data is stored in the following order LS Area Address Data 0 Volume of read data 2 Read data e Volume of read data n bytes The volume of read data is stored e Status The error code is stored if the data cannot be correctly loaded or cannot be written in the LS area The types of errors are as follows OOOOh 0001h Data has been successfully read 0002h Error reading data data cannot be stored in the LS area 0003h Data exceeding the maximum number of bytes storable in the LS area has been received The maximum number of bytes of data are stored in the LS data In this case the read complete bit address setting is ON is turned ON Data exceeding the maximum number of bytes cannot be written in the LS area 4 106 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 5 Serial code Reader Compatibility e The data read by the Serial code reader is stored in the LS area in accor da
381. n the F tag Area movement and Two Point movement Area Movement The library object moves within the selected area Reserve two words for the data coordinates Designated Word Address GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 57 2 7 F tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Two Point Movement The library object moves directly between two points Reserve one word for the movement data Erd Point Designated Word Address Movement Data E The GP converts coordinate or movement data stored in the Word Address and calls in the library item to the designated coordinates WE Displays the library of the designated screen There are two types of Screen Access setups Direct and Indirect E When Screen Access is Direct the library s screen number is fixed E When Screen Access is Indirect the library s screen number 1s variable WE An offset is available for designating the screen number e When creating multiple F tags make sure that an F tag s mov ing objects do not overlap others on the display When they do important the objects will not display properly e When there is another drawing in the F tag library movement area if the drawing and library object overlap the display will disappear due to the GP s XOR display logic Called objects using 3 dot or 5 dot line types will not display Ge a Libraries that contain filled drawings take time to redraw Avoid using fills in NS l
382. n the PLC Word Address is used Control Data Count and Data are constantly read out from the PLC to the GP regardless of screen display The time from the Control display bit turning ON to graph display to read out Data will be longer than the time when the LS Area is used However when graph display is not performed time required to display data of the entire screen will be shorter than when using the LS Area This function is also useful when data for more than 256 words is required to display mul tiple graphs via the Block Display function Za When the PLC Word Address is used to increase the entire screen data dis Note play speed to display multiple graphs via Block Display function the follow D ing method is useful Specify the Offset of all graphs displayed via the Block Display function and then designate each graph s Control Data Count and Offset with con secutive address No of Data Items n First Data Unit Offset No of Data Items n Second Data Unit 2 278 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 30 Trend Graph Display Word Address s setting items The Word Address setting items for Block Display is as follows The Offset setting is valid only when the PLC Word Address is used How ever GP 270 does not have the PLC Word Address setting With No Offset Control With Offset Control 0 Control N
383. nates is the left top point of the screen When drawing an object on the window the registered window s left top point is the origin point Object Drawing Example When drawing a straight line with an arrow at the end the line type of Solid line in white Trigger bit address M00000 Start Address D00100 Data Size 7 Drawing data set Trigger bit address Drawing M00000 Data storage address Trigger bit ON Trigger bitaddress Drawing M00000 Start 50 100 Data storage address D00100 D00101 D00102 End 100 50 1 The GP 270 does not support this function 2 86 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 11 J tag Yau J tag Moving Mark Display Overview 2 11 1 The J tag displays the Mark created in pixel units and registered in a Mark screen on the rail positions setup using R tags In conjunction with R tags Rails the J tag displays a moving Mark This will be useful to indicate the object move ment in a production line system and can be used for display of PV graph levels Designated ray Address Position Data a a a a ae ae The positions for moving the Mark image are set on an R tag The position data refers to the position numbers designated in the R tag 2 11 2 About J tags WE Absolute and Relative data formats are available in the position data setup process E When using Absolute da
384. nce with the String Data Mode set in the GP Therefore the string can be displayed with the S tag e The usable LS area is as follows shaded area LS Area Address Data LS0000 System data area LS0020 Load area 2012 words User area LS2031 LS2032 Special relay LS2047 LS2048 Reservation LS2095 LS2096 User area 2000 words LS4095 e The LS area should be updated after all the data from the Serial code reader has been read e If the volume of the read data exceeds the capacity of above shaded areas the data within the shaded areas would be written in the LS area However the status shows 0003h Data that exceed the maximum number of bytes of data that can be stored in the LS area have been received Extended Settings E Read complete bit address setting ON OFF Setting Present When all the data are completely written in the LS area the read complete bit address 1s turned ON The read complete bit address 1s useful for deter mining whether the GP has retrieved all the data in the host When the bit is turned ON at the GP side the bit should be turned OFF at the host side If the bit is not turned OFF the next data will not be read in the GP Setting OFF The complete bit is not turned ON even if all the data is written in the LS area Control processing of the GP and the host is not necessary However if the data were loaded one by one it would be overwritten GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag R
385. nd OFF GX te For details about bit operations 3 1 7 Bit Operation Examples Priority and Associativity The following table shows the trigger priorities If two or more operators have the same priority follow the direction shown by the associativity 3 14 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script Statements Branch Statements e if if endif When a condition enclosed with brackets becomes true the process following the if statement is executed The Assign character cannot be used in a conditional expression e if else if else endif When a condition enclosed with brackets becomes true the process following the if statement is executed When the condition is false the statement after else 1s executed The Assign cannot be used in a AN conditional expression Note For details about the execution path DA 3 1 8 Conditional Branches Statements E Gee e loop loop endloop Loop repetitive processing is repeated according to the number stored in the temporary Addresses designated in the brackets This feature is supported by only GP77R Series GP377 Series and GP2000 Series units e The loop format is as follows E g loop number of loops lt Designates the temporary Address where the loop repetition number is designated E Important Mode
386. nd data is automatically allocated and the Start Address is entered Enter the number of Addresses to be allo cated in the Number of Bits to Add field Addresses will be allocated in series for the entered number beginning from the Start Address Add Offset 1s a feature to allocate Ad dresses in Bit or Word by the designated increment This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 6 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 1 Sound Output Automatic Address Allocation can also be ll TE a performed via selecting the Edit menu ce ERA kiea z ei enik gt ee Automatic Address Allocation command a T BE When a Symbol is designated as the Start 2 pn ry ae FI Repeat Address the added Address will be dis 3 posse yf m Pee played as follows a E aa ee aoa e g When the Start Address ra a ES a El Reese TEST lt Symbol Ei Rerest and ra rs a T Number of Bits to be added 4 MOOOOP 9 PE gt Repeat 9 sos Repeat Addresses will be added in series as follows e eet TEST ES i g ae TEST 1 Se TEST 2 TEST 3 When selecting a desired sound data file from the sound data list that has already been created via Sound Number the de tails of data will be displayed See the pic ture below Es Sound Settings Edit Convert View Help EG EARHEHE i SE A AOOOG
387. ndows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 237 2 26 U tag 2 238 Chapter 2 Active Image Functions WE Touch panel keys hidden under windows will not operate E When displaying multiple windows that overlap on a screen the window called up last displays at the very front The window displayed in the back ground can be brought to the front simply by touching it However if you press a touch panel key on the background window the T tag operation will process first before moving the window to the front When you press the area lt moves up to the front of the window below WE To display window data quickly select high speed display setting Important ot ore D If the total number of tags on the current Base screen and win dows exceeds 256 128 for the GP 270 GP 370 and GP H70 excluding the R tag display positions and k tags the 257th tag and later tags do not operate The tags become invalid in the order of the last displayed window If the total number of display positions for all R tags combined on the current Base screen and any windows exceeds 512 256 for the GP 270 GP 370 and GP H70 the 513th position and later positions do not display or operate When U tag s High Speed is selected even though a window is not currently displayed its device data write tags W tag D Script etc will be activated when a trigger occurs If however you wish to have the window appear before device data
388. ng Data Displays on the currently displayed screen be sure not to use the same ID No for multiple Filing Data Displays Also when placing a window con taining two or more Filing Data Displays on a Base screen be sure not to use the same ID No more than once File No 1 Enter the previously entered filing data number No of Display Lines 3 No of Display Characters 10 Direct Selection Selected Cursor Position Control Selected This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function lt Cursor Position Control gt Ge e Even when the screens are changed on the GP monitor the current File Name 2 _ Display s cursor position can be preserved e Cursor Position Control can be designated when setting up the File Name Display e When the GP s main power is turned ON or the GP is reset the cursor will appear on the first line e The cursor position will be stored for each ID No The storage area of an ID No and its cursor position correspond to each other To retain the cursor position be sure that the File Name Display ID Nos do not overlap each other on any of the screens For more detailed information about the File Name Display Operation Manual 2 1 Parts 2 1 16 File Name Display Style Color File Display FD_O01 General Settings Display S
389. ng Data from Backup SRAM to CF Card lt Data transfer from SRAM to CF card gt Control Address used for CF card data storage 0 Mode Command Status 1 Folder No 1 to 8999 The folder number designation range will be as follows For GP internal screen data memory 1 to 64 For CF card 1 to 8999 e When a single folder is used designate the folder number as 1 e If the designated number s folder does not exist data will not be transferred to backup SRAM Also the Write Completed Bit Address will not be turned ON e When data is not transferred to backup SRAM the GP internal special relay LS2032 s bit 9 will turn ON e Filing data folder names stored on the CF card will be as follows E Important Folder Seting Fiene Use Multiple Folders OFF ZF00001 BIN fixed Use Multiple Folders ON oe Folder No j ex ZF00001 BIN ZF00002 BIN etc This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units 4 16 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function lt Method 2 Manual Transmission type 1 gt Filing data is transmitted to the PLC by touching a GP screen touch key Use the Filing Data Display to transfer data to from the PLC using the SRAM gt PLC touch key and the PLC SRAM touch key GP Internal memory 1 Backup SRAM PLC screen data To use a CF card the optional Multi Unit
390. ng ibe Logging Function gio secacagactenciesestactertincsese in nA inr EE E E NE E 4 44 A30 Diplis SEUNS sorre aa ET EENT AONNE en OEEO 4 57 kod Pn SO a a TE E A AEE E E TEE E ATE R 4 68 438 Excel Display of Logging Dala soressererin anr Eas 4 79 4 3 9 Data Logging Display Usage Pxain plea icercsastecastestoerasariesdetasstecteeudecrsiassventerderectare 4 82 Wa DPE MOE e AAA AA 4 89 aa Usne TS CE CITE ea E 4 93 Me O E Wy E E E AN T E E A E EA A E T 4 93 WA A Fa O a A E A ES 4 93 AA CF Card Usare Caulis sessenetos ririri niee ES ESA AAA TE NANE NR T EN EANA 4 95 4 4 4 External Storage of GP PRO PB III data ooo ccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 97 AAS CF Card Data Output Folder Sevan ssc 9 cecserenchetesznvedecePiacteneianternisaseeeeieseeneidiantets 4 97 4 4 6 Transferring Data from Output Folder to CF Card ccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 97 AA Using the GP SOFFLINE Mode secacencetecveteceseeeiecdeseetesssnveseyteeteiccsanedectieaaiactendetesetaaties 4 98 4 4 8 Transferring Data from Backup SRAM to CF Card nnnnnnnnnnonnnonssnsesnnsssnsnenssssssseee 4 99 4 4 9 Checking the CF Card s Available Capacity ccccccccccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeess 4 103 4 5 Serial Code Reader Compatibility cccccccccsssssssssssssssccccccssecssssssscccosees 4 113 Aad Bd oh gree ee TE Tee Tee REN RPE Be tee ROOTES TOT aT YT eTT aN RSET Tae Re cere eee 4 113 4 5 2 Compatible Serial code Leas secre ecacecem
391. nits This feature initializes all devices at once Setting data for the number of Addresses is taken from the Set Word Address The allowable range of Addresses is from 1 to 640 Format memset Set Word Address set data number of Addresses Example When 0 is set to addresses D0100 to D0109 memset w D0100 0 10 lt Memory Set memset gt As the number of Addresses increases the more the time is important required for writing data to the PLC Depending on the number of Addresses it may take from 20 seconds to several minutes Although it will depend on the number of Addresses to be cop ied data will be read from the original copy data then divided into pieces and copied to the copy destination Therefore even if a communication error occurs during data read data may be partially written Unless data write is completed for the designated number of Addresses screen displays such as tags will not be updated or refreshed Also screen changes Q tag alarm processing and other processing will not be performed Although this function designates Address es they are not counted as D script Address es When using device addresses for the Assign operation the write values will not be assigned immediately due to the GP to PLC transmission time E g memset w D0100 0 10 nitializes D100 to D109 as 0 w D200 w D100 Assigns D100 data to D200 In this case value 0 written to D100
392. ns with the capital letter O followed by up to 5 Single byte characters The number of channels will equal the number of trend graph lines GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 267 2 30 Trend Graph Display Chapter 2 Active Image Functions WE There are three Trend Graph Display formats Normal Pen Recorder and Block WE Normal Display Mode Data changes in the word address setup 1 word are displayed at the desig nated time The data display begins at 0 zero At the designated sampling time the latest data is drawn in the Direction setup When you reach the end of the Trend graph display area the data scrolls over by the value set in the Scroll field and the display continues e When Direction Right Scroll 4 Scroll takes place here mst Begins W Pen Recorder Display Mode Data changes in the word address setup 1 word are displayed at the desig nated time The data display begins at 0 zero At the designated sampling time the graph display scrolls over one by one from the selected direction The latest data displays on the edge of the selected Direction the origin axis e When Direction Right he he Begins 2 268 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 30 Trend Graph Display W Block Display Mode All the data in consecutive word addresses are sampled at the designated time then graphed as a single trend line
393. number so that it is forced to display the next messages screen 20 messages E g When 20 rows of messages are displayed enter 21 as the a tag Start Number to bring up the next 20 messages WE Up to 160 Single byte characters can be registered on the Alarm Editor for a single message However when this message displays on the GP the maximum number of characters per row and the maximum number of rows per screen are designated by the GP s type and Display orientation setup used 2 1 2 About A tags Max No of Characters and Lines A tag GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 21 2 2 a tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions WE You may designate Display Size and Display Border options WE Alarm Message displays start from the lowest monitor bit address Succeed ing alarm messages will appear beginning with the allocated to the lowest monitor bit address from the top of the alarm display Alarm messages that exceed the length of the designated dis play area will be truncated to the allowable display length a Important EN Only one a tag can be created on each Base screen If you desire more than one Note ina Base screen use a window display with an a tag setting 2 22 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W General Info a Tag Setting General Info Display Format Size Color Display Angle Tag Name a E Displa
394. o gether with its Block Name No of Char Item Designate the maximum number of block name characters No of Data Col Designate the number of data display col umns in the data display area Data Char Size Designate the character size for each data in the data display area No of Char Data Designate the number of characters in the data display area Preview The setting contents can be preview This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 49 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features lt Row Column Settings gt 20000 29990 oe 20090 EA 209000 ac ee 3333 QWIIVI IAN TVIIN NN J QQ0OQQOQ 29990 Names OO0OOQ0OOQOOJ VIVIV IN IAN FVIV IN IN IA OQ0OQ0Q0Q QQ0QQQQ Names OO0OO0OOQOOJ VIVIIV IN IAN FVVQV N N IA VIQIV IN IN 0QQ0QQQQ 1 3 Oper PICER atone en 90000 00000 00000 900000 C No of Char Col No of Block Char Col 1 16 1 16 No of Data Col 1 60 Za Up to 60 columns and up to 2100 rows of data can be entered However since lt Note the file capacity is approximately 58KB depending on the No of Block Name NY Rows and No of Char Name designated for the cells these column and row limits will decrease 60 columns 2100 rows e When the loop feature is used regardless of the logging frequency the data display will always be only one row e For dialog box di
395. o of Data Items 1 No of Data Items n 2 Offset m Data n units Data n units Control The role of each bit in the Control Status word is described in the following passages e To begin the turn bit 00 ON Oe 02 01 00 contol TCT TT e To clear the entire a turn bit 01 ON OS U2 O71 00 Control Status e To clear the then re draw it turn both bit 00 and bit 01 ON Oe 02 01 OO contol TOT TED Data Count Defines the number of data values to display on the graph To display a graph like the one shown below set the Data Count to 7 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 279 2 30 Trend Graph Display Chapter 2 Active Image Functions e To display the graph delay Control Status setting by a time _ longer than the communication cycle time after storing the data Important count and data values e After displaying the graph the Control Status resets to 0 To display the graph again store the data in the same Control Sta tus word e The Scale value setup in the Axis Setting dialogue box refers to the number of trend line segments 6 in the above diagram and the Data Count for the block display trend graph refers to the number of data points Offset The area where the data for a trend graph 1s stored is indicated When the PLC Word Address is used this setting is valid Data This area stores the data for a trend graph W Setting Exa
396. o clockwise Graph Pattern Normal Meter When Meter is selected the needle uses the foreground color and the meter face uses the background color When drawing a rectangular frame for the bar graph be sure to 1 draw the frame so that it is 1 dot outside the graph display area If Important the graph and frame overlap the frame will disappear However it is unnecessary to draw a frame for the Pie or Half Pie graph EN When setting up the Bar graph s display position two opposite points need to Note be setup in the same manner as when drawing a rectangle When setting up the Pie or Half pie first designate the center point then the radius of the outer and inner circles The radius of the inner circle must be at least 20 dots To omit the inner circle after setting the external circle move the cursor to the center until the internal circle disappears and left click 2 74 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 9 g tag E Range Color g Tag Setting Range Type General Info Data Format RangeColor Display Angle Direct Select this option to directly designate Color Type No of Ranges ish shee the data range Indirect b Indirect This option is enabled when the No of Ranges setting is set to 2 or more If this option is selected the data range Range Settings Color Settings puren Vale a CI Cooly Backe Patter Jee SZER wil
397. o rA Designated Input I Display Mode BitLength 16 Direct Directly specifies Word Address s range via the Input Range field Indirect Indirectly specifies the range of the data stored in the Word Address The Word Addresses used to store the input range s maximum minimum values are displayed in the Input Range field The GP 270 however does not have this setting i 2 s Complement Input Code Format fs No Code i MSB Cee Word Address 9 Display Data 1 Input range Max 2 Input range Min Input Range Min Value Max Value Setup the range of the data stored in the Word Address The setup range limits vary with the Code Input Input Code Format No Code Displays positive values only 2 s complement Uses 2 s complement to express nega tive values MSB Uses MSB code system to express nega tive values lt Min Max Input Range Values gt Input Code Format Input Range 2 s Complement 32768 32767 MSB 32767 32767 2 72 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 9 g tag WE Graph Type Bar Graph General Info Data Format Graph Type Range Color Display Angle Bar Graph i Pie Graph i Half Pie Graph g Tag Setting Bar Graph Select this option to display a bar graph g Display Direction Graph Patter fi Up fe Normal i Lett
398. o suppress setups are available for the display style WE When host data contain zeros set display to zero suppress Sr e The upper and lower limits of the alarm range can be displayed on the screen Note using the n tag SGOT 2 18 n tag Alarm Range Display e For details about the touch keyboard SA 2 12 k tag Keyboard Setup e For more about the relationship of high and low order word address data when the 32 bit data is used MEAANI PLC Connection Manual WE The word address to store the display data can be indirectly designated The device of the source word address can be the same or different from that of the destination address for the indirect designation SZ 26 4 Indirect Word Addressing Examples E tag Usable barcode readers are restricted to those recommended in your User s Manual GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 95 2 12 K tag Key Input Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 96 W General Info E Tag Setting l Alarm Settings Arithmetic Operation l Display Angle General Info Data Format SizerStyle Tag Name KE Trigger Bit Address 00000 Word Address poogt Base Address Data Format The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for the K tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double by
399. ock Data av i g F A y we About C tags E Time displays in 24 hour military format W Position size and color attributes of the Time Display are adjustable E When using a C tag data used for the C tag display is stored in either System Data Area address 5 direct access type or addresses 7 and 8 memory link type WE C tags display only time To display the date set an N tag to use System Data Area address 2 3 and 4 for direct access type applications or 4 5 and 6 for memory link type applications EN Only one C Tag may be used per screen If multiple C Tags have been used on Note a single screen only the first will be valid enabled D e For the system data area of the direct address method and memory link method PLC Connection Manual GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 27 2 3 C tag W General Info C Tag Setting General Into Size Color Display Angle Tag Hame C Description Color Character Size ae 6 Angle degrees E Size Color C Tag Setting General Info Size Color Display Angle Display Size Text Color Fg Eee a AE Bg Bee me ek Po Bee meek Chapter 2 Active Image Functions ym Using C tags The General Info page provides informa tion about current settings for C tag Tag Name Not more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and composed of letters and or symbols Descri
400. of an arithmetic operation performed on the storage data can be displayed with the N tag WE Character size and display color attributes are adjustable WE The display styles Shift Left Right Zero Suppress can be easily set up E When the host PLC data is 0 the display can be set so that 0 zero values will not appear N699 is a reserved tag name Do not use this name 2 148 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 17 N tag W General Info The General Info page provides infor mation about the current settings for the N tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and composed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a descrip H Tag Setting Data Format Size Siyle Alarm Settings Arithmetic Operation Tag Name H ro Description Word Address boop Data Format Abszolute Decimall 6 General Into Alarm Settings Arithmetic Operator tion of the tag E Data Format Absolute H Tag Setting Absolute R N g Das ronal a a a Select this option to display the data in E Absoluie 1 Relative the Word Address using the designated Word Address Ll Code Data Format Word Address Defines the word address whose data is used in the display Code Set this up to display negative values Only
401. of char acters text is shifted to right for one character When designating Char Col for Column Type data is printed being shifted left General Info Column Type Date Time Date Time Prints out Time and Date data Column Settings 1 Column Type 7 Value fe Date Time t Char Col 1 Border General Info Column Mo Date ppr mmAdd lapat ssc Data Type Display Format Data Format Column Settings D ate Data Format Size Style Prints out date data e i Time Time Prints out time data Display Format ppm dd e Display Format Select the desired time date display format EN Date Time settings have two settings i e Date settings and Time settings Note Time data is printed out only via the 24 hour system e For date mm dd yy mm dd yy mm dd dd mm yy e For time hh mm hh mm ss Size Style No of Char Col Designates the cell size Enter a value from 1 to 32 digits Column Settings General Info Size Style Display Format No of Char Col Previews E Shii igh M Zea Suppesa Display Style This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function General Info Column Type Char Col Char Col Prints out the text Lata Format Size Style 1 Column Type Value Date
402. of operation Specify the Serial code reader LS in the extended SIO setting to connect the Serial code reader MEHAANIKA 1 6 Setting of extended SIO in the operation manual The data from the Serial code reader is stored in the LS area in the GP The Serial code reader is not interlocked with the K tag function The data read by the Serial code reader is stored in the LS area because the data volume greatly exceeds that read by a one dimensional bar code reader When the Serial code reader is used the data from the Serial code reader stored in the LS area can be sent to the upper host or partially displayed on the screen with the GP tag function GP2000 series The data from the Serial code reader is stored in the LS area Serial code reader Extended serial interface DSUB 9 pin Address Data in the LS area Volume of read data n bytes Read data Even if the Serial code reader is set up the serial 1 dimensional bar code reader can be also connected However the read mode should be set to nor mal Se te AN GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 105 4 5 Serial code Reader Compatibility Chapter 4 Advanced Features ae Action Settings The required settings for the Serial reader are as follows Basic settings e Starting address of LS data storage area e Communication settings Communication settings for the extended serial I F can be set with the extended functio
403. ogge Input Style Auto Clear OFF Tl BarCode Input i Auto Clear ON a Auto Clear amp Input Check E Alarm Setting General Info Data Format Size Style Alarm Settings Arithmetic Operation Display Angle Alarm Frc e m Min Value 0 a Max Value 85535 m Bit Addres s E xo le Select Indirect Address Area i rea After Display Adediesa iD dies Alter Base Addhess Alarm Type Direct E Indirect 2 Color Change Alarm Color Po eC ek 6 METEEN ek o GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual K Tag Setting 2 12 K tag Key Input Input Style Auto Clear OFF Without clearing the previous value the setup area displays and waits for you to input the next values If you want to clear the display press the CLR key on the touch keyboard Auto Clear ON The first character entered except cursor movement ENT DEL and BS key entry clears the previous display Auto Clear amp Input Check Performs automatic clearing when barcode reader inputs are used Also it checks the validity of the input data length with the Display Digit setup Data will not be writ ten to the word address 1f it is not valid When using touch keyboard input only Auto Clear takes place Bar Code Input When this option is selected both the touch keyboard and barcode reader inputs will be acceptable Alarm Display Set the Alarm ON to use the Alarm dis play settin
404. olor Bg and blink attributes Blk for when the alarm is triggered Acknowledge Color Defines the foreground color Fg back ground color Bg and blink attributes Blk for when the alarm is acknowledged Recovery Text s Color Defines the foreground color Fg back ground color Bg and blink attributes Blk for when the alarm is recovered Erase Color Defines the color attributes for areas where messages are not displayed Ifthe GP screen is monochrome this should be set black 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Pte The recovered message remains Error Clear Color even if the Ack Key is pressed D W Sub Display Q Tag Setting General Info Display Mode Display Format Size Color Sub Display Display Angle os t Base Screen 1 Active Window GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual None This setting turns the Sub Display feature OFF Base Screen This setting turns the display of a Base screen Sub Display ON Also it can be used to change the screen s display The GP 270 does not support this function 2 177 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Active Window This setting turns the Window Display fea ture ON and turns the Window Sub Dis play feature ON The GP 270 does not support this func tion e The GP 270 does not support the Sub Display feature e When you enter the Word Address of an X tag to use in a Sub Display the Word
405. ols Display Style No gf Die Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag E Display Mode Trigger Type Display Mode Size Siyle Display Ange 0 1 When the bit address changes from OFF to ON the character string is displayed 1650 When the bit address changes from OFF ON or ON OFF the character string 1s displayed Indirect The character string display switches when data in the word address changes Trigger Bit Address Defines the ON OFF trigger bit address of the character display When Indirect is se lected for the Trigger Type then this set ting 1s unnecessary Read Out After Trigger When this check box is checked after the trigger bit changes the text data will be read out When the text data is a large volume or many S tags are set on the single screen check this check box for each S tag to increase other tag display speeds When this check box is checked other tags display speeds will be increased S tags speeds however will be decreased When the trigger method is specified to Indirect this setting 1s not valid Trager Type Trigger Bit Address SES koo FE i Indirect JQ Read Out After Trigger Word Address mpoo Fe o cma Hem This feature cannot be used with some PLCs For a complete list of these PLCS refer to 1 3 Tag List s note section 4 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag R
406. om Base and Im age Library screens Image Screen CF Card Select this when you want to designate the Image screen saved to the CF Card Start Screen No Determines the first screen file number Base or Image Library screen of the li brary to be displayed No of Ranges Set up the total number of switching li brary screens which can be a value from 1 to 32 However a value cannot be desig nated which exceeds the amount of data which can be displayed in a bit length des ignated by Bit Length E g When the Bit Length 4 the possible Number of Ranges is 1 15 2 137 2 15 l tag lt small L gt 2 138 General Info Designated Screens Range Settings No of Ranges Bit Offset ooo Bi Length Range Settings EN RN ON ty ey F Input Data Format ia Decimal i Hex 3 BCD Current alue 1 0 lt gt 65535 Range 1 Lower Limit Range 1 Upper Limit Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Bit Offset Set up the offset value from 0 to 15 When you can use the entire Word Address or when the offset is unnecessary enter a value of O zero Bit Length Determines the number of bits in the Word Address to use for the display Set up a Bit Length of 1 to 16 When the Bit Offset is other than 0 set up a range whereby the Bit Offset Bit Lengths 16 The Bit Offset and the Bit Length values determine the display data When the Bit Offset is 0 and the entire Word Address is available set up a value of
407. omentary AUX Output Defines whether or not a buzzer signal is sent from GP s AUX I F This function is invalid for the GP 270 GP H70 GP 370 GP 377R and GP 377 because they do not have an AUX I F GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 219 2 23 T tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions yay xem One Shot Buzzer for T tag momentary This section describes how to set up the one shot buzzer during the T tag momentary operation Only the GP77 series GP377 series and GP2000 series support this function E When both the buzzer sound and the one shot buzzer sound are ON the buzzer sounds only once when the touch panel switch is depressed ON Touch operation OFF Buzzer sound ON AUX output OFF E When the buzzer sound is ON and the one shot buzzer sound is OFF the buzzer continues to sound while the touch panel switch is depressed ON Touch operation OFF Buzzer sound ON AUX output OFF E When the buzzer is OFF the buzzer does not sound ON Touch operation OFF Buzzer sound ON AUX output OFF 2 220 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 23 T tag W The one shot buzzer settings are valid under the following con ditions 1 Momentary of the bit action 2 Momentary of the group with the bit action automatic OFF function 3 Inching output Tih tag Tiw tag The inching output can be activated only in the large model of the GP
408. on the user s file size may exceed this capacity The following example 1s the standard display setting size e Enter the Block Name in the Ist column and then up to 8 single byte characters in each column e Enter the Block Name in the Ist row and then up to 8 single byte charac ters in each row e Four rows are available for totals Total Average Max Min No of value columns Block Name Date Time Value Value Value Block Name pecneron asoneron pecoeron frecoeren Jasoneron Data display ascoren o o Soo Data display ascoercH O o jepay rows Datadisplay aecoersw TT display rows es es es S T T S Data display ascoren o o Soo doo doo Soo o o Total Total ascose TFET Total Average ascoren Jo Total Max ascose fF To Too oo Total Min ascoren oo oo Soo o When using the pattern shown above the maximum number of value col umns and data display rows are as follows No of Value No of Data e bagam Pets When the No of value columns number of logging words is the maximum 32 columns When the No of value columns number of logging words is the maximum 16 columns os tm When the No of value columns number of logging words is the maximum 8 columns When the No of value columns number of logging tte words is the maximum 4 columns When designating the columns as the block name display and p entering characters in each col
409. on 1s con trolled address 0 to 21 Each address has each of the functions and the attribute that 1s controlled is written in the corresponding address The video is displayed with the attribute The following table details the functions Video ID number 1 to 8999 However when input with BCD 1 to 1999 Word Address 5 O gt N Oo CO Write FFF F Hex to display the video window according to the information written in the video control area Command 0 Delete 1 Display number is finished to be 0 Standard Mode 1 Large Mode loaded Transparent iy eae oo onoarei Rin E 0 Transparent display of colors except specified colors 1 Transparent display of specifed colors 4 Prohibit Touch Input within Video Window 0 Input Valid 1 Prohibited Still Video Screen Static 0 Animation 1 Static Screen Unused Reserve lt Video ID Reload 9 to 15 Unused Reserve Input Channel Number 0 to3 Transparent Color 0 to 63 64 color mode 0 to 255 256 color mode Video Window Display 0 to 615 GP 2500T Function X coordinate GX 0 to 775 GP 2600T Video Window Display 0 to 455 GP 2500T Function Y coordinate GY 0 to 575 GP 2600T Width of Video GP 2500T Window DX NTSC Standard Mode 25 to 320 Large Mode 25 to 640 PAL Standard Mode 25 to 384 Large Mode 25 to 640 GP 2600T NTSC Standard Mode 25 to 320 Large Mode 25 to 640 PAL S
410. ons draw lines without overlapping the end NY points Incorrect Start and end points x Start point End point Start point Correct Start and end points do not overlap Ww yam How to Avoid Overlapping Erase Images When libraries are called with the Screen Access set to Indirect and the Erase Mode set to No and the library image changes the new image is drawn on top of previous images To avoid overlapping Library Item erase images create erase library screens as follows e Libraries to load 1 Draw a black filled rectangle that cov ers the largest figure among all the n libraries that will be loaded in 7 Erase library Bei Bei Bolz NO In each library draw your figures on top of this black filled rectangle J When images are called up using an L tag it will appear as if only the objects in the current loaded library are display ing Actually the images from screens B300 and B301 are also in the dis play but only B302 appears 2 130 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 14 L tag 2 14 10 Overlapping Colors on a Color GP In a color GP when figures or text with the Erase Mode set to Yes are loaded into a Base screen in RUN mode overlapping any of the screen s previous images will make the colors blend So you must consider color combinations when overlapping colors See the following table to determine the display colors
411. or The recovered alarm message s line is displayed accord ing to the Recover Color settings When the alarm is recovered Save 10 08 B tank Pressure Trouble 11230 SOTO 12 15 A tank Low Water Level 13 15 15 00 GAOT 1 00 Leyel 1 Point closed 14 00 16 50 e Pressing the Delete key erases the message in the current cursor position As a result all the other messages move up one row Pressing Delete All causes all the alarm messages to disappear However the control device is not deleted GeO 2 10 05 B tank Pressure Trouble 9801001 12 00 Level 1 Point closed 14 00 16 50 Delete All e The cursor key disappears when the End key is pressed If you press the Start key twice the alarm display stops This is known as freeze mode Seve 10 05 B tank Pressure Trouble 3 gt End 301401 1400 Level 1 Point closed GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 183 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions yA ge Sub Display Example This section explains how to use a Sub Display from an Active Window Library Display W Sub Display Example Sub a 98 01 02 10 05 B tank Pressure Trouble 11 30 Low Water Level 98 01 01 12 00 Level1 Point closed 14 00 16 50 Down Ack Ack All__ 1 2 1 Select any of the Alarm Summary s messages by touching the screen or using the Up Down key When a message is selected by touching its screen Active Window appears on the screen and the Library
412. or area as the Word Address designated above Device Type amp Address Both a device type and an address are indirectly designated using device and address codes Then you need to enter and the address code in the next word address PLC Connection Manual GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 43 2 6 E tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Tag Setting Range Color Arithmetic Operation Display Angle General Info Data Format Size Style i Absolute Relative Word Address Zl indireci S _ Aekhasses mew Fe O Devisa Typa amp Aabbhess SEn OBED Oi Code Data Display Format H Ram Ua 16 Bit 32 Bit Decimal Decimal i Hex i Hex i BCD 4 BCO 2 Octal fd Bin 3 Bin t3 Float ee cc Base Address Appears Only when the Indirect Address option is selected The Base address and word address are added to create the dis play data address Bin BCD E tag uses the data format designated here to display the data When Device Type amp Address option is selected the data for mat is fixed to Bin Code Use Code when handling negative values Only available when setting Deci mal data Round Up This option can be selected when Data Dis play Format is specified as Float 32 bit The decimal point numbers created during data conversion will be rounded up 1f the number is 5 or above and rounded down if the number is anything
413. or settings 1 Printout color can be set for the Trigger Acknowledge and Recovery colors 2 When using the Grouping selection the Trigger Acknowl edge and Recovery printing colors will be the same as the colors selected in the Q Tag Alarm Display screen 3 If you touch the Alarm History s Ack key after the Alarm Message is recovered the message s Recovery color will remain the same 4 There are eight 8 color selections available 5 The printing color settings are only for characters and not for backgrounds e When the Grouping feature is used any Alarm that Is Triggered or Recovered during printing will not be printed Only the Alarm status data created before printing started will be printed If the GP is turned OFF during printing printing will also stop However when the GP Is turned ON again printing will not con tinue automatically from where it stopped If the Print setting s Trigger bit is still ON when the GP ts turned ON printing will repeat again from the beginning of the messages e Be sure to hold the Print Trigger Bit s ON OFF state longer than the communication cycle time and the Tag Scan time If no Q Tag settings are input or if no Alarms have occurred prior to Alarm status printout the message Number of Message s 0 will be printed e When the number of specified alarm type settings the number of alarm types stored in the GP system settings is 0 the opera tion co
414. ore XY 2 17 4 Relative Data Display Settings N tag Eg g 16 bit dataz 3Ranges 32 bit data 3Ranges Designated Word Address Designated Word Address 1 Display Data 2 Range 2 lower t 3 Range 2 lower 4 words 4 Range 3 lower 5 Range 3 lower 4 2 Range 2 lower Range 3 lower 2 words lt Data Format Range gt Data Format Range es SN L E 32768 32767 De IE C r ra o O o Ce O oo CE ee a 99999999 2 52 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 6 E tag W Arithmetic Operation E Tag Setting Arithmetic Operation If this item is selected an arithmetic operation will be performed to the data retained from the word address and the resulting data is displayed This function works only when the Number of Ranges attribute on the Range Setting page is set to one Operand Data Format Size Style l Arithmetic Operation Display Angle General Into A ange Color 1 Arthmetic Operation 7 Indirect Select Indirect Address Area is Areadifter Dippy ddbtess i Area differ Baga Adbhessy rs Word Address Operator Data mw Co Arthmetic Operators Data Location t Lett fe Add i Sub Direct t Right op Mult i Div 7 Jand Or Select this option to directly designate the 1 ror operand Indirect Select this option to
415. ormat fimt15cm WE The host PLC word address data can be either the Binary or BCD format WE Negative data uses the 2 s complement format E You may display only necessary data units by truncating nonessential data fractions For example with data using decimal places you can truncate the decimal values and display only integers E An alarm function is available by defining the upper and lower numerical limits of the data Both numbers and characters pre designated format will display using the attributes set for the alarm GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 161 2 19 P tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions WE The alarm range can also be designated as variable where the upper and lower limits are obtained indirectly For this setting the maximum and minimum values are stored in consecutive addresses following the desig nated Word Address E g n i Display data e 32 bit data i Upper limit e Display data Word Address n n 4 Lower limit n 5 R re For more about the relationship of high and low order word address data when NY the 32 bit data is used PLC Connection Manual WE The display size and color attributes are adjustable W For display style Shift Left Right and Zero Suppress can be set up 2 162 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E General Info P Tag Setting Alarm Settings Display Angle
416. ormat and the Code setting QX te e For details about the Relative value input x 2 17 4 Relative Data Display Settings N tag e For details about indirect designation 2 6 4 Indirect Word Addressing Examples E tag GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 99 2 12 K tag Key Input Chapter 2 Active Image Functions lt Minimum and Maximum Values of the Ranges gt Data Format Input Range Display Range Code Input No Code 0 65535 32768 32767 0 65535 2 s complement 32768 32767 32768 32767 0 65535 MSB 32767 32767 32768 32767 0 65535 woe o e o Zs complemen MSB 32767 3276 2 s complement Char String Arithmetic Operation eA Using the touch keys designated with k tags Cher Sting ASCII code text input to the host PLC is ie J so FE possible The maximum length of the text to be stored should be designated 1 Absolute Mi indirect Base Address ti Addresses ow Word Address eee R Defines the data storage word address No of Display Cher E E Trigger Bit Address Defines the address of the bit that enables touch key input Indirect If this option 1s selected the data storage word addresses are indirectly designated oe aa Addresses The indirectly designated address is within the same device as the Word Address des ignated above Device Type amp Address Both a device type and an address are in
417. osition and the Display Size settings 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 5 Tag Setting General Info Display Made Size Style Display Angle ehcp Fo Magoma mE Nok IF Background Color Patter L iz hE ee ae Bo EB OOS SOOM Nok Display Sq le _ _ _ _ A fen Shift Left i Clear Display Ci Centered Et Shift Right ok Cancel ff Hep E Display Angle Display Size pa ia Mo of Display Char FA 2 22 S tag Display Style Shift Left Centered Shift Right Select one of the above options Displays the data in the selected alignment Clear Display When this option is set before displaying the next set of characters the previous dis play is erased When this option is not set the next set of characters writes over the previous display S Tag Setting Display Angle General Info Display Mode Size Style Display Angle Display Angle aeria A 7 90 degrees fh 180 degrees i 270 degrees Set up the rotation for the display Select one from 0 zero 90 180 and 270 de grees GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 207 2 208 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 23 T tag rwa T tag Touch Panel Input T tags interpret touch areas on the Graphic Panel for the host PL
418. ot shift To move to another data area first press the CAN key This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 85 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features 2 Use the keypad to edit the data and press the ENT key to store the edited data in the GP s internal SRAM ZEN Data can be edited in the cells in A and B rows Time and Data columns Note Block Names and Average values cannot be edited However which is 2 displayed as a result of data read errors can be edited Areas whose logging data has not been acquired cannot be edited Scroll Use UP DN L and R keys to scroll the display areas The gray colored areas in the figure below represent that they are not currently dis played Use the scroll keys to move to those data cells VOLTAGE CSS CEE e oy ies deg lite fico les pe os Ea This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 86 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function 2 Touch the R key This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 87 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features m Economy Mode In economy mode a maximum of 255 logging words can be speci
419. pe t Direct 1 Indirect Screen Type Base Screen Screen No 1 2 8 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions A Tag Setting General Info Display Format Size Color Sub Display Display Angle t None t Base Screen H Active Window Screen Type 4 Direct i TOSE Screen Type Base Screen Mode Settings Change Screen 4 Library Display H Text Display Screen No Word Address a O00000 Fy EEE PREP 2 1 A tag Screen Type Indirect Designates the screen file number Base screen to be displayed next as indirect This setting is valid only for the GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series Screen Number Word Address Designates a Word Address to store screen file number Base screen to be displayed Be sure to designate screen file numbers as binary numbers S Library Display General Info Display Format Size Color Sub Display Display Angle t None t Base Screen 9 Active Window 2 Indirect screen Type Base Screen Mode Settings 1 Change Screen ie Library Display 1 Text Display Screen No 1 E Word Address Ltag Word Address EE Doon F A Tag Setting Tx Screen Type Direct Designates the number of the Base screen to be displayed as a sub screen directly in the Screen No area Screen No Enter the start number of the Base screens created as sub screens Word Address
420. peration Manual 4 5 1 Project Information Data in backup SRAM Is erased when e The GP s memory is initialized T Data is transmitted importante The GP system and protocol are set up e GP s self diagnosis Internal FEPROM screen area is per formed e The GP s OFFLINE mode is set up However if the GP s system version is 1 30 or higher GP PRO PBIII for Windows95 Ver 2 0 or higher backup SRAM data is not erased La e These data registration limits will differ depending on your GP s environ Note ment conditions such as backup SRAM usage and current settings e Up to 59520 bytes of filing data can be stored in one folder in the GP s internal memory Approximately up to 95KB of filing data which is the maximum capacity of the backup SRAM can be stored in the CF card when storing only filing data to the backup SRAM This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 13 4 2 Filing Data Recipe Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features Ge as Filing data can be registered when the following conditions are satisfied W SRAM Storage Capacity Calculation 1 file 96 32 2 7 x number of data pieces x number of data blocks 59520 Total capacity of all files 1 Fixed value 2 Use 2 for 16 Bit devices and use 4 for 32 Bit device file calculation The following shows Storage Capacity when using 16 Bit Devi
421. play attributes Color attributes Coordinates data Max 8 Drawing type 0 Straight lines rectangles circles and dots are drawn via the data stored here l Straight line 2 Rectangles 3 Circle 5 Dot Display attributes 1 Each drawing type s display attributes can be specified via the data stored here The display attributes will vary depending on each drawing type such as line type fill pattern etc When drawing dots this data will be ignored e Straight line 15 8 7 O Bit Line type 00 Solid line 01 Dotted line 02 One dotted broken line 03 Two dotted broken line 04 Thick solid line 05 Thick dotted line 06 Thick one dash broken line 07 Thick two dash broken line 08 3 dot thick solid line 09 mmm 5 dot thick solid line Arrow 00 None 01 At line end 02 Both ends lt E g gt When drawing a 3 dot thick solid line without arrows 15 8 7 0 bit H 1 The GP 270 does not support this function 2 82 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 10 H tag e Rectangular 15 8 7 O bit a e Line type 0 Solid line 1 Dotted line 2 One dotted broken line 3 Two dotted broken line 8 3 dot thick solid line 9 m _ X_ 5 dot thick solid line Fill pattern 0 i 5 EES Mode 00 Line drawing 01
422. posed of letters and or symbols m Description Color Attribute Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag E Data Format D Tag Setting Word Address ee Defines the first word address of consecu tive word addresses that contains display E qem data for a statistic graph Data Format Data Format t Bin E Bin BCD Defines the format for the data in the word addresses WE Graph Type Bar Graph D Tag Setting Bar Graph Select this option to display bar graphs Pie Graph Select this option to display pie graphs Display Direction When using a bar graph select the graph s display orientation from Up Left Down and Right Division Color Settings Display Angle General Info Data Format Graph Type i Pie Graph Display Direction f Up i Left Down i9 Right Up Down T Left Right oLt Ch When setting up the bar graph inside its rectangle border make the graph s display area one dot smaller If you make the graph display area the same as the drawing the border will disappear It is not necessary to draw display borders when using pie graphs To set up a bar graph s display position designate two opposite points or draw a rectangle For a pie graph designate its center point and size of the internal and external circles The radius for the internal circle must be ei ther zero or more than 20 dots To create an internal circle of zero afte
423. previously registered recipe data can be Advanced iodin Logs and stores the PLC data to the backup SRAM periodically or Function Feature when the PLC triggers Also the logged data can be stored in a CF card Sound Output Sounds are output according to the host s bit changes Contains items whose functions change according to the GP 5 screen size and installa Design your own program and execute it on the GP to provide Special D Script additional display functions D script programs also help to reduce 4 Function the PLC s data display load tion orientation i e portrait or landscape Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 GP 270 GP 370 GP H70 and GP37W2 units do not support certain tag features Chapter 2 Features Common to GP PRO PBIII for Win dows All Versions 3 GP 270 does not support certain features of tag Chapter 2 Features Common to GP PRO PBIII for Win dows All Versions 4 Depending on the PLC used certain tag features may not be available e Modicon Modbus Master e Modicon Modbus Slave e Modicon Modbus Plus e Allen Bradley PLC 5 Data Highway e Allen Bradley SLC500 DH485 e Allen Bradley Remote I O e Siemens S7 200 PPI 5 Available only for the GP77R GP377 GP37W2 and GP2000 Series Chapter 2 Features Common to GP PRO PBIII for Win dows All Versions 6 Available only for the GP77R and GP2000 series Chapter 2 Features Common to GP PRO PBIII for Win dows All Versions GP PRO PB III for
424. provides informa tion about the current channel settings for the Trend Graph Display Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description Sampling Address Designates the Word Address to be sampled Trigger Bit Address When the bit address stored here turns ON the sampled data will be stored into the LS Area Top Write Address Specifies the LS Area s data storage start address LS0000 to LS0019 cannot be used since they are the system area The Start address Sampling data count 1 must not exceed LS2031 No of Sampl Addr Designates the number of sampled data items to be stored GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features Data Format Sampling wo E Sampling 4ddress Trigger Bit Address Top Write Address 3 2 Data Sampling Settings BackUp Data Backup The sampled data will be backed up in the GP s backup memory Synchronous Mode With this mode selected when the GP s No of Sampl Addr H power is turned ON data will be sampled following that data stored before the GP s power was turned OFF With this mode unselected when the GP s power 1s turned ON data sampling will start from the value 0 For normal operation select this mode E Syneh
425. prox 58 KB with Base screens that contain moving images La The initial letter of each file s name is called its File Header Note A total of 8 999 screens can be created for each of the above mentioned file SS types However the total number of files you can actually store in the GP will depend on the size of any screens created and the available memory capacity of the GP unit you are using GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 1 1 1 2 Active Image Functions Chapter 1 GP Display Data Types ia Active Image Functions The GP displays data from the host PLC in real time using pictures text and graphic images the user has created via the GP PRO PBIII drawing software The GP also has touch panel keys which together with these functions send the data you enter to the host PLC These functions are referred to as Active Image functions When using Active Image screens information such as which data in the host PLC to use data s format and location on the screen must all be defined in advance and stored in the GP These Active Image screens change the GP panel from a simple display monitor to an intelligent and valuable operation panel E Wide Range of Functions Active Image type display functions include 21 different kinds of pre made Parts and 30 different kinds of Tags as well as an Alarm Message Display Trend Graph Display D Script Data Sampl
426. ption Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag Display Size Text characters used in the display can be 16 32 64 or 128 dots high and 8 16 32 or 64 dots wide The basic unit of mea surement is a Single byte or Double byte character 1 e lt Single byte lt Double byte Character gt Character gt dots 16 dots 16 dots 16 dots Text Color Defines the color attributes Fg fore ground Bg background Blk blink to be used in the display Background Color Specifies a pattern s background color Bg and blink ON OFF status Blk The background pattern s color Pc is speci fied in the Pattern area Combinations of Background Colors and Pattern colors Pc are possible For the GP 270 only Pattern 0 white can actually be used 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag 2 28 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 3 C tag E Display Angle C Tag Setting Display Angle l TEA Es ee Set up the rotation for the display Select 0 zero 90 180 or 270 degrees Display Angle fe O degrees 9 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 29 2 30 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 4 D tag r D tag Statistical Graph Display D Tags display statistics in two different types of graphs bar
427. quired for writing data to the PLC Depending on the number of Addresses it may take from 20 seconds to several minutes Although it will depend on the number of Addresses to be cop ied data will be read from the original copy data then divided into pieces and copied to the copy destination Therefore even if a communication error occurs during data read data may be partially written Unless data write is completed for the designated number of Addresses screen displays such as tags will not be updated or refreshed Also screen changes Q tag alarm processing and other processing will not be performed If data to be written exceeds the designated device range a communication error occurs In this case you must turn the GP s power OFF and then ON again to reset the GP from the error When the 32 bit device data is copied to a 16 bit device using D script and the bit length is designated as 16 bits only the data for lower 16 bits will be copied E g memcpy w w30 0100 w BD00100 3 1 w20 0100 2 101 12 Also when 16 bit device data is copied to a 32 bit device the data for the lower 16 bits will be copied and 0 will be desig nated for the upper 16 bits GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 9 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features E g memcpy w BD00100 w w30 0100 31 w30 0100 1 BD0100 101 2 101 102 3 102 When 32 bit device data is copied
428. r Display Direction Clockwise The direction is fixed to clockwise 0 Graph Pattern Normal Meter When Meter is selected the needle uses the foreground color and the meter face uses the background color When drawing a rectangular frame for the bar graph be sure to L draw the frame so that it is one dot outside the graph display area Important If the graph and frame overlap the frame will disappear However it is unnecessary to draw a frame for the Pie or Half Pie graph EN When setting up the Bar graph s display position two opposite points need to Note be set up in the same manner as when draw a rectangle When setting up the Pie or Half pie set up the center point then the radius of the outer and inner circles The radius of the inner circle must be at least 20 dots To omit the inner circle after setting the external circle move the cursor to the center until the internal circle disappears and left click GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 67 2 8 G tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions WE Alarm Color Settings G Tag Setting Pattern Defines the fill pattern for the graph Graph Color Defines the foreground and background colors and the blink attribute for the graph 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Patter NZE Graph Colo Fg MIC ek Bo OOOO E Alarm Display Select this option to use the alarm function Alarm Type Direct Select this option to directly designate th
429. r Logging loop auto save responding correctly Control Address becomes this value during the auto save mode When the value is changed the auto save mode finishes 0100h Write error SS oh Multi Unit not installed CF Card not inserted CF Card access switch OFF 0300h 0400h _ O File Number Specify a file number prior to writing a command The file numbers can be set 1 fixed when not using Multiple Folders via Filing data from 1 to 8999 when using Multiple Folders via Filing data from 0 to 65535 when using data other than Filing data e When data is saved on the CF Card a folder will be automati ura cally created to save it if there is no specific folder like file or Important log However if no folder can be created because the CF Card has not been initialized etc a write error will occur e Ifa write error occurs any file that has not finished loading may remain on the CF Card Zr e Specify a file number before writing a command Note It may several seconds to write data depending on the amount Nl Tag and screen related operations may become slower during the writ ing of data 4 100 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 4 Using the CF Card Logging Loop Auto Save When using the loop feature the CF Card data write function will operate as follows Logging data can also be written to the CF Card automatically when the GP s F
430. r setting the external circle move the cursor to the center until the internal circle disappears and then left click GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions WE Graph Type Pie Graph D Tag Setting Division Color Settings Display Angle General Info Graph Type i Bar Graph Display Direction fo Clkwes From Top E Division Color Settings Bar Graphs D Tag Setting General Info Data Format Graph Type Division Color Settings Display Angle Mo of Data Divisions T Div 1 Pattern C Div 1 Color Fo Bema oe Eg Ee omee oo e Pie Graphs D Tag Setting Data Format Graph Type Division Color Settings Display Angle Mo of Data Divisions Div 1 Pattern LI Div 1 Color Fo Be oee oo E Eg Ee oee oo e 2 4 D tag The direction of pie graph data is fixed to Clkws From Top the graph data always starts from the top of the graph and ex tends clockwise When using a pie graph it is unnecessary to set the Direction at tribute a Clockwise No of Data Divisions Defines the number of parts you want the graph divided into You can designate from two to eight divisions The same number of word addresses from the desig nated Word Address will be automatically occupied for storing graph data Div 1 Pattern Div 1 Color Fg Bg and Blk Defines foreground Fg and background Bg colors blink BIk and
431. r Attributes area and set the color attributes below Display Color After selecting a data division number select foreground Fg and background Bg colors and blink Blk ON OFF here for the data division 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Display Style Set the display styles Shift Left Shift Right and Zero Suppress When selecting the Display option the display style is fixed at Shift Right Zero Suppress on and Display Digits 3 Shift Left Shift Right Select either Shift Right or Left Data will appear aligned to the side designated here Zero Suppress If this option is selected leading zeros are not displayed e g When the Display Digit is 4 and the 0 Suppress option is not selected 25 will appear as 0025 For details about Color Attributes Note settings x 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag 2 38 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 5 d tag E Display Angle d Tag Setting Display Angle General Info Display Format Size Style Display Angle _ Set up the rotation for the display Select 0 zero 90 180 or 270 degrees i 90 degrees 9 180 degrees fo 270 degrees GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 39 2 40 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 6 E tag yam E tag Extended N tag Function Displays data as a numeric display The
432. r tags sub screens corresponding to each message can also be displayed Alarm Summary Lists the alarm messages registered in the Alarm Editor according to 7 Display a tag the host s PLC s bit address data changes vie Displays the time based on the GP s internal clock a Statistical Graph Displays a Statistical graph which represents data in the hosts PLC s consecutive related word addresses as percentages of a Display D tag otal Statistical Data Displays numeric values according to the data in the hosts PLC s a Display d tag consecutive related word addresses Numeric Data Displays numeric data in real time as the data in the host s PLC s Display expand word address changes The color of the display can be set to show ed N tag function movement within preset data ranges Data can be displayed in E tag decimal hexadecimal BCD binary octal and floating point format Brings up a library objectin the position designated by the PLC word address data The object may then be moved to any position on the GP display Graph Display Uses bar pie or half pie graphs to display host PLC word G tag address data in real time Graph Display Uses bar pie or half pie graphs to display host PLC word expanded G tag function address data in real tme The color of the display can be set to show g tag movement within preset data ranges a Draws objects such as straight lines rectangles circles etc at the desir
433. racter gt 8 dots 16 dots 16 dots 16 dots 2 7 2 1 A tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Display Color Fg foreground and Bg background colors and Blk blink ON OFF are designated here Erase Color Defines the color attributes for the area where data is not being displayed If the GP screen 1s monochrome this should be set as black 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag W Sub Display A Tag Setting None General Info Display Format Size Color sub Display Display Angle Turns OFF the sub screen display te Hone ft Base Screen 2 Active Window Base Screen Runs the sub screen display Active Window Runs all the sub screens and window displays Sub Display Base Screen Base Screen General Info Display Format sub Display Display Angle Mode Settings 7 None i Base Screen Active Window ca Change Screen Change Screen Changes the display screen to another v EA screen Same as the normal screen change operation Library Display Displays a library screen Base screen as a sub screen at the location set by the L tag Text Display A sub screen of text data Text screen will display at the location set by the X tag Change Screen Screen Type Direct Designates the screen file number Base screen to be displayed next directly in the Screen No area Screen No Enter the screen file number Base screen to be displayed next This data must be in binary format Screen Ty
434. reen Ne When cancelled the Library screen is written over by a black rectangle Base screen Image Library screen Displa The Image Library screen is erased by a black rectangle painting overlaying over it In the example to the left the dotted rectangle represents the black filled area Erase When Erase Mode is set to Yes the called library will not display images that use 3 or 5 pixel lines 2 pixel arrow lines and relief characters a Important E Designated Screen Indirect Indirect a reg Select this option to display the library Direct Indirect D State preser Type Ther BtAdiress ese Mode whose screen file number matches the ae apa Ele a screen file number stored in the word ad a pes ae ee dress The screen type however must be mpoo OF IE eo cae either a Base screen or Image Library Gee vane fE ty eae CF Card screen ee cc 2 122 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 14 L tag L Tag Setting Trigger Type n lt 0 1 The library appears when the trigger bit changes from OFF to ON Only a single i State ire rigger e Trigger Bit Address Erase Mode 30 E kooo F FE No gt Yes one Word Address Data Format Screen Type library Can be displayed Eom T E Bin i Base Screen 1 0 e E 3 BCO 2 Image Screen Ofsetvalue 0 2 Image Screen
435. reen 2 Base screen 2 Tag Settings iets VI ID No ninn l VI v2 Channel No u eceee eee 0 Video Window Display ON Display Size o n Standard Transparency Mode None Touch Operation OFF y2 MDN coterie eee 2 Channel No cscsassscnconsacenes l Video Window Display ON Display Size n n Standard Transparency Mode None Touch Operation ON This function is only avaliable with the GP 570VM 870VM and GP 2500 2600 with the VM unit GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 249 2 27 V tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 1 Pressing Area A SCREEN MONITOR Lis Ares T1 changes the display to batie screen 2 T2 runs ID num Bea ber 1 display L30027 LS Ares Ls0020 oon he The video setup with ID L50027 No 2 displays Lis Areg L50020 TE isplays the ID No 1 wsoe 7 Lodge Cy Ge ie If you are using the application screens made for GP 530VM in the GP S 570VM please be aware that the GP 570VM s Video Control Area start ad dress will be different This function is only avaliable with the GP 570VM 870VM and GP 2500 2600 with the VM unit 2 250 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 28 W tag yas N tag Write to Device Writes data to a word address or either sets resets a bit in response to host PLC word address changes When Trigger Mod
436. reen Direct Direct Select this option to directly designate the Mark screen file number to fix it H Tag Setting een Size Color Trigger Bit Address l poo FI Trigger Bit Address Defines the address of the bit controlling the display of the Mark Mark Screen No Set up the Mark screen file number you wish to display E Designated Screen Indirect Indirect Te Size Color Select this option to use variable Mark screen file number The display Mark changes according to the data change of the designated Word Address Trigger Bit Address Defines the address of the bit controlling the display of the Mark Word Address Defines the word address from which to obtain the Mark screen file number Offset Value Defines an offset value to be added to the data in the Word Address The resulting value is the screen file number When the offset 1s not in use set up a value of 0 2 14 7 Offset Set tings L tag Ii Trigger Trigger Bit Address Word Address ee ooon Fe e poon Fe 2 Format Offset Value fet Bin 7 ma ty BCD GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 143 2 16 M tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Data Format Bin BCD Defines the format of the data in the Word Address E Size Color H Tag Setting Display Size eneral Into esignate creenll izeColor s eter The Mark can be magnified by a factor of oa Fe aa a en 1 2 4 or 8 in the vertical
437. reeze mode To end freeze mode press the End key EN e Be careful not to touch the Delete or Delete All key in the freeze mode or the Note message stored in the GP will be cleared even if the displayed message re YY mains e When the message stored in the GP has been cleared as mentioned above that message s sub display is not displayed in the freeze mode GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 187 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions yan Roll Up and Roll Down Keys Pressing the Roll up or Roll Down key allows you to scroll up or down the currently displayed alarm display page These keys are useful when many alarms are issued simultaneously You can scroll display pages to see all the alarm data The following is the display example when the Roll Up key is pressed with the conditions below Number of alarms issued 15 Number of display lines 3 Number of roll up key presses 3 Each cursor position is displayed below when the Roll Up key is pressed five times from the current cursor position Message 1 Message 2 lt Current Position aie Message 3 Message 4 Message 5 lt 1 oe L_Messages_ Messece7 Message 6 Message Message 8 lt 2 Hh Message 9 Message 10 Message 11 A oO Message 12 Message 13 Message 14 lt 4 Message 15 J lt 5 lt Cursor position L Number of alarms displayed at one time on the scree
438. res i Absolute Address Offset 0 i Data Logging Address DOOO00 Bit Length 1 16 16 Input Code ft No Code JA Code Ci 2 s Complement i Round Up Display Range Min Value Max Value Size Style Column Settings General Info Data Foma Sizer Style Alarm Settings t 7 Forma Mo of Display Digits E ire Color Settings Display Color B BOOM OM No ek Display Style fa Shift Right Jv Zero Suppress C Shift Lett Input Style i Auto Clear OFF E Auto Clear ON 4 3 Logging Function Code Check this check box when displaying negative values Only available when se lecting the Dec data format Round Up The decimal point numbers created dur ing relative value range conversion will be rounded up or off When this option is not selected those numbers will be rounded off Input Range Min Value Max Value Designates the range of values stored in the Logging Address The possible ranges vary depending on the Input Code Format Display Range Min Value Max Value Designates the range of values displayed in the N tag The possible ranges vary de pending on the Display Format and Code settings 2 17 4 Relative ata Display Settings N tag Display Format No of Display Digits Designates the number of digits for the dis play within the range of characters desig nated in the Display tab usually as 1 to 16 digits The length designa
439. ress Defines the word address containing the screen number Offset Value Defines an offset value to be added to the Word Address data screen number When not using the Offset enter a value of 0 2 14 7 Offset Settings L tag en ee ee E Mode Area Move Area Move Moves the library image to any point in the designated F tag area by defining the X and Y coordinates In this case two word General Info Designated Screen Mode Data Format ianenamncn ne i Move Betncen Polis F Tag Setting Data Storage Address Direction Dooa addresses are used to store the coordinate Y Direction pooo data Thus two consecutive addresses from the designated Word Address are used for data storage Address 0 is for the X coordinate data and 1 is for the Y coordinate data Data Storage Address X Direction Y Direction Two word addresses related to the Word Address designated on the Screen Access page will display here E Mode Move Between 2 Points Move Between 2 Points Moves the library between two designated points For this type only one word ad dress is required for storing movement F Tag Setting General Info Designated Screen Mode Data Format i Area Move Data Storage Address Position Change D00000 data 2 60 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Data Format F Tag Setting General In
440. resumes data logging will also be suspended When writing data to the CF Card automatically using the loop feature file data will be added to any existing data Adding File data requires that the file be opened Even if a file with the same name already exists data will be added to that file GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 4 Using the CF Card oe Checking the CF Card s Available Capacity The current amount of CF Card free space will be stored to the LS area s designated address using the range from 0 to 65535 FFFFh Checking this value stored in the LS area tells you how much CF Card free space is avail able All data stored in the CF Card will be in KB units In the following cases the amount of free space available cannot be checked correctly and will be displayed as OKB e The optional Multi Unit has not been installed e The CF Card has not been inserted e The CF Card access switch has been turned OFF AN e The CF Card free space data value stored in the LS area is an approximate lt Note Value Therefore there is the possibility that exactly that amount of data may a not be stored in that space e Even when the amount of free space exceeds 65535 FFFFh Kbytes the LS area value will be 65535 FFFFh E CF Card Free Space Storage Address Settings The Storage Address settings are designated via the GP Settings window s Extended Settings ta
441. ribed as follows E D Script 1 Initialization routine Initialization for communication Run only once before nans annasman n 2 Main routine Main routine for communication Reads the current value SS O ane nernosatena tian ven aes 3 10 second timer routine Routine for 10 second timer Decrements the value of the temporary work every second E D Script function 4 Transmitting Reads the current value of the thermostat Transmits a Receiving Function 1 command to the thermostat and receives the response COMM_READ1 5 Transmitting Reads the target value of the thermostat Transmits a Receiving Function 2 command to the thermostat and receives the response COMM_READ2 Transmitting es 1 Transmits the command to read the current value of the arms Func R emo Seneca o N Function Receives the response to the command to read the eoon current value The received data is stored in the LS area Transmitting a 2 Transmits the command to read the target value of the TRANS_FUNC_R2 thermostat Sets up the command values in values in the LS area and transmits them Receiving i 2 Receives the response to the command to read the target lm value The received data is stored in the LS area 10 Value Converts ASCII code into a binary value The received data Function ASC2BIN is stored in the LS area as ASCII code This function converts the code into a binary value GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Referen
442. rm range setin K tags Display n tag Numeric Display Displays host PLC word address data as an absolute value using a pre in Pre defined defined format Format P tag Lists alarm messages registered in the Alarm Editor in historical order and in response to host PLC bit changes The messages in the summary display can be listed as either active history or log When used 1 in combination with other tags messages can be checked deleted sub displayed and so on Rail Settings Defines the rail track along with a preset Mark set via a J tag moves R tag Used together with the J tag String Displa 4 bh a Displays character string data stored in the host s PLC s word address Touch Panel T tags interpret touch area on the Graphic Panel for the host PLC Input When the user presses one of these defined touch area the action 4 T tag defined by the associated T tag is performed selector Switch Provides a touch panel object which looks and operates like a selector Input switch Each time the object switch is pressed one switch address 4 t tag turns OFF and another address bit turns ON sends inching output from the touch panel GP directly to a digital input Inching Function DIN relay on the host PLC via the GP s AUX I O interface hereafter Tih and T iw tags referred to as AUX I F This allows instantaneous fine adjustment to be performed using just the touch panel keys Window Display
443. rmat Tag Name B 0000 Description Display Mode Active Up No of Display Char 40 Mo of Display Lines 12 Line Spacing 0 Line Start Character Size Cousor Size Display Format of the tag E Display Mode Display Mode Select the display format Active History Size Color Sub Display Display Angle or Log When a block is selected via the Display Mode Display Format Alarm Editor select Blocks 1 2 and 3 Alarm messages block registration is sup ported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units Scroll Direction 4 Scroll Direction ie Up t Down Display Farrak Up Mo of Display Char a0 Down Line Start 1 a Select the scroll direction Up or Down E g Alarm Order AAA gt BBB CCC e When Scrall IIn No of Display Lines 12 Ea Line Spacing il l Kl Lea Scroll direction lippp Start position gt CCC e When Scroll Down Start position gt CCC Scroll direction BBB AAA Tag Setting Displayed when a block is selected via Alarm Size Color Sub Display Display Angle Creation and Editing Display Mode Display Format Display Mode oie No of Display Char Block Designates the maximum half character ca display length available for each Alarm Down a message a Display Start Line Designates the display start line
444. rned ON This setting designates that Word Address Control Word Address 0 Trigger 10 Reservation All OFF f Block No Trigger ON Print OFF Not Print F This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function Print Completed Bit Address Sn Designates the Bit Address to be turned 4 Block Uni t Realtime opy from Displa 1 1 l ee Ee ON at the end of printing when data 1s No otData Rows B 1e Daat E printed out for each block After confirm e oe os ing that this Bit Address is turned ON Control Word Address poco IEE LeftMargin Fay perform the next printing Print Completed Bit Address Jeonan FF re Left Margin Data Logging Setting Designates the left margin size to be used when printing out the data The space for the number of the characters designated here is saved as a blank This setting con trols only the data print area For dialog printing settings refer to tageyrereywK 4 3 7 Print Settings Note e When using loop operation and performing real time printing the Total sec tion will not be printed e When using loop operation and performing real time printing if the logging frequency is not very high or a printer has not yet been connected printing cannot be performed at the speed the logging data is created thereby causing a difference between
445. rns OFF the Bit Address PLC to GP GP to PLC Loop Selecting this feature means when data log ging is completed it will begin again from the top most data address and overwrite the existing data This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 46 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function lt Trigger settings with Loop operation gt Trigger settings will differ depending on the type of Loop operation designated Bit Method Item Trigger Settings Without Loop Operation With Loop Operation Data Logging Start Address Designated by user Designated by user No of Words 1 to 32 Words 1 to 32 Words Read Count 1 to 2048 1 to 2048 1 The maximum number of logging Words in all blocks is 2048 Number of blocks x frequency lt 2048 Time Method C Duron ___ __Howrhin 860 Fourinses Read Count 1 to 2048 7 1 to 2048 7 7 The end time is automatically calculated using the time period and frequency 2 The maximum number of logging Words in all blocks is 2048 Number of blocksx frequency lt 2048 When using loop operation the number of blocks needs to be designated to decide the Logging area size This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 47 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features The PLC monitors bits at
446. ro 2 88 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W General Info J Tag Setting Size Color Data Format Alarm Settings General Info Designated Screen a DOoooo Absolute Bin 16 Bit Direct MT Tag Hame Description Word Address Data Format Designated Screen sl Screen Mo Rail Mo i Color E Designated Screen Direct J Tag Setting Size Color Data Format Alarm Settings General Info Designated Screen 3 Indirect Word Address Rail Mo mpoo e E Mark Screen Mo fe 2 11 J tag muvee Using J tags The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for the J tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag Direct Designate the Mark Screen No to be dis played The number designated in the Mark Screen No area becomes this setting at tribute Word Address Designate the word address containing the movement position number Mark Screen No Designate the screen file number of the Mark to be displayed Rail No The Mark display positions are designated on the rail designated here Must match the rail number set for an R tag E Designated Screen Indirect J Tag Setting Size Color Data
447. rom this address specified here the LS Area for the maximum group numbers will be used for the area to write the number of triggered alarm summaries When an alarm is triggered the LS Area data equivalent to the group num ber will be incremented 9 Be sure to keep the LS Area equivalent to the group number S The number of triggered alarm summaries will not be backed up To back it up use it together with the LS Area back up function Up to 65535 of trigger alarm summaries can be counted 0 to 65535 When the number of the triggered alarm summaries exceeds 65535 triggered alarm summaries after this number will not be counted anymore The number of triggered alarm summaries increments the LS Area data Therefore if the data is overwritten or cleared due to the GP or PLC s being shut down the count will not be made correctly This data is fixed to the Bin format Alarm Triggered Group Number C wessaget 0 reer 0 Group No 1 s trigger no 1 Group No 2 s trigger no 2 Group No 3 s trigger no C mesae 0 Group No 0 will not be counted The group number can be set up using the alarm editor The maximum group number is the maximum number of registered messages For the GP2000 series 2012 is the maximum group number The maximum value is 2012 this is the maximum value of the continuous LS area available to the user There fore when the maximum number of messages has been set
448. s Block Display Mode feature cannot be used with some PLCs For a Note NSS complete list of these PLC s refer to 1 3 Tag List s note section 4 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 269 2 30 Trend Graph Display Chapter 2 Active Image Functions i Using Trend Graphs E General Info Screen Settings To check the current settings display the trend General info Graph Settings Aris Setting Sampling graph screen and select the Tag selection s Graph Type a Normal c6 99 Erase Color L Setup Screen Graph Backup Off Synchronous Transmission Height 100 Pitch 10 Scale 10 Scroll 9 W Graph Settings Graph Type Screen Settings Normal Pen Recorder Block Display C Pen Recorder Select a graph type from the three types of 2 Block Display graphs 7 at Display Direction Graph Backup Select the direction of the graph Dy Synchronous Mode Backup Graph Backup Trend graph data displayed for each trend graph screen is backed up in the GP The graph types that can be backed up are Nor mal and Pen Recorder When backing up only trend graphs in 32K bytes of backup SRAM approximately 12 trend graphs of 639 pieces of display data each can be saved e The number of pieces of data that can be backed up will vary depending on ay i the number of Q tags and the LS Area s back up capacity ore I gt Although the trend graph backup
449. s 0025 Zero Display When this option is clicked and the host PLC data is 0 the value 0 will not dis play Alarm Settings H Tag Setting Alarm Display General info Data Fomat Size Siyle Alarm Settings Arithmetic Operation Select this option to use the Alarm dis play setting Alarm Type Alarm A ange Alarm Type Direct in Value 2 Indirect oho Direct Mas Value 5525 m e Select this option to directly designate Alarm Color 1 1 ro N TTT TT ok the upper and lower limits of alarm val Ba B O E ko ues Indirect Select this option to indirectly designate the upper and lower limits of alarm val ues The data in the address immediately following the designated Word Address will be the upper limit and the data in the next address will be the lower limit 2 152 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 17 N tag Alarm Range Min Value Max Value When the Direct option is selected for Alarm Type designate the minimum and maximum values here The possible values depend on the Data Format set tings Alarm Color Defines the alarm colors The display data exceeding the maximum or mini mum value appears in the colors desig nated here lt Alarm Range gt Data Format Range m ea 32768 32767 C D 65535 FFFF h 177777 0 N e FFFFFFF o a _ 2147483647 W Arithmetic Operation N Tag Setting Arithmetic Operat
450. s Dadooo F write to LS Address L50020 Write Complete Bit Address 00000 F Write Sethings T otal Control Word Address Dadooo F write to LS Address LSo020 Write Comolete Bit Address esO0000 ia Chapter 4 Advanced Features Write to LS Address Designates the LS Area Address where data is written to Write Complete Bit Address Designates the Bit Address that will be turned ON when data write to the LS Area is completed After turning the Bit Ad dress ON is detected use the PLC to turn it OFF When there is no designated Block No the Perform Data Write Bit Address is not turned ON Write Settings Total Writes each column s total value for each block to the LS area The Total value is written to the LS area via the Control Word Address according to the Logging Set tings Display Settings Perform Data Write On Off Designates whether or not the Total value is written to the LS area Control Word Address When writing the Total value to the LS area transfers the Total value data to the LS area by designating a Block No and turning the Trigger Bit OFF and then ON Control Word Address ne 0 Reservation All OFF g Trigger 1 Block No Trigger ON Transmit OFF Not transmitted Write to LS Address Designates the LS Area Address used when writing data Write Complete Bit Address Designates a Bit Address to be turned ON when data write into the LS Area is com pleted After the Bit Address ON
451. s are controlled for each block if the number of alarms exceeds the fixed value the oldest alarms are deleted Q Tag Display Format Set up the Alarm Summary display format of the Q tag Set up the distance in half character units 8 dots from the left margin for each Q tag alarm summary display area If the setup value is zero there is no display Be careful not to overlay some items such as the Date and Trigger Also be sure that the length of the message position is within the length of the longest message designated If the items overlap they could be displayed incorrectly D O Tag Format o Date 2 Ack 29 j a Trigger i Recovered 35 Messages li Ss O Sample Date Trigger Messages 4ck Recover mmddyy 24 OU Message 24 00 24 00 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 189 2 20 Q tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Alarm Summary Display area Date Q Tag Print Settings Used for entering the Q Tag Alarm Summary print settings To enter these settings click on the Print Settings tab and select either Real Time or Grouping Be aware that grouping can only be selected for GP77R and GP2000 series units The Trigger Color Ack Acknowledge Color and Recovered Color settings are available with either selection When Real Time is Selected The Print format is the same as Log area display format Messages are printed whenever a Trigger Acknowledge or Error Recovery oc
452. s data Absolute id Relative D a Address Offset KOEN etai R The Logging Address is changed by the offset value entered here For example ajia when the number of logging words is 4 the offset value becomes 0 to 3 Display Data Format Select the desired data format from Dec Hex and BCD Code Check this check box when displaying negative values Only available when se lecting the Dec data format Data Format Relative Relative Column Settings Data stored in the Address entered in the Babsie fiai Logging Address area 1s converted accord Address Offset E Data Logging Adress D00000 ing to the Input Range area s values and Bit Length 1 16 16 E the converted data values are displayed Address Offset The Logging Address is changed by the offset value entered here For example when the number of logging words is 4 the offset value becomes 0 to 3 Bit Length 1 16 Cancel j Hee Enter the Enabled Bit length of data to be stored in the Logging Address Input Code No Code Displays positive values only 2 s Complement Uses 2 s complement to express negative values Input Code Mo Code I Code z No Cod J Code Ch 2 s Complement JA Round Up Display Range MinValue Max Yale 65535 This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 60 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Featu
453. s function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 55 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features Ge i If a data block s size exceeds the LS Area size that data block cannot be trans ote mitted Logging Data for each block LS Area LS20 Not transmitted LS2031 Insufficient Space The following is an example of the display settings used when writing each logging data column s total value data to the LS area block units lt Total Value Data and Average Value Data Display gt Display Settings errs em tany ease ce ___ tte bate Time vatue value value fore fF m Cea e o ee i a p E penal EE lt Total Value Data Write to LS area gt When using the above display settings the Total value data will be written to the LS area as follows The Total values Total Average Max and Min are all written as 32 bit data Also the Total values will be written from the left column All values except Data and Item will be automatically shifted to the left in a column Write to LS area 0 1st column s 1 total value 1st column s values 2 1st column s 3 average value 4 2nd column s 5 total value 2nd column s values 6 2nd column s 7 average value 8 3rd column s 9 total value 10 3rd column s 11 average value 3rd column s values If the size of the Total value data exce
454. s the data storage word address Devies Type amp Aakhessy SEn Deco Trigger Bit Address nput Code Forma Display Format k aa ace Po Defines the address of the bit that enables 19 2 s Complement i Hex e a P touch key input Bit Length 1 16 Set up the valid bit length of the data stored in the Word Address Round Up The decimal point numbers created dur ing relative value range conversion will be rounded up or off When this option is not selected those numbers will be rounded off Indirect If this option 1s selected the data storage word addresses are indirectly designated Address The indirectly designated address 1s within the same device as the Word Address des ignated previously Device Type amp Address Both a device type and an address are 1n directly designated using device and ad dress codes Write the device code in the word address designated in the Word Ad dress and the address code in the next word address PLC Connection Manual Base Address Defines the base address The K tag dis plays the data in the address designated by adding the base address number to the data in the Word Address Bin BCD The K tag uses the data format designated here to display the data in the related word address When the Device Type amp Address option is selected the data format is fixed to Bin Input Range lt Display Range E Value 0 Value 0 iacta ou
455. s3 _ Monitor Word Address SA 0c i al zz Ho of Monitor words i a Display Format fa Direct CA Indirect Border Type i Mo Border a Text Screen No I ok cancel Hep 2 6 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions A Tag Setting General Info Display Format Size Color Il Sub Display Ii Display Angle o Monitor ddr 5 s Monitor Word Address f jooon mE Ho of Monitor words i a Display Format fe Direct Border Type i Mo Border a CA Indirect Text Screen No 1 al Blank Line Display Display Start Line 1 Mo of Display Lines 12 No of Display Char 40 ok cancel Hep Note Ne Start Line as shown below Screen 1 Start Line normally 1 2 1 A tag rows can be shown in either case This fea ture is available only with Digital s GP77R Series GP377 Series and GP2000 Series units Display Format Indirect Used when the text screen number is desig nated indirectly This setting is valid only for GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units Text Screen No Word Address Designates a Word Address to store the Text screen to be displayed The Text screen num bers are designated as binary numbers Also when changing a screen to another be sure that the number of text lines contained in each screen 1s always the same Blank Line D
456. sC tt the touch panel key to be a special func Su OG tke tion switch used exclusively with the GP Return to Previous Screen Pressing this touch panel key causes the A previous screen image to return It is possible to return to as many as 32 pre vious screens Reset GP When the touch panel key is pressed mees the GP unit restarts itself to return to p I the same condition as when powering Dette Bn up At that time the data in the LS area will be erased Interlock The Interlock Address can be entered only when the Interlock is used to con trol the Touch screen s operation The Touch available condition designates which Interlock Bit Address setting i e ON or OFF effects the Touch func tion The Touch available condition s Bit Off setting is supported by only GP77R Series GP377 Series and GP2000 Series units fi Bik Fh Ge Here Previous screen means the screen displayed prior to the current N screen not the screen whose screen number is prior to the current screen T Tag Setting General Info Mode Options CH Bit EA word E Special A Tag Selection Key When using the A tag Sub Screen function use these keys in the A tag display area There are three types Up Down and OK E Down A Tag Salesian ke Jok Action ft D T ag Selection Key U 5 pecial lt lt Action G Return to Previous Screen ff Up p Moves the highlighted cursor up a row in the A tag display area Dow
457. screen 1s designated by the window num oe ee ber entered in the Registration No field After completing the U tag settings set the window display position 1s also set directly on the screen Window Registration No This setup is only available when Window Access 1s set to Direct Set up the screen number that will be used for the pop up window Indirect The window display screen and display position are variable Alterations are made by storing data to the set word addresses The Indirect option is effective only when the High Speed option is selected Data Format Bin BCD Defines the format for the display position and window registration data in the word addresses Only available when Window Access is set to Indirect C o J cae Her GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 26 U tag yA U tag Examples Base screen Condition of each tank Setup a tag to display a Local Window on the Base sereen Tank B RIJN Window Access Indirect Tank STOP word Address DOW0 Tank A RUN Window no 1 Window no 2 Temperature Ratio of Materials Tank A Tank B Tank DSO TAL When the U tag display window is set up as Indirect the four consecutive word addresses beginning from the set word address will automatically be used for controlling the window display A window displays when bit 00 is set to 1 one Setting it to 0
458. set O i R word Address2 Utag Word Address El Direct Selection khs im Guear O isplby Window Registration No 1 a Defines the Word Address used to desig nate an L tag s Base screen No address The Sub Display screen No used in the Alarm Creation and Editing area is treated as the Library screen No Screen Type Base Screen OK cancel He 2 180 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 20 O tag Erase Screen No When a message in the Alarm Creation and Editing area is selected whose Sub Screen No setting is 0 the base screen called by this feature will delete the previous dis play screen Create a Base screen for eras ing by making a black filled rectangle Window Registration No Enter a Window Registration No here for the window you wish to display on the screen Sr When a message in the Alarm Creation and Editing area is selected whose Note Sub Screen No setting is 0 the Window Registration No is set to 0 and NI the Erase Screen No is written to the L tag s Word Address which prevents the Sub Screen from displaying Q Tag Setting Text Display General Into Display Mode Display Format Sub Display aac Word Address1 X tag Screen Address C None j Base Screen 8 Active Window Defines the Word Address used to desig Mode Settings 7 Change Screen i Library Display Ward Address Mt
459. set up the values whereby Bit Offset Bit Length lt 16 The Bit Offset and Bit Length values determine the display data E g When the Bit Offset 1s 3 and the Bit Length is 4 q2 1110 03 0 OF 0E 0E 04 03 02 01 OO BitLength Bit Offset The shaded bits are used as the monitor data area Set up the Bit Offset and Bit Length when portions of the Word Address are controlled elsewhere It is necessary to set the monitor bits consecutively as 00 XX and YY 15 E g When consecutive four bits from the highest and lowest bits are con trolled elsewhere 16141312 1110 Oe Oe OF 06 06 04 03 Oe 01 OO Bit a TT Jffset The shaded bits are areas controlled elsewhere In the example above the Bit Offset is 4 and the Bit Length is 8 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 139 2 140 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 16 M tag yi M tag Mark Display M tags used to display Marks bit mapped icon images created in a Mark screen appear on the GP screen when the corresponding data in the PLC changes i a a a a r Y About M tags WE The display of a Mark is controlled by the ON OFF value of a bit in the host PLC WE Displays the Mark of the designated screen number set up either directly or indirectly E When Mark Access is set to Direct the mark screen file number is fixed E When Mark Access is set to
460. spaoron nines toon ecun sone E E E EE E 4 143 4 9 2 NGAISVGA Display FUnGtiOnN ss2iccutsnccocssonsavantenseadasonseonedviacede nasccautensaievsxececeteneces 4 150 4 9 3 Notes on migrating from the GP 530VM GP 570VM to another GP 00 4 153 INDEX GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 15 MANUAL SYMBOLS AND TERMINOLOGY MANUAL SYMBOLS AND TERMINOLOGY This manual uses the following symbols and terminology If you have any questions about the contents of this manual please contact your local GP distributor Also If you have any question about your personal computer or Windows please contact your PC distributor or manufacturer E Safety Symbols and Terms This manual uses the following symbols and terms to identify important information related to the correct and safe operation of this product Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could result in serious injury A or death Warning Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could result in minor injury or AN equipment damage Caution result in abnormal equipment operation or data loss orani Indicates instructions or procedures that must be performed to ensure reful correct product use E Indicates instructions or procedures that must not be performed E General Information Symbols and Terms This manual uses the following symbols and terms for general information Symbol Za Provides hints on correct product use or
461. splay touch key and other operations are possible Designated Wc Video Address Control i a a a ee Remote Ope Al 2 27 2 About V tags WE According to the video ID number entered the ID number and correspond ing various control information can be combined together and called up Host Video Control Area V tag Setup Items 1 Video Control Information Control Display settings Information Write Display settings It is unnecessary for the host PLC to receive a large amount of video control data at the start since the video display begins with just the setup ID number Each ID number s control information setting items can be col lected in the GP thereby reducing the load on the host PLC 21 This function is only avaliable with the GP 570VM 870VM and GP 2500 2600 with the VM unit GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 245 2 27 V tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W Select the video window Display Size Standard or Zoom E A transparent video window display is also possible WE Touch panel input on the video window can be either ON or OFF E Other than writing the ID number from the host PLC the video window can be controlled dynamically from the host PLC directly by changing the data in the Video Control Area data WE tags can be used only on Base screens Up to 32 can be used on each screen however only 1 video window
462. splay GP 15 8 7 0 bit 2 Background color Foreground color Ge i For more detail about color codes otre V 2 14 10 Overlapping Colors on a Color GP L tag 1 The GP 270 does not support this function 2 84 GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 10 H tag Coordinates data 3 The display coordinates for each drawing type can be specified via the data stored here e Straight line End X Y Start X Y e Rectangles 3 X starting coordinate 4 Y starting coordinate Start X Y 5 X end coordinate 6 Y end coordinate End X Y e Circle 3 X center coordinate 4 Y center coordinate Radu Radius 0 cannot be used e Dot 3 X center coordinate x 4 Y center coordinate The GP 270 does not support this function GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 85 2 10 H tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions g While drawing an object the GP is monitoring the trigger bit address activation When drawing objects continuously take the time of the tag scanning time or communication cycle time or more for the bit OFF time DO NOT specify incorrect object drawing data EN e If screens are switched during the time from the trigger bit address is turned Note ON to completion of object drawing or deleting the trigger bit address will Na not be turned OFF a Important The origin point of the coordi
463. splay setting information 4 3 6 Display Settings Display Settings cae The display row settings used during loop operation are as follows See next page This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 50 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function Data Display Row Only Block Name Row Data Display Row Data Display 1 row Block Name Data Display 1 row Data Display Row T otal Row Block Name Row Data Display Row T otal Row Data display 1 row Block Name Total Row s 1 to 4 rows Data Display Row 1 row Total Row s 1 to 4 rows When using the loop feature the Data Logging Display is as follows gS E g When frequency is set to 4 Logging Data Backup SRAM data mto oto p eroro wato oTo Fao oro mtooo P t eo toro Za e Here the oldest acquired earliest logging data is displayed in the top most lt Note cell When a single cycle of data logging is completed from beginning to end Xx data display rows will then shift upwards one row every time data is logged e When using the loop feature the Total Total Average Max Min rows will disappear However these Total values will be the totals of backup SRAM data at that one pointing in time Therefore the new data that overwrites the old data will not be included in the Total values This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and
464. ss ae Sejal Code Feader Press the Extend SIO protocol settings button to specify the communication settings in the following dialog box Select a transfer speed of 2400 4800 9600 19200 34800 57600 or 115200 bps The default value of each setting depends on the extend protocol selected Extend SIO communication settings Transmission Speed 3600 Data Length Parity Bit i 7 Bits i None fei 3 Bits Odd fi Even GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 113 4 114 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 6 256 color Mode asm 256 color Mode The GP2000 series features a 256 color mode as well as the previous 64 color mode Drawing data and image data can both be displayed with 256 colors awe 256 color Mode Correspondence e 256 colors are available for drawing data image data and tags e When the 64 256 color modes are switched all screens including the windows are displayed in the selected mode The modes cannot be switched for individual windows e Hard copies are available in 8 colors reduced from 256 colors When printing out alarm messages Q tags and logging data the printout function can be used Ge re e Blink settings are not available in 256 color mode Nel Switching between 64 color mode and 256 color mode can be done only with the drawing editor but not with the GP off line The transparent co
465. ssssssssee 3 1 CAN OI o EA E E AA A A E E A E I E 3 1 sL ADOM 16s De E T E a E E ee eee eee 3 1 so DeD e ena E E AT AE 3 2 3 1 4 D Script Global D Script Limitations nnennennenenneeessserersrersrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrren 3 23 Sake IN USS on Operation Results ssesisorcssrirrrersrorncreri tirenn t ianen ran ana e ERNEA DAE Er 3 25 DeleO Logical Operation Examples sssssrisrsirssresrsisrreninnsnrn isinin Nns NN Eni Tan ENE ENA AEREN EN 3 26 12 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Dele Di Cet atl Ore Examples seruran r E EEES 3 27 Shes SONG MO Mal BANC NES serea E E 3 28 De PADUA On Example 1 serrererisirErnr anane ESEN E N ninaa 3 29 ome Peed Applicalon Example 2 sesriisrinins eier er n N aR ANEN 3 32 3 4111 D sctipt Extended SIO Wi COG siniossiresiinnriirinspineiiirinir ne ian ni nena iee ia 3 33 32 Data Samplhnp DOU GG a csvsss case sern s aonr ru EROK EE a 3 45 AR o E AT T A E A LA AAE 3 45 32 2 About Data Samplino Setin iS secsrsercreeri tt aes stead rea seaa tia ENEA EEEE 3 45 32o Usine Channel nenas soseer aa E E eee 3 46 3 2 4 Data Sampling s CSV File Storage Example ses ssrsssssessrissssssssssvesissseiverereraninsi srei 3 50 CHAPTER 4 Advanced Features AL SUNN OG esera EEE EEEE EE 4 1 EA A TON a E E E E E E E E E TRS 4 1 ANZ Aboul Sound OUMU c cesseoseseceecsssageseclssaeasndatadoasad a E NAE ETE iE 4 1 Al Sound Output GUIS 24 scncstinsccestzaieanadeceaantandenesnact
466. stes the copied row or column data to the desired position Cut Deletes the currently selected row s or column s are deleted This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 68 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function 1 Column Settings Print E Attribute Settings To set up column attributes select either a Ruled Line the Date Time or a String Char Col and click on the Settings button Print Settings General Info The General Info page provides informa tion about the current Column Settings in use Column Settings Data Format Size Style Column Mo 1 General Info Colunn Type fe Value CA Date Time 2 Char Col 9 Border Data Type Absolute DOO000 Display Format 2 Column Type Select the desired display item from Value Date Time Char Col or Border General Info Column Type Value Value Generalinfo DataFomat Size Sle When this option 1s selected numeric data is printed out Colunn Type fe Value Date Time 2 Char Col 9 Border Column Mo Data Type Absolute DOQQ Display Format Data Format Absolute DaaFomat Seese ooo Data stored in the Address displayed in the 1 Relative ama E n Logging Address area is directly printed out This data is handled as an absolute Display Data Format 168 value a Bee Address Offset
467. switches Use these in combination with K tags which writes the data input through k tags to the designated word addresses i a a a a The setup data is displayed and written to the host PLC using the K tag rew About k tags WE The operation keys listed below can be created using k tags e Character Input key e DEL delete key e CLR clear key e BS back space key e ENT enter key e Cursor movement left right previous tag next tag key e Keyboard Change Screen key e Logging Cancel key WE Use k tags small letter k combination with K tags capital letter K The K tag displays the data input through the k tags and writes it to the host PLC The data can be written only when K tag data input is in the standby status 2 12 4 Data Input Example K tag E When all the keys for the keypad do not fit on a single screen use a key board Change Screen function so that the rest of the keys become available GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 113 2 13 k tag Keyboard Setup Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W Create k tags on a Keypad screen then load and use the Keypad screen on a Base screen Although you can create k tags directly on a Base screen an obvious disadvantage will be that the keypad Change Screen function is unavailable on the Base screen GX re Only 1 Keypad screen can be called into a Base screen D E In the GP 470 570 pressing a touch ke
468. system to express nega tive values Code Select the Code option when han dling negative values Data Display Format Dec Hex Octal The relative data display can use only 16 bit data Select the data format from Decimal Hex and Octal Input Range Min Value Max Value Defines the range of values stored in the Word Address The possible ranges depend on the Code Input setting Display Range Min Value Max Value Defines the range of values displayed in the N tag The possible ranges de pend on the Display Format and Code settings 2 17 4 Relative Data Display Settings N tag 2 150 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 17 N tag lt Minimum and Maximum Range Values gt Data Format Input Range Display Range J Code Input No Code 65935 Ha 32767 65535 2 s complement 32768 32767 C Rer S276 B wo 005585 0 N ee m e r FFFF h Me e wer re 2 complement 82768 _a2767 0 TO m szr6r sare7 0 TO W Size Style H Tag Setting Display Size General nfo Data Fomat 5ize 5tyle Alam 5ettings Arithmetic Operation _ Text characters used in the display can be 16 32 64 or 128 dots high and 8 16 32 Size Data Display Format mF Fl e a a or 64 dots wide The basic unit of mea Decimal Paces JE jo surement is a single or double byte char Display Color Fo i IC e RENTS Es geome Ko lt Single By
469. t 9600bps 8 1 Nme GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 47 Serial One Dimensional Bar Code Reader Compatibility For Keyence bar code reader Model BL 80R e Wiring diagram AC 100V adapter lt y sub 9 pin connector Ban N Touch scanner The bar code reader is directly connected to the GP Direction of signal signal oe RD Input 2 3 RD RXD E 6 5 DR Input 6 gers RS Output 7 p 7 CS CTS PCS Input 8 e RSRS O RIVCC Input NC Output Communication settings The communication settings of the extended serial I F of the GP is specified as the initial data of the bar code reader The initial data of Imex s bar code readers BL 80R is as follows Data length Stop bit Parity bit 9600bps GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 129 4 130 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 8 Backup SRAM Capacity ae Backup SRAM Capacity 4 8 1 Overview This new version of the GP2000 series features a larger backup SRAM of 256KB ewe Backup SRAM Amounts for each type of GP GP70 series Only the unit installed backup SRAM GP 77R series GP3 77 series 96KB GP37W2 Series woe Backup SRAM Applications Applications of the Backup SRAM depend on the settings used The following features can use the following a
470. t the zero in the unit position The cursor appears in the lowest integer position lt UP gt lt DN gt lt LF gt 7 Input a 4 Ais daeth P is inserted at the Current cursor positon af this postion dA M e N and 2 is shifted to the left 2 116 GP PRO PB II for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 13 k tag Keyboard Setup Inputas 7 Current cursor position P m 5 5 is inserted at the atthis postion cursor position and 2 and 3 are shifted to the left E Options Options General nio Mode Options Reverse Video Determines whether the touch area high Sasi e Ea lights while pressed iiss AUX Output Set the Buzz Sound ON or OFF When set ON a buzz sound activates while the key is pressed However there 1s no ON OFF option for the buzz sound when the Char acter Code is set to lt ENT gt as the Buzz Sound is fixed ON in this case AUX Output The buzzer output can be sent from the AUX output during a key press The GP 270 GP 370 GP 377 GP377R and GP H70 do not support this function k Tag Setting EN When using a touch panel key drawn with a fill and Reverse is set ON regard Note less of the color attributes setup the filled area will blink on the GP screen When the key uses fills set Reverse OFF except when necessary GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 117 2 118 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows V
471. t value However the negative code can only be used when Alarm is disabled and Fraction is set to zero E g 1234 counts as 5 digits AN e The negative code is not included in the Display Digit value when Note using the Dec data format e Hex and Oct formats do not use negative data GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 109 2 12 K tag Key Input Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Sr e After entering negative data press the plus key to change it into positive data Note NI E g To change 1234 into 1234 1234 has been entered Press the key 1234 is now displayed E g When the data format is 16 bit BCD and the number of displayed digits is 4 digits enter 1 to store FOO1h in the data storage address using the key board on the touch panel Display of data storage address during input 1 mi gt F001 Display of data storage address after input 001 Even if zero suppression is enabled a 0 after the minus sign is dis played 2 110 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 12 K tag Key Input r PA Auto Clear Example When Auto Clear On has been selected in the Input Style and the cursor 1s on the first character pressing any character key performs the operation below When the cursor is on the first character And you press a character key The previous data c
472. t read 2 274 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Channel Settings Channel Hame Description Edit W General Info Channel Settings Data Format Line Type Color Alarm Settings Channel Hame O on COooo0 Abs Dec 16 bit Color E Line Type General Info Descriptions Word Address Data Format E Data Format Absolute Channel Settings General Info Data Format Line Type Color Alarm Settings 2 Absolute 2 Relative Word Address i pooo FE I Display Mode E Gitset t Bin Data Format E BCD oe cae nem _ 2 30 Trend Graph Display yale Channel Settings To check the current settings display the trend graph screen and select the Tag selection s Setup Channel Add Use this button to set a new channel Delete Use this button to delete a channel which has been set Select the channel name then press the Delete key Edit Use this button to edit a channel which has been set Select the channel name then press the Edit key The General Info page provides informa tion about the current channel settings for the Trend Graph Display Channel Name Up to five Single byte or two Double byte characters can be entered Can be letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered
473. t settings for the U tag Tag Name U Tag Name Description LCS Must be no more than five Single byte or Word Address poooon two Double byte characters long and com a ee aA posed of letters and or symbols Dorae Description Touched S Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag E Designated Window _ High Speed E When this check box 1s checked display Designated Window speed used when a window is called up is increased However since even when the window is not displayed tag data speci fied on the window is read excluding touch input tag data the other tag display speeds will be decreased The High Speed option and a deselected U tag can not be specified on the same screen Word Address This setting only refers to the Local Window Display The word address designated here is the start address of the area used for win dow display operations If the Window Ac cess 1s set to Direct only this word address 1 word is used 1f Window Access is set to Indirect four consecutive word addresses are used beginning from this word address When the High Speed check box 1s checked set a Bit Address Touched Screen To Front When this check box is checked and when multiple windows are displayed on the screen the current window display will moved behind all other screen windows simply by touching it This option is en abled only when the High Spe
474. ta the movement position data format can be set up as Bin 16 bit or BCD 16 bit When using a Relative data setup data be comes Binary format so to manage negative data select either 2 s comple ment format or MSB code format WE Displays the Mark screen file number whose Mark is accessed directly or indirectly E When Mark Access is Direct the Mark screen file number is fixed E When Mark Access is Indirect the Mark screen file number is variable GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 87 2 11 J tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E An Alarm setup is possible for the Mark when the data movement position number is outside the maximum or minimum values setup WE An Offset of the screen file number is also possible e When a Mark s display area 40x24 or 48x48 dots designated m using J tags overlaps another tag display area the display will Important not appear correctly The display may not appear 40 dots correctly because the Mark Incorrect display area overlaps the N tag display area 24 dots Mark display g origin point 7 _ Setup N tag position OK gt Ensure other tags do not enter ine A tlark tag s display area e Uverlapping tne mark S raii posiuon wiin orner tags Causes an incorrect display Incorrect e When using a single J tag a Mark cannot display in more than one position at 73 one time Note ve I A Mark will not display when the position data is ze
475. tag Examples Base Screen x Text Screen Operation Sub Display 1 Operating XXX 1 Operating XXX Cheel the conneciion bemveen Check the connection between xxx and yyy before supplying the power After the check turn the switch ON If the pilot lamp does not light 3 Status Table Pilot Lamp green RUN red STOP yellow PAUSE Registers Text screens from X1 black Power Off Switches text screens Text can be displayed by scroll Be sure to enter a carriage return at the ing Set up two 2 touch panel end of each row keys for scrolling How an X tag is set up is based on the following conditions 1 The number of Text screens displayed one or multiple or 1f it is neces sary to switch multiple screens 2 If it is necessary to change the start line to create a scroll display Mode Setting Start Line Designation Using multiple Word Start line is changed Direct Text screens Start line is not changed Indirect Using only one Bi Start Line can be changed Text screen Regardless of Start Line Access setting In the above example the operation mode 1s Word and the start line number is accessed indirectly Use the Text Screen box to designate which Text screen number to display in the Mode box s Word Address field and use the Start Line Access box to designate from which row number to start the text display Here D0200 is entered in the Text Screen box to designate
476. tandard Mode 25 to 384 Large Mode 25 to 768 Height of Video GP 2500T Window NTSC Standard Mode 25 to 240 Large Mode 25 to 640 DY PAL Standard Mode 25 to 384 Large Mode 25 to 640 GP 2600T NTSC Standard Mode 25 to 240 Large Mode 25 to 480 PAL Standard Mode 25 to 288 Large Mode 25 to 576 Display X coordinate VX IPAL T 167 Display Y coordinate VY PAL 0 575 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 9 Extended Functions of VM Unit Word B R k kados Contents emarks Internal Video Window Control 0 Update of Coordinate Flag Unused Reserve UP Operation Actions indicated in the right DOWN Operation 4 are performed while the bit is RIGHT Operation 4 SAN LEFT Operation ste 6to8 awe erenecining CE Moemoe Bits 6 to 8 are for specifying 7 TSize Chanae Mode the mode Turn one of the bits s 8 Scroll Mode to ON to specify each mode 9 to 15 Unused Reserve Brightness Channel 0 to 15 Low lt gt High 0 Oto 15 Low gt Figh 0 to 15 Greenish hue lt gt Reddish hue Brightness Channel 0 to 15 Low lt gt High 1 Oto 15 Low lt gt Figh 0 to 15 Greenish hue lt gt Reddish hue Brightness Channel 0 to 15 Low lt gt High 2 Oto 15 Low lt gt High 0 to 15 Greenish hue lt gt Reddish hue Internal Color Control Flag EM Update of Color Value Actions indicated on the right h a are per
477. tant The result is true if N1 is equal to N2 N1 N2 For details about logical operations N 3 1 6 Logical Operation Examples Memory Control This feature is supported by only GP77R Series GP377 Series and GP2000 Series units 1 This feature is not available with the following units e Modicon Modbus Master e Modicon Modbus Slave Modicon Modbus Plus e Allen Bradley PLC 5 Data Highway e Allen Bradley SLC500 DH485 e Allen Bradley Remote I O e Siemens S7 200 PPI GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script e Memory Copy memcpy Memory Copy memcpy Copies device memory all at once Data for the number of Addresses will be copied to the copy destination Word Addresses beginning from the copy original Word Address The number of Addresses effective is 1 to 640 Format memcpy Copy destination Word Address Copy original Word Address the number of Addresses Example When copying data of D0100 to D0109 to D0200 to D0209 Important memcpy w D0200 w 0100 10 lt Memory Copy memcpy gt Original copy data will be read from the PLC only once when re quired If a communication error occurs during data read the GP s internal special relay LS2032 s Bit 12 will be turned ON When data read is completed normally Bit 12 will be turned OFF As the number of Addresses increases the more time is re
478. te characters can be entered as a description of the tag E Data Format Absolute Alarm Settings Arithmetic Operation Display Angle Absolute i paaFoma sese Ifthis option is selected 16 or 32 bit data i Absolute i Relative i Char String Word Address Trigger Bit Address Can be used fea Donon e oono Ie B Word Address nee eae Defines the data storage word address O Aekiesses mpoo I tata OE Ons Trigger Bit Address L Code Display amp Wite Data Format Defines the address of the bit that enables 16 Bit 32 Bit E i 1 Decimal t Decimal touch key Input ae Hes Indirect Maco H BCO i If this option is selected the word address i Bin i Float ls F containing display data is indirectly des ignated 2 6 4 Indirect Word Addressing Examples E tag Address The indirectly designated address 1s within the same device as the Word Address des ignated above Device Type amp Address Both a device type and an address are indirectly designated using device and ad dress codes Write the device code in the word address designated in the Word Ad dress attribute and the address code in the next word address PLC Connection Manual Base Address Defines the base address The K tag dis plays the data in the address designated by adding the base address number to the data in the designated Word Address GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver
479. te lt Double Byte a ye Eee e Character gt Character gt 2i Shift Right ero Suppress ShiftLeft J Zero Display 8 dots 16 dots 16 dots 16 dots OK i Cancer Cancel Hep Data Display Format No of Display Digits Defines the number of digits for the dis play usually 1 11 The length set here includes digits after the decimal point but not the decimal point Decimal Places Defines the number of digits displayed after the decimal point This setting is valid only for decimal and BCD formats You can designate the value from 0 to 10 Set 0 zero if not displaying decimals GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 151 2 17 N tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions Display Color Defines the display color Fg back ground color Bg and blink attributes Blk When the Alarm option is se lected think of the color attributes set here as the normal display When dis playing a numeric value using a N tag on a filled object set up the background colors the same for both the object and N tag 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Display Style Shift Left Shift Right Select the display style from the Shift Left and Shift Right The data will ap pear starting from the side designated here The Shift Right is selected by de fault Zero Suppress Select this option to omit the leading zeros of display data E g When the Display Length is 4 and the Zero Sup press 1s NOT selected 25 appears a
480. te the PLC Bit Address When data logging 1s completed one time GP turns ON the Bit Address designated here GP to PLC This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units 4 44 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features Data Logging Settings Trigger Settings Display Print white Settings Cogging IN OFFJs gt gt g Special 9 Economy i Bit Method 4 Time Method Data Logging Start Address Mo of Words Read Count Block Count PLE Trigger Bit Address GP_ACK Bit Address File Full Bit Address Data Clear Bit Address Poe tore lf Help 4 3 Logging Function File Full Bit Address Designate the PLC s Bit Address When data logging is performed for the desig nated number of blocks the Bit Address designated here is turned ON GP to PLC After the PLC detects the Bit Address is turned ON turn it OFF Data Clear Bit Address Designate the PLC s Bit Address When the Bit Address designated here is turned ON data stored in the backup SRAM is deleted After the backup SRAM data is deleted GP turns OFF this Bit Address PLC to GP GP to PLC Loop Selecting this feature means when data log ging is completed it will begin again from the top most data address and overwrite the existing data Trigger Settings Time Method Data Logging Settings Trigger Settings Display Print white Set
481. ted here includes digits after the decimal point but not the decimal point itself Decimal Places Designates the number of digits displayed after the decimal point usually as 0 to 14 digits This setting is valid only for Dec and BCD formats Enter 0 when not dis playing decimal place numbers Color Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk blink When the Alarm option is selected the color attributes designated here are used for normal display SEO 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Display Style Shift Left Shift Right This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 61 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 62 ZEEL Select the display style from the Shift Left erea Daa Fama 5 y Rem Sati and Shift Right The data will appear start ae ing from the side designated here Shift Left has been selected as the default setting Zero Suppress Color Settings Display Color ze Wi E Bk i i s Se ive Check this check box to omit the leading zeros of display data e g When the Dis play Length is 4 and the Zero Suppress 1s NOT selected 25 appears as 0025 Input Style Auto Clear OFF Display Style t Shift Right Fil Zen Suppress 12 Shift Left 7 Auto Clear ON Input Style t Auto Clear OFF In this mode the previousl
482. ters can be entered as a description of the tag General Info Tag Name Description Selection Number No of Set Addr Bit Address AUOO00 SO0000 WE Address Setting t Tag Setting General Info Address Settings Options Selection Mumber Bit Address p 1 E Koon FIE No of Set Add 2 ko IE Ee Selection Number Set up the Select Number within the range of 0 2047 which is used as valid control number for the entire system all the screen data to be sent to GP It recognizes and remembers the touch operation number performed and if other t tags have the same Select Number then they too will use the same administrative data whenever pressed However to use the same t tag Select Number effectively set the same bit ad dresses along with the same Select Num ber so the same bit operations can be per formed between different screens without any adverse effects No of Set Addr Defines the number of bits operated by this touch panel key t tag Setup a value of 2 4 Bit Address Enter the bit addresses operated by the t tag The input fields are ordered from 1 onwards Thus touch inputs will follow this order o cancel Hem GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 231 2 24 t tag Chapter 2 Active Image Functions E Options General Info Address Settings Options Reverse Video Defines whether touch areas hig
483. the Word Ad dress and D0201 is entered in the Start Line Access box for the Word Address Set the T tags operation mode to Word and Add Binary 16 Bit Be sure Word Address and Word Address 1 have the same address to create an operation that will increment Next be sure the T tag s Start Line Access box s address is the same as the X tag s Word Address Therefore enter D0201 in both the T tags Word Address and Word Address 1 The constant value for the UP key is 1 and 1 for the DOWN key 2 23 T tag Touch Panel Input 2 264 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 29 X tag The Actual Settings in GP PRO PBIII When the data in Ty Taree Address that stores Word changes by Mode Sie Ste Dena Angle the Text screen 1 the display et __ aad number Text Screen a scrolls up down by a ii Direct 5 lines when No of Epon FE aaa a a ata Formal Ward Address Scroll Line is set to ane i fess pom 5 i BCD bist Faria Address that stores o of Scroll Lines ig Bin H pE T BCD the start line number Same as the T tag OK Cancel Help ad d ress n T tag UP T tag DOWN Mode Options Mode Options i Bit fe word t Special 3 Bit fe Word 9 Special word Mode Word Address word Made word Address i Set 16 Bit i ponm ia Set 16 Bit ey poon F EJ Set 32 Bit Word Address 1 i Set 32 Bit Word
484. the two In this case only part of a single cycle s logging data will be printed _ to LS _ Write Settings When Writing to LS Area r Stores logging data in the LS area Dis wre Setinge 0 sta plays logging data items in combination EA einer with N tags ee ee Perform Data Write On Off Gon it Although all logging data can be displayed miei pe at a single time via the display settings SS using the LS Area allows each piece of log Caritl Word Adthess pane F ging data to be displayed separately to Wite to LS Adie i gether with N tags Click on this check box ite Comelete Bit Addtess ko FEA to use this setting Control Word Address Designate a Word Address that is the trigger or mode change for writing data to the LS Area This Trigger Bit is turned ON or OFF by the PLC When writing backup SRAM logging data to the LS area logging data transfer 1s performed by designating a Block No when using loop operation set to 0 and turning the Trigger Bit OFF and then ON Control Word Address ug 0 Reservation All OFF R Trigger 1 Block No Trigger ON Transmit OFF Not transmitted This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 53 4 3 Logging Function Data Logging Settings Trigger Settings Display Frint_ Write Settings Write Settings D ata Ji Perform Data Wwritef0 n0t Control word Addres
485. then use the number of bits listed in the Bit Length field as the data WE The library display writes over the top of any existing image Be aware of this when creating libraries 2 14 9 How to Avoid Overlapping Erase Images L tag 2 136 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions W General Info Tag Setting General Info Designated Screer s Range Settinas podj B 1 0 16 Tag Name Descriptiory Word Address Start Screen Mo Bit Offset Bit Lenath W Designated Screen E Range Settings General Info Designated Screeni s Range Settings No of Ranges Bit Offset cd Bit Lenath Cy EEE EE F Input Data Format i Decimal i Hex 3 BCD Curent Yalue 1 0 lt gt 65535 Range 1 Lower Limit Range 1 Upper Limit GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual I Tag Setting 2 15 l tag lt small L gt The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for the I tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag Word Address The word address set here becomes the monitor word Screen Type Base Screen Image Screen Select the screen type fr
486. tings J Logging ON OFF gt gt i Special 4 Economy tA Bit Method Data Logging Start Address Ho of Words Start Time H M Finish Time ph ph a Duration H Ml 5 ReadCount fl 0000 f EE Block Count Data Logging Auth Bit Address Block s Finish Bit Address poo F Fa File Full Bit Address poo F Fa Data Clear Bit Address 0000 gt ees poet fe Time Method Select this option when performing data logging by triggering logging start at the designated timing Data Logging Start Address Designate the Start Address of the PLC device where data to be logged is stored No of Words Designate the desired number of words counted from the Start Address Up to 32 words can be designated Start Time Designate the first data logging start time Duration Designate the time period that data logging is performed periodically S second set ting options are 00 15 30 and 45 with 15 second intervals When designating data logging time data logged from the start to end times is handled as 1 block Read Count Designate the frequency of data logging between the Start time and End time Based on the frequency set here the End time is determined This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 45 4 3 Logging Function Data Logging Settings Trigger Settings Display Print Write Settings
487. tions in the host PLC WE There are four types of commands Drawing Mathematical calculations Boolean operations and Bit operations GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 1 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features W Syntax check is available during program creation W Syntax auxiliary function provides a pop up keyboard for address settings to enhance programming efficiency E Programming commands can be entered via icons NEVER use the D Script Global D Script function Warning for the control of machines or actions which have the possibility of resulting in either opera tor injury or damage to equipment Smee Using D Script E D Script Editor n O Scrpt Editor Untitled Timer Duration min I Foe m Ir Ir Ataf Show Toolbox Jil Formula E Data Type i ig Data Length 16 Fit F Code Enter an expression Press HELP for examples on carcet Onions Hem ID Each D Script program is uniquely identified by an ID number Enter an ID number in the range of 00000 to 99999 Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered here as a description about the D Script you are to create Show Toolbox When checked the tool box appears that contains the Operators Statements and Operands used to create the D Script program Data Type Designates the D Script data format as either Bin or BCD 3 2 GP PRO PBIII for
488. tive Image Functions 2 20 Q tag Ge re e To use the Library Display feature you must place an L tag on the same YY screen as the Q tag The L tag Designated Screen area s settings should be set to Indirect and the Data Format to Bin e To use the Text Display feature you must place an X tag on the same screen as the Q tag The X tag Designated Screen area s settings should be set to In direct and the Data Format to Bin Q Tag Setting Display Mode Display Format Sub Display __DisplayAngle 1 Active Window General Info Size Color i None fe Base Screen Mode Settings t Change Screen Screen Type Base Screen Word Address Ltag Word Address Erase Screen No ji ti Test Display Offset o a E Direct Selection 1 Cisar Bisley Q Tag Setting Display Mode Display Format Sub Display Display Angle General Info Size Color i None fe Base Screen 1 Active Window Mode Settings t Change Screen Library Display Screen Type Text Screen Word Address stag Screen Address Erase Screen No ji Offset o a E Direct Selection 1 CusarBikpley o cma Hem GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Base Screen Mode Settings Library Display Word Address 1 L tag Word Address Defines the Word Address used as the L tag s Base screen No address The Sub D
489. tow registered Sub apne lcd rial iad the sce amos display screen T Start Line must s 77 7 start number B diect O Indien be Display lines Word Address1 Ltag Word Address Text Screen No 10 i M Blank Line Display AET Fies n Display Start Line E x n u m be r of 7 S u b m d l S p a y E sea roa ansa the first screen where the Library OK Cance Help I x a He Hee the value is screen file normally one number for sub and increases screen is by the number of registered same rows set address as L tag L tag T tag resend Select Indirect General Info Designated Screen 9 Direct Indirect State on th e S creen 2s word Specia Ee fe kooo0o rE Ac ce S S p a g e aa creen Data Format Screen Type a n d S e t t h e _ l Ls000 Ix i Bin Base Screen RE oe oms Data Format to Bin ox cont H i a mp FE a E Only the text rows whose monitor bits are ON will display in consecutive order Display a sub display that corresponds to the message by simply selecting a row When the monitor bit is turned OFF the sub display clears In reality the sub screen blanking library is overlaid on top Alarm Screen 1 Sub display Alarm Screen 1 Sub display ca2 Red Alert AB3 Breakdown The machine needs new fanbelts Warning PAi When the monitor bit for the The sub display is cleared by selected message turns OFF the sub screen blanking library
490. tput through the AUX I O interface hereafter referred to as AUXI F provided at the rear of the unit The GP 270 GP 370 GP H70 GP 377R GP 377 and GP37W2 do not support this function because they do not have this AUX I F Do not use a touch panel key for extremely important switches such as an emergency stop switch Instead provide a separate hardware switch Immediately after changing screens touch panel keys may be temporarily disabled because the processor is busy drawing the screen Warning EN e If multiple T tags or t tags are set on the same screen position all the switches Note are pressed when the multiple T tags or t tags defined area is pressed Extra communication time may be required to process each touch input e After powering up the GP and one of the bits set for the t tag is ON in the host PLC the initial press of the switch causes the bit next to the currently ON bit to turn ON Plus when more than one bit is ON then pressing the switch causes the first bit of defined addresses to turn ON 2 230 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 24 t tag W General Info The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for the t tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte charac
491. ts 4 78 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function ez Excel Display of Logging Data The following example displays CSV file logging data on Excel For information about saving CSV file data to a CF card refer to 4 4 Using the CF Card E Trigger Settings e Number of logging words 4 e Start time 9 00 e Logging interval 1 hour e Logging frequency 8 times e Number of data blocks 2 e Loop operation not available E Display Settings Although logging frequency is designated as 8 times in the Trigger Settings here designate it as 4 times to display data for 4 logging operations For normal operation designate it as 8 times tem Name Value Time amp Date Value Value Value temNane Datas Time Data 0 Datat Data2 Data Displey Not tom fer e Data Displey No hm ef Data Display Nos hm ef Data Displey Nod mhm ef Cacuaton a ae ee E Excel Data Display When a CSV file stored in a CF card is opened in Excel using the above settings the data is displayed as shown below When storing the backup SRAM s logging data to the CF card perform the operation described in CF Card Data Storage Settings Control Word Address 4 4 8 Transferring Data from Backup SRAM to CF Card Date and time data is always displayed Values are displayed from the leftmost column Display format is yy mm and hh mm ss as designated via the
492. tyle Color Switch Settings SwitchType Color Border Type Display color i3 NoBorder Fo BIOS OO MF No e IF aL Bo E E Noe IF oE Erase Color Ummi i ma a Border Type Outer and inner borders Display Color Select desired colors Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk blink 2 1 5 Color Settings A tag Erase Color Select the desired color Select the display area color to use when a Filing Data Display is cleared When us ing a monochrome GP select Black Cee e Switch Settings File Display FD_001 General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings ___SwitchType Color Automatic Switch Placement Method Send To PLC From SRAM Selected Send To SRAM From PLC Selected Roll Up Not selected Roll Down Not selected Send To LS From SRAM Not selected Send To SRAM From LS Not selected Send To LS From PLC Not selected Sending To PLC From LS Not selected Select the desired switch shape from the browser Jv Send To PLC From SRAM Ci Senell Toul Freon Stal M4 Send To SRAM From PLC J Sendi Te SRE Fon LS Tl Roll Up 1 a E Send Tol Fiam PLE ee e Switch Type Color File Display FD_001 General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchType Color Ie Border Color Select the desired color Select the desired color for the Filing Data Border Color BOSS OOM oe FF Display s border
493. type In this example select the Bit Rising left side option and designate a bit address M0001 Edge Bit Address IN opg A FE iet itf 3 30 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script 6 Create a program in the Action area by clicking the buttons in the Opera tors Statements and Operands areas Action if i Cw P0200 70 wi L00302 100 w LS0Q0300 wi LS00300 1 endif Program Example if w D200 gt 70 If 70C or above w LS302 100 70C or above alarm message screen No 100 assigned w LS300 w LS300 1 Count up errors endif if w D200 lt 30 I lf 30C or below w LS302 101 30C or below alarm message screen No 101 assigned w LS301 w LS301 1 Count up errors endif 7 Click on the OK button The ID number and description you have entered will appear in the D Script List window O Sccript 00001 Alarm Display GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 3 31 3 1 D Script Global D Script Chapter 3 Special Features Smee Application Example 2 In this example we create three interlocked switches as shown below Screen SETUP Bit switch Address M0001 Bit operation Set OK Bit switch Address M0002 Bit operation Set RUNNING Lamp Address M0003 Operation Example Pressing the SETUP and OK keys in that order turns the RUNNI
494. uch func tion The Touch available condition s Bit Off setting is supported by only GP77R Series and GP377 Series units Word Address Defines the word address for the write operation performed when the touch panel key is pressed Stores data used in the operation Screen Level Change Direction When setting the screen change T tag check this check box to select Screen Level Change 2 23 6 Screen Level Change Direction Constant Settings Constant Set up a fixed value in this field Dec BCD Hex Set up the data format for the constant Re fer to the table on the next page for the valid setup ranges for the different operations T Tag Setting General Info Mode Options CH Bit fa word CY Special ord kode Word Address amp Set 16 Bit Joooo i fi Set 32 Bit Et Add Binary 16 Bit i Add BCD 16 Bit Ch AND Binary 16 Bit im Screen Level Change Direction i OF Binary 16 Bit Ci 0R Binary 16 Bit 9 Digit ADD C Digit SUB Dec ABCO Hex Interlock Address jo IE Touch available condition fa Bit Ory i Bik Oth Sie be When using a T tag to create a Change Screen switch select the Set 16 Bit YY operation GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 215 2 23 T tag 2 216 Chapter 2 Active Image Functions lt Constant Data Setting Range gt Set 32Bit 2147483648 2147483647 0 65535 E Mode Special T Tag Setting Special Gampeie S s C
495. umn the file size will become extremely large Depending on the number of characters en tered and other items designated approximately 1000 rows can be used for the pattern shown above E Important This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBM for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 67 4 3 Logging Function Chapter 4 Advanced Features ewe Print Settings In this dialog box the current Print Settings applied in the Print screen can be viewed and edited Data Logging Settings Trigger Settings Ein Print Write Settings Pri nt Setti ng J Print ON OFF tS Block Unit 2 Realtime Copy from Display dial og box Row Setting F Column Settings Mo of Data Rows 2 Mo of D ata Col 2 No of Calc Rows i D o o o Header Footer Preview Control Word Address ooooon F aaa Left Margin jo Pit Competed Bi Addtess SOOT PIE Print Settings Seti aa eer res ee an eal 7 When using the loop feature regardless of the logging frequency the data Note displ ill i ingl NSS isplay row will be designated as a single row Settings To change row column attributes select the desired row or column and click on the Edit button Add Select a row or column and click on the Add button then one row or column is added Copy Copies the currently selected row or column data to the Clipboard Paste Pa
496. urrent counting The timer may produce designated time or tag scanning time errors PLC Connection Manual 1 1 Communication Method 1 1 5 Special Relay e When writing data into the PLC device take enough time pe riod the communication cycle time or more for intervals When the GP s internal special relay s tag scan counter is used as the data write trigger and data write into the PLC device is performed frequently a communication error may occur E D Script Settings Operands Statements a Ben o The buttons in the tool box are classified and x7 T elo positioned by each function group Compare bit O peration EE S Tar Copy si Operation ddr label 3 4 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 3 Special Features 3 1 D Script Global D Script E Operators Draw GP 270 does not support this function Ped eo e Scrn Load Screen The GP 270 does not support this function This function is used to call up a previously registered Library Item The designated screen Base screen will be called up at the designated X Y coordinates Load Screen Screen Ho Position 420 REY BI Position r Landscape type Designate Portrait type displa these display XY p d t coordinates X Y coordinates 0 0 X X Y coordinates 639 399 Y 639 399 0 0 Xx e Dot Draws a dot at the designated point Designate a dot type its X Y coordi n
497. urrent settings for Totals Settings Total Settings eneral Info Size Style Alarm Settings 3 Total G Aow Number Column Humber Aow Type Data Calculation Settings Total aN Alam Settings Data Calculation Settings Select the desired calculation item from To tal Average Maximum and Minimum The calculation attributes can be set up for the entire Data row or Value column At this time the applicable column s attribute 1s Date Time or Char Col and the Data Cal culation Settings cannot be designated Data calculation is performed via the 32 Bit for mat Display Style Shift tras Mo of Display Digits SNo of Display Digite Decimal Places 0 Size Style Total Settings General Info Size S tyle Alarm Settings Display Format No of Display Digits E Decimal Places jo Display Format No of Display Digits Enter the number of display digits The numbers displayed after the decimal point is also included However the decimal point is not included itself Enter a value in a range from to 16 a eae Decimal Places SHS Enter the number of digits after the deci mal point in a range from 0 to 14 This ae Ee setting IS Enabled only when the Data For mat is designated as Dec or BCD Ifthe values after the decimal point are not dis played enter 0 Color Settings Display Color F9 BOO No Biki s BOOS CO E Noek Preview
498. vcnceseenerenatanciesuceaitenstencuceoatenuesisuereecenetantesapadcesetees 2 25 GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS 23 aem DIG AY i A E A E E EA S 2 27 Dia SOW CCW OIA E A OEA 2 27 Ae PO ADON A a E A E E N E E AE E EEEN 2 27 PR i U E ar E E AAE EN AEEA A E E AOE E A AA 2 29 Za D ta Statistical Graph Display ssscssiccscecisessoscsvesscasccossescnsccsevcssedsavesvessaasseosoeses 2 31 DAN CLIC Wy ANEAN EEA EA A AA E E E ET 2 31 2AL ROM AG aa rA N AA EA S 2 31 A U A aa A T R A E S 2 32 2 5 d tag Statistical Data Display sssssssseccccccsssssceccocossseseecccoosssssceceeosssssssseseeesso 2 35 Die OTIC Wy E E A EE EA ET A E A Aneec ses 2 35 T AO nee ee EEEE ene eee OA TOA EE 2 35 Ba S A A T EOE E EENE ENAA O ANTA 2 37 2 6 E tag Extended N tag Function ssssssecccocssssssceccccossssececcooocossssececcossssseseeeesso 2 41 POM OS CI o E A E A E NS E A E E E E 2 41 20 ADOT a ria A E T ae eee S 2 41 26a TS aE A EET E E A cece eee 2 43 2 6 4 Indirect Word Addressing Examples cccccetesec cecdenscastescscccntenaceds axaqeantensastensscesatenecasal 2 55 27 EA Free Cibrary Display issreisisesseisissisrackeinsnsieeeta nanei ineas nikari 2 57 PAA E a o EEE EA A E I E AAT 2 57 dee AVO A sd aina AA EEEE ENE EEA AEN A EEEE AEE 2 57 PG ss Un EE r A E E E ET E A E A ENA A TEENA 2 59 2S AOS CGA DED e T eis 2 63 DN Ni T ENEE AN ENA ds ne A ANE E ceeepaewerg in ceeacdactls 2 63 Loa ADON O ne EE E EE
499. w Help ETERRA OOO eare Sound Wonber compress Flay 1 Repeat F Repeat F Repeat F THH EE B Change Attribute Sound Data Convert From Sound H une 1 Ta ft Internal CA CF Card 2 Error 3 Waning Convert To Title OF Sound Number an ig 2 Internal 4 CF Card Information Warming Jj Compression Click on the Close button to return to the sound data window Displays the converted data Click on the icon or select the Convert menu Change Attribute Sound Data command Select the data to be changed Change the Title and Sound Number then click on the Convert button This function is supported only by GP477R GP577R and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 4 5 4 1 Sound Output E Deleting Sound Data Convert Create Sound Data Delete Sound Data Ft ternal Hemor 3 CF Card 1 Information 2 Tor 3 Warming Delete Sound Data fd Internal kemo 4 CF Card 1 Information 2 Error Chapter 4 Advanced Features Select the Convert menu Delete Sound Data command A list of previously created sound data files will appear Select sound data to be deleted from the list and click on the Delete button WE Automatic Address Allocation Add Address Start Address t lt o0000 F i a Add Offset f H ac Number of Bits to Add The Trigger Bit Address used to output sou
500. w data AN e Open the CSV file with the Excel gS e Only the sampled data is output as CSV files e Data sampling data s range is 0 to 65535 whether it is 16 bit device or 32 bit device 3 64 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 1 Sound Output D Advanced Features The advanced features explained in this chapter have been newly added in order to enhance GP s operation performance Prior to using these advanced features however please thoroughly understand the features described in Chapters 2 and 3 am Sound Output 12 Turning a Monitor Bit ON triggers sound data output from the GP unit The unit is operating Please perform safety check ee es About Sound Output WE The GP s sound data is PCM 16 Bit 11kHz WAV data This type of WAV file is used for all creation and storing of the GP s sound data E To convert WAV data to GP sound data select the Project Manager s Sound Settings s Create Sound Data selection WE Store sound data in either GP s internal memory or on a CF card Please note that the CF card can hold more sound data than the GP E The following three modes of sound output are available e Repeat Play Mode While the Bit is ON sound data is output When multiple start Bits are ON all sound data 1s repeatedly output e Play Mode When the Trigger Bit is turned ON sound data is output only once e Play Bit OFF Mode Wh
501. weon i Displays a library screen Base screen as a Sub Screen at the location set by the L tag Text Display A Sub Screen of text data Text screen will display at the location set by the X tag Word Address2 Utag Word Address Defines the Word Address used to control the Window screen When Local Window is used this data defines the U tag Word Addresses When Global Window is used this data is controlled by LS0016 D tuar Ditgey o N cma Hem Sr e When using Active Window you must place a U tag on the same screen as the Note Q tag The U tag s Designated Screen area settings should be set to Indi Na rect and the Data Format to Bin e To use the Library Display feature you must place an L tag on the Window Registration screen The L tag s Designated Screen area settings should be set to Indirect and the Data Format to Bin To use the Text Display feature you must place an X tag on the Window Registration screen e The X tag s Designated Mode area settings should be set to Word and the Data Format to Bin Active Window Mode Settings General Info Display Mode Display Format e Sub Display i Display Angle Library Display None Base Screen Active Window Word Address1 Ltag Word Address Mode Settings 7 Change Screen porary epar Word Address Ltag Word Address 3 Text Display kloz fa Erase Screen No JI i Off
502. with alphabet gt for FEP 5 lt Use FEF hiragana for FEF 9 lt Do Not Converts for FEF 3 lt Convert Text Inputs for FEF 5 lt Cancel gt for FEP Moves cursor to the preceding input field lt DN gt Moves cursor to the next input field lt LI gt Moves the cursor one position to the left lt RT gt Moves the cursor one position to the right lt Change Screen gt Becomes a key to switch the keypad lt Cancel gt for Logging Setting Becomes a Cancel key for the logging function EN When switching between different sized keypad set the Clear Area to cover all Note exceeding portions Na CHAA For information on the Clear Area order refer to Operation Manual GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 115 2 13 k tag Keyboard Setup Chapter 2 Active Image Functions EN Even when switching to a smaller sized keypad drawings and text hidden by Note the previous larger keypad will not be visible As a result do not make any x drawings except a touch keypad in the portion covered by the Clear Area WE Operation Examples lt CLR gt e Zero suppress is OFF aign Integer Decimal i far Cursor position The sign is replaced by a blank space and the rest of the numbers are cleared to zero The cursor appears in the lowest integer position e Zero suppress is ON The integer and decimal sections are cleared to zero as the integer part is reduced to a single digi
503. y Format Sub Display Display Angle Mode Settings t None Mode Settings i Change Screen 1 Library Display i Text Display 2 10 H Base Screen Active Window Indirect Window Registration No Is Change Screen Displays the window designated to change to Library Display Displays a library 1tem s screen Base screen as a sub screen at the location set by the L tag Text Display A sub screen of text data Text screen is displayed at the location set by the X tag GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 1 A tag Change Screen General Info Display Format Size Color Sub Display Display Angle t None Base Screen i Active window 2 Indirect Mode Settings ie Change Screen 1 Library Display 1 Tent Display Window Registration No H Screen Type Direct Designates directly the window to be dis played in the Window Registration No area Window Registration No Enter the registration number of a window to be displayed Indirect Designates a window to be displayed in Screen Type 7 None Base Screen i Active Window Screen Type t Direct Mode Settings Change Screen i Library Display 4 Text Display Window Registration No Yord Address es D00000 F 1 Local Window Setings E Global Word Address Utag Ward Address ma poo FHE coce Help
504. y Start Line 1 Monitor Address DOOOO0 No of Monitor Words 1 No of Display Lines 12 No of Display Char e E Display Format a Tag Setting General Info Display Format Size Color Il Display Angle Monitor Address Monitor Word Address i Donon FE No of Monitor Words i Display Format lt lt lt Display Start Linell No of Display Lines 2 is Mo of Display Char 40 ok cancel nee f GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual 2 2 a tag yee Using a tags The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for the a tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description Monitor Address Monitor Word Address Defines the starting word address for the monitor bits set with the Alarm Editor No of Monitor Words Defines the number of word addresses used for the monitor bits Maximum 100 words Border Type Defines the type of border from No Border __ border and table Display Format Display Start Line Defines which line of alarm messages with activated monitor bits to begin the display with No of Display Lines Defines the number of rows for the Alarm Summary display on one screen Maxi mum is 40 rows No of Display Char De
505. y can cause a buzzer sent from the AUX interface located on the back of the unit Buzzer output operations cannot be performed on the GP 270 GP 370 GP 377R GP 377 and GP H70 since they do not have an AUX interface ZEN e Several sample keyboards are included with your screen editing package mere e For details about how to use the sample keypad Operation Manual 2 114 GP PRO PB Ill for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 13 k tag Keyboard Setup W General Info The General Info page provides information about the current settings for the k tag Tag Name Must be no more than five Single byte or two Double byte characters long and com posed of letters and or symbols Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a description of the tag Mode Select the operation for the particular key oa oa lt ENT gt os o Sends the inputted data to the host PLC a lt ASCll gt a lt Change Screen gt lt B S gt Backspace Moves the cursor back one position deleting the character in that position lt CLR gt Erases the current input data lt DEL gt Deletes a single character in the current tion Although settings for the FEP can ee an ik be specified in language environ Sets up character keys ments other than Japanese these lt UP gt will not work on the GP 3 lt Cancel gt for Logging Setting 9 lt Use
506. y entered val ues are not cleared and newly entered val ues are added to those values To clear the previously entered values press CLR of the touch keyboard Auto Clear ON When the first character of a value 1s en tered excluding moving the cursor enter ing ENT DEL and BS the previously entered value is cleared Date Time and Value data except for the text characters are centered Also a 2 dot space is automatically inserted in the upper lower left and right sides 5 dots For example when the number of characters are 7 and the number of numeric value s digits are 5 in a cell space for one character is saved on both left and right sides and displayed data is centered Alarm Settings Alarm Display On Off Select this check box to display the Alarm display Alarm Range Min Value Max Value When the Alarm Type 1s set to Direct desig nate the Alarm Range When selecting Rela tive value display the Display Range desig nated in the Data Format tab 1s used as nor mal display s Min and Max Values automati cally The possible Alarm ranges varies de pending on the Data Format selected Column Settings General Info Data Format Size Style Alarm Settings n WAJomECOEF oor so MEJODECOME MeF This function is supported only by GP77R GP377 and GP2000 series units GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 4 Advanced Features 4 3 Logging Function
507. y or ENT key K tag Sr If multiple T tags are set on the same screen position all the switches are pressed Note when the multiple T tags designated area is pressed Extra communication time Ne may be required to process each touch input Warning Important 2 210 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 5 0 Tag Reference Manual Chapter 2 Active Image Functions 2 23 T tag wee Using I tags W General Info The General Info page provides information about the current settings for the T tag ee Tag Name Description Lid Must be no more than five Single byte or ae os two Double byte characters long and com eee posed of letters and or symbols Reesevecs of Description sin oie s Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte char acters can be entered as a description of the tag WE Mode Bit Bit a _Sets or resets the bit address er ee Bit Address ean Defines the bit address for the touch panel OE key input operation Bit Access Set Sets the bit in the bit address high ON when the touch panel key is pressed The bit will remain high Reset Sets the bit in the bit address low OFF when the touch panel key is pressed The bit will remain low Momentary Sets the bit in the bit address high ON only while a touch panel key is pressed Invert The bit in the bit address is reversed ON lt OFF each time the touch panel key is pressed The bit remains with the set value Compare Defin

Tag Reference Manual - Pro

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents